Gas Transmission

and Distribution
Piping Systems

ASME Code for Pressure Piping, 831

AN INTERNATIONAL PIPING CODE®

Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~

No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ~
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Gas Transmission
and Distribution
Piping Systems
ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31

AN INTERNATIONAL PIPING CODE®

 Dale of Issuance: September 30, 2014

The next edition of this Code is scheduled for publication in 2016. This Code will become effective
6 months after the Date of Issuance.

ASME issues written to concerning interpretations of technical aspects of this Code.

Interpretations, Code Cases, and errata are published on the ASME Web site under the Committee
at http://cstools.asme.org/ as they are issued. Interpretations and Code Cases are also included
with each edition.

Errata to codes and standards may be posted on the ASME Web site under the Committee to
provide corrections to incorrectly published items, or to correct typographical or grammatical errors
in codes and standards. Such errata shall be used on the date posted.

The Committee can be found at http://cstools.asme.org/. There is an option available to

automatically receive an e-mail notification when errata are posted to a particular code or standard.
This option can be found on the Committee Page after "Errata" in the "Publication
Information" section.

ASME is the registered trademark of The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

This international code or standard was developed under procedures accredited as meeting the criteria for American
National Standards and it is an American National Standard. The Standards Committee that approved the code or
standard was balanced to assure that individuals from competent and concerned interests have had an opportunity to
partiCipate. The proposed code or standard was made available for public review and comment that provides an
opportunity for additional public input from industry, academia, regulatory agencies, and the public-at-Iarge.
ASME does not "approve," "rate," or "endorse" any item, construction, proprietary device, or activity.
ASME does not take any position with respect to the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection with any
items mentioned in this document, and does not undertake to insure anyone utilizing a standard against liability for
infringement of any applicable letters patent, nor assumes any such liability. Users of a code or standard are expressly
advised that determination of the validity of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, is
entirely their own responsibility.
Participation by federal agency represenlative(s) or person(s) affiliated with industry is not to be interpreted as
government or industry endorsement of this code or standard.
ASME accepts responsibility for only those interpretations of this document issued in accordance with the established
ASME procedures and policies, which precludes the issuance of interpretations by individuals.

No part of this document may be reproduced in any form,

in an electronic retrieval system or otherwise,
without the prior written permiSSion of the publisher.

The American Society of Mechanical Engineers

Two Park Avenue, New York, NY 10016-5990

Copyright © 2014 by
THE AMERICAN SOCIElY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS
All rights reserved
Printed in U.S.A.
 CONTENTS

Foreword ................ . viii

Committee Roster ....... .. x
Introduction .... xiv
Summary of xvi
General Provisions and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
801 General .............................................. .
802 and Intent ..... ...... ............ . ............ . 1
803 Piping Systems Definitions ............................. . 2
804 Systems Definitions ..... . ......... . 4
805 Fabrication, Operation, and Terms and
6
806 Quality Assurance ......................... . .......... . 12
807 and of Personnel ...... ... .. . .. . 12
Chapter I Materials and Equipment ............. . 14
810 Materials and Equipment .............................. . 14
811 of Materials and 14
812 Materials for Use in 15
813 Marking .................. ................. . 15
814 Material ................................ . 15
815 16
816 16
817 16
Table
817.1.3-1 Tensile 17
Chapter II Welding .................. . 19
820 19
821 19
822 for Welding . . . . . . . . .. . .................... . 19
823 of Procedures and Welders. . . . . . .. . ...... . 19
824 20
825 20
826 21
827 Intended
Stress Levels of 20% or More of
Minimum Yield Strength ............... . 22
Chapter III Piping System Components and Fabrication Details ....... . 23
830 and Fabrication Details ..... . 23
831 23
832 30
833 31
834 33
835 34
Tables
831.4.2-1 Reinforcement of Welded Branch
28
832.2-1 or Contraction of
Materials 30

iii
832.5-1 Modulus of for Carbon and Low
Steel .. .............................................. 31

Chapter IV Design, Installation, and Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

840 and .. ... .. ... .. 35
841 Pipe... ......................................... 37
842 Other Materials. . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . 51
843 Stations ........... ........................ 59
844 and Holders ... ..... . .. ,.. 62
845 Control and Limiting of Gas Pressure. . .. .......... .... 63
846 Valves.................................................. 68
847 Vaults ....... , .. , ... , ...... , ... , ...... ,................. 69
848 Customers' Meters and Regulators ... , ...... , .. , ..... ,. 70
849 Gas Service Lines ... . ...... , ... , .. , ...... , ....... ,..... 71

Tables
841.1.6-1 Basic Factor, F ................................... 39
841.1.6-2 Design Factors for Steel Construction . ............. 40
841.1.7-1 Joint E . . ............. ........... 41
841.1.8-1 T, for Steel Pipe ..... 41
841.1.11-1 Pipeline Cover Requirements ........... .......... ..... 43
841.2.3-1 Field Cold Bend Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
841.3.2-1 Test Requirements for Steel and Mains to
Operate at Stresses 30% or More of the
'"'V'"'-" '''''' Minimum Yield of the Pipe. . . . . . . . . 49
841.3.3-1 Maximum Stress Permissible an Air or Gas
Test ................... ,............................. 50
842.1.1-1 Standard 'fhickness Selection Table for Ductile
Iron 52
842.2.2-1 WaH Thickness and Standard Dimension Ratio for
Thermoplastic .................................. , 54
842.2.3-1 Diameter and Wall Thickness for Reinforced
Thermosetting Plastic ............................ 54
842.2.9-1 Nominal Values for Coefficients of Thermal
of Materials ....... .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
844.3-1 Factors, F ...... .. ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 62
844.3-2 Minimum Clearance Between Containers and Fenced
Boundaries ..... .......... ...... ..... . . . . . . . . . 62
845.2.2-1 Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure for Steel or
Plastic or Mains .. ... ..... 64
Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure for
Operating at 100 (690 kPa) or More. . 64
845.2.3-2 Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure for
Operating at Less 111an 100 64

Chapter V Operating and Maintenance Procedures. .. . .. . .. .......... 75

850 Operating and Maintenance Procedures Affecting the
Safety of Gas Transmission and Distribution
Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . .. .. ....... .. .. ..,.... .. 75
851 Pipeline Maintenance ... ............................... 77
852 Distribution Maintenance ................... ,.... 83
853 Miscellaneous Facilities Maintenance .................... 86
854 Location Class and in Number of Buildings
89
855 Service Conversions .. . ..... 91
856 Odorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...... . .. 91
857 Uprating ...................................... . 92

tV
Figure
851.4,1-1 Allowable Ripple 80

Tables
851.4,4-1 Wall Thickness for Occurrence of
Bl
854.1-1 Location Class " ., .... , .. ".,', ...... ,', .. , .. ,." ..... . 90
857.4-1 Wall Thickness Allowance for a Ductile Iron
Main or 94
VI Corrosion Control. .. , . , ...... . 95
860 Corrosion Control General.. . . . . . . .. ., 95
861 External Corrosion Control for Steel 96
862 Cathodic Protection Criteria , .. ,." ..... , ... , ... , .. ,.,. 98
863 and Maintenance of Cathodic Protection
98
864 Internal Corrosion Control ..... ,. ., .. , .. " .. ,.,.', .. ". 98
865 Steel Pipelines in Arctic Environments '.,... '." .. , 99
866 Steel in Service " . , . , . , . , . 100
867 Stress and Other Phenomena , ... , .. , ,.'.,., .. 101
868 Cast Iron, Wrought Iron, Ductile Iron, and Other Metallic
Pipelines ............................................ . 101

Chapter VII Intentionally left Blank. . . . . . .. .......................... 102

VIII Offshore Gas Transmission.. ............ ... ., .. 103

ASOO Offshore Gas Transmission .............................. 103
AB01 General ... ..................................... ....... 103
AB02 and Intent ............ '" .... " . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . .. 103
AB03 Offshore Gas Transmission Terms and Definitions . . . . . . .. 103
A811 Qualification of Materials and .............. , 104
A814 Material ........ , .................. , . . . . .. 104
AB17 Conditions the Reuse and of 105
AB20 Welding Offshore Pipelines. . .... ,., ..... ,.............. 105
AB21 General .... , ..... , .. , . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . .. . . . . . . . ... 105
A823 Qualification of Procedures and Welders.. . . . . . ... . . . .. . 105
AB25 Stress . .. . .. ,. ... ... ..... .. 106
AB26 106
AB30 106
AB3} 106
A832 106
AB34 106
A835 106
AB40 107
AB41 107
AB42 108
AB43 "m,m'""",")!' Stations
....... , .. ...... . .......... . 111
AB44 On-Bottom Stability ... ..,......... .... . ............. . 112
AB46 Valves ...... .. ... .. ...... ..... . .. ,. ,.. .. . .... . 113
AB47 113
AB50 Operating and Maintenance Procedures the
of Gas Transmission Facilities .... ,... . .... 114
AB51 Maintenance .... . .... , . .. ............. ., .. 114
AB54 Location Class ., ................... ,........... .... . .. 115
A860 Corrosion Control of Offshore 115
AB61 External Corrosion Control ....... , .................. , .. . 115
AB62 Cathodic Protection Criteria ............................ . 117
A864 Internal Corrosion Control ...................... . 117

v
by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
be made or this material without written consent
Table
A842.2.2-1 Factors for Offshore Platform
Piping, and Risers ......... , .. , . , ... , . , . , .. , . , 109

Chapter IX Sour Gas Service .. , . , , , .. , . , .. , . , .. ' ... "., .... " .. " .. , 118
B800 Sour Gas Service, .... , .. , .. " ... " .. , . . , ........ ,., .. . 118
B801 General ,',.,., .... , ......... ,.,." ..... ,., .. , .... ,', .. ,. 118
B802 and Intent ."., .. ,... .., .... , .......... ,., ...... , 118
B803 Sour Gas Terms and Definitions .... ,........ ... . .... ,. 118
B813 Marking .. , ... , . .. .,.,., ., ,...... .......... ..,. 119
B814 Material . , ...... , .... , . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ., .. 119
B820 119
B821 119
B822 Preparation for Welding ... , ... , ..... , .. . ... ,.. .., ..... 119
B823 Qualification of Procedures and Welders.,. . .... ,.,", .. 119
B824 119
B825 120
B826 120
B830 '''"", ..... rma"k and Fabrication Details, . '. . 120
B831 120
B840 Installation, and Testing ... , .. , . , . , ....... , ... , .. 120
B841 Steel Pipe , . , , . , , ., .. ,.,...... ..,.'. .' .... ... .., ,. 120
B842 Other Materials """""""""""'" ' ..... , .. , ... ,' 121
B843 .omlpn~ss()r Stations , ... , ......... , ...... , .. , ..... ,.,.,. 121
B844 Pipe-Type and Bottle-Type Holders ..... " .... ,. 121
B850 Additional and Maintenance
Considerations the of Sour Gas
Pipelines , ... , .. , .. " .. '., .. , ... , ..... " , ..... , ... , .. 121
B851 Maintenance """"""""""'" """"'" 122
B854 Location Class and Changes in Number of Buildings
Intended for Human Occupancy ,. . , , , . '. , ... ,' 122
B860 Corrosion Control of Sour Gas 122
B861 124
B864 Internal Corrosion Control ." .............. ,.' .. , ... ,'. 124
B867 Stress Corrosion and Other Phenomena , ., .' 124

Tables
B850.1-1 100-ppm ROE .. , ... , .. ' .... , ... , .. , . , , . , ..... , ... , , . 123
B850.1-2 500-ppm ROE. , ... , .. , . , , .. , . , , , ... , .. , . " .. ,.' ....... . 123
8850.1-3 Metric for 100-ppm ROE .. , . , ...... , .. . 123
B850.1-4 Metric for 500-ppm ROE """"'" .... ,.,'.,. 123
Appendices
Mandatory A References .. , .. ,.,., .... "., .. " .... ,., .... ,., ... , ... ,.' 125
Mandatory Appendix B Numbers and JULneLl:>
That Appear in Appendix .. , , ...... ,., 130
Nonmandatory C Publications That Do Not Appear in the Code or
Mandatory A ... " ..... , ..... , ... " .... , .. 131
Mandatory o Minimum Yield
Commonly Used in Piping 134
Mandatory Appendix E FleXibility and Stress Intensification Factors " ... " .... ,.. 137
Mandatory Appendix F Extruded Headers and Welded Branch Connections ... ,. 143
Mandatory G Testing of Welders Limited to Work on Lines Operating
at Hoop Stresses of Less Than 20% of the
Minimum Yield ... , ..... , ..... , ..... , .... , ... 151
Mandatory H Flattening Test for 152
Mandatory I End Preparations for ...... , .. , , , . , .. , .... " 153
Nonmandatory Appendix J Used Conversion Factors .. , , , , . . .. .,' .. '. 162

vi
Mandatory Criteria for Cathodic Protection .................... ,.... 166
Nonmandatory L Determination of Remaining of Corroded
168
Nonmandatory Appendix M Gas Leakage Control Criteria ., ...... ,., ... ",.,,",.,.,' 169
Nonmandatory N Recommended Practice for of
in Place ., ............. "., ....... , ....... , .. 176
Appendix a of Technical . . . . .. , .... , .. , .. ', .. , 178
Nonmandatory P Nomenclature for 179
Mandatory I-\nnl-'rll' 180
Nonmandatory Appendix R 183
Index .............. . 185

vii
 FOREWORD

The need for a national code for pressure piping became evident from 1915 to
1925. To meet this the American Standards Committee (later to the
American Standards Association, now the American National Standards Institute) initiated
B31 in March 1926 at the of the American Society of Mechanical and with
that Society as sole sponsor. several years of work by Sectional Committee 831 and its
subcommittees, a first Edition was published in 1935 as an American Tentative Standard Code
for Pressure
A revision the original tentative standard in 1937. Several more years of effort were
to securing uniformity among sections, eliminating divergent and
cies, keeping the Code abreast of current in welding calculating stress
and reference to new dimensional and material standards. this
was in with the American
and complemented the American Code for Mechanical
work culminated in the 1942 American Standard Code for Pressure Piping.
1 and 20f the 1942 Code, which appeared in 1944 and introduced
and material standards, a new formula for pipe wall thickness, and more
for instrument and control Shortly after the 1942 Code was
were established for handling inquiries or interpretation
and for publishing such inquiries and answers in Mechallical
for the information of all concerned.
By 1948, continuing increases in the
ment of new materials and to meet requirements warranted more extensive
in the Code than alone. The decision was reached
American Standards Association and the sponsor to the sectional committee
its several subcommittees and to invite the various interested bodies to reaffirm their represen-
tatives or to new ones.
Because of the wide field between 30 and 40 different societies, govern-
ment trade associations, institutes, and similar organizations one or more representa-
tives on the sectional committee, plus a few "members at to interests.
Code activities were subdivided to the scope of the several sections. General direction
of Code activities rested with the Committee officers and an executive committee,
of which consisted principally of Standards Committee officers and section chairmen.
Following its in 1948, Standards Committee 831 made an intensive review of
the 1942 Code that resulted in
(a) a revision and extension of requirements to agree with
(b) the revision of references to dimensional standards and material and
the addition of references to the new ones
(c) the clarification of
A revision was Standards Committee B31. Following
by this the by the sponsor organization and the American
Association. It was as an American Standard 1951, with the
B31.1-1951.
Standards Committee 831 at its annual meeting of November 29, authorized the
publication of a section of the Code for Pressure Piping gas transmission and distribu-
tion to be with the applicable of Section 2, Gas and Air
Fabrication Details; and Section 7, - Their
was to provide an document for gas transmission and
distribution would not to other sections of the Code.
The first of this document, known as American Standard Code for Pressure
Piping, Section 8, Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping WilS published in 1952 and

viii
consisted almost entirely of material taken from Sections 2, 6, and 7 of the 1951 Edition of the
Pressure Piping Code.
A new section committee was in 1952 to update Section 8 as necessary to address
modern materials and methods of construction and operation.
After review by B31 Executive and Standards Committees in 1955, a decision was made to
and publish sections as Code documents of the American Standard
for Pressure The 1955 Edition constituted a general revision of the 1952 Edition
with a scope. Further in the application of the Code resulted
in revisions in 1963, 1966, 1967, 1968, 1969, and 1982.
In December the American National Standards Committee B31 was
ASME Code for Pressure B31 Committee. The code
ANSI! ASME 831.
The 1989 Edition of the Code was a compilation of the 1986 Edition and the addenda
issued to the 1986 Edition.
The 1992 Edition of the Code was a compilation of the 1989 Edition, the three
addenda, and the two Errata issued to the 1989 Edition.
The 1995 Edition of the Code was a of the 1992 Edition and the three
addenda issued to the 1992 Edition.
The 1999 Edition of the Code was a of the 1995 Edition and the revisions that
occurred the issuance of the 1995
The 2003 Edition of the Code was a compilation of the 1999 Edition and revisions that occurred
following the issuance of the 1999 Edition.
The 2007 Edition of the Code was a compilation of the 2003 Edition and revisions that occurred
following the issuance of the 2003 Edition.
The 2010 Edition of the Code was a compilation of the 2007 Edition and revisions that occurred
folowing the issuance of the 2007 Edition.
The 2012 Edition of the Code was a compilation of the 2010 Edition and revisions that occurred
following the issuance of the 2010 Edition.
The 2014 Edition of the Code is a compilation of the 2012 Edition and revisions that have
occurred since the issuance of the 2012 Edition. This Edition was approved by the American
National Standards Institute on August 15,2014.

ix
 ASME 831 COMMITTEE
Code for Pressure Piping
(The following is the roster of the Committee at the time of approval of this Code.)

STANDARDS COMMITTEE OFFICERS

I. E. Meyer, Chair
I. W. Frey. Vice Chair
N. lobo. Secretary

STANDARDS COMMITTEE PERSONNEL

R. I.
Appleby, ExxonMobil Development Co. G. A. JoUy, Flowserve/Gestra USA
C. Becht IV, Becht Engineering Co. N. Lobo, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
A. E. Beyer, Fluor Enterprises, Inc. W. J. Mauro, American Electric Power
K. C. Bodenhamer, WHibros Professional Services, Engineering I. E. Meyer, Louis Perry and Associates. Inc.
R. Bojarczuk, ExxonMobil Research and Engineering Co. T. Monday. Team Industries. Inc.
C. I. Campbell, Air Liquide M. L Nayyar. NICE
I. S. Chin, TransCanada Pipelines U.s. G. R. Petru, Enterprise Products Co.
D. D. Christian, Victaulic E. H. Rinaca, Dominion Resources. Inc.
R. P. Deubler, Fronek Power Systems, LLC M. J. Rosenfeld, Kiefner/Applus RTD
C. H. Eskridge, Jr., Jacobs Engineering R. J. Silvia, Process Engineers and Constructors, Inc.
D. J. Fetzner, BP Exploration (Alaska), Inc. W. J. Sperko, Sperko Engineering Services, Inc.
P. D. Flenner, Flenner Engineering Services J. Swezy, Jr., Boiler Code Tech, LLC
I. W. Frey, Stress Engineering Services. Inc. F. W. Talar, FM Global
D. R. Frikken. Becht Engineering Co, K. A. Vilminot, Black & Veatch
R. A. Griehuk, Fluor Enterprises, Inc. G. Aniak!, Ex·Officio Member, Becht Engineering Co,
R. W. Haupt, Pressure Piping Engineering Associates. Inc. l. E. Hayden, Ir., Ex·Officio Member. Consultant
B. P. Holbrook, Babcock Power, Inc. A. J. livingston, Ex-Officio Member, Kinder Morgan

B31.8 EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE

A. P. Maslowski, Secretary, The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers
D. D. Anderson, Columbia Pipeline Group
R. J. Appleby, ExxonMobil Development Co.
K. B. Kaplan. KBR
K. G. leewls, Dynamic Risk Assessment Systems, Inc,
M. J. Rosenfeld, Kiefner/Applus RTD
J. Zhou, TransCanada Pipelines Ltd.
E. K. Newton, Ex·Officio Member, Southern California Gas Co.
B. J. Powell. Ex·Officio Member, NiSource. Inc.
W. J. Walsh, Ex·Officio Member, ArceiorMittai Global R&D

x
 B31.8 GAS TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION PIPING SYSTEMS SECTION COMMITIEE
R. J. Appleby, Chair, ExxonMobil Development Co.
D. D. Anderson, Vice Chair, Columbia Pipeline Group
A. P. Maslowski, Secretary, The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers
R. C. Becken. Energy Experts International
C. A. Bullock, Centerpoint Energy
). S. Chin, TransCanada Pipelines U.s.
S. C. Christensen, Consuilant
A. M. Clarke, Spectra Energy Transmission
P. M. DIckinson, Resolute Energy Corp.
J. W. Fee, Consultant
D. J. Felzner, BP Exploration (Alaska), Inc.
M. W. Gragg. ExxonMobii Development Co.
M. E. Hovis, Energy Transfer
M. D. Huston, ONEOK Partners. LP
M. Israni, U.s. DOT PHMSA
D. L Johnson, Energy Transfer
K. B. Kaplan. KBR
R. W. Kivela, Spectra Energy
M. P. lamontagne, Lamontagne Pipeline Assessment Corp.
K. G. leewis, Dynamic Risk Assessment Systems. Inc.
B31.8 SUBGROUP ON DESIGN, MATERIALS, AND CONSTRUCTION
M. J. Rosenfeld, Chair. Kiefnl!r/Applus RTD
R. J. Appleby, ExxonMobii Development Co,
R. C. Becken, Energy Experts International
B. W. Bingham, T, D. Williamson. Inc.
J. S. Chin, TransCanada Pipelines U.S.
A. M. Clarke, Spectra Energy Transmission
P. M. Dickinson, Resolute Energy Corp.
J. W. fee, Consultant
D. J. Fellner, BP Exploration (Alaska). Inc.
S. A. Frehse. Southwest Gas Corp.
R. W. Galling. Southern California Gas Co.
D. Haim. Bechtel Corp. Oil, Gas and Chemicals
R. O. Hurlaux. Consultant
M. D. Huston, ONEOK Partners, LP
K. B. Kaplan. KBR
B31.8 SUBGROUP ON DISTRIBUTION
E. K. Newton, Chair, Southern California Gas Co.
B. J. Powell, Vice Chair, NiSource. Inc.
J. Faruq. American Gas Associalion
S. A. Frehse, Southwest Gas Corp.
I. M. Groot, Southern California Gas Co.
W. I. Manegold, Pacific Gas and Electric Co.
xi
R. D. lewis, Rosen USA
W. J. Manegold, Pacific Gas and Electric Co.
M. J. Mechlowicz, Southern California Gas Co.
C. J. Miller, Fluor Enterprises. Inc.
D. K. Moore, TransCanada Pipelines U.S.
E. K. Newton, Southern California Gas Co.
G. E. Ortega. Conoco Phillips
B. J. Powell, NiSource. Inc.
M. J. Rosenfeld, Kiefner/Applus RTD
R. A. Schmidt, Canadoil
P. t. Vaughan, ONEOK Partners, LP
F. R. Volgstadt, Voigstadt and Associates. Inc.
W. J. Walsh, ArcelorMiltal Global R&D
D. H. Whitley, £DG. Inc.
D. W. Wright, Wright Tech Services. LLC
M. R. Zerella. National Grid
J. Zhou, TransCanada Pipelines Ltd.
J. S. Zurcher, Process Performance Improvement Consultants
S. C. Gupta, Delegate, Bharat Petroleum Corp. Ltd.
A. Sont, Delegate, Engineers India
R. W. Galling, Contributing Member. Southern California Gas CO,
J. K. Wilson, Contributing Member, Williams
M. J. Mechlowicz. Southern California Gas Co.
C. J. Miller. Fluor Enterprises, Inc.
E. K. Newton, Southern California Gas Co.
M. Nguyen, lockwood International
G. E. Ortega, Conoco Philips
W. L Raymundo. Pacific Gas and Electric Co.
E. J. Robichaux, Almos Energy
R. A. Schmidt, Canadoil
J. Sieve, U.s. DOT PHMSA·OPS
H. Tiwari, FMC Technologies, Inc.
P. L Vaughan, ONEOK Partners, LP
F. R. Volgstadl, Voigstadt and Associates. Inc.
W. J. Walsh, ArcelorMittal Global R&D
D. H. Whitley, EDG, Inc.
J. Zhou, TransCanada Pipelines Ltd.
M. A. Boring. Contributing Member, Kiefner and Associates. Inc.
M. J. Mechlowicz. Southern California Gas Co.
E. J. Robichaux, Atmos Energy
V. Romero, Southern California Gas CO.
J. Sieve, u.s. DOT PHMSA·OPS
F. R. Voigsiadt, Voigsiadt and Associates, Inc.
M. R. Zerella, National Grid
 B31.8 SUBGROUP ON EDITORIAL REVIEW
K. G. leewls. Chair, Dynamic Risk Assessment Systems, Inc. D. Halm. Bechtel Corp. Oil, Gas and Chemicals
R. C. Becken, Energy Experts International K. B. Kaplan. KBR
J. P. Brandl, BP Exploration (Alaska), Inc. R. D. lewis, Rosen USA
R. W. Galling, Southern California Gas Co. D. K. Moore. TransCanada Pipelines U.S.

831.8 SUBGROUP ON OfFSHORE PIPELINES

K. B. Kaplan. Chair, KBR M. W. Gragg. ExxonMobii Development CO,
R. I. Appleby. ExxonMobii Development Co, J.Sieve. U.s, DOT - PHMSA·OPS
K. K. Emeaba. National Transportation Safety Board H. Tiwari, FMC Technologies, Inc.

831.8 SUBGROUP ON OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

D. D. Anderson, Chair, Columbia Pipeline Group M. P. lamontagne, Lamontagne Pipeline Assessment Corp.
M. E. HOllis, Vice Chair. Energy Transfer K. G. leewis, Dynamic Risk Assessment Systems, Inc.
R. P. Barry. ENSTAR Natural Gas Co, R. D. lewis, Rosen USA
A. Bhatia. Alliance Pipeline ltd. C. A. Mancuso. Jacobs
J. P. Brandl, BP Exploration (Alaska), Inc. W. J. Manegold, Pacific Gas and Electric Co.
D. K. Moore. TransCanada Pipelines U.s.
C. A. Bullock. Centerpoint Energy
M. Nguyen, lockwood International
K. K. Emeaba, National Transportation Safety Board
8. I. Powell. NiSource, Inc.
J. D. Gilliam, U.S, DOT - PHMSA M. T. Reed, Alliance Pipeline lid.
J. M. Groot, Southern California Gas CO. D. R. Thornton. The Equity Engineering Group
J. Hudson, EN Engineering j. K. Wilson, Williams
l. J. Huyse. University of Calgary D. W. Wright. Wright Tech SeNices, llC
M. Isranl. U,S. DOT PHMSA M. R. ZereUa, National Grid
D. l. johnson, Energy Transfer J. S. Zurcher, Process Performance Improvement Consultants
R. W. Kivela. Spectra Energy D. E. Adler, Contributing Member, Columbia Pipeline Group

B31.8 GAS TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION PIPING SYSTEMS, INDIA IWG

N. 8. Sabu, Chair, Gujarat State Petrone! ltd. S. Prakask. ILFS Engineering and Construction Co,
A. Karnatak, Vice Chair, Gail India Ltd. V. T. Randeria. Gujarat Gas Co, ltd.
P. V. Gopalan, l&T Valdel Engineering ltd. S. Sahani, TOW India ltd.
R. D. Goyal, Gail India ltd. K. K. Saini. Reliance Gas Transportation Infrastructure ltd.
M. jain, Gail India ltd. R. B. Singh, Adani Energy LId.
P. Kumar, Gail India ltd, J. Sivaraman. Reliance Gas Transportation Infrastructure ltd,
A. Modi. Gail India ltd, I. Somasundaram. Gail India ltd.
D. S. Nal1aware. Indian Oii Corp. ltd. A. Soni. Engineers India Ltd.
Y. S. Navathe. Adani Energy lid, M. Sharma. Contributing Member, AS ME India PVT, Ltd.

B31.8 INTERNATIONAL REVIEW GROUP

R. J. Appleby. Chair, ExxonMobii Development Co. Q. Feng. PetroChina Pipeline Co.
H. M. AI·Musllm, Saudi Aramco W. Feng. PetroChina Pipeline Co.

B31 CONFERENCE GROUP

T. A. Bell, Bonneville Power Administration
R. A. Coomes. State of Kentucky, Department of Housing/Boiler
Section
D. H. Hanralh. Consultant
C. ). Harvey. Alabama Public SeNice Commission
D. T. Jagger. Ohio Department of Commerce
K. T. lau. Alberta Boilers Safety Association
R. G. Marini. New Hampshire Public Utilities Commission
I. W. Mault. Manitoba Department of labour
A. W. Meiring, Fire and Building Safety Division/Indiana
R. f. Mullaney, Brilish Columbia Boiler and Pressure Vessel Safety
Branch
P. Sher, State of Connecticut
M. E. Skarda. Arkansas Department of Labor
D. A. Starr. Nebraska Department of Labor
D. I. Stursma. Iowa Utilities Board
R. P. Sullivan. The National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel
inspectors
I. E. Troppman, Division of labor/State of Colorado Boiler
Inspections
W. A. West, Lighthouse Assistance. Inc.
T. F. Wickham, Rhode Island Department of labor

xii
 B31 EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
J. E. Meyer, Chair, louis Perry and Associates, Inc. R. A. Grichuk, Fluor Enterprises, Inc.
N. lobo, Secretary, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers l. E. Hayden, Jr., Consultant
G. A. AnIak!, Becht Engineering Co, G. A. Jolly, Flowserve/Gestra USA
R. J. Appleby, ExxonMobii Development Co, A. J. livingston, Kinder Morgan
D. D. Christian, Victaulic M. l. Nayyar, NICE
J. W, Frey, Stress Engineering Services, Inc G. R. Petru, Enterprise Products Co.
D. R. Frlkken, Becht Engineering Co. R. A. Appleton, Contributing Member, Refrigeration Systems Co.

B31 FABRICATION AND EXAMINATION COMMITTEE

J. Swezy, Jr., Chair, Boiler Code Tech. LLC
F. Huang, Secretary, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers
R. D. Campbell, Bechtel Corp.
D. Couch, Electric Power Research Institute
R. J. Ferguson, Metallurgist
P. D. flenner, Flenner Engineering Services
S. Gingrich, URS Corp.
J. Hainsworth, Consultant
A. D. Nalbandian, Thielsch Engineering. Inc.
R. J. Silvia, Process Engineers and Constructors, Inc.
W. J. Sperko, Sperko Engineering Services, Inc.
P. L Vaughan, ONEOK Partners, LP
K. Wu, Stellar Energy Systems

B31 MATERIALS TECHNICAL COMMITTEE

R. A. Grichuk, Chair, fluor Enterprises, Inc. M. L Nayyar, NICE
N. lobo, Secretary, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers M. B. Pickell, Willbros Engineers, Inc.
W. P. Collins, WPC Solutions, LLC D. W. Rahal, CCM 2000
R. P. Deubler, Fronek Power Systems. LLC R. A. Schmidt, Canadoil
C. H. Eskridge, Jr., Jacobs Engineering H. R. Simpson, Stantec
G. A. Jolly, Flowserve/Gestra USA J. L Smith, Jacobs Engineering Group
C. J. Melo, S&B Engineers and Constructors, Ltd. Z. Djilall, Contributing Member, Sonatrach

B31 MECHANICAL DESIGN TECHNICAL COMMITTEE

G. A. Anlaki, Chair, Becht Engineering CO. R. W. Haupt, Pressure Piping Engineering Associates, Inc.
J. C. Minichiello, Vice Chair, Bechtel National, Inc. B. P. Holbrook, Babcock Power. Inc.
R. lucas, Secretary, The American SOciety of Mechanical Engineers W. J. Koves, Pi Engineering Software. Inc.
D. Arnett, Chevron ETC R. A. leishear, Savannah River National laboratory
C. Becht IV, Becht Engineering Co. G. O. Mayers, Alion Science Technology
R. Bethea, Huntington Ingalls Industries, Newport News I. F. McCabe, General Dynamics Electric Boat
T. Q. McCawley, TQM Engineering PC
Shipbuilding
J. E. Meyer, Louis Perry and Associates. Inc.
J. P. Breen, Becht Engineering Co.
A. Paulin, Paulin Research Group
P. Cakir·Kavcar. Bechtel Corp. Oil. Gas and Chemicals
R. A. Robleto, KBR
N. F. Consumo, Sr., Consultant M. J. Rosenfeld, Kiefner/Applus - RTD
J. P. Ellenberger, Consultant T. Sato, Japan Power Engineering and Inspection Corp.
D. J. Fetzner, BP Exploration (Alaska). Inc. G. Stevick, Berkeley Engineering and Research, Inc.
D. A. Fraser, NASA Ames Research Center H. Kosasayama, Delegate, JGC Corp.
J. A. Graziano, Consultant E. C. Rodabaugh, Honorary Member, Consultant

831 NATIONAL INTEREST REVIEW GROUP

American Pipe Filling Association H. Thielsch Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
American Society of Heating. Refrigerating and Air·Conditioning Industry R. A. Schmidt
Engineers - H. R. Kornblum National Association of Plumbing·Heating-Cooling Contractors
Chemical Manufacturers Association D. R. Frikken R. E. White
Copper Development Association - A. Cohen National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau D. Nikpourfard
Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association T. F. Stroud National Fire Protection Association T. C. Lemoff
Edison Electric Institute - R. L. Williams National Fluid Power Association - H. Anderson
International District Heating Association - G. M. Von Bargen Valve Manufacturers Association - R. A. Handschumacher

xiil
 INTRODUCTION

The ASME Code for Pressure consists of many Users of this Code are cautioned making use
individually published sections, each an American of revisions without assurance that are
National Standard. in this Introduction ilnd to any authorities of jurisdiction where the piping is to
in the text of this Code Section, 831.8, when the word be installed.
"Code" is used without identification, it means The Code under the direction of
this Code Section. Code for Pressure Piping, which
111e Code sets forth deemed is under of The
necessary for the safe construction of pres- American Mechanical
Although silfety is the basic r(),r1",t1P,c"t, been accredited by the American National Standards
alone will not Institute. The Committee is a one and
of ilny is cau- all Code Sections current with new developments in
tioned that the Code is not a design handbook; it does materials, construction, and industrial practice.
not eliminate the need for the or for rr"tTIr,,,t,m When no Section of the ASME Code for Pressure
judgment. Piping covers a
To the greatest possible extent, Code requirements for discretion to select ilny Section
are stated in terms of basic and ally ilpplicable; however, it is cautioned that
formulas. These are supplemented as necessary with tary rements to the Section chosen may be
to ensure uniform application of necessary to provide for a safe piping for the
and to guide selection and application of intended application. Technical limitations of the vari-
elements. The Code prohibits and ous Sections, legal and
known to be unsafe and contains warnings where cau- bili ty of other Codes or Standards are some of the
tion, but not prohibition, is warranted. to be considered by the user in determining the applica-
This Code Section includes bility of any Section of this Code.
milterial specifications
and including dimensional and
lwc,,..,,,·,·h, requirements Appendices
for and
This Code contains two kinds of manda-
assemblies
tory and nonm,mdatory. Mandatory appendices contain
(c) requirements and data for evaluilting and
materials the user needs to carry out a
stresses, reilctions, and movements associated with pres-
recommendation in the main text
sure, and other forces
Nonmandatory appendices, which are written in man-
(d) guidilnce and limitations on
datory are offered for application at the user's
applying and
discretion.
(e) requirements for fabricating, and
installing
if) requirements for and test- Interpretations and Revisions
ing piping
procedures for and maintenance that The Committee has established an orderly procedure
are essential to public to consider requests for interpretation and revision of
(11) provisions for protecting from external Code To receive
and internal corrosion must be in and must
It is intended that this Edition of Code Section 831.8 Nonmandatory Appendix 0
not be retroactive. The latest edition issued at least technical inquiries.)
6 months before the contract date for the first The reply to an inquiry will be sent directly
phase of activity covering a piping system or In the question and reply will
shall be the governjng document, unless agreement is be as part of an Interpretation to
made between to use the Code Section, issued with the revisions.
another issue, or unless the regulatory body having juris- Requests for interpretation and SUIH"Y,PSflOflS
diction the use of another issue or different sion should be addressed to the
ASME 831 Committee, The American Society of

xiv
Mechanical Engineers, Two Park Avenue, New York, NY Materials are listed in the Stress Tables only when
10016-5990. sufficient usage in piping within the scope of the Code
has been shown. Materials may be covered a Case.
Cases for listing shall include evidence
A Case is the usage and data to permit establishment of allow-
when able stresses or pressure rating, maximum and minimum
fication or when the limits, and other restrictions. Additional
ments of the Code or criteria can be found in the for addition of
materials or alternative constructions. The Case will be new materials in the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
published on the B31.8 Committee at Section II. (To develop and gain
http:// cstools.asme.org/. unlisted materials may be in accordance with
A Case is normally issued for a limited period, after para. 811.2.2.)
which it may be in the Code, or
allowed to if there is no of further need
for the covered by the Case. The Effective Date
of a Case, however, be used after its
or withdrawal, the Case was effective on the This when contains new Code
original contract before sions. It is a compilation of the 2012 Edition and revisions
of the and the to the 2012 Edition.

xv
I q by the American Society of
be made of this material without
 ASME 831.8-2014
SUMMARY OF CHANGES

by the B31 Committee and and after public review, ASME B31.8-2014
by the American National Standards Institute on 15,2014.

ASME B31.8-2014 consists of editorial changes, revisions, and corrections identified a margin
note, (14), placed next to the affected area.
Locatioll
801.1 First sentence editorially revised
802.1 In subpara. (b)(1O), reference to
ASME B31.11 revised to ASME 831.4
14 811.1 ed itorially revised
811.2.3 Subparagn'lph editorially revised
15 814.1.1 Note revised
16 815 Fourth sentence editorially revised
816 Second paragraph editorially revised
23,24 831.1.1 (1) References updated
(b) revised
831.2.1 References updated
28 831.4.2 (g) revised
32 833.4 In equation revised
(2) Subparagraph (d) revised
33 834.4 revised
36 840.2.2 and (a)(2) revised
38 841.1.2 In subparas. references to
API5L
39,42 841.1.9 In (a), first sentence revised
(2) In subpara. revised
40 Table 841.1.6-2 Revised
45,46 841.2.4 In subpara. second sentence
revised
51 842.1.1 In subpara. (d), second sentence revised
53 842.2.1 In definition for 5, of
corrected
59 843.3.1 (b) revised

64 Table 845.2.2-1 "Pressure for Steel" column revised

66,67 845.2.7 In third sentence revised
78 851.4 First paragraph added

xvi
 Location
87 853.3.1 In subpara. (b )(2), first sentence
editorially revised
89 854.2 In (el, last sentence revised
103, 104 A802 Editorially revised
A803 Definition for steel catenary riser (SCR)
added
106 A831.1. 1 References updated
111 A843.1.5 Added
113 A847.2 Revised
118 B802.2 Editorially revised
125-129 Appendix A Updated
131-133 NonmandRtory Updated
Appendix C
143 F-1 Under definition for r o, and
(b) revised
149 F-2.2.5M Revised

SPECIAL NOTE:
The to ASME B31.8 are included in this edition as a section for the user's
convenience.

xvii
INTENTIOI\JALLY LEFT BLAf\IK

xviii
 ASME B31.8·2014

GAS TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION PIPING SYSTEMS

General Provisions and Defi n itions

801 GENERAL and used as gaseous fuels. All of the

ments of NFPA 58 and NFPA 59 and of this Code con-
(14) 801.1 Approved Standards and Specifications
construction, and
Standards and for use under m<1inten<1nce of piping facilities shall
of the sponsor- butane, propane, or mixtures of
ing organizations are shown in Mandatory A. gases.
It is not considered to refer to a (b) This Code does not to
edition of each of the standards and (1) and manufacture of pressure vessels cov-
the individual Code paragraphs. ered by the BPV
piping with metal temperatures above 450°F
801.2 Use of Standards and Specifications or below -20°F (-29°C)
Incorporated by Reference see para.
(3) piping beyond the outlet of the customer's
A are by meter set (Refer to ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54.)
elsewhere in this Code. Users of this Code are advised (4) in oil refineries or natural
of of these extraction gas plant piping other than
the refer- the main gas stream in dehydration, and all other
ence to that standard. processing plants as p<1rt of a gas transmission
industrial
801.3 Standard Dimensions mines other sections of the
Adherence to American National Standards Institute for Pressure Piping, 831.)
(ANSI) dimensions is strongly recommended wherever (5) vent piping to operate at substantially atmo-
Paragraphs or notations specifying these pressures for W<1ste gases of any kind
<1nd other dimensional standards in this Code, however, (6) wellhead assemblies, including control valves,
shall not be that other of flow lines between wellhead and or separator, off-
at least shore platform production piping, or and
tubing in gas or oil wells platform produc-
tion facility see API RP 14E.)
801.4 SI (Metric) Conversion (7) the and manufacture of
For factors used in converting U.s. units items of equipment, or instruments
to SI units, see Nonmandatory Appendix J. (8) the and manufacture of heat
(Refer to appropriate standard.)
(9) petroleum piping ""':torn"
802 SCOPE AND INTENT to ASME
(14) 802.1 Scope (10) slurry piping
to ASME B31.4.)
(Il) This Code covers the
(11) carbon dioxide transportation
tion, inspection, and testing
for the transportation of gas. This Code also covers
of the opera tion and maintenance of those
I BPV Code references here ill1d elsewhere in this Code Rr€ to
ties. Mandatory Appendix Q for scope diagrams.) the ASME Boiler Rnd Pressure Vessel Code.
This Code is concerned only with certain TubuJRl' Exchill1ger Mallufilcturers Association, 25 North
of petroleum gases when they are BroildwilY, TilrrytoWl1, NY 10591.

1
2014 by the American Society
be made orillis material without
 ASME B31.8-2014

(12) liquefied natural gas piping ~"~tpn1~ (Refer to 803 PIPING SYSTEMS DEFINITIONS
NFPA 59A and ASME
803.1 General Terms and Definitions
(13) cryogenic piping
carbon dioxide: a heavy, colorless gas that does not sup-
802.2 Intent port combustion, dissolves in water to form carbonic
and is found in some natural gas streams.
802.2.1 Adequacy for Normal Conditions. The
of this Code are for under environment: the or cond i tions (physical,
conditions usually in the gas chemical, mechanical) in which a material exists.
for all unusual conditions cannot be spe- gas: as used in this Code, is any gas or mixture of gases
provided for, nor are all details of suitable for domestic or industrial fuel and transmitted
and construction therefore, activities involv- or distributed to the user a piping The
the common types are natural gas, manufactured gas, and
of gas transmission, petroleum gas distributed as a vapor, with or
should be undertaken personnel hav- the admixture of air.
the or knowledge to make pro- hal branch connections made to
vision for such unusual conditions and pipelines, mains, or other facilities while are in
and construction details. All per- operation. The branch is connected to the
the of this Code shall meet or operating line, and the operating line is while
Ov'~r","'"'''' or herein. it is under pressure.
802.2.2 Safety. This Code is concerned with liquefied naturnl gas: natural gas liquefied by refrigeration
(n) safety of the or pressure.
(b) employee liqllefied petrolellm gases (LPG): predominantly
basic quality materials and workmanshi p, of the following hydrocarbons by themselves or
for operations, and maintenance as mixtures): butane (normal butane or isobutene),
distribution facilities. (including and
to work areas, LPG can be stored as
are not intended

802.2.3 Retroactive Applications. It is not intended listed speci{icnl ion: a listed in Mandatory
that this Code be applied retroactively to such Appendix A.
installations as design, cOll1pallY or nl1l'mJ'nr'
and at the time of construction. it is vidual, partnership, r[),'nn.r"~
not intended that this Code be retroactively to or other entity responsible for the con-
established struction, testing, operation, and mainte-
as nance of the facilities.
802.2.4 Application to Existing Facilities. Provisions encroachment: as used in this Code, is the portion
of this Code shall be and mainte- of the route of a pipeline or main that lies within, runs in
a parallel direction to, and does not
cross the of a street, highway, or
railroad.
802.2.S Qualification of Those Performing
Inspections. Individuals who shall petroleulII: crude oil,
be qualified by training and / or experience to implement ral gas liquefied oetTolelllTl gas,
the and recommendations of ieum products.
this of physical facilities which gas
moves in transportation, including pipe, fittings,
802.2.6 Further Information. For further informa-
and gaskets), regulators, pres-
see the nonmandatory
rrll~,pn.'>r" relief valves,
Managing
compressor units,
stations,
stations, pressure stations, and assem-
802.3 Offshore Gas Transmission
blies. Included within this definition are gas transmis-
See VIII for additional and defi- sion and lines, which transport gas from
nit ions applicable to offshore gas transmission production facilities to onshore locations, and gas stor-

2
 ASME B31.8-2014

age equipment of the closed pipe type that is fabricated distribution system: a gas distribution
or from pipe or fabricated from pipe and fittings. in which the pressure in the mains and ser-
private rights-oJ-wilY: as used in this are rights-of- vice lines is the same as that delivered to
way not located on streets, or highways used the customer's In such a a service
the public, or on railroad regulator is not required on the individual service lines.
system or pipeline syslem: either the operator's entire 803.4 Systems
line infrastructure or of that infrastructure
that have definable used for
transportation gathering, transmission, or distribu-
tion of gas pipeline or the of gas.
gatllering line: a of installed in a
valllt: an sh'ucture that may be entered
ing
and that is to contain piping and piping com-
ponents (such as valves or pressure gathering one or more of pipeline, usu-
ally interconnected to form a network, that transports
803.2 Piping Systems from one or more production facilities to the inlet
componenl or pipeline componellt: an individual item or a gas plant. If no gas plant
element fitted in line with in a pipeline exists, the to the most downstream
such as, but not limited to, valves, elbows, tees, of one of following:
and closures. (a) the point of custody transfer of gas suitable for
new and pipelines, delivery to a distribution
way, and any equipment, or building used in (b) the where accumulation and of
the transportation of gas or in the treatment gas from separate production
the course of transportation. sonable proximity completed
pipeline section: a continuous run of pipe between
803.5 Miscellaneous Systems
cent compressor stations, between a station
and a block valve, or between control piping: all used to
segment: a length of or interconnect air, gas, or control
has characteristics in a or instrument transmitters and receivers.
location. used for commer-
~P(">r,,,... hlrfield containing a well or wells
N"m,-,lol,,,ri for and dedicated to subsurface stor- illstfllillellt all piping, valves, and fittings used to
for later recovery, transmis- connect instruments to main piping, to other instru-
ments and or to measuring
production Jacility: or used in produc-
transmission tion, extraction, recovery, stabilization, separa-
tmllSJllissiol1 system: one or more of pipeline, tion, trea associated measurement, field
usually interconnected to form a network, that trans- gas lift, gas injection, or fuel gas supply.
gas from a the outlet of a gas Production facility piping or must be used
processing plant, or a to a or low- petroleum liquids or natural gas from the
pressure dish'ibution system, a customer, it for transportation by pipeline.
or another field. pipillg: all and used to
803.3 Distribution Systems collect samples of gas, steam, water, or oil.
gas lIlaill or distributioll /IIaill: a of in a 803.6 Meters, Regulators, and Pressure Relief
distribution installed to convey gas to individual Stations
service lines or other mains.
CIIslomer's meier: a meter that measures gas delivered to
gas service line: the piping installed between a main,
a customer for consumption on the customer's premises.
pipeline, or other source of supply and the meter set
para. B02.1(b)(3).] lI1eler sel asselllbly: the and fittings installed to
high-pressure distribution system: a gas distribution piping connect the inlet side meter to the gas service
that at a pressure than the stan- line and the outlet side of the meter to the customer's
dard service pressure delivered to the customer. In such fuel line.
a system, a service is required on each service lIIolliloring reglliator: a pressure installed in
line to control the pressure delivered to the customer. series wi th another pressure

3
by the American Society of
Illade of this material
 ASME 831.8-2014

assumes control of the pressure downstream of the sta- 803.8 Gas Storage Equipment
tion, in case that pressure exceeds a set maximum. bailie: as used in this is a structure com-
pressllre-limiting stat ion: consists of that under pletely fabricated from pipe with drawn, forged,
abnormal conditions will act to or spun end closures and tested in manufacturer's
off the supply of gas flowing into a to plant.
the gas pressure from exceeding a predetermined value. bottle-type holder: any bottle or group of interconnected
While normal pressure conditions prevail, the pressure- bottles installed in one location and used only for stor-
limiting station may exercise some degree of control of gas.
the flow of the gas or may remain in the wide open
position. Included in the station are and auxiliary pipe-type holder: any container or group of intercon-
devices, such as valves, control instruments, control nected pipe containers installed at one location and used
only for storing gas.
lines, the enclosure, and equipment, installed
in accordance with the of this
Code. 804 PIPING SYSTEMS COMPONENT DEFINITIONS
staliol1: consists of equipment
804.1 Plastic Terms and Definitions
installed for automatically and regulating the
pressure in the downstream or main to which plastic a material that contains as an essential
(I10Iln):
it is connected. Included and auxiliary devices an organic substance of high to ultrahigh
such as valves, control control lines, the weight, is solid in its finished state, and at
enclosure, and ventilation equipment. some stage of its manufacture or can be
shaped by flow. TIle two referred
pressllre relief statiol1: consists of installed to to in this Code are th<>rrronn
vent gas from a system protected to the
gas pressure from thermoplastic: a that is capable of
gas may be vented into the lower softened by increase of and
capable of safely the gas decrease of temperature.
being Included in the station are piping and plastic: that is of
auxiliary devices, such as valves, control instruments, changed into a substantially infusible or insoluble
control the and uct when cured under application of heat or chemical
installed in accordance with the means.
of this Code.
804.2 Iron Terms and Definitions
service a installed on a gas service
line to control the pressure of the gas delivered to the enst irol1: shall apply to gray cast iron, that is, a cast
customer. ferrous material in which a of the carbon
content occurs as free carbon in of flakes inter-
803.7 Valves spersed throughout the metal.

block or stop valve: a valve installed for the purpose of ductile irall: sometimes called nodular iron, a cast ferrous
blocking or the flow of gas in a pipe. material in which the free is in a
roidal rather than a The desirable prop-
check valve: a valve designed to permit flow in one direc- erties of ductile iron are achieved by and a
tion and to close automatically to prevent flow in the ferritizing heat treatment of the
reverse direction.
804.3 General Terms and Definitions
cllrb villve: a valve installed below in a service
line at or near the accessible a pipe cOlllainer: a structure assembled in a shop
curb box or standpipe, and operable by a removable key or in the field from and end closures.
or wrench for shutting off the gas supply to a building. items: items made and marketed a com-
This valve is also known as a cllrb Sillt/off or cllrb cock. pany having the exclusive or restricted to manufac-
service line villve: a stop valve readily and acces- ture and sell them.
sible for the purpose of shutting off the gas to the cus-
tomer's fuel line. The valve should be located in 804.4 Pipe Terms and Definitions
the service line ahead of the service or ahead cold expanded pipe: seam less or welded tha t is formed
of the meter, if a is not provided. TIle valve is and then cold while in the mill so that
also known as a service line shl/foff, service lille or the circumference is increased by at least
/IIeter 0.50%.
 ASME B31.8-2014

miter: two or more sections of pipe matched and elongation under load. The specified limiting set or elon-
joined on a line the angle of junction so as to ga tion is expressed as a of gage
produce a in direction. length. Its values are in the various material
pipe: a tubular including tubing, made for sale specifications under this Code,
as a production item, used primarily for rnml,pu.
804.7 Steel
fluid and sometimes for
plate the fabrication of auxiliary are 804.7.1 Carbon common custom, steel is
not as defined herein. considered to be carbon steel when no minimum content

804.5 Dimensional Terms and Definitions niobium,

diameter or nominlll oliiside dillmeter: the or sten, vanadium, or any other element added
as-specified outside diameter of the pipe, not to be con- to obtain a desired alloying effect; when the
fused with the dimensionless NPS (ON). For minimum for copper does not exceed 0.40%; or when
NPS 12 (ON 300) has a specified outside diameter the maximum content specified for any of the
of 12.750 in, mm), NPS 8 (ON 200) has a elements does not exceed the following
outside diameter of 8.625 in. (219.08 and NPS 24 Element
(ON has a specified outside diameter of
24.000 in. Copper 0,60
Manganese 1.65
of the length delivered from the Silicon 0,60
is a length, of its actual
dimension. This is sometimes called joint, but is In all carbon steels, small quantities of certain residual
preferred. elements unavoidably retained from raw materials are
!Jolllillal pipe size (NPS) or dill meter 1101llil1a/ (ON): a dimen- sometimes found but are not specified or such
sionless of pipe. It indicates a standard as copper, nickel, chromium, etc. These
Vll'VVV<::U by the appropriate number
elements are as incidental and are not nor-
40), NPS 12 (ON 300)]. See ASME mally deterrnined or
page 1 for additional information on NPS. 804.7.2 Alloy Steel." common custom, steel is
I: the wall thickness considered to be steel when the maximum of the
range given for the content of elements exceeds
one or more of the limits:
Element
for the wlderthickness tol-
Copper 0,60
nnrmlPfl specifica tions.
Manganese 1.65
Silicon 0,60
804.6 Mechanical Properties
specifiedmillilllUII1 elongation. the minimum or in which a definite range or a definite mll1l1num
(expressed in of the gage length) in the tensile quantity of any of the following elements is
test specimen, by the specifications under or required within the limits of the
which the material is from the manufacturer, constructional steels:
(11) aluminum
~nf'rlflPn lIIil1il/l1l1l/
lellsile in
(b) boron
per square inch the minimum tensile
(c) chromium to
prescribed the under which is pur-
(d) cobalt
chased from the manufacturer,
(e) columbium
specified lIIinilllllm yield strellgtli (SMYS): (j) molybdenum
pounds per square inch (MPa), the minimum (g) nickel
strength prescribed by the specification under
(11) titanium
pipe is from the manufacturer.
(i) tungsten
in pounds (j) vanadium
tensile stress (k) zirconium
a material can sustain before

} From Sleel Prorluc/s Mlllllml, Section 6, Americiln Iron ilnd Steel

in pounds per square inch Institute, August 1952, pp. 5 i1nd 6,
at which a material exhibits a 4 From Sleet Prorlucls MOII/ml, Section 6, Americiln [ron ilnd Steel
jnstit\lte, Jm1URl'y 1952, pp, 6 i\nd 7,

5
 ASME B31.8-2014

or any other alloying element added to obtain a desired and the of

alloying effect. pressure. ASTM AS3,
Small quantities of certain elements are ASTM A13S,
in alloy steels. In many (e) vllttwelded pipe
not considered to be are not or (1) bel/-welded: furnace-welded pipe produced in
When not or required, they should individual from The lon-
not exceed the following amounts: butt joint forge welded by the mechanical pres-
sure is developed in the furnace-heated skelp
Element
through a known as a weld-
Chromium 0.20 bell), which serves as a combined and weld-
Copper 0.35 die. Typical specifications are ASTM AS3 and API SL.
Molybdenum 0.06
(2) cOlltilluolls-welded: furnace-welded pipe pro-
Nickel 0.25
duced in continuous from coiled and sub-
804.7.3 Pipe Manufacturing Processes. cut into individual
names of welded joints are used herein longi tudinal butt joint is t,."oo_",<o
common usage as defined in AWS A3.0, or as pressure in rolling the hot-formed
defined as follows: a setof round pass welding rolls. Typical
(a) pipe having a lon- cations are ASTM AS3 and API SL.
gitudinal or helical butt joint by at least two if) laser bea1/1 welded
passes, one of which is on the inside of the Coales- butt joint made with a
cence is by with an electric arc or arcs laser beam to melting full thickness of
between the bare metal electrode or electrodes and the to be by the fusion of those
work. The is shielded a blanket of granular, typical is ASTM AI006.
fusible material on the work. Pressure is not and seamless pipe: a wrought tubular product made
filler metal for the inside and outside welds is obtained without a welded seam. It is manufactured by hot-
from the electrode or electrodes. working steel if necessary, subsequently cold-
are ASTM A381, ASTM AlOOS, and API SL. the hot-worked tubular product to produce
(b) electric-Jlash-zvelded pipe: pipe having a longitudinal the desired and
butt joint wherein coalescence is produced simultane- ASTM AI06, and API SL.
ously over the entire area of abutting surfaces by the heat
804.8
obtained from resistance to the flow of electric current
between the two surfaces, and by the application of For pipe, see para. 80S.1.3.
pressure after heating is substantially Flash-
and are of
805 DESIGN, FABRICATION, OPERATION, AND
metal from the A typical
TESTING TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
(c) eleclricjllsiol1-zvelded pipe
nal butt joint wherein coalescence is 805.1 General
tube by manual or automatic electric-arc
805.1.1 Area
The weld may be or double and may be
made with or without the use of filler metal. Typical locationeli/SS or elI/S5 loention: a area
specifications are ASTM A134 and ASTM A139, which pipeline classified to the number and
permit or double weld with Of without the use of bui intended for human occupancy and
of filler metal. Additional typical afe other characteristics that are considered when
ASTM A671 and ASTM which require both inside ing factors for construction,
and outside welds and the use of filler metal. and of pipelines and mains
also made by the electric- the area and applying certain operating and mainte-
fusion-welded process with either a butt joint, a lap joint, nance requirements.
or a lock-seam joint. fications are of IClnd on which
ASTM A134, ASTM A139 (butt joint), API and power highwClYs, and
ASTM A211 (butt joint, lap joint, or lock-seam joint). lar facilities are constructed. The ROW
(d) elecl ric-resislallce-welded secures the right to PClSS over owned by others.
individual lengths or in continuous ROW right of
and subsequently cut into individua.1 lengths. The and egress for the operation Clnd maintenance the
have a butt joint wherein the installation of the fClcility. The ROW
coalescence is produced by the heat obtained from resist- with the construction Clnd maintenance
ance of the to the flow of electric current in a circuit the and is usually

6
 ASME 631.8·2014

determined based on negotiation with the affected land- fillet weld: a weld of approximately cross sec-
owner or by authority. tion joining two surfaces at right
to each other in a joint, tee joint, or corner joint.
805.1.2 leakage Investigative Terms and
Definitions. For definitions of gns conlrol criteria weld: a circumferential butt weld joining
investigation terms, see Nonmandatory Appendix M. pipe or components.
805.1.3 Plastic Terms and Definitions !lent treatmellt: heating and cooling a solid metal or
in such a way as to obtain desired Heating
nd/Jesive a joint made in piping by the use
for the sole purpose of hot working is not considered
of an adhesive substance that a continuous bond
heat treatment. If a weldment is heated and cooled in a
between the mating surfaces without dissolving either
controlled manner, then the term pas/weld /lent treatment
one of them.
is used.
dimension ratio (DR): the ratio of outside diameter
to wall thickness of thermoplastic pipe, It is calculated
seam weld: the longitudinal or helical seam in pipe, made
in the pipe mill for the purpose of a
by dividing the outside diameter of the pipe
circular cross section.
by the minimum wal! thickness.
heat fusion a joint made in thermoplastic a metal to a suitable
by
heating the to permit fusion the long
materials when the parts are ual stresses, and then cooling slowly to minimize
the of new residual stresses.
hydrostatic basis (HDB): one of a series of estab-
lished stress (specified in ASTM for a slIblllelged arc weldillg: an arc welding process that uses
plastic compound obtained by the long- an arc or arcs between a bare metal electrode or elec-
term hydrostatic determined in accordance trodes and the weld pool. The arc and molten metal are
with ASTM D2837. Established HDBs are listed in shielded by a blanket of granular flux on the workpieces,
PPJ TR-4. TIle is used without pressure and with filler
metal the electrode and sometimes from a
long-term hydrostalic slrengtli: the estimated mental source (welding flux, or metal
in per inch (MPa) in a wall
that will cause ure of the at an average of fie-ill: a connection where a is left to divide a pipeline
100,000 hr when to a constant hydrostatic into test sections, or to a replacement
pressure, section, or in the continuous line construction at a loca-
tion such as a river or highway
solvelll cemenl joinl: a joint made in thermoplastic
by the use of a solvent or solvent cement that forms a tie-ill weld: a tie-in connection a
continuous bond between the mating surfaces. weld,
standard dimension ratio (SDR): the ratio of outside pipe weld: a localized coalescence of metals or nonmetals
diameter to wall thickness of thermoplastic It is duced either by heating the materials to the
calculated dividing the outside of with or without the of pres-
the pipe by specified thickness. sure, or by the of pressure alone and with
or without the use of filler material.
805.1.4 fabrication Terms and Definitions
weIde/': one who performs manual or semiautomatic
arc or arc weld: a group of welding processes that welding.
produces coalescence of metals heating them with
an arc. The processes are used with or without the appli- opera/a/': one who
cation of pressure and with or without filler metal. automatic, or
blttt joint: a between two members aligned approxi- weldillg procedures: the detailed methods and
same plane, See l(A), 3, involved in the production of a weldment.
in AWS A3,0. wrinkle bend: a pipe bend produced by a field machine or
bult weld: a nonstandard term for a weld in a butt joint. controlled that may result in contour
cold-springing: where used in the the fabrication on the inner radius. The wrinkle is delib-
of piping to an actual shorter than its nominal introduced as a means of shortening the inside
and it into position so that it is stressed meridian of the bend. Note that this definition does not
apply to a pipeline bend in which incidental minor,
in the erected thus compensating partially
for the effects produced by the due to an smooth ripples are
increase in temperature. factor is the ratio wrollght: metal in the solid condition that is formed to
of the amount of cold spring provided to the total com- a desired by (rolling, extruding,
puted usually at an

7
 ASME 831.8-2014
805.2 Design
805.2.1 Pressure Terms and Definitions
design pressure or internlll design pressure: the maximum
pressure permitted by this Code, as determined by the
design procedures applicable to the materials and loca-
tions involved . It is used in calculations or analysis for
pressure design of a piping component.
hydrastat ic test or hydrot est: a pressure test using water
as the test medium.
II1I1Xill1l1111 1I110wabie operating pressure (MAOP): the maxi-
mum pressure at which a pipeline system may be oper-
ated in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
II1I1Xill1UIl1 1I110wllbie test pressure: the ma ximum internal
fluid pressure permitted by this Code for a pressure test
based upon the material and location involved .
I11I1Xil11ull1 opemting pressure (MOP): sometimes referred
to as maximum actual operating pressure, the highest
pressure at which a piping system is operated during a
normal operating cycle.
no 1"11/11 I opemting pressure: the predicted pressure (sum
of static head pressure, pressure required to overcome
friction losses, and any backpressure) at any point in a
piping system when the system is operating under a set
of predicted steady-state conditions.
overpressllre protection: the prevention of the pressure
in the system or part of the system from exceeding a
predetermined value and is typically provided by a
device or equipment installed in a gas piping system.
pressure: unless otherwise stated, expressed in pounds
per square inch (kilopascals) above atmospheric pres-
sure (i.e., gage pressure) and is abbreviated as psig (kPa).
pressure test: a means by which the integrity of a piece
of equipment (pipe) is assessed, in which the item is
filled with a fluid, sealed, and subjected to pressure.
It is used to validate integrity and detect construction
defects and defective materials.
stllndllrd service pressure: sometimes called the normal
utilization pressure, the gas pressure a utility undertakes
to maintain at its domestic customers' meters.
stlllldup pressure test: a procedure used to demonstrate
the leak tightness of a low-pressure, gas service line,
us ing air or gas as the test medium.
805.2.2 Temperature Terms and Definitions
IIl1Jbienttelllpemture: the temperature of the surrounding
medium, usually used to refer to the temperature of the
air in which a structure is situated or a device operates.
groulld tell/pem/llre: the temperature of the earth at pipe
depth .
lIIinillllllll design telllpemt 11 re: the lowest anticipated mate-
rial temperature during service. The user of this Code
is cautioned that ambient a nd operating temperature
8
Cop)'rigilt © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engilleers.
No reproduction may be mad e of this material without written conse nt of ASME.
conditions may exist during construction, start-up, or
shutdown that require special design considerations or
operating restric tions.
tell1pe/'l1/ure: e x pressed in degrees Fahrenheit (OF)
[degrees Celsi us (0C)] .
805.2.3 Stress Terms and Definitions
bellding stress: the force per unit area acting at a point
along the length of a member resulting from the bending
moment applied at that point.
compressive stress: the applied pushing force divided by
the original cross-sectional area.
hoop stress, SH: the stress in a pipe of wall thickness, t,
act ing circumferentially in a plane perpendicular to the
longitudinal axis of the pipe, produced by the pressure,
P, of the fluid in a pipe of diameter, D, and is determined
by Barlow's formula:
(U.S . CustollJllry Unit s)
PO
SH = 2t
(SI Unit s)
lI1axill1ulIJ 1I110wllbie hoop stress: the maximum hoop stress
permitted by this Code for the design of a piping system.
It depends on the material used, the location of the pipe,
the operating conditions, and other limitations imposed
by the designer in conformance with this Code.
opemtillg stress: the stress in a pipe or structural member
under normal operating conditions.
residulIl stress: stress present in an object in the absence
of any e xternal loading, typically resulting from manu-
facturing or construction processes.
secolldlllY stress: stress created in the pipe wall by loads
other than internal fluid pressure, such as backfill loads,
traffic loads, loads caused by natural ha zards (see
para. 841.1.10), beam action in a span, loads at supports,
and at connections to the pipe.
stress: the internal resistance of a body to an externally
applied force, e xpressed in units of force per unit area
(psi or MPa). It may also be termed unit stress.
stress COllcel/tmtor or stress cOllcelltmtioll: a discontinuity
in a structure or change in contour that causes a local
increase in stress.
stress level: the level of tangential or hoop stress, usually
expressed as a percentage of specified minimum yield
strength.
tensile stress: the applied pulling force divided by the
original cross-sectional area .
~
e· ·s
me
 ASME 831.8-2014

805.2.4 Construction, Operation, and Maintenance removal of material by usually utiliz-

Terms and Definitions such as a disk.
abandoned: removed from service. an anomaly with characteristics that do not
actiol1able allomaly: an anomaly that may exceed acceptable limits.
able limits based on the anomaly and nlT",IInP inclllsion: a nonmetallic sulfide,
data analysis. or silicate particle in a metal
anolllaly: an unexamined deviation from the norm in indication: a of a nondestructive tech-
material, coatings, or welds. or method that deviates from the ':>Yr'''rh"rl It may
dala the process through or may not be a defect.
data are and in-line il1spectioll (ILl): a steel pipeline tech-
nique that uses devices known in the
in a hole or trench to fill exca- or smart These devices run inside the
and provide of metal loss, deformation,
other defects.
written testimony of qualification.
in-service pipelillc: a that contains natural gas to
conseq1lence: the that a pipeline failure could have be The gas mayor may not be flowing.
on the public, property, and the
IIlSlJet"llOll: the use of a nondestructive
environment.
or method.
crack: very narrow, elongated defect caused by mechani-
cal into parts. the capability of the pipeline to withstand all
anticipated loads (including hoop stress due to
a physically examined anomaly with dimensions operating pi us the of safety established
or characteristics that exceed acceptable limits. by this section.
dellt: a deformation of the circular cross- that includes
section that a decrease in the diame- the indications
ter and is concave inward. using a variety
discolf/illuily: an interruption of the typical structure of a examinations,
material, such as a lack of in its mechanical, and
metallurgical, or characteristics. A discontinu- ntpO'ritv of the

ity is not
evaluation: a review following the characterization of an leak: an unintentional escape of
actionable to determine whether the anomaly The source of the leak may be
meets criteria. and
e.mll1ination: the direct physical connections.
which may include the use of examina-
tion (NDE) or methods. mechanical damage: a in a pipe or
pipe coating caused of an external
force. Mechanical damage can include denting, coating
nondestructive removnl, metal metal movement, cold
tion of qualified including the performance of the metal, and
of the NDT method c1lld related activities but not includ- stresses.
training programs.
mitigation: the limitation or reduction of the probability
failllre: a term used to that a in service of occurrence or expected consequence for a
has become completely inoperable; is still but event.
is incapable of performing its intended
function; or has deteriorated seriously, to the that 11olldes/ruel iue exalllil1at iOIl or Ilondes/mct iue
it has become unreliable or unsafe for continued use. (NOT): a method, such as radiography,
fatiglle: the process of of, or acoustic emission, or n
of, a crack as a result of ret:.eaited cycles of stress. flux leakage, magnetic par-
fract II re the resistance of a material to fail from ticle inspection, shear-wave and contnct
the extension of a crack. ultrasonic.
mechanically induced metal loss that causes local- a device run inside a pipeline to clean or
grooves or cavities in a metal the or to batch fluids.

9
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material witllout II'rittell COilsent
 ASME 831.8-2014

Imp or scmper Imp: an ancillary item of pipeline equip- used in a broader sense, surface preparation,
ment, such as a launcher or receiver, with associated ments, dry film and manner of
and for a into a pipe- are included,)
line or removing a pig from a corrosion: the deterioration of a material, a
piggil1g: the use of any that results from an electrochemical reaction with its
tool, or vehicle that moves the interior environment.
of the for cleaning, corrosion fatigue: fatigue-type of metal caused
or drying. repeated or fluctuating stresses in a corrosive envi-
qrlfJ/ijicll/ioll: demonstrated and documented ronment and is characterized by shorter life them would
skills, and with documented be encountered as a result of either the or
or required for personnel to fluctuating stress alone or the corrosive environment
perform the duties of a job or task. alone,
ruplure: a failure of any portion of the corrosion inhibitor: a chemical substance or combination
that allows the to escape to the environment. of substances that, when in the environment or
on a or reduces corrosion,
slug: a volume of liquid or gas, filling the
cross section of the corrosion mte: the rate at which corrosion proceeds,
survey: measurements, or observations corrosiveness: the of an environment to cause
intended to discover and events or conditions corrosion or the to which or rate at which it
that indicate a departure from normal operation or causes corrosion,
condition of the crevice corrosion: localized corrosion of a metal smface
tmillillg: an program to impart the to, an area that is shielded
knowledge skills necessary for qualification. to the environment because of close
the metal to the surface of another materiaL
ultmsonic: high-frequency sound. Ultrasonic examina-
tion is used to determine wall thickness and to detect a chemical process of
the presence of defects, """,odiDeof a or other material over
a period of time,
IIpmting: the qualifying of an pipeline or main
for a higher maximum allowable operating pressure, cllrrent: a flow of electric charge,
cllrrent density: the current to or from a unit area of an
805.2.5 Corrosion Control Terms and Definitions electrode surface or through a unit area of a conductor
mlOde: the electrode of an electrochemical cell at which or
oxidation occurs, Electrons flow away from the anode depoillrization: the removal of factors the current
in the external circuit, Corrosion usually occurs and in an electrochemical cell.
metal ions enter the solution at the anode,
dielectric COllt , a coa that does not conduct
bmcelet Ill1odes: galvanic anodes with
for direct attachment around the r;r'rllfYIf'or,mr'o r,' "
line, These may be half-shell bracelets consisting dissimilar metll/s: different metals that could form an
semicircular sections or bracelets anode-cathode relationship in an electrolyte when con-
of a number of individual anodes, nected by a metallic path,
between
cathodic protectioll (CP): a to reduce the corro-
and its environment.
sion of a metal surface by making that surface the cath-
ode of an electromechanical cell. electrical illtelference: any electrical disturbance on a
metallic structure in contact with an caused
cell or eieclrocllelllica/ cell: a system of an anode
by stray
and a cathode immersed in an electrolyte so as to create
an electrical circuit. The anode and cathode may be dif- eiectrical isolalion: thecondition electrically sepa-
ferent metals or dissimilar areas on the same metal rated from other metallic structures or the environment,
surface, electrode: a conductor used to establish contact with an
a liquid, liguefiable, Of mastic that, and through which current is transferred to
after application to a is into a solid or from an electrolyte,
protective, or functional adherent film, Coat- a medium ions that in an
also includes wrap. electric field,
cOllting the number and of coats epoxy: type of resin formed the reaction of aliphatic or
applied to a substrate in a predetermined (When aromatic polyols (like bisphenol) with epichlorohydrin

10
 ASME 831.8·2014

and characterized the presence of reactive oxirane overvoltage: the of an electrode from
end groups. its equilibrium or when current is
erosion: the loss of material from a solid applied.
surface due to mechanical interaction between that sur- a pigmented liquid or resin to a substrate
face and a fluid, a multicomponent fluid, or solid ilS a thin layer that is converted to an opilque solid film
des carried with the fluid. after application. It is commonly used as a decorative
fault CIIlTenl: a current that flows from one conductor to or
or to another conductor due to an abnormal pipe-to-soil the electric potential difference
cormection (including an arc) between the two. A fault between the surface of a buried or metallic
current to may be called a ground fault structure ilnd the that is
current.
a thin, not visible of material. pilling: localized corrosion of a metal surface that is
foreign sll'llclure: any metallic structure that is not confined to a small Mea and takes the form of cavities
intended as a of a under cathodic called
galvallic anode: a meta I that provides sacrificial the change from the onpn·"nrn
to another metal that is more noble when as a result of current across the p\<>rtl,r.'IP
in an This type of anode is the elec- interface.
tron source in one type of cathodic protection. coaling: a applied to a surface to protect
corrosion: accelerated corrosion of a metal the substrate from corrosion or other
because of an electrical contact with a more noble metal
and a more noble locillized section of the metal or
(a) the resistance per unit of a substance with
nonmetallic conductor in a corrosive
uniform cross section.
graphitizntion: the formation of graphite in iron or (b) a measure of the ability of an
from decomposition of iron carbide at elevated soil) to resist the flow of electric
This should not be used as a term to protection current). Resistivity data are to
describe graphitic corrosion. a groundbed for a cathodic protection system.
in a protective that expo- msf: corrosion of various iron oxides
surface to the environment. and iron oxides. (This term properly
ell/brill/ement: a loss of ductility of a metal only to iron and ferrous alloys.)
resulting from absorption of shieldillg: preventing or diverting the flow of cathodic
hydrogen stress current from its natural path.
presence of hydrogen in a stray CIlrrenf. current other than the
tensile stress. It occurs most intended circuit.
slress corrosiOIl cracking (SCC): a form of environmental
impressed cllrrent: an electric current supplied by a device
attack of the metal an interaction of a local
a power source that is external to the elec-
corrosive environment and tensile stresses in the
(An is direct current for cathodic
in formation and growth of cracks.

impressed CIIrrent anode: an electrode suitilble for use as an 805.2.6 Engineering Terms and Definitions
anode when connected to a source of impressed current, brilfle fraetllre: fracture with little or no
which is of a substantially inert deformation.
material oxidation of the
a of time used in design calculations,
for this reilson, is not corroded
selected for the purpose of verifying that a
suitable for the
life may not pertain to
because a properly maintained and
ion: an electrically charged atom or group of atoms. pipeline system Celn provide service
lIIeflllloss: any of a number of of anomillies in pipe
in which metal has been ,'",,""m,.ot'l from the surfilce, dllctility: a measure of the capability of a material to be
usually due to corrosion or deformed plastically before fracturing.
noble: the positive direction of electrode potential, thus elasfic distortioll: of dimensions of a material
noble metals such as gold and upon the application of a stress within the elastic range.

11

© 2014 by the American of Meclmnical

be made ofll1i5 material wilhout written consent
 ASME 831.8·2014

the release of an elastic stress, the material consist of periodic audits and checks that
returns to its dimensions without any perma- ensure the Quality Control will meet all of its
nent deformation. stated purposes.
The of a pipeline may be improved
elastic limit: the maximum stress to which a materia!
the application of Quality Assurance
may be without retention of any
c\I"I-"m<: should be applied to the design,
deformation after the stress is removed.
construction, operating, and maintenance activi-
elasticily: the of a material that allows it to ties in the of this Code.
recover its dimensions following deformation lions design, fabrication,
by a stress its elastic limit. assembly, erection, inspection, examination,
and maintenance application
engineering assessment: a documented assessment using B31.8 piping systems should have a written Quality
of the effect of relevcmt variables
Assurance system in accordance with docu-
upon service or integrity of a pipeline ments. or certification
due ted by or under supervision of a rC>,'Yl,",,,l-c.n
should be by
with demonstrated understanding of
involved.
the of and risk
assessed.
807 TRAINING AND QUALIFICATION OF
critical asseSlilent: an analytical PERSONNEl
fracture mechanics that allows
tion of maximum tolerable sizes for 807.1 Program
and conducted by or under supervision of a competent company shall have a program to man-
person with demonstrated understanding of and of personnel who perform
ence in the of the tAn:>n/'O and construction activities that
related to the issue assessed. or of a TI1e
modulus of elasticity: a measure of the stiffness or rigidity program at a minimum,
of a material. It is actually the ratio of stress to strain elements:
in the elastic of a material. If determined by a (a) Identify those tasks for which the qualification
tension or compression test, it is also called of the program apply. The tasks shall include
Modulus or the coefficient of elasticity. operating, maintenance, and construction activities that
could the or of a
probability: the likelihood of an event occurring. (b) For each task covered by the program, identify
risk: a measure of potential loss in terms of both the abnormal conditions, and describe the process
incident probability (likelihood) of occurrence and the used to ensure that individuals who perform these tasks
magnitude of the consequences. are able to and react to such conditions. An
condition is defined in ASME
span: a section of the that is unsupported. may indicate a malfunction of a
strain: the of a material in response to or deviation from normal that
an applied on a unit length basis may
inches per inch or mm per mm), (1) indicate a condition limits
(2) result in to persons, property, or the
805.2.7 Miscellaneous Terms and Definitions environment
(c) Identify ts for
sllall or shall 110t: used to indicate that a is
involved in tasks covered by the program,
mandatory.
(d) Describe the evaluation process and critera used
s/lOlIld, should 110t, or if is recommellded: used to indicate to determine
that a is not mandatory but recommended as (1) initial qualification
(2) or qua Ii fica tion
(3) or revocation of qualifications
(4) reinstatement of qualifications
806 QUALITY ASSURANCE (e) Establish for car'
rying out each program element.
Quality Control consist of those planned, sys- if) Establish a to periodically evaluate the
tematic, and preventative actions that are required to effectiveness of qualification program, including
ensure that products, and services will meet for the program based on the results
Quality Assurance and

12
 ASME 831.8-2014

(g) Describe how program in Ul\JLI:UU

nicated to affected individuals and how nance functions. The
gram requirements are managed and find to prepare "ITln;,,",,,,'"''
(II) Identify the documentation area of responsibility.
to adequately manage the program.
807.2 Operating and Maintenance Functions 807.3 Reference
In addition to the requirements in para. each A useful reference for
operating company shall provide for employees tions is ASME

13
 ASME 631.8-2014
Chapter I
Materials and Equipment
810 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
It is intended that all materials and equipment that
will become a permanent part of any piping system
constructed under this Code shall be suitable and safe
for the conditions under which they are used. All such
materials and equipment shall be qualified for the condi-
tions of their use by compliance with certain specifica-
tions, standards, and special requirements of this Code,
or otherwise as provided herein.
811 QUALIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND
EQUIPMENT
(14) 811.1 Categories
Materials and equipment fall into the following six
categories pertaining to methods of qualification for use
under this Code:
(11) items that conform to standards or specifications
referenced in this Code
(b) items that are important from a safety standpoint,
of a type for which standards or specifications are refer-
enced in this Code but specifically do not conform to a
referenced standard (e.g., pipe manufactured to a speci-
fication not referenced in this Code)
(c) items of a type for which standards or specifica-
tions are referenced in this Code, but that do not conform
to the standards and are relatively unimportant from a
safety standpOint because of their small size or because
of the conditions under which they are to be used
(d) items of a type for which no standard or specifica-
tion is referenced in this Code (e.g., gas compressor)
(e) proprietary items (see definition, para. 804.3)
(/) unidentified or used pipe
811.2 Procedures for Qualification
Prescribed procedures for qualifying each of these six
categories are given in the following paragraphs.
811.2.1 Conformance. Items that conform to stan-
dards or specifications referenced in this Code
[para. 811.1(a)) may be used for appropriate applica-
tions, as prescribed and limited by this Code without
further qualification. (See section 814.)
811.2.2 Nonconformance (Important Items). Impor-
tant items of a type for which standards or specifications
are referenced in this Code, such as pipe, valves, and
flanges, but that do not conform to standards or specifi-
cations referenced in this Code [para. 811 .1(b)) shall be
qualified as described in (a) or (b) below.
14
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduction lIlay be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
(11) A material conforming to a written specification
that does not vary substantially from a referenced stan-
dard or specification and that meets the minimum
requirements of this Code with respect to quality of
materials and workmanship may be used. This para-
graph shall not be construed to permit deviations that
would tend to affect weldability or ductility adversely.
If the deviations tend to reduce strength, full allowance
for the reduction shall be provided for in the design.
(b) When petitioning the Section Committee for
approval, the following requirements shall be met. If
pOSSible, the material shall be identified with a compara-
ble material, and it should be stated that the material
will comply with that specification, except as noted.
Complete information as to chemical composition and
physical properties shall be supplied to the Section
Committee, and its approval shall be obtained before
this material is used.
811.2.3 Nonconformance (Unimportant Items). Rel- (14)
atively unimportant items that do not conform to a stan-
dard or specification [para . 811.1(c)) may be used,
provided that
(11) they are tested or investigated and found suitable
for the proposed service
(b) they are used at unit stresses not greater than 50%
of those allowed by this Code for comparable materials
(c) their use is not specifically prohibited by this Code
811.2.4 No Standards or Specifications Referenced.
I tems of a type for which no standards or specifications
are referenced in this Code [para. 811.1(d)) and proprie-
tary items [para. 811.1(e)) may be qualified by the user
provided
(11) the user conducts an investigation and tests (if
needed) that demonstrate that the item of material or
equipment is suitable and safe for the proposed service
(e.g., clad or duplex stainless steel pipe); or
(b) the manufacturer affirms the safety of the item
recommended for that service (e.g., gas compressors and
pressure relief devices)
811.3 Unidentified or Used Pipe
Unidentified or used pipe [para. 811.1(f)) may be used
and is subject to the requirements of section 817.
~
~
 ASME 831.8·2014

812 MATERIALS FOR USE IN LOW-TEMPERATURE 814.1 Pipe Conforming to Referenced Standards and
APPLICATIONS Specifications
Some of the materials to that is qualified under para, 811.1(a) may be used,
referenced for use under this Code may not
814.1.1 Steel Pipe (14)
ties suitable for operation at low Users of
(a) Steel pipe manufactured in accordance with the
this Code are cautioned to consider the effects of low
standards may be used:
and the potential on fracture per-
fOfmance at low API5L
Whenever the minimum is below ASTM
-20°F (-29°C), a fracture control program shall be estab-
lished. The program shall address parent the Seamless Pipe
parent material seam weld (if circumferential ASTM A106/ A 106M Seamless Carbon Steel for
butt welds, attachment welds, and any weld heat- Service
affected zone ASTM A134 Electric-Fusion
Of importance in the fracture control pro- Welded NPS 16
gram is the prevention of brittle fracture initiation that and
can occur at small stress concentrations. As a minimum,
ASTM A135/ A135M Electric-Resistance-Welded
the fracture control shall require impact
Steel
energy testing at or the minimum design temper-
ASTM A139/ A 139M Electric-Fusion (Arc)-Welded
ature, The energy is a function of
Steel (Sizes NPS 4 and
the its and the
Over)
stress, See para, 84],1,2 for addi tiona I
ASTM A333/ A333M Seamless and Welded Steel
tive to fracture control for
for
Provided the manufacturer's fracture
Service
of reference material (material standards and
ASTM A381 Metal-Arc-Welded Steel Pipe
cations referenced in Mandatory Appendix A or
for Use With High-Pressure
Nonmandatory is performed at or below
Transmission ;:,vsrems
the ffUl1lmUm and meets
ASTM A671 Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel
the of the fracture control plan, additional
for Atmospheric and
of the material is not required, TIle
Lower
for circumferential welds shall be
to the fracture control nrr)(;rr,;Hn ASTM A672 Electric- Fusion-Welded Steel
for
at Moderate
ASTM A691 Carbon and Alloy Steel
Electric-Fusion-Welded for
813 MARKING High-Pressure Service at

813.1 ASTM A984 Electric- Resistance-Welded

All bolting. and tubing Steel Line
shall be marked in accordance with the marking sections ASTM AlO05 Longitudinal and Helical
of the standards and to which the items Double
were manufactured or in accordance with the Welded Steel Line Pipe
ments of MSS SP-25, ASTM AI006 Laser Beam Welded Steel Line

813.2 Die Stamping

NOTE:
Die stamping, if used, shall be done with dies (1) The provisions of API5L, 45th edition. unless otherwise
blunt or rounded edges to minimize stress provided for, by. or limited this edition of
concentrations, ASME B31.8,

(b) Cold expanded shall meet the mandatory

814 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS requirements of API 5L.
For a of all referenced material 814.1.2 Ductile Iron Pipe. Ductile iron manu-
see Mandatory A. For a listing of standards factUl'ed in accordance with ANSI A21.52, titled
for other used materials that (1re not refer- Ductile-Iron Centrifugally for Gas, may be
enced, see Nonmandatory C. used,

15
 ASME 631.8-2014

814.1.3 Plastic Pipe and Components 816 TRANSPORTATION OF LINE PIPE (14)
(II) Plastic pipe and components manufactured in
Provisions should be made to protect the
accordance with the following standards may be used:
and 0f
(1) For polyethylene (PE) use during any transportation (highway, rait
of line
ASTM 02513 Polyethylene Gas Pressure
to be by railroad, inland
Tubing, and Fittings
waterway, or by marine transportation shall be loaded
(2) For use and transported in accordance with API RP 5L1 or
API RP 5LW Where it is not to establish that
ASTM D2513 Polyethylene Gas Pressure was loaded and in accordance with
Tubing, and Fittings the above referenced recommended the
ASTM 02517 Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure shall be tested for at least 2 hr to at least
and 1.25 times the maximum allowable
if installed in a Class 1
(b) tubing, fittings, and cements
the maximum allowable
shall be produced in accor-
in a Class 2, 3, or 4 Location.
dance with the quality control program recom-
mended in Annex A3 of that specification_
817 CONDITIONS FOR THE REUSE OF PIPE
814.1.4 Qualification of Plastic Piping Materials
(11) In addition to complying with the provisions of 817.1 Reuse of Steel Pipe
para. 814.1.3, the user shall thoroughly investigate the 817.1.1 Equivalent Service level. Removal of a por-
pipe, or fitting to be used and tion of an steel line and reuse of the in
determine material for the cond i tions at the same or lower
anticipated. The selected material shall be adequately that the fracture
resistant to the liquids and chemical that
may be encountered.
(b) When tubing, or fittings of different rated pressure and the meets the restrictions
material are jOined, a thorough of paras. and (i). of the pipe in the
tion shall be made to determine that the materials are same line or in a line at the same or lower
compatible with each other. See para. 842.2.9 for joining pressure and the same or higher is permit-
ted subject to the same para. 817.1.3 restrictions above
and any derations as Table 841.1.8-1.
814.2 Steel, Cast Iron, and Ductile Iron Piping Removed pipe that is reinstalled in the same location
Components need not be retested. Used pipe installed elsewhere is
I'''''n'',,,~,, for these piping rrll'n"r,n"ni,,, to paras. 817.1.3(i) and (j).
are found in Chapter III. 817.1.2 low Hoop Stress Service level Than
6,000 psi (41 MPa)]. Used steel and unidentified
new steel pipe may be used for low-stress [hoop stress
(14) 815 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS less than 6,000 (41 MPa)] level service where no close
or close bending is to be done, that
for the piping
(a) careful visual examination indicates that it is in
listed in Mandatory ix A and
good condition and free from split seams or other defects
Appendix C, it is not intended to include
that would cause leakage
in this Code complete specifications for Cer-
(b) if the is to be welded and is of unknown
tain details of design and fabrication, however, necessar-
it shall pass weJdability tests
ily refer to such as vibration
prescribed in para. 817.1.3(e)
dampeners, electrical facilities, compressors,
etc. Partial for such equipment items are 817.1.3 Midrange Hoop Stress Service level [Greater
given herein, particularly if they affect the of the Than 6,000 (41 MPa) but less Than 24,000
piping in which they are to be installed. In other (165 MPa)]. Unidentified steel and unidentified
cases where this Code no for the new steel pipe may be qualified use at
item, the intent is that the safety levels above 6,000 psi (41 MPa) or for service
Code shall govern, insofar as are close coiling or close by the
In any case, the safety of equipment installed within the limits outlined below.
shall be to that of other (a) inspection. All pipe shall be cleaned inside and
outSide, if necessary, to permit All

16
 ASME B31.8-2014

shall be visually to determine that it is reason- Table 817.1.3-1 Tensile Testing

ably round and and to discover any defects that ------
lot Number of Tensile Tests, AU Sizes
might impair its strength or
(b) BelJding Properties. For pipe NPS 2 (ON and 10 lengths or less 1 set of tests from each length
a sufficient of pipe shall be bent cold 11 to 100 lengths 1 set of tests for each 5 lengths, but
not less than 10
through 90 around a cylindrical the diame-
Greater than 100 lengths 1 set of tests for each 10 lengths,
ter of which is 12 times the nominal diameter of the pipe,
but not less than 20
without developing cracks at any portion and without
the weld.
than NPS 2 flattening tests
as in Mandatory H shall be made. SlIIface Defects. All shall be examined for
The pipe shall meet the requirements in this test, except gouges, grooves, and dents and shall be qualified in
that the number of tests required to determine flattening accordance with the provisions of para. 841.2.4.
shall be the same as in below to Deterlllination of Yield Strengtl!. When the manu-
ue,ellllille yield
facturer's tensile
(c) De/ermina/ioll of Wall Thickness. Unless the nomi- strength, or is unknown, and no
nal wall thickness is known with certainty, it shall be tests are made, the minimum yield strength
determined the thickness at points shall be taken as not more than 24,000 psi
on one end each piece of If the lot of (165 MPa). the tensile may be
is known to be of uniform size, and nominal established as follows:
measurement shall made on not less than
(1) Perform all tensile tests API
10% of the individual lengths, but not less than
that the number of such tests shall be as shown
10 lengths; thickness of the other may be verified
in Table 817.1.3-L
applying a gage set to the minimum thickness. Fol-
(2) All test shall be selected at random.
lowing such measurement, the nominal wall thickness
(3) If the ratio exceeds 0.85, the pipe
shall be taken as the next commercial wa.11 thickness
shall not be except as provided in para. 817.1.2.
below the average of all the measurements but
(11) S Value. For pipe of unknown the
in no case than 1.14 times the least measured
to be used as 5
thickness for all pipe smaller than NPS 20 (ON
para. 841.1.1, in lieu of the
and no than 1.11 ti mes the least measured thick-
shall be 24,000 (165
ness for all pipe NPS 20 500) and
as follows.
(d) Longiludinal FaciOI'. If the longitudinal
Determine the average value of all tests
joint can be determined with the
for a uniform Jot. TIle value of shall then be taken as
tudinal joint E (Table 841.1
the lesser of the
IV), may be used. E shall be taken
(1) 80% of the average value of the
for pipe l\fPS 4 100) and smaller, or 0.80 for
larger than NPS 4 100). tests
We/dabilily. shall be determined as fol- (2) the minimum value of any test,
lows. A qualifi~d welder make a girth weld in the provided, that in no case shall 5 be taken as
pipe. The weld shall then be tested in accordance with than 52,000 psi (359
"~~~~~.•, of API 1104. The weld shall be (i) Hydrostatic Test. New or used pipe of unknown
made under the most severe conditions lmder which and all used pipe, the of which is
welding will be permitted in the field and using the corrosion or other shall be
same as to be used in the field. The pipe shall retested hydrostatically either length by length in a mill-
be considered weldable if the set forth in test or in the field after installation before being
API 1104 are met. At least one such test weld shall be placed in service. The test pressure used shall establish
made for each 100 of pipe on sizes the maximum allowable pressure, to
NPS 4 (ON On sizes NPS 4 (ON limitations described in para. 841.1.3.
one test will be required for each 400 lengths of (j) Frac/llre Control alld Arrest. Without fracture
If in the weld the of APll104 cannot 841.1.2, unidentified steel
may be established and new or pipe of unknown
carbon and lnanganese shall not be used in the following applications:
in accordance with the (1) where the stress exceeds 40%
Boiler and Pressure Vessel SMYS for NPS 16
Section IX. The number of chemical tests shall be the stress exceeds 72%
same for circumferential weld tests stated than NPS 16 (Class 1 Division 1
above.

17
 ASME 831.8-2014

(3) where the minimum is provisions and specifications of para. 842.1 provided a
below -20 FD
careful indicates the is sound and per-
of tight
817.2 Reuse of Ductile Iron Pipe
817.3 Reuse of Plastic Piping
817.2.1 Equivalent Service level. The removal of a
Used pipe and tubing of known "l-'c:\,.W!I-a,
of an existing line of unknown
and dimensions that have been used in natural
and the reuse of the pipe in the same line or in a line
vice only may be reused, provided that all of the
operating at the same or lower pressure is
are true:
nrrlv,(1pr! careful indicates that
(n) It meets the of ASTM 02513 for new
sound, permits the of tight joints, and an
thermoplastic pipe or tubing, or ASTM 02517 for new
actual net wall thickness equal to or exceeding the
thermosetting
of para. 842.1.1 (d). The shall be leak-
A careful indicates that it is free of
tested in accordance with para. 841.3.4 or 841.3.5.
visible defects.
817.2.2 Known Specifications. Used of known It is installed and tested in accordance with the
specifications may be reused in accordance with the requirements of this Code for new

18
 ASME B31.8-2014

Chapter II
Welding

820 WELDING 821.6 Welding Safety

Prior to welding in or around a structure or area con-
821 GENERAL taining gas a thorough check shall be made to
determine the possible of a combustible gas
821.1 General Requirements mixture. Welding shall only when safe conditions
This addresses the of pipe in are indicated,
both and cast steel and covers butt
and fillet welded in valves, and 821.7 Welding Terms
and fillet weld joints in pipe branches, slip-on Definitions pertaining to welding as used in this Code
socket weld etc., as in conform to the standard definitions established by the
connections to or equipment. When American and contained in AWS A3.0,
valves or equipment are furnished with ends
suitable for directly into a
822 PREPARATION FOR WELDING
and stress procedures must
damage will result from the 822.1 Butt Welds
operation, This does (a) Some end are shown in
the seam in the manufacture Mandatory Appendix l, I-4,
(b) I, 1-5 shows "rc'pnr:<h
end preparations for buttwelding of having either
821.2 Welding Processes unequal thickness or unequal strength, or both,
The may be done process or combina-
822.2 Fillet Welds
tion of processes that produce that meet the proce-
dure qualification requirements of this Code, The welds Minimum dimensions for fillet welds used in the
may be produced by position or roll welding, attachment of slip-on flanges and for socket welded
or a combination of position and roll welding. joints are shown in Mimdatory t Fig. 1-6,
Similar minimum dimensions for welds used
in branch connections are shown in Mand
821.3 Welding Procedure
I, Figs. 1-1 and 1-2.
Prior to welding of any piping or
related equipment this Code, a pro- 822.3 Seal Welds
cedure shall be established and qualified, Each welder shall be done by qualified welders. Seal
or welding operator shall be qualified for the established of threaded is permitted, but the seal
before on any pipe, not be considered as to the
installed in strength of
accordance with this Code,

823 QUALIFICATION OF PROCEDURES AND

821.4 Weld Acceptance WELDERS
The standards of for welds of
823.1 Requirements ror Qualifying Welders on
to
",,,orpm<=: at hoop stress of 20% or more
Piping Operating at Hoop Stresses of
specified minimum yield strength as established in
less Than 20% of the Minimum
APl 1104 shall be used. Viel.d Strength
Welders whose work is limited to operating
821.5 Welding QUalifications
at stress levels of less than the
All done under this Code shall be minimum strength shall be qualified under any of
under a standard referenced in para, 823,1,1 or the references in para, 823.2.1 or in accordance
whichever is with Mandatory Appendix G.

19
 ASME B31.8·2014

823.2 Requirements for Qualifying Procedures and 824 PREHEATING

Welders on Systems Operating at Hoop
824.1 Carbon Steels
Stresses of 20% or More of the Specified
Minimum Yield Strength Carbon steels having a carbon content in excess of
0.32% (ladle or a carbon + Y. Mn)
823.2.1 Qualifying Standards. Welding in excess of 0.65% (ladle analysis) to
and welders performing work for new construction and the indicated the welding
out·of-service pipelines shall be qualified under shall also be for steels having lower
Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code carbon content or carbon equivalents when the
or API 1104. For in-service welding, welding indicates that chemical composition, ambient
and welders shall be qualified under and/or metal material or weld-
API 1104. Procedures qualified under Appendix B for IJlCJUlH.e saUs-

either branch or sleeve welds are suitable for weld depo-

sition repair, provided the is for
the wall thickness to which it is 824.2 Dissimilar Materials
When welding dissimilar materials
823.2.2 Compressor Station Piping. When welders the material
qualified under API 1104 are employed on compressor shall govern.
station piping, their qualification shall have been based
on the destructive mechanical test of 824.3 Suitable Methods
API 1104, Preheating may be accomplished any suitable
method, provided that it is uniform and that the temper-
823.2.3 Variables for the Separate Qualification of
ature does not fall below the minimum dur-
Welders. The references in para. 823.2.1 contain the actual
sections titled "Essential Variables" applicable to welder
qualification. These shall be followed, that for 824.4 Temporary Monitoring
purposes of this all carbon steels that have a car-
The shall be checked by the
bon content not 0.32% heat and
use of temperature-indicating crayons,
not 0.65% by
pyrometers, or other suitable methods to ensure
heat are considered to come under material the is obtained to
grouping P-No. 1. Alloy steels having weldability char- and
acteristics demonstrated to be similar to these carbon
steels shall be preheated, and stress relieved as
nrp"wrlnP'(1 herein for such carbon steel. There may be 825 STRESS RELIEVING
significant differences in the base metal strength en com-
825.1 Carbon Steels
by these P-No, 1 and although it is
not an essential variable to welder qualification, it may Welds in carbon steels having a carbon content in
qualification in accordance excess of 0.32% (ladle analysis) or a carbon equivalent
with para. 823.2.1. (C + Xi Mn) in excess of 0.65% analysis) shall be
stress relieved as in the ASME BPV
Section VIII. Stress relieving may also be advisable for
823.3 Welder Requalification Requirements welds in steel having lower carbon content or carbon
Welder requalification tests shall be required jf there equivalent when adverse conditions cool the weld too
is some a welder's ability or rapidly.
if the welder is not in a process of welding
825.2 Wall Thickness
for 6 months or more. All welders shall be requalified
at least once each year. Welds in all carbon steels shall be stress relieved when
the nominal wall thickness exceeds 1 Xi in. mm).
823.4 Qualification Records 825.3 Different Wall Thicknesses
Records of the tests that establish the of When the welded parts that areof differ-
a welding "'''.'Le'.lUl ent thicknesses but of similar the thickness to
is in use. The company or contrac- be used in applying the rules in paras. 825.1 and 825.2
tor shall, during the construction involved, maintain a shall be
record of the welders qualified, showing the dates and (n) the thicker of the two joined, measured
resu Its of tests. at the weld joint

20
 ASME B31.8·2014

(b) the thickness of the be at least 2 in, (51 mm) than the diameter of
of branch connections, the weld joining the or attachment to the header.
fittings The entire band shall be brought up to the
and held for the time specified.
825.4 Dissimilar Materials
If either material in welds between dissimilar materi- 825.8 Equipment for local Stress Relieving
als stress relieving, the joint shall reguire stress (n) Stress relieving may be "rr,.".,."n
electric resistance, fuel-fired
fuel-fired or other suitable means heating,
825.5 Connections and Attachments provided that a uniform is obtained and
All of connections and attachments shall be maintained during the stress relieving.
stress relieved when the is to be stress (b) The stress shall be checked
relieved by the rules of para. 825.3, with the following by the use of or other suitable
to ensure that the proper stress cycle
(n) fillet and groove welds not over ~ in. (13
size that attach connections not over NPS 2 (DN
size
(b) fillet and groove welds not over %in. (10 mm) 826 WElD INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
groove size that attach supporting members or other 826.1 Visual Inspection
nonpressure attachments
Visual inspection of welds must be conducted
825.6 Stress Relieving Temperature person qualified and
(n) Stress relieving shall be performed at a ~c>"nn.::,""
826.2 Inspection of Welds on Piping Systems
ture of 1,100 o P for carbon steels, and
Intended to Operate at Hoop Stress levels of
(649°C) or ferritic alloy steels. The
less Than 20'% of the Specified Minimum
exact temperature range shall be stated in the
Yield Strength
The quality of welds shall be checked visually on a
sampling and defective welds shall be
stress or removed from the line.

826.3 Inspection and Tests for Quality Control of

Welds on Piping Intended to
a period of time '..... n'f"'!·;,""",; on the basis of at least at Hoop Stress levels of 20% or More of the
1 hr/in. (1 h/25 mm) of wall but in no Specified Minimum Yield Strength
case less than ~ and be allowed to cool slowly (n) The quality of each weld shall be examined by
and uniformly. visual mcnc>,- •• rm
(b) In addition, a certain of the welds shall
825.7 Methods of Stress Relieving be examined through examination, ultra-
(n) Heat the structure as a unit. sonic testing, or other compa-
(b) Heat a section the weld or fable and methods of nondestructive
welds to be stress relieved before attachment to other The method of nondestructive
sections of work.
(c) Heat a of the work by a circum- The following minimum number of field butt welds
ferential containing the weld at the center. The shall be selected on a random basis by the
wid th of the band that is heated to the company from each construction for examination.
ture shall be at least 2 in. mm) than the Each weld so selected shall be examined over its entire
width of the weld reinforcement. Care should be taken circumference or else the length of welds
around the entire cir- shall be examined if the company chooses to
cumference of the temperature shall diminish examine only a of circumference of each. The
gradually the of this band, same mll11mUm shall be examined for dou-
(d) Branches or other welded attachments for which ble ending at railhead or yard:
stress relief is may be locally stress relieved by (1) 10% of welds in Location Class 1.
heating a circumferential band around the pipe on which (2) 15% of welds in Location Class 2.
the branch or attachment is welded with the attachment (3) 40% of welds in Loclltion Class 3.
at the middle of the band, The width of the band shall (4) 75% of welds in Location Class 4.

21
 ASME 831.8·2014

(5) 100% of the welds in compressor stations, and hoop stress levels of 40% or less of the mm!-
at major or navigable river crossings, major highway mum yield strength, then (b) and (c) above
and railroad if practical, but in no are not mandatory, the welds are
case less than 90"/0, All tie-in welds not to a visually and by a qualified
pressure proof test shall be examined. (/) In addition to the nondestructive
(c) All welds that are must either meet the requirements outlined above, the quality of
standards of acceptability of API 1104 or be appropri- be continually controlled by qualified
ately and The results of the
tion shall be used to control the quality of welds, 827 REPAIR OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WElDS
(d) When examination is employed, a IN PIPING INTENDED TO OPERATE AT HOOP
meeting the of API 1104 shall STRESS LEVELS OF 20% OR MORE OF THE
be followed. SPECIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH
(e) When size is less than NPS 6 (DN 150), or Defective welds shall be or removed. If a
when the construction involves such a limited is made, it shall be in accordance with API 1104.
number of welds that nondesh'uctive would performing shall be in accor-
be and the is intended to at dance with para. 823.2.

22
 ASME B31.8-2014

Chapter III
Piping System Components and Fabrication Details

830 PIPING SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND ASME 816.33 Metallic Gas

FABRICATION
830.1 General
(a) The purpose of this
ASME 816.34
standards for piping
(1) specifications for and selection of all items and
ASME 816.38 Valves for Gas
accessories that are a part of the piping system, other
Distribution: Manually
than the pipe itself
NPS 2~ (DN 65) to
(2) acceptable methods of making branch
125 psig
connections
(8,6 Maximum
(3) provisions to care for the effects of temperature
ASME 816.40 Manually
(4) and Valves in Gas Distribution
of and buried
(b) This Chapter does not include
MSS SP-70 Iron Gate Valves, Flanged
(1) pipe materials I) and Tlueaded Ends
(2) welding procedures Chapter 1I) MSS SP-71 Iron Check Valves,
(3) design of pipe IV) and Threaded Ends
(4) installation and of piping systems MSS SP-78 Valves, Flanged
IV) Ends
special conditions for offshore application
(b) Valves having shell cover, and/or
VIII)
components made of cast ductile iron in
(6) special conditions for sour gas application
with ASTM A395 and dimensions
to ASME 816.1, ASME 816.33, ASME 816.34,
ASME 816.38, ASME or API6D/]SO 14313 may
831 PIPING SYSTEM COMPONENTS be used at pressures not 80% of the pressure
All components of including valves, for comparable steel valves at their listed temper-
flanges, fittings, assemblies, etc., shall ature, provided the pressure does not exceed 1,000 psig
be designed in accordance with the applicable (6900 kPa), and weld is not on any ductile
ments of this section and engineering prac- iron component in the of the valve shells or
tices to withstand opera pressures and other their as part of the
loadings. (c) Valves having shell
shall be selected that can withstand the shall not be used in gas
and test conditions of the in SOl' sta tions.
component is to be used without failure or 831.1.2 Threaded Valves. Threaded valves shall be
and without of their spr'VI('pr>n. threaded according to ASME B1.20.1, API 5L, or API6A.
831.1 Valves and Devices 831.1.3 Pressure·Redudng Devices. Pressure-
(14) 831.1.1 Valves Without Threads. Valves shall con- devices shall conform to the requirements of
form to standards and referenced in this this Code for valves in service conditions.
Code and shall be only in accordance with the 831.2 Flanges
service recommendations of the manufacturer. 831.2.1 Flange Types and (14)
(a) Valves manufactured in accordance with the fol- (a) The dimensions and
lowing standards may be used: shall conform to one of the following standards:
API 6A for Wellhead and ASME 816.1 Iron Flanges
Christmas Tree
API 6D/ISO 14313 for Pipeline Valves

23
 ASME B31.8-2014

ASME B16.5 Pipe and (l,6-mm) raised the bolting shall be of car-
NPS !0 Through bon steel to ASTM A307 Grade B, without
NPS 24 Metric/Inch heat treatment other than stress relief,
Standard (j) Class 150 steel may be bolted to Class 125
ASME B16.24 Cast Copper Alloy cast iron When such construction is the
Flanges and (1.6-mm) raised face on the steel shaJl be
Classes 150, removed, When bolting such
900, 1500, and 2500 flat to the inner
ASME B16.42 Ductile Iron the bolting shall be of carbon steel equivalent to
and Flanged ASTM A307 Grade B, without heat treatment other than
Classes 150 and 300 stress relief. When bolting such together
ASME B16.47 Diameter Steel a full·face the bolting may be alloy
NPS 26 Through (ASTM AI93),
NPS 60 (k) Class 300 steel flanges may be bolted to Class 250
Standard cast iron Where such construction is the
ASME B31.8, Mandatory bol ting shall of carbon equivalent to ASTM A307
Appendix I, Table 1·1 Grade B, without heat treatment other than stress relief.
MSS SP·44 Steel Pipeline Flanges Good indicates that the raised face on the steel
flange be but also in this case, bolting
with or shall be of carbon steel equivalent to ASTM A307
in sizes and the pressure classes Grade B.
the standards listed above, to the (J) Forged steel neck flanges having an out·
and gasketing side diameter and drilling the same as that of
and paras. 831.2,2 and 831.2.3, AS ME BI6.1, but with modified
(b) Threaded companion that comply with the
B16 group of ASME standards are permitted in sizes
and pressure classes covered these standards,
(c) are permitted in sizes and pressure
classes established in ASME BI6.5. provided
(d) welding are in sizes and (1) the minimum flange T, is not less than
classes established in ASME BI6.5. that in Mandatory I for
of rectangular section may be substituted for
hubbed slip-on flanges, provided the thickness is (2) flanges are used with nonmetallic full-face gas-
increased as required to produce strength as kets to the of the flange
determined by calculations made in accordance with (3) the joint has been proven by test to be
Section VIII of the BPV Code, suitable for the
(e) Welding neck are permitted in sizes and (JII) Flanges made of ductile iron shall conform to the
pressure c1<lsses established in ASME BI6,5, of ASME Bl6,42, Bolting for
ASME B16,47, and MSS SP-44. The bore of the ductile iron joints shall be the same as those for
should to the inside di<lmeter of the pipe carbon and low alloy steel flanges as in
used, For welding end treatment, see para, 831,2,2,
Mandatory Appendix I, 1-5, 831.2.2 Bolting
Cast iron, ductile iron, <lnd steel shall have (II) For all the bolts or stud bolts used
contact faces finished in <lccordance with MSS SP·6, shall extend completely through the nuts,
(g) Nonferrous shall h<lve contact faces fin- (b) For all joints other than those described in
ished in accordance with ASME B16,24, 831,21(h), 0),0), and (k), the bolting shall be made
(b) Class 25 and 125 cast iron or threaded alloy steel to ASTM A193, ASTM A320,
flanges may be used with a full· face or ASTM A354, or of heat treated carbon steel conform-
or with a flat gasket to the irU1er ing to ASTM A449, Bolting, for ASME BI6.5,
of the bolt holes, When gasket, Class 150 and 300 between -200P
bolting may be of alloy steel A193), When and 400 0 P (-29°C and be made of
a the bolting shall be of carbon ASTM A307 Grade B materiaL
lent to ASTM A307 Grade B, without heat treatment (c) bol material
other than stress relief. ASTM A193 or ASTM A354 shall be used for
(i) When two Class 250 or flanges if such bol is made VB-in.
threaded companion cast iron having undersized,

24
 ASME B31.8·2014

(d) The materials used for nuts shall conform to (d) Types
ASTM A194 and ASTM A307. ASTM A307 nuts may be (1) The use of metal or
used with ASTM A307 bolting. plain or is not pressure
(e) All carbon and bolts, stud bolts, and except as noted in (b)(2), provided that the
their nuts shall be threaded in accordance with the fol- rial is suitable for the service
lowing thread series and dimension classes as required of gaskets are recommended for use with the small male
by ASME B1.1. and female or the sma II
(1) Carbon Steel. All carbon-steel bolts and stud They may also be used with steel flanges with lapped,
bolts shall have coarse threads having Class 2A dimen- male and female, large or
and their nuts shaH have Class 2B dimensions. raised-face
(2) Steel. All alloy-steel bolts and stud bolts (2) Full-face should be used with all bronze
of I-in. (25-mm) and smaller nominal diameter shall be copper alloy) and with Class 25 and Class 125
of the coarse-thread series; nominal diameters cast iron Flat ring with an outside diam-
1 Va in. (29 mm) and shall be of the 8-thread series eter to the inside of the bolt holes may be used
(8 threads per 25.4 mm). Bolts and stud bolts shall have with cast iron flanges, with raised-face steel flanges,
a Class 2A dimension; their nuts shall have Class 2B or with lapped steel provided that the bolting
dimension. of ASME B16.5, para. 5.3.5 are followed.
Bolts shall have ASME Standards regular (3) For steel to secure higher unit compres-
heads or heavy hexagonal heads and shall sion on the metallic of a width less than
ASME Standards hexagonal nuts conforming to the full male face of the may be used with raised
the dimensions of ASME B18.2.1 and ASME B18.2.2. lapped, or large male female The wid th
Nuts cut from bar stock in such a manner that the of the gasket for small male and female or for
and-groove shall be to the width of the male
axis will be parallel to the direction of rolling of the bar
face or
may be used in all sizes for in which one or both
(4) Rings for ring joints shall be of dimensions
are cast iron and for with steel
where the pressure does not exceed 250 psig (1 720 established in ASME B16.20. The material for these
Such nuts shall not be used for in which both shall be suitable for the service conditions encountered
flanges are steel and the pressure exceeds and shall be softer than the flanges.
250 (1720 kPa), that for nu sizes (5) Gnskets.
Yz in. mm) and lating gaskets, may be used, provided
for the pressures, gas
and other conditions to which they may be
831.2.3 Gaskets
(n) Geneml 831.3 Fittings Other Than Valves and
(1) Gasket materials shall be of maintaining
831.3.1 Standard Fittings
their once installed eXj:,osE!d to the
(n) The minimum metal thickness of flanged or
gases and fluids contained in the
threaded shall not be less than for the
(2) ASME B16.20 and ASME B16.21 are standards
pressures and icable
that provide guidance for applicable and
ASME standards or
materials.
(b) Steel shall comply with either
(b) Pressure
ASME B16.9 or MSS SP-75 shall have pressure and
(1) Gaskets shall be made of materials suitable for
temperature ratings based on stresses for pipe of the
the and test pressures of the '"'V'""-tTI<: in which same or material. For of
are installed. the actual shall at
(2) Metallic or spirally least equal the computed bursting strength of pipe of the
wound metal used with material and wall thickness. Mill hydrostatic
ASME Class 150 or lighter shall steel buttweJding is not
not be used for flanges but all such fittings shall be of with-
ASTM A307 Grade B bolts or are used. a field test pressure equal to the test pressure
(c) established by the manufacturer, without failure or leak-
(1) Gasket materials shall be capable of maintaining age, and without of their
their desired mechanical and chemical for the (e) Factory-made wrought steel induc-
full range of to which they will be exposed. tion bends or hot bends shall comply with ASME B16.49.
(2) Consideration should be given to the use of fire- (d) SteeJ fittings shall comply with
safe materials to withstand emergency conditions. ASME B16.11.

25
 ASME 831.8·2014

(e) Ductile iron fittings shall comply with the (d) Prefabricated units, other than regularly manufac-
i"prnpnt" of ASME 816.42 or ANSI A21.14. tured buttwelding that and
shall comply with tudinal seams as contrasted with that has been
and tested under one the
Reinforced plastic fi ttings shall listed in this Code, shall be constructed, and
comply with ASTM D2517. tested under of the BPV Code. BPV Code
are not intended to apply to such
assemblies as split or collars or to other field
from those of welded details.
ASME and (e) under this sec-
para 831.3.6 shall tion of the Code shall withstand a pressure
test wi thout failure, distress, or distortion other
831.3.3 Branch Connections
than elastic distortion a t a pressure equal to the test
Welded branch connections on steel must
of the system in which it is installed, either
requirements of paras. 831.4 831.5.
installation or during the system test. When such
in cast iron for branch connec-
units are to be installed in they shall be
tions are without to a size not
pressure tested before installation, if otherwise,
more than 25% of the nominal diameter of the
they shall withstand a leak test at the pressure
of the line.
tions create abnormal or unusual external
cast iron unreinforced threaded 831.3.6 Pressure
connections are tted only on cast iron pipe Pressure-Containing Components.
NPS 8 (DN 200) in provided that components that are not covered the standards listed
the size is no than 25% of the nominal in Mandatory A and for which equa-
diameter. tions or herein may used
(c) in cast iron pipe may be where design of similarly proportioned, and
connections when careful sized components has been proven satisfactory suc-
inspection cessful performance under service condi-
tion in the main surrounding the opening. tions. (Interpolation may be made between
(d) Threaded in ductile iron are permitted with small differences in size or
without reinforcement to a size not more than 25% of proportion.) In the absence of such service
the nominal diameter of the pipe, that the pressure shall be based on an consist-
1 (DN are in NPS 4 (DN 100) ent with the philosophy embodied in this
a nominal waH thickness of not less than Code and substantiated at least one of the following:
mm).
(a) proof tests, as described in UG-101 of Section VIII,
(e) Mechanical may be used for making hot
Division 1 of the BPV Code
on and mains,
(b) stress as described in
for the conditions
Annex 5.F of Section VIII, Division 2 of the BPV Code
are suitable for that purpose.
(c) engineering calculations
831.3.4 Openings for Gas Control Equipment in Cast
Iron Pipe. Threaded used for control equip- 831.3.7 Closures
ment in cast iron pipe (Le., a section of main)
are permitted without reinforcement to a size not more ~a ~rn.
than 25% of the nominal diameter of the except used for access to the interior of a piping sys-
that 1 (DN 32) are permitted in NPS 4 (DN 100) tem. It is not the intent of this Code to the
Taps than those permitted above shall use ofa
a reinforcing sleeve. a quick closure.
831.3.5 Special Components Fabricated by Welding closures shall have pressure and tem-
(a) This section covers piping components ratings to or in excess of the
other than assemblies consisting and fittings requirements of the to which they are
joined by circumferential welds. attached.
(b) All shall be r'>,,;,,'tr,,'IT\t:>rl Quick closures shall be with
locking devices in compliance with Section VIII,
Division I, UG-35.2 of the BPV Code.
(c) Branch connections shall meet the design Weld end preparation shall be in accordance with
ments of paras. 831.4, 831.5, and 831.6. I, H.

26
 ASME B31.8·2014

(b) Closure Closure fittings commonly (c) The required cross-sectional area, A R, is defined
referred to as "weld shall be designed and manu- as the of d times t:
factured in accordance with ASME B16.9 or MSS SP-7S.
para.
(c) Closure Heads. Closure heads such as
where
dal [other than in spherical, or conical heads are
d of the of the finished
allowed for use under this Code. Such items may be in header wall measured parallel to axis
in accordance with Section VIII, Division 1 of the run or the inside diameter of the branch
of the BPV Code. For closure heads not to connection
Section VIII, Division 1 of the BPV Code, the maximum the nominal header wall thickness by
allowable stresses for materials used in these closure para, 841.1.1 for the d pressure and
heads shall be established under the of sec-
tion 841 and shall not exceed a hoop stress level of 60%
SMYS, When the wall thickness includes an allowance
If welds are used in the fabrication of these heads, for corrosion or erosion, all dimensions used shall result
they shall be in accordance with the provisions after the corrosion or erosion has taken
of Section VIII, Division 1 of the BPV Code, (d) The area available for reinforcement shall be the
Closure heads shall have pressure and sum of
to or in excess of the (1) the cross-sectional area that results from any
system to which they are attached, excess thickness available in the header thickness over
(d) Fabricated CloSl/res. bull the minimum for the header as defined in (c)
swages are prohibited on '",,;rp,m<: and that lies the reinforcement area as defined
at hoop stress levels of 20% or more of the =>,,':LllltU in (e)
minimum yield of the material. Fish tails (2) the cross-sectional area that results from any
and flat closures are permitted on NPS 3 (DN excess thickness available in the branch wall thickness
and smaller operating at less than 100 psi kPa), over the minimum thickness for the branch
Fish tails on pipe than NPS 3 are prohib- and that lies within the reinforcement area as defined
ited, Flat closures on than NPS 3 shall be in (e)
according to Section VllI, Division 1 of the (3) the cross-sectional area of all added reinforcing
BPV Code. [See (c).] metal that lies within the reinforcement area, as defined
(e) Boiled Blind Flange Conllections. Bolted blind in (e), including that of solid weld metal that is conven-
connections shall conform to para. 831.2. tionally attached to the header and/or branch
(e) The area of shown in Mandatory
Appendix F, F-6, is defined as a rectangle whose
831.4 Reinforcement of Welded Branch Connections length shall extend a d, on each side of the
transverse centerline of the finished opening and whose
831.4.1 General Requirements. All welded branch
width shall extend a distance of times the header
connections shall meet the following requirements:
wall thickness on each side of the surface of the header
(a) When branch connections are made to in the wall. In no case, shall it extend more than
form of a connection or in a header or manifold times the thickness of the branch wall from the out-
as a series of connections, the design must be side surface of the header or of the reinforcement if any.
to control the stress levels in the pipe within safe limits, (I) The material of any added reinforcement shall
The construction shall accommodate the stresses in the have an allowable working stress at least to that of
pipe wall due to the in the or the header wall, that material of lower allowable
header, the shear stresses by the pressure act- stress may be used if the area is increased in direct ratio
on the area of the and any external of the allowable stress for header and reinforcement
loadings due to thermal movement, weight, vibration. material,
etc. The following provide design rules for (g) The material used for or saddle reinforcement
the usual combinations of the above for may be of specifications differing from those of the pipe,
excessive external loads. proVided the cross-sectional area is made in direct pro-
(b) The reinforcement in the crotch section portion to the relative of the pipe and reinforce-
of a welded branch connection shall be determined by ment materials at the and
the rule that the metal area available for reinforcement provided it has qualities to those
shall be to or than the required area as of the pipe. No credit shall be taken for the additional
defined in this as well as in Mandatory "h',"n()"~h of material a higher than that
Appendix F, F-6. of the to be

27
Society of Mechanical
 ASME 831.8-2014

(11) When or saddles cover the weld between Table 831.4.2·1 Reinforcement of Welded Branch
branch and a vent hole shall be provided in the Connections. Special Requirements
ring or saddle to reveal in the weld between Ratio of Nominal Branch
branch and header and to during weld- Diameter to Nominal Header
Ratio of Design
and heat treating operations. Vent should be Diameter
Hoop Stress to
during service to crevice corrosion Minimum Specified More Than
between pipe and member, but no plugging Yield Strength in 25% Through More Than
material that would be of pressure the Header 25% or less 50% 50%
within the crevice should be used.
(i) The use of ribs or shall not be considered as 20% or less (g), Gl (g), 0) (h), (D
More than 20% (d), (i), (j) 0), (j) (h). (I), (j)
contributing to reinforcement of the branch connection. through 50%
This does not prohibit the use of ribs or gussets for More than 50% (el, (d), (e). Ol (b), (el. OJ (a). (el, (0, 0)
purposes other than such as
OJ The branch shall be attached by a weld for the full GENERAL NOTE: The letters in the table correspond to the subpara·
thickness of the branch or header wall plus a fillet weld, graphs of para, 831.4.2.
WI! as shown in MandatOlY Appendix I, Figs. Hand
1-2. The use of concave fillet welds is to further
member and header do not exceed the thickness of the
minimize corner stress concentration. or saddle
header.
reinforcement shall be attached as shown by 1-2.
(d) Reinforcement calculations are not
When a full fillet is not it is recommended that
2 in, (51 mm) and smaller in
the edge of the reinforcement be relieved or chamfered at
ever, care should be taken to provide suitable
approXimately 45 to merge with the of the fillet.
vibrations and other external forces to which
(k) Reinforcement rings and saddles shall be accu-
small are frequently
fitted to the to which they are attached.
(e) All welds joining the header,
Mandatory Appendix I, 1-2 and 1-3 illustrate some
member shall be to those shown in
forms of reinforcement.
Mandatory Appendix I, H, 1-2, and 1-3,
(/) Branch connections attached at an angle less than
The inside of the finished opening shall,
85 to the run become weaker as the
be rounded to a ~ in. mm)
angle decreases, Any such must be given individ-
radius. If member is thicker than the
ual study, and sufficient reinforcement must be provided
header and is welded to the the ends shall be
to for the inherent weakness of such con-
down to the header and continuous
ribs to support the flat
welds shall be made, In the case of hot or
surfaces is and may be
plugging fittings, use special requirement (j),
calculations, The is
Reinforcement of
cautioned that stress concentrations near the ends of
however, reinforcement may be
partial may defeat their reinforc-
cases involving pressures over 100 psig (690 kPa), thin
ing value,
wall pipe, or severe external loads.
(14) 831.4.2 Special Requirements. In addition to the (11) If a reinforcement member is and the
requirements of 831.4.1, branch connections must branch diameter is such that a localized type of reinforce-
meet the of the following para- ment member would extend around more than half the
graphs as given in Table 831.4,2-1: circumference of the then a encircle-
(II) Smoothly contoured wrought steel tees of proven of reinforcement member shall be used,
are preferred, When tees cannot be used, the of the design hoop stress, or a smoothly con-
member shall extend around the circumfer- toured wrought steel tee of proven may be used.
ence of the header, Pads, or other (i) The reinforcement may be of any the
of localized reinforcement are prohibited, "",.,.Hmt<: of para. 831.4.1.
(b) Smoothly contoured tees of are pre- (j) For hot tap or plugging
ferred, When tees are not member rations Fig. 1-3.1), where the
should be of the encirclement type, but may and thicker than the
be of the type, saddle or a welding outlet tion resu Its in additional sllch as that from hot
fitting type. tapping and equipment, the following require-
(c) The reinforcement member may be of the complete ments apply:
encirclement pad saddle or welding (1) The minimum dimension of the fillet weld
outlet fitting The of reinforcement members at the ends of the sleeve shall be 1.0t the gap
should be to the header thickness. It is recom- observed or measured between the inside of the fitting
of fillet welds joining the and the outside of the pipe on installation, where t is

28
 ASM£ 831.8-2014

the actual wall thickness of the pipe, This will result in surface of the run that is to or than the
a minimum effective weld throat of 0,71, radius of curvature of the external contoured of
(2) The maximum dimension of the end fillet the outlet. Appendix F, F-l through
welds shall be 1.41 plus the gap observed or measured F-4 and
between the inside of the fitting and the outside of the (b) These rules do not to any nozzles or branch
on installation, in an effective weld throat connections in which additional nonintegral material is
not to exceed 1.0t. applied in the form of rings, pads, or saddles.
(3) If necessary, the shall be bev- These rules apply only to cases where the axis of
eled, or chamfered at their ends to a minimum approxi- the outlet intersects and is perpendicular to the axis of
mate of 45 deg (with to the end face), the run,
should (d) F-l through F-4 define the
least a nominal the dimensions and limiting conditions.
but the face dimension should not exceed 1.4 times the (e) Reqllired Aren, The area is defined as
calculated thickness to meet the maximum
hoop stress of the sleeve, The leg of the fillet
A = KlrD n
deposited on the end face need not be carried out fully
to the shoulder of the face if so would result in
where
an oversized fillet weld,
K 1.00 when diD> 0,60
(4) Because each installation may be unique, the
or chamfer shall be the responsibility of the user == diD when diD> 0,15 and not
0,60
or otherwise by between user and
manufacturer. 0.70 when dID s 0.15

831.5 Reinforcement of Multiple Openings The must meet the criterion that the reinforce-
When two or more branches are spaced ment area defined in (f) below is not less than the
at less than two times their average diameter (so that required area,
their effective areas of reinforcement the /?eillforcelllellt Aren, The reinforcement area shall
of shall be reinforced in wi be the sum of areas + + A3 as defined below,
para, 831.4. The reinforcing metal shall be added as a (1) Area is the area lying within the reinforce-
combined the of which shall ment zone resulting from any excess thickness available
the combined strengths of the reinforcements that in the run wall, Le"
would be for the In no case
shall any of a cross section be considered to
apply to more than one or be evaluated more
than once in a combined area, (2) Area is the area lying within the reinforce-
(b) When more than two openings are to be ment zone resulting from any excess thickness available
with a combined the minimum in the branch i.e"
between centers of any two of these
shall preferably be at least 1 ~ times their average diame-
tel~ and the area of reinforcement between them shall
be at least to 50% of the total for these
is the area lying within the reinforce-
two on the cross section being considered.
ment zone from excess thickness available in
(e) When the distance between centers of two
the extruded outlet j.e"
is less than 1 Ys times their average
under (b), no credit for reinforcement shall
for any of the metal between these two

(d) Any number of closely adjacent

in any may be reinforced as if group
were treated as one assumed of a diameter
all such
831.6 Extruded Outlets
(n) The rules in this paragraph to steel extruded
outlets in which the reinforcement integral.
An extruded outlet is defined as an outlet in which
the extruded at the outlet has a height above the

29
© 2014 by the American Societ)' of Mechanical
be made of this material without wril1en cOllsent
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table 832.2·1 Thermal Expansion or Contraction exists as to the adequate flexibility of the See
of Piping Materials para. 833.7 for further guidance.
Carbon and Low Alloy (b) shall be provided by the use of
High Tensile Steel and Wrought Iron loops, or offsets, or shall be made to absorb
Approximate Expansion or
thermal by
Temperature, Contraction, In./IOO H (mm/m) plings of the
of rOC) Above or Below 32°F (O°C) bellows are used, anchors or
rigidity shall be installed
-125 (-87) 1.2 (1.0)
to for end forces due to fluid pressure and other
-100 (-74) 1.0 (0.8)
-75 (-60) 0.8 (0.7)
causes.
-50 (-45) 0.6 (0.5) (c) In calculating the flexibility of a
the system shall be treated as a whole. The significance
0(-18) 0.2 (0.2)
32 (0) 0.0 (0.0)
of all of the line and all restraints, such as rigid
60 (16) 0.2 (0.2) or shall be considered.
100 (38) 0.5 (OA) (d) Calculations shall take into account stress intensi-
fication factors found to exist in components other than
125(52) 0.7 (0.6)
150 (66) 0.9 (0.8)
plain Credit may be taken for the extra
175 (79) 1.1 (0.9) flexibility The flexibility fClctors and
200 (93) 1.3 (1.1) stress intensification shown in Table E-l may
be used.
225 (107) 1.5 (1.3)
250 (121) 1.7 (1.4) (e) and fittings for these calcula-
300 (149) 2.2 (1.8) tions on nominal dimensions, and the
factor E shall be taken as 1.00.
350 (177) 2.6 (2.2)
400 (204) 3.0 (2.5)
The total range in temperature from minimum
450 (232) 3.5 (2.9) to the maximum design tempera-
ture shall considered in all expansion stress calcula-
whether piping is or not. Should
or shutdown temperatures be out-
832 EXPANSION AND FLEXIBILITY
range, the maximum
832.1 Application <JV"""u,,, temperature shaH be considered. In addi-
Section 832 is applicable to meeting the defini- lion to the expansion the linear and
tion of unrestrained in para. movements of the to which it is
attached shall be considered.
832.2 Amount of Expansion or Contraction Flexibility calculations shall be based on the mod-
ulus of elasticity to the lowest tprnnPf'"
The thermal expansion and contraction of the more
common carbon and low alloy steels may be calculated ture of the
using 6.5 x 10-6 in./in.;oF (1.17 x as (11) In order to and
the coefficient of thermal or contraction, runs of pipe may be Cold-
contraction to be considered is the difference between may be taken into account in the calculations of
the maximum or minimum and provided an effective method of obtaining
the average installation is and used.
thermal expansion coefficients
832.4 Reactions
rials, refer to authoritative source such as publicCl-
tions of the National institute of StandClrds Clnd (a) Reaction forces and moments to be used in the
Technology. A table containing approximate amounts of of restraints and supports for a piping system,
or contraction per unit length for selected and in eVClluating the effects of piping on
is provided in Table 832.2-1. connected shall consider the range of
thermal conditions plus weight and exter-
832.3 Flexibility Requirements nal loads. Cold-spring may be useful for mClintaining
(a) Piping shall be designed to have sufficient reactions within limits.
flexibility to prevent thermal expansion or contraction (b) The reactions for thermal shall be
from excessive stresses in the material, calculated using the elastic modulus to
excessive or unusual loads at or undesir- the lowest of an operational
able forces or moments at points of connection to equip- (c) Consideration shall be to the load-carrying
ment or at guide points. Formal of attached and
calculations shall be where reClsonable doubt and the

30
 ASME 831.8·2014

Table 832.5-1 Modulus of Elasticity for 833.2 Calculation of Longitudinal Stress

Carbon and low Alloy Steel Components
Temperature, Modulus of Elasticity. (II) The longitudinal stress due to internal pressure in
of (OC) psi x 106 (GPa) restrained is
-100 (-73) 30.2 (208)
70 (21) 29.5 (203)
200 (93) 28.8 (198) where is the hoop stress,
300 (149) 28.3 (195)
(b) The stress due to internal pressure in
400 (204) 27.7 (191)
500 (260) 27.3 (188) unrestrained pipeline is

51' = 0.55 H

where SH is the hoop stress, (MPa)

(e) The stress due to thermal

832.5 Modulus of
The modulus of for carbon and low
steel at various temperatures is in Table 832.5-1. where
Values between listed may be E the elastic (MPa), at the ambient

at the time of installation,

tie-in, or burial, OF (0C)
the warmest or coldest pipe operating
833 DESIGN FOR LONGITUDINAL STRESS OF (OC)
IT the coefficient of thermal
833.1 Restraint
lIoF (1rC)
(II) The restraint condition is a factor in the structural
behavior of the The of restraint may can operate either warmer or colder
be affected construction, temperature, both conditions for
terrain. Section 833 is appll- may need to be examined.
within the scope of ASME B31.8. (d) The nominal stress in or
For purposes of this Code two axial bends due to or other external
restraint conditions, "restrained" "unrestrained." loads is
Guidance in categorizing the restraint condition is given
MIZ
below.
in which soil or prevent axial dis- where
or flexure at bends is "restrained. Restrained M the bending moment across the cross sec-
may include the following: tion, lb-in. (N·m)
(1) sections of buried piping Z :::: the section in 3 (cm3 )
(2) bends and piping buried in stiff or con-
solidate soil stress in and compo-
nents due to or other external loads is
(3) sections of nd piping on rigid

(c) Piping that is freed to displace or flex at

bends is "unrestrained" Unrestrained piping may where MR is the resultant intensified moment across the
include the following: fitting or component. The resultant moment shall be
(1) nd red to caleu la ted as
accommodate thermal or anchor movements
+ (O.75ir +
through flexibility
bends and buried in soft or where
unconsolidated soil i; in-plane stress intensification factor from
(3) an unbackfilled section of otherwise buried Mandatory Appendix E
pipeline that is sufficiently flexible to displace laterally io out-of-plane stress intensification factor from
or that contains a bend Mandatory E
(4) to an end cap pressure force in-plane

31
 ASME B31.8·2014

bending moment, lb-in. (N·m)

moment, Ib-in. (N·m) swelling, or
(b) The maximum permitted strain is limited to 2%.
The product 0.75i ~ 1.0
(/) The stress due to axial loading other than thermal 833.6 Summation of longitudinal Stresses in
expansion and pressure is Unrestrained Pipe
Sx = RIA (a) The net longitudinal stress in unrestrained is
where
A metal cross-sectional area, in 2 (rrun 2)
R external force axial component, Ib (N) (b) The maximum permitted longitudinal stress in
833.3 Summation of longitudinal Stress in unrestrained pipe is $; where S is the
Restrained Pipe minimum yield psi (MPa), per para. 841.1.1 (a),
and T is the derating factor per
(II) The net stresses in restrained pipe are para. 841.1.8.

833.7 Flexibility Analysis for Unrestrained Piping

Note that values.
(a) There is no need for formal flexibility for
an unrestrained that
where 5 is the
(1) duplicates or without
(MPa), per para. and T is the
a with a successful record
factor per para. 841.1.8.
(2) can be readily judged by
Residual stresses from construction are often pres-
for bending in buried pipelines where with previously analyzed systems
settlement occurs. These stresses (3) is of uniform size, has no more than two points
are often to evaluate but can be disre- of fixation and no intermediate restraints, and falls
garded in most cases. It is the engineer's within the limitations of the following rical
to determine whether such stresses should be evaluated.

(14) 833.4 Combined Stress for Restrained Pipe ~$K

(II) The combined biaxial stress state of the (L
in the operating mode is evaluated using the
in either (1) or (2) below. where
(1) max. or D nominal outside diameter of pipe, in. (mm)
K 0.03, for u.s. Customary units (208, for 51 units)
(2) SH + si] 1/2
listed in the equation above
The maximum value for the combined biax-
L developed length of between anchors,
ial stress is kST S is the minimum yield
strength, (MPa), per para. 841. 1.1 (a), T is the
ft (m)
ture derating factor per para. 841.1.8, and k is U straight line separation between anchors, ft (m)
in and (c) below. Y resultant of total strains, in. (mm),
(b) For loads of long duration, the value of k shall not to be absorbed by the system
exceed 0.90.
NOTE: No general can be offered that this empirical equa-
(e) For occasional nonperiodic loads of short dun"-
tion always yields conservative results. It is not applicable to sys-
tion, the value of k shall not exceed 1.0. tems lIsed in severe conditions. It should used with
(d) SL in (a) above is calculated both the caution in configurations such as unequal leg U·bends
tensile and values of L/U 25; or "saw·tooth" 111115; or where i ? 5 due
(e) Stresses induced by loads that do not occur simul· to thin-walled design; or where displacements not in the direction
need not be considered to be additive. connecting ilnchor points constitute il part of the total dis-
placement. TIlere is 110 assurance that terminal reactions will be
(f) The biaxial stress evaluation described above acceptably low even if i\ piping system falls within the limitations
applies only to sections of of (a)(3).

833.5 for Stress Greater Than Yield (b) Any piping

(II)The limits in paras. 833.3 and 833.4 may be criteria in (a) should a flexibility stress analysis
exceeded where due consideration is given to the ductil- by a simplified, approximate, or method
ity and strain of seam weld, girth and as deemed

32
 ASME B31.8-2014

833.8 Flexibility Stresses and Stresses Due to (b) The maximum allowable sum of circumferential
Periodic or Cyclic Fatigue Loading stress due to internal pressure and circumferential
(a) The stress range in unrestrained piping due to
through-wall bending stress caused by surface vehicle
thermal and periodic, vibrational, or loads or other local loads is O.9ST, where 5 is
"'-tlmtl.nt<:: or loads shall be as minimum per para, 841.1
and T is the dera factor per
= MdZ para. 841.1.8.
Local stresses in or (b) caused or
where ME is the resultant intensified moment range from loads may further limitations in con-
one stress state to another. The resultant intensified of fatigue.
moment shall be calculated as
833.10 Buckling and Lateral Instability
+ + , Ib-in, (N'm)
1n order to buckling in the form of
(b) The stress range $ where of the wallar lateral the maximum
allowable net stress is 3-3 of the critical buck-
stress a suitable criterion.

834 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE FOR EXPOSED

N equivalent number of cycles during the PIPING
service life of the 834.1 General
Sc at the minimum
Piping and equipment shall be supported in a substan-
temperature
tial and workmanlike manner, so as to prevent or reduce
0.33 at the maximum installed or operating
excessive and shall be anchored sufficiently
to undue strains on connected equipment.
5L longitudinal stress calculated according to
para. 833.6(a), 834.2 Provision for Expansion
5" minimum ultimate tensile strength, hangers, and onchors should be so installed
psi (MPa) as not to interfere with the free and contrac-
T derating factor per para, 841.1.8 tion of the piping between Sui table
(c) When the computed stress range varies, is sway bracing, etc., shall be provided where
defined as the stress range. The value necessary.
of N in such cases can be calculated as 834.3 Materials, Design, and Installation
lor i I , 2, '" 1/ and anchors shall

where
NE number of cycles of maximum computed stress
range,
number of associated with stress
range, 5,
/" 1
Sj stress range smaller than 834.4 Forces on Pipe Joints (14)
(n) All pipe shall be able to sustain the
maximum end Ib (N), due to the internal pressure,
833.9 Local Stresses i,e., the design pressure, psig (kPa), times the internal
«(I) High local stresses are area of the pipe, in.2 (mm 2), as well as any additional
tural discontinuities and sites local forces due to or contraction or
they may exceed the material to the weight of and contents.
such stresses may often be disregarded because (b) If compression or sleeve-type couplings are used
are localized in influence and may be or shall be made to sustain
relieved local deformation. include stresses noted in (a) above. If such
in branch connections caused pressure or external sion is not made in the manufacture of the
or stresses at structural discontinuities. This Code suitable bracing or shall be provided, but
does not address the maximum allowable value must not with the normal ntl,·tnr'I'n"
for local stresses, It is the to nor with its proper maintenance. Attach-
ments must meet the of para. 834.5.

33
 ASME 831.8-2014

834.5 Attachment of Supports or Anchors thrust to sustain the

(II) If the is at a hoop stress nal pullout force. If provision is not made in the
of less than 50% of the minimum yield manufacture of the joints, suitable bracing or
structural supports or anchors may be welded directly shall be provided.
to the Proportioning and welding strength
ments such attachments shall conform to standard 835.5 Supports for Buried Piping
siruc tura I practice.
(b) If the pipe is designed to operate at a hoop stress
((l) In
of 50% or more of the minimum strength, stressed internal uniform and
support of the pipe be furnished by a member that of the pipe in trench is essential. Unequal
coftlo.monfc may produce added stresses in the
completely encircles it. Where it is necessary to
attachment, as at an the pipe, Lateral thrusts at branch connections may greatly
welded to the member only; the support increase the stresses in the branch connection itself,
be attached to the encircling member and not to the unless the fill is consolidated or other
The connection of the to the mem- sions are made to resist thrust.
shall be by continuous rather than intermit- (b) Rock shield shall not be draped over the pipe
tent ones. unless suitable backfill and padding are in the
ditch to provide a continuous and support of
835 ANCHORAGE FOR BURIED PIPING the in the trench,
(c) When are made in a consolidated backfill
835.1 General
to connect new branches to an line, care must
Bends or offsets in buried be taken to provide firm foundation for both the header
forces that must be resisted by 'm,-"n,""CrO at the bend, and the branch to vertical and lateral
by restraint due to friction of the soil, or longitudinal movements,
stresses in the
835.2 Anchorage at Bends 835.6 Interconnection of Underground lines
If the is anchored by at the bend, care Underground lines are to
shall be taken to distribute the on the soil so that stresses due to in pressure and
the pressure is within safe limits for the soil
For lines, the of the earth w il
involved,
changes in length from these stresses, for several
835.3 Restraint Due to Soil Friction hundred feet adjacent to bends or ends. At these loca-
Where there is doubt as to the of restraint tions, the movement, if unrestrained, may be of consider-
friction, calculations shall be indicated able tude. If connections are made at such a
shall be installed, location to a relatively unyielding line or other fixed
object, it is essential that the interconnection shall have
835.4 Forces on Pipe Joints ample flexibility to compensate for movement,
If is not provided at the bend or the line shall be with an anchor sufficient
para. pipe joints that are close to the points of to the forces necessary to limit the movement.

34
 ASME B)1.8-2014

Chapter IV
Design, Installation, and Testing

840 DESIGN. INSTALLATION. AND TESTING (4) WaleI' VaporColllel1t and Free Liquids. Free water
and hydrocarbons at certain combinations of
840.1 General Provisions and may produce hydrates,
(a) The design of this Code are intended crystalline solids that may cause or
to be adequate for public safety under all conditions pipeline that may to a disruption of
encountered in the gas Conditions that may pipeline
cause additional stress in of a lineor its appurte- Based on the characteristics of the gas stream (i.e.,
nances shall be provided using good value, gravity, temperature, free liquid,
of such conditions include long and other objectionable sub-
'-"'(W,·o,-, spans, unstable ground, mechanical or sonic precautions shall be considered to
weight of special nrr'''''',ITlC that might adversely affect the

induced stresses, stresses caused or the end user.

ences, and the soil and factor to the fail-
in the Arctic.
the difference between the lowest and
metal during pressure test construction of
operating services having due to past recorded
data and the effects of lower or associated with human
air and ground industrial enterprises. These services, such as water, gas
(b) The quality of the gas in the and electrical supply, sewage systems, lines
pipeline, or by the pipeline considered and ditches, buried power and communication
when facilities. Measures shall be taken to streets and etc., become more prevalent and exten-
control or minimize adverse effects of the gas nrrInArhc'~ ty of to the
or gas when any of the following may be concentrations of
a concern: for human occupancy, Determining
(1) Gas Uncontrolled or unexpected Location Class a method of assessing the
variations in heating value may result in problems at degree of exposure of the line to
the end user's burner tip or process. Noncombustible (d) A designed, constructed, and operated
nitrogen, compounds, carbon in with the of Location Class 1
etc.) may reduce the value and increase para. 840.2.2(a)] is basically safe for pressure con-
gravity of the gas stream. Carbon dioxide tainment in any location; however, additional measures
to internal corrosion in the presence of free are necessary to protect the integrity of the line in the
water. Increased of the gas stream may presence of activities that might cause damage. One of
foretell the at cooler the measures by this Code is to lower the stress
which may negatively affect operations. level in relation to increased public activity. This activity
A change in may affect and is quantified by Location Class and relating
compressor capacity calculations. For effects of heavy the design of the pipeline to the appropriate design
hydrocarbons on the of for ductile fractme factor.
arrest, see the "Caution" at the of para. 841.1.1. (e) editions of this Code used the term
(2) SlIlfide Con tell I. Hydrogen sulfide is "population density index" to determine design, con-
highly toxic and contributes to corrosion in the presence struction, and They also
of water. Refer to Chapter IX, Sour Gas for used the term "Location Class" in design
provisions related to sulfide. pressure, type of construction, and maximum allowable
Content. Oxygen contributes to corro- pressure. To simplify use of this the
.-.rl',"'a"YlC in the presence of free water at certain term "population density index" was eliminated.
Certain mixtures of oxygen and gas above Construction Types A, B, and D were eliminated and
the lower explOSive limit can create an explosive with the same term used for
condition. section 864 and pRrRs. 841.2.7 Rnd 850.6.) class.

35
 ASME 631.8-2014

if) The based on Location Class were 0.72 but equ<ll to or less than 0.80. Table 841.1.6-2 for
such that there were no significant changes in the exceptions to factor.)
installation, and operation of piping .~V'''Pl'ns (2) Class 1, Division 2. This Division is a Location
due to in terminology. Class 1 where the factor of the pipe is to
(g) Pipelines constructed prior to the of or less than 0.72. Table 841.1.6-2 for to
this Edition and designed in accordance with Location design factor.)
Classes established in with previous edi- (b) Loeatioll Class 2. A Location Class 2 is any
tions of this Code may continue to use the Location I-mi (1.6-km) section that has more than 10 but fewer
Classes so determined, that when observed than 46 intended for human A
increases in the number of buildings intended for human Location Class 2 is intended to reflect areas the
occupancy occur, the Location Class determination shall of population is intermediate between Location
be as in para, 840.2. 1 and Location Class 3, such as areas around
cities and towns, industrial areas, ranch or country
840.2 Buildings Intended for Human Occupancy es ta tes, etc.
840.2.1 General
(c) Location Class 3. A Location Class 3 is <lny
I-m! (1.6-km) section that has 46 or more
(a) To determine the number of buildings intended
intended for human except when a Location
for human occupancy for an onshore pipeline, layout
Class 4 3 is intended to reflect
(O.4-km) wide the route of the
areas such as suburban housing
on the centerline of this zone, and
centers, residential areas, ind ustrial areas, and other
divide the pipeline into random sections 1 mi (1.6 km)
areas not meeting Location Class 4
in such that the individual lengths will include
the maximum number of intended for human
(d) Location Class 4. Location Class 4 includes areas
occupancy. Count the number intended for
where multistory buildings are prevalent, where traffic
human occupancy within each 1-mi (1.6-km) zone. For
is or dense, and where there may be numerous
this purpose, each dwelling unit in a multiple
other utilities Multistory means four or
unit building is to be counted as a
more floors including the first or ground
building intended for human occupancy.
floor. The of basements or number of basement
(b) It is not intended here that a full 1 mi (1.6 km) of
floors is immaterial.
lower stress level shall be installed if there are
physical barriers or other factors that will limit the fur- 840.3 Considerations Necessary for Concentrations
ther of the more densely populated area to of People in location Class 1 or 2
a total distance of less than 1 rni (1.6 km). It is intended,
(a) In addition to the criteria contained in para. 840.2,
however, that where no such barriers exist, allow-
ance shall be made in the limits the lower additional consideration must be given to the possible
stress to provide for probable further develop- of a failure near areas where a concentra-
ment in the mea. tion is likely, such as a school,
dwelling unit, hospital, or recreational area of an orga-
(c) When a duster of buildings intended for human
nized character in Location Class 1 or 2.
occupancy indicates that a basic 1 mi (1.6 km) of
If the facility is used infrequently, the
should be identified <IS a Location Class 2 or Location
of (b) need not be applied.
Class 3, the Location Class 2 or Location Class 3 may
(b) near of public assembly or con-
be terminated 660 ft (200 m) from the nearest
centrations of people, such as churches, schools, multi-
in the cluster.
ple unit buildings, hospitals, or recreational
(d) For shorter than 1 rni (1.6 km) in length,
areas of an nature in Location Class 1 or 2
a Location that is typical of the Location Class
shall meet for Location Class 3.
that would be for 1 mi km) of pipeline
(c) Concentrations of referred to in (a) and (b)
the area shall be
above are not intended to groups of fewer than
(14) 840.2.2 location Classes for Design and instance or location but are intended to
Construction cover in an outside area as well as in a building.
(n) Lom/ioll Class 1. A Location Class 1 is any l-rni
(l.6-km) section that has 10 or fewer intended 840.4 Intent
for human occupancy. A Location Class 1 is intended (n) It should be that Location Class (1, 2,
to reflect areas such as mountains, 3, or 4) as in the paragraphs is
land, farml<lnd, and areas. defined as the description of a geographic area
(1) Class 1, Division 1 This Division is a Loc<ltion certain characteristics as a basis for n,.,>cr,·ih
Class 1 where the factor of the th<ln of and methodsof

36
 ASME B31.8·2014

to be used in those locations or in areas tha t are compara- T derating factor obtained from
ble, A numbered Location such as Location 841.1,8-1
Class 1, refers only to the of that location or ::::: nominal wall thickness, in, (mm)
a similar area and does not indicate that a CAUTION: This cautionary nole is nonmandatory, Steel pipe
factor of 0,72 will suffice for construction in may exhibit pronounced differences in strength between the
location or area in Location Class 1, longitudinal and circumferential directions. The orientation of
require a design factor of 0,6; see the strength test is established by the pipe product specification
depending on pipe size and method of pipe making, Conse-
quently, pipe may have a qualified strength in an axis orientation
locations for
that does not conform to the orientation of the principal loading
construction and or stress, The user is alerted to be aware of the standard test
due consideration shall be orientation used to determine conformance of pipe to the mini-
to the possibility of future of the area, mum strength requirement of the selected grade, and to consider
If at the time of planning a new pipeline this future whether the intended uses or anticipated service conditions of
development likely to be sufficient to the pipeline system warrant supplementaltesling of the strength
the Location this shall be taken into consideration properties in other orientations.
in the of the O«)O()SE'C1 (b) The factor for
Division 1 is based on gas
ence at operation levels in excess
841 STEEL PIPE
recommended by this Code,
841.1 Steel Piping Systems Design Requirements It should be noted that the user may be required to
out such or reduce pressure to 0,72 SMYS
841.1.1 Steel Pipe Design Formula maximum in accordance with para, 854.2,
pressure for steel gas
or the wall thickness for a design pressure 841.1.2 fracture Control and Arrest (14)

shall be determined by the following formula (for limita- (a) FmC/lire TOllgliness Criterion, A fracture toughness
tions, see para. 841.1.3): criterion or other method shall be to control
fmcture propagation when one of the is true:
(u.s, Customary Units) 0)a ~ either at a hoop
in sizes NPS 16
p 251 FET
==7)
to at a hoop stress
SMYS in sizes smaller than
(51 Units)

is with a minimum
lure below -20oP as outlined in
section 812
where When a fracture toughness criterion is used, control
D nominal outside diameter of pipe, in, (mm) can be achieved by that the has
E longitudinal joint factor obtained from ductility and either specifying
Table 841.1.7-1 also para, or installing crack arrestors on the pipeline to stop
F design factor obtained from Table 841.1.6-1. In
the values of the design factor, F, due (b) Brillie Fmcture COlltrol, To ensure that the pipe has
consideration has been given and allowance has ductility, fracture toughness shall be
been made for the various underthickness toler- in accordance with the
nt>"f"r"'t>rl

ances for in the specifications SR5 or SR6 of API 5L

listed and approved for usage in this Code, or Annex G of API .5L (45th
P (kPa) also other equivalent alternatives, If the operating
ture is below 50 0 P (10°C), an lower test tem-
S minimum yield strength, shall be used when
stipulated in the under which the
from the manufacturer or
in accordance with paras,
and 841.1.4, The fied minimum yield during pressure
strengths of some of the more commonly used service, having
steels whose are incorpo- data and possible of lower air and
rated by reference herein are tabulated for con- The average shear value of the
venience in Mandatory D. appearance of three Charpy from

37
 ASME 831.8-2014

each heat shall not be less than 60%, and the all-heat develop the empirical equations above, The presence of heavier
average for each order per and hydrocarbons can cause the gas to exhibit two-phase behavior
on sudden decompression and thus requires a greater Charpy
shall not be less than 80%. Alternatively, when
energy to arrest propagating pipe fracture. Likewise, pipe with
weight tear is at least 80% of the heats heavy wall thickness greater than 1,25 in, (32 mm) or Ihat has
shall exhibit a fracture appearance shear area of 40% or been control rolled or quench and tempered may not behave as
more at the test temperature. indicated by the equations and may also require a Charpy
(c) Dllctile Fmc/lire Arrest. To ensure that the energy to arrest a propagating fracture. must be
to arrest a ductile fracture, the performed to determine if the decompression exhibits two-phase
in accordance with the behavior, and an assessment must be made as to the applicability
of the arrest equations where additional toughness may be
requirements SR5
required. Otherwise, mechanical crack arrestors (see (d) abovel
(43rd or Annex G of API 5L (45th edition). The should be installed, or the Charpy toughness requirements for
all-heat average of the Charpy energy values shall meet arrest should be verified through experiments or additional
or exceed the energy value calculated one of the calculations,
following that have in various NOTE: The empirical equations specified in (cl, Ductile Fracture
research programs: Arrest, were utilizing conventional line pipe Willi thick-
(1) Battelle Coillmbus Labom/ories (BCL) (AGA) this Code is advised that of the test
temperature to below the minimnm design temperature is some-
times necessary to accurately simulate the of materi-
als when the pipe waH thickness is greater than the
(2) American Iron and Steel Illstilllte (A IS I) size of the test specimens.
CVN O.0315V>!2RI/2 841.1.3 Limitations on Design Pressure, P, in
Para. 841.1.1. The design pressure obtained by the
(3) Brilisll Gas COl/lleil (BGC)
formula in pi1ra, 841.1.1 shall be reduced to conform to
CVN = O.03150'R/1 the following:
(11) P for furnace buttwelded shall not exceed the
(4) Bri/ish Steel Corpomtiol1 restrictions of para. 841.1.1 or of mill test pressure,
whichever is the lesser.
CVN = O.OO119£1R
(b) P shall not exceed 85% of the mill test pressure
where for all other provided; that pipe, mill
CVN tested to a pressure less than 85% of the pressure
to produce a hoop stress equal to the specified
R minImum may be retested with a mill hydro-
static test or tested in after installation. In the
0' event the is to a
mill test pressure, then P
For API 5L pipe, the minimwn values shall retest pressure rather than the initial mill test
be the of those the equations above or It is mandatory to use a liquid as the test in
those by API 5L for PSL 2 pipe. Annex G of all tests in place after installation where the test pressure
API 5L (45th Edition) contains additional exceeds the mill test pressure. This is not to
for be construed to i1l1ow an pressure or
energy values, pressure in excess of that for by para, 841,1.1.
manufactured to other standards where the
minimum impact values are within that stan- 841.1.4 Limitations on Specified Minimum Yield
dard, those minimum requirements shall be maintained. Strength,S, in Para. 841.1.1
In cases where the pipe manufacturing standard does (a) If the under consideration is not new
not the minimum the mini- i1 and
Edition) shall the value of 5 may be in accor-
dance with one of the
Mechanical Crack Arrestors. Mechanical crack (1) 5 value for new pipe qualified under
of wrap, heavy- para. or 811,2,2(b)
or other suitable have shown to (2) 5 value for reuse of steel under
reliable methods of arresting ductile fracture, one of the of para, 817.1
mechi1Ilical crack i1rrestors shall be at inter- (3) 5 value for pipe of unknown as
vals the determined by para. 817.1.3(h)
CAUTION: The requirements specified in (c), Ductile Fracture (/;) When that has been cold worked for meeting
Arrest, assume the pipeline is Iransporting essenlially pure meth- minimum yield
;me and the pipe is similar in fracture behavior 10 thai used 10 to a temperature

38
 ASME B31.8·2014

Table 841.1.6-1 Basic F 841.1.9 Additional Design Information or (14)

Design Factor,
Instructions
location Class F (a) Fabricllted Assemblies. When fabricated
such as connections for main line valve
Location Class 1, Division 1 0.80 cross connections, river
Location Class 1, Division 2 0.72 etc., are to be installed in areas defined in Location
Location Class 2 0,60
Location Class 3 0.50
Class 1, a design factor of 0.6 is required throughout
Location Class 4 0.40 the assembly and for a distance equal to the lesser of
5 diameters or 10 ft (3 m) in each direction the
last A shorter distance may be used
that combined stresses are considered in the design of
any period of time or over 600°F for more than the installation. Transition at the end of an assem-
1 the maximum allowable at which it can
bly and elbows used in of pipe bends are not
be used shall not exceed 75% of val ue obtained by use
considered fittings under the of this para-
of the steel pipe formula in para. 841.1.1.
Also see section 822.
(c) In no case where the Code refers to the
minimum value of a mechanical shall the
actual value of a be in the
steel pipe given in para. 841.1.1. If the
actual value is than the minimum value
of a mechanical property, the actual value may be used
where it is permitted by the Code, such as in para. 817.1
the reuse of steel pipe.
841.1.5 Additional Requirements for Nominal Wall
Thickness, t, in Para. 841.1.1
(II) The minimum wall t, required for pres-
sure containment as determined by para, 841.1.1 may
not be for other forces to which the
may be para, Consideration
shall also be given to loading due to transportation or
hand ling of the construction, of
and other second-
operation. para. 841.1.1 for
to provide additional
Consideration should also be to welding or
Standard wall thick-
ness, as shall be the least
nominal wall used for threaded and

(b) Transportation, installation, or repair of shall

not reduce the wall thickness at any point to a thickness
less than 90% of the nominal wall thickness as deter-
mined by para. 841.1.1 for the pressure to which
the is to be subjected.
841.1.6 Design Factors, F, and location Classes.
The factor in Table 841.1.6-1 shall be used for the

factors to be used in the are given in

Table 841.1.6-2.
841.1.7 longitudinal Joint Factor. The
nal joint factor shall be in accordance with
Table 841.1.7-1.
841.1.8 Temperature Derating Factor. The
ature derating factor shall be in accordance with
Table 841.1.8-1. personnel.

39
© 2014 by the American Society of Meclmnical
be made of this material without written consent
 ASME 831.8·2014

(14) Table 841.1.6·2 Design Factors for Steel Pipe Construction

location Class
1
Facility Div. 1 Div.2 2 3 4

Pipelines, mains, and service lines !see para. 840.2.2J 0.80 0.72 0.60 0.50 0.1,0

Crossings of roads, railroads without casing:

(a) Private roads 0.80 0.72 0.60 0.50 0.40
(b) Unimproved public roads 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.50 0."0
(cl Roads, highways, or public streets with hard surface and railroads 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.50 0.40

Crossings of roads, railroads with casing:

(a) Private roads 0.80 0.72 0.60 0.50 0.40
(b) Unimproved public roads 0.72 0.72 0.60 0.50 0.40
(c) Roads, highways, or public streets with hard surface and railroads 0.72 0.72 0.60 0.50 0.40

Parallel encroachment of pipelines and mains on roads and railroads:

(a) Private roads 0.80 0.72 0.60 0.50 0.40
(b) Unimproved public roads 0.80 0.72 0.60 0.50 0.40
(c) Roads, highways, or public streets with hard surface and railroads 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.40

Fabricated assemblies [see para. 841.1.9(a)] 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.40
Pipelines on bridges [see para. 841.1.9(b)J 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.40
Pressure/flow control and metering facilities [see para. 8~1.1.9(c)J 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.50 0.40

Compressor station piping 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.40

liquid separators constructed of pipe and fittings without internal welding 0.40 0.40 O.~O 0.40 0.40
[see para. 843.3.1(b)]

Near concentration of people in location Classes 1 and 2 [see para. 840.3(b)] 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.40

40
 ASME 631.8-2014

if) Olher (Nollll1(lI1datoI'Y) COllsidemfiollS for Metering

Facilities
(1) Meter reduces measurement uncer~
tainty. Where meter size, and flow rate allows,
consider installing meter
Table 841.1.7-1 longitudinal Joint Factor, f (2) Upstream dry gas filter(s) should be considered
Spec. No. Pipe Class E Factor when installing rotary or turbine meters. Particulates
.~--.-.-.-".---.-------.--.-- .. -------------~-

and dust can contaminate meter lubricating oil

ASTM AS3 Seamless 1.00
and damage and other internal meter
Electric-resistance·welded 1.00
Furnace·buttwelded, continuous weld 0.60 components.
ASTM AI06 Seamless 1.00 (g) Pressure/Flow COl1trol Facilities
ASTM A134 Electric·fusion arc·welded 0.80 (1) shall be provided by
ASTM A135 Electric·reslstance·welded 1.00
the use of
ASTM AU9 Electric·fusion arc·welded 0.80
ASTM A333 Seamless 1.00 (~a) a monitor regulator in series with a control-
Electric·reslstance·welded 1.00 regulator (each run),
ASTM A381 Submerged·arc·welded 1.00 (~b) adequately sized relief valve(s) downstream
ASTM A671 Electric·fusion·welded
Classes 13, 23, 33, 43, 53 0.80
of the controlling regulator(s).
Classes 12, 22, 32, 42, 52 1.00 (~c) overpressure shutoff IIpstream or
ASTM A672 Electric·fusion·welded downstream of the Installation
Classes 13, 23, 33, 43, 53 0.80 of alarm devices that indicate primary (controlling) reg-
Classes 12, 22, 32,42, 52 1.00
ulator failure is useful and should be considered for
ASTM A691 Electric·fusion·welded
Classes 13. 23. 33, 43, 53 0.80 monitoring
Classes 12, 22. 32. 42. 52 1.00 (2) Each control, and line
ASTM A984 Electric·resistance·welded 1.00 shall have a isolation valve for isolation pur-
ASTM A100S Double submerged·are·welded 1.00 poses during regulator and maintemmce and to
ASTM AI006 Laser beam welded 1.00
APi 5L Electric welded 1.00
prevent a safety device (i.e., monitor, regulator) from
Seamless 1.00 unintentionally due to plugging
Submerged·are·welded (longitudinal 1.00 of instrument lines.
seam or helical seam) (3) Steps shall be taken to prevent the
Furnace·bultwelded, continuous weld 0.60
up and of control valves,
GENERAL NOTE: Definitions for the various classes of we!ded pipe instrumentation, pilot controls, and valve actuation
are given in para. 804.7.3. equipment c(lused by moisture S(ltuf(lted instrument air
or gas, pipeline gas, or extern(ll ambient conditions.
(4) Sound pressure levels of 110 dBA and
shall be avoided to prevent to control equipment
and piping.
(5) G(lS velocities in piping should not exceed
100 ft/sec (30 m/s) at conditions, Lower velocities
are recommended. High gas velocities in piping increase
turbulence and pressure drop (lnd contribute to exces-
sive sound pressure levels (lerodynamic noise) and can
Table 841.1.8·1 Temperature Derating factor, C(luse internal piping erosion.
T, for Steel Pipe (l!) Oliler (NolllllandaloI'Y) COllsidemlioHs Pressure/
------~~~~---~~---~~---~~-~~-~~-~---- .-----~~~-

Temperature Derating Flow COlltrol Facilities

Temperature, OF (OC) Factor, T (1) Filtration of gas, particularly for instrumenta"
Hon, instrument regulators, etc., should be considered
250 (121) or !ower 1.000
300 (149) 0.967 where contaminants are a present or
350 (177) 0.933 tial problem.
400 (204) 0.900 (2) Installation of conical reducers immediately
450 (232) 0.867
downstream of a or control valve will allow
GENERAL NOTE: for intermediate temperatures. interpolate for derat·
a more expansion of gas to and
ing factor. reduce turbulence and pressure drop during gas

41
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
reproduction may be Illade of this material without writ1Cll consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

(i) Electricnl Fncilities al1d Electronic Equipment jor (-a) nondestructive examination of 100% of all
PresslIre/Flow Control and Metering Fncililies circumferential welds prior to installation
(1) All elecn'ical equipment and wiring installed in (-b) pressure (pretest) of the fabricated
control facilities and facilities pipe prior to installation
of NFPA 70 and other ( -c) an internal plate, caliper tool,
AGA or instrumented device through the
"oro"",nr,oc are listed in Nonmandatory C. string following installation
(2) Electronic control, monitoring, and (6) Damage Prevention. To minimize the potential
surement equipment shall be properly for damage to existing surface or subsurface structures,
isolated from piping to help design of the plan and profile shall consider
accidental shutoff situations caused by the accuracy of the methods to be in locating
ure due to lightning strikes and electrical transients and existing structures, maintaining required clearances
to safety hazards caused by fault currents, Elec- from structures, tracking the of the
trical isolation equipment for corrosion control pilot head and reamer during drilling and
should not be installed in buildings unless tracking of the reamer during pullback.
to be used in combustible Prior to the commencement of
sources or redundant location of all subsurface sh'uctures in near
considered to to the design drill path shall, where nr;,rt,r"
shutoff situations caused by to t a visual confirmation of the structure's
location,
A useful reference for electronic gas measure- Prior to initiating the operation, consider-
ments is API Manual of Petroleum Measurement ation shall be given to the impact of the
Standards, Chapter 21 - Flow Measurement lion on all adjacent structures due to any
Electronic Systems, Section 1 Electronic Gas deviations from the design path,
Measurement. (k) Gt/ler (Nollll1al1datory) Considerations jor Pressure
(j) Installatioll by Directiollal Drilling Cycle oj Longitudinal Pipe Seams. Line pipe longi-
(1) Qllalifications, Drilling contractors shall main- tudinal seams are not generally regarded as susceptible
tain written and installation procedures to fatigue due to operational in most
crossings to be by the directional natural gas service. for
drilling method. Drilling equipment operators and per- crack growth due to
sonnel responSible for establishing the location of the for pipe containing seams where
pilot head and reamer drilling shall the expected lifetime accumulation of full MAOP
be qualified by training and lOy,,),,,,'lm,rlO may exceed the following number of occurrences:
tation of the contractor's
(U.S. Cllstomary Ullits)
(2) Geoteclinical Evaillatiolls. Geotechnical evalua-
tions should be considered at the crossing location to
establish subsurface conditions.
(3) Installation Forces and Stresses. Loads on, and
stresses in, the string during installation shall be (51 Uuits)
evaluated to ensure protection of the pipe against yield- f 9.8 X 1011 )
buckling, and undesired movement of the ~ = (F X 5)3 x
. N ,
pipe due to combined effects of external pres-
sure, axial and bending. (See directional
where
drilling references in Nonmandatory
F factor from Table 841.1.6-1
(4) Protective Conting, The frictional ,md N equivalent number
forces that be exerted on the service life of the piping
be considered when 5 yield strength, (MPa),
to be applied to under which the
joints, During care shall be pipe was from the manufacturer or
the ty and integrity of the external corrosion determined in accordance with paras. 817.1.3(11)
and 841.1.4
(5) AddUiollal Evn/llalioll Measures. In addition to t == nominal wall in. (mm)
the minimum and
requirements of Code, consideration shall be The pipeline is considered not susceptible to fatigue
to the following additional measures on the in the longitudinal seams due to if the
has been to a

42
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society ofMccbanical """"""'~"e
be made oflhi5 material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

pressure level at least 1.25 times the MAOr, and the Table 841.1.11-1 Pipeline Cover Requirements
eXI:>ected lifetime accumulation of full-MAor is Cover, in, (mm)
N or fewer, or the factor, F, is 0.4 or less. For
For Rock
of applying criterion, pressure
Excavation
than 50% of the MAOr in tude
Pipe Size Pipe Size
be counted as full-MAOP cycles. Seam welds
NPS 20 larger Than
that are not oriented parallel to the longitudinal axis of (ON 500) and
for Normal NPS 20
the pipe are from the evaluation. Location Excavation Smailer (ON 500)
-.---.
841.1.10 Protection of Pipelines and Mains From
Class 1 21; (610) 12 (300) 18 (460)
Hazards Class 2 30 (760) 18 (1;60) 18 (460)
(a) When pipelines and mains must be installed Classes 3 and 4 30 (760) 24 (610) 24 (610)
where will be subject to natural such as Drainage ditch at public 36 (910) 24 (610) 24 (610)
unstable soil, roads and railroad
related events (such as surface faulting, soil crossings (all
locations)
and soil and slope or other
conditions that may cause serious movement of, or NOTE:
abnormal loads on, the pipeline, reasonable (1) Rock excavation is excavation that requires blasting.
shall be taken to the such as
the wall thickness, revetments, 'WL'''.o,,,''
erosion, and installing anchors.
(/J) Where and mains cross areas that are
normally water or to flooding (i.e., lakes, Where these cover
bays, or swamps), sufficient weight or anchorage shall external loads may
be to the line to flotation. bridged, or to withstcmd any such
(c) Because submarine be to anticipated external loads. In areas where farming or
washouts due to the natural other result in plOWing, in areas
\A",rfJr'\N;m bed, water velocities, deepening of the chan- to erosion, or in locations future
of the channel location in the waterway, is likely, such as at roads, highways, railroad crossings,
shall be given to the and ditch crossings, additional shall be
or main at such The shall vided. (e) for
located in the more stable bank and bed locations. tional protection.]
The of the line, location of the bends installed in (c) Clearance Belween or Mains arid Olher
the wall thickness of the pipe, and weighting of Ulldelgrolllld Stl'llctllres
the line shall be selected based on the characteristics of (1) There shall be at least 6 in. (150 mm) of clearance
the wherever between any buried and any
(d) Where cmd mains are exposed, such as other structure not used in
and the pipelines with the peline. When such clearance cannot be
mains shall be by distance or to the sha lJ be
barricades from accidental damage by vehicular traffic or
or other causes, material.
841.1.11 Cover, Clearance, and Casing Requirements (2) There shall be at least 2 in. (50 mm) of clearance
for Buried Steet Pipelines and Mains wherever possible between any buried gas main and
(a) Covel' Reqllirelllcnts jo), MaillS. Buried mains shall any other underground structure not used in conjunc-
be installed with a cover not less than 24 in. (610 mm). tion with the main. When such clearance cannot be
Where this cover provision cannot be met, or where attained, precautions to the main shall be
external loads may be excessive, the main shall be such as the installation of material or casing.
bridged, or to withstand any such (d) Casing Requiremel1ts Under Railroads, Highways,
external loads. Where or other oper- Roads, or Streets. shall be to withstand
ations result in plowing, in areas subject to the of
erosion, or in locations where future grading is likely, water
such as road, highway, and ditch be sealed. If the end sealing is of a type that will retain
additional protection shall be provided, for sug- the maximum allowable operating pressure of the carrier
gested methods to provide additional protection,] the shall be for this pressure and
Covel' Rcqllircll1ellls Except for off- factor of 0.72, Venting of sealed
shore buried shall be installed with is not manda tory; however, if vents are insta lied
a cover not less than that shown in Table 841.1.11-1, they shoul.d be protected from the weather to

43
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of
be made of this material without
 ASME B31.8·2014

water from for cross- 841.2 Installation of Steel Pipelines and Mains
ings within casing '01",",',",",0 and highways are shown
in Table 841.1.6-2.) 841.2.1 Construction Specifications. All construc-
tion work performed on in accordance
(e) Additional Protection. The pipe
with the of shal! be done under
factor, F, in accordance with
construction The construction specifica-
Table 841.1.6-2 for the crossing of roads and railroads.
tions shall cover all phases of the work and shall be in
The provided API RP 1102, Steel
sufficient detail to cover the of this Code.
Railroads and Highways; or GRI
Guidelines for Pipelines Crossing 841.2.2 Inspection Provisions
or Gas Piping Technology Committee's company shall suitable
Guide Material Appendix of Uncased I n~,np'-tnlrq shall be either by
of Highways and may be ence or training, The shall have the authority
and installation of pipeline cross- to order the repair or removal and of any
operator shall evaluate the need for rl'UYl1'>()n'''nt found that fails to meet the standards of this
additional pipe protection over the pipeline
when the road or railroad right-of-way width is unde- (b) The installation inspection for
fined based on anticipated loading from traffic or lines and other facilities to at hoop stresses of
equipment maintenance activities minimum yield
to the road or railroad. DOSSJDle at least the following
U<:)':'l<:'"O of additional protection from third- In Ca,prt1()ns at SUfnr'lermv tr"'OIlPnl intervilJs to ensure
party to a buried main or pipeline crossing of workmanship:
within (or parallel the right-of-way of road or railroad the surface of the for serious surface
may be achieved using the following techniques, or vari- defects just prior to the coating operation,
ants thereof, or in combination: para, 841.2.4(b)(1).J
(1) A barrier or marker may be installed (2) the surface of the
above or around the para. If a physical lowered into the ditch to find
barrier is the conflict with the right-of- indicate the pipe might have been
way maintenance activities should be coated,
cal barrier or marker methods include (3) the fitup of the joints before the weld is
(-a) a concrete or steel barrier placed above the
made.
the beads before subse-
vertically adjacent to
extended above the of
welds before they are
covered
material, such as
(6)
concrete
(-d) extra depth of cover additional to thc1t
required in
the fit of the pipe to the ditch before
(-e) buried high-viSibility warning placed
backfilling, for offshore
parallel to and above the
(8) Inspect all repairs, or changes
(-f) pipe (d) and para. 861.1.6J
ordered before they are
(2) A heavier wall thickness than is
(9) Perform such are
design factor, F, in accordance with
or Table 841.1,6-2, required by the such as nondestructive
(3) Pipeline alignment should be as straight and testing of welds and electricill of the protective
perpendicular to the road or rililroad illignment as coating.
ble to promote reliilble of the pipe location (10) bilckfill material prior to use and
through the right-of-wilY and at right-of-way limits. observe backfill procedure to ensure no occurs
Additional underground protection shall be used to the in the process of
in conjunction with an educiltionill 841.2.3 Bends, Miters, and Elbows in Steel Pipelines
(pilril. 850,4.4), periodic surveillance of and Mains. in direction may be made by the
(para, 851.1), pipeline patrolling (para. 851.2), and utili- use of miters, or elbows under the limitations
ziltion that provide notification to operators noted below.
impending excavation if available, (a) Bends
841.1.12 Design factors Summary. factors (1) A bend shall be free from buckling, or
are summarized in Table 841.1.6-2. other evidence of mechanical

44
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of ASME,
 ASME B31.8·2014

Table 841.2.3-1 Pipeline Field (old Bend analysis that considers

Requirements construction and operation on the reliability of pipe
Minimum Radius of
affected by such features. In addition, the bend shall
Deflection of Bend in Pipe meet all other provisions of this section.
longitudinal Diameters (b) Miters. Mitered bends are the
Nomina! Pipe Size Axis. deg [see 841.2.3(a)(3)] following limitations are met:
(1) In intended to operate at hoop stress
Smaller than NPS 12 841.2.3(a) (4) 18D
(ON 300) levels of 40% or more of the specified minimum yield
NPS 12 (ON 300) 3.2 18D mitered bends are not permitted. Deflections
NPS 14 (ON 350) 2.7 210 by misalignment up to 3 deg are not considered
NPS 16 (ON (00) 2.4 24D as miters.
NPS 18 (ON (50) 2.1 27D ,,,,,,tp,YlC intended to at hoop stress
NPS 20 (ON 500) 1.9 300
levels of or more but less than hoop stress levels
and larger
of 40% of the minimum yield strength, the
tot(ll deflection angle at e(lch miter shall not exceed
12Y:/ deg.
(2) The maximum of on a field cold (3) In intended to operate at hoop stress
bend may be determined by either method in levels of less than 10% of the specified minimum yield
Table 841.2.3-1. The first column expresses the maximum the total deflection at each miter shall
deflection in an arc length equal to the nominal outside not exceed 90 deg.
diameter, and the second column expresses the mini- (4) In systems intended to operate at hoop stress
mum radius as a function of the nominal outside levels of 10% or more of the specified minimum yield
diameter. the minimum distance between miters mea-
(3) A field cold bend may be made to a shorter <It the crotch shall not be less than one
minimum radius than permitted in (2) provided diameter.
the completed bend meets al! other of this (5) Care shall be taken in making mitered to
section, and the wall thickness after is not less provide proper and alignment and full
than the minimum permitted by para. 841.1.1. This may penetration.
be demonstrated through appropri<lte (c) Elbows. Factory-made, wrought-steel welding
(4) For smaller than NPS 12 (DN 300), the elbows or transverse cut therefrom may be
(1) above must be met, and the wall used for changes in direction, that the arc
after shall not be less than the mini- measured <llong the crotch is at least 1 in. mm)
mum permitted by para. 841.1.1. This may be demon- sizes NPS 2 (DN and larger.
strated through appropriate
(5) Except for offshore pipelines, when a circumfer-
841.2.4 Pipe Surface Requirements Applicable to (14)

ential weld occurs in a bend section, it shall be Pipelines and Mains to Operate at a Hoop Stress of 20%
to radiography examination after bending. or More of the Specified Minimum Yield Strength.
'-'IU'U)',";>, grooves, and notches have been found to be an
(6) All hot bends shall be made in accord<lnce with
important cause of failures, and all harmful
ASME 816.49.
defects of this nature must be prevented, eliminated, or
(7) Wrinkle bends shall be only on sys-
Precautions shall be taken during
at hoop stress levels of less than 30% of
h(luling, and installation to the gouging or
When wrinkle
grooving of
are m<lde in pipe, longitudinal weld
shall be located on or near to the neutral axis of the bend. (II) Deleclioll of Gouges lind Grooves
Wrinkle bends with sharp kinks shall not be (1) The field provided on each sh(lll
of wrinkles shall be measured along be suitable to reduce to an minimum the
and the distance between chances that gouged or pipe will into the
shall exceed the diameter of the On finished or main. for this purpose
NPS 16 (DN and the wrinkle shall not just of the coating oper<ltion and d the
produce an of more than deg per wrinkle. lowering-in and backfill operation is required.
(8) Incidental in the pipe surface m<ly occur (2) When pipe is inspection sh(lll be made
along the inside radius during the forming of cold field to determine th<lt the coating m<lchine does not C<luse
bends in some having a dimension mea- harmful gouges or grooves.
sured from to not exceeding 1% of the pipe (3) Lacerations of the shall be
outside diameter are considered acceptable for all gas carefully examined prior to the repair of the coating to
service. may be permitted based on an determine if the pipe surface has been

45
© 2014 by Ihe American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without written cOllsen! of ASME.
 ASME 631.8-2014

(b) Field Repair of and Grooves Code for the conditions of use. 1 In all other cases,
(1) Injurious gouges or grooves shall be removed. is prohibited, and the portion of containing the arc
(2) Gouges or grooves may be removed grinding burn must be cut out as a and replaced with a
to a smooth contour, provided that the resulting wall Insert patching is prohibited. Care shall be
thickness is not less than the minimum this exercised to ensure that the heat of does not
Code for the conditions of uSilge. pma. 841.1.5(b),] produce a metallurgical notch.
(3) When the conditions outlined in (b)(2) cannot
841.2.5 Miscellaneous Operations Involved In the
be met, the damaged portion of pipe shall be cut out as Installation of Steel Pipelines and Mains
a cylinder and replaced with a good piece. Insert patch-
(a) HOlding, and Stringing. Care shall be
is
taken in the of the handling and in
(e) Denis
hauling, unloading, and placing the pipe so
(1) A dent may be defined as a that as not to the
produces a gross disturbance in the curvature of the (b) Instnl/atioll of Pipe in the Ditch, On
wall (as opposed to a scratch or which
at hoop stress levels of 20% or more of the
the pipe wall thickness). The depth a dent shaH be
minimum yield it is important that
measured as the gap between the lowest of the
stresses imposed on the pipeline construction be min-
dent and a prolongation of the original contour of the
imized, Except for offshore pipelines, the pipe shall fit
pipe in any direction. the ditch without the use of external force to hold it in
(2) A dent, as defined in (c)(l), that contains a stress place until the backfill is When sections
concentrator such as a scratch, groove, or arc burn of that have been welded the ditch are
shall be removed by cutting out portion of lowered in, care shall be exercised so as not to jerk
the as a or impose any strains that may kink or put a
the
(3) All dents that affect the curvature of the permanent bend in the pipe. Slnck are not
at the longitudinal weld or any circumferential ited by this where laying conditions render
shall be removed, All dents that exceed a maximum their use advisable.
depth of %; in. (6 mm) in NPS 12 (DN and
(c) Backfillillg
smaller or 2% of the pipe diameter in all pipe
(1) shall be performed in a manner to
than NPS 12 (DN 300) shall not be permitted in
provide firm under the
or mains intended to at hoop stress
(2) If there are rocks in the material to be used
of 40% or more of the
for backfill, care shall used to to the
strength. When dents are
coating by such means as the use of rock shield material,
of the shall be cut out as a cylinder. Insert
or by making the initial fill with rock-free material suffi-
and pounding out of the dents is prohibited.
cient to prevent
(d) Notches
(3) Where the trench is flooded to consolidate the
(1) Notches on the pipe surface can be caused by
care shall be exercised to see that the pipe is
mechanical in manufacture, transportation,
not floated from its firm on the trench bottom.
handling, or installation, and when determined to be
mechanically caused, shall be treated the same as gouges 841.2.6 Hot Taps. All hot shall be installed by
and grooves [see above], trained and experienced crews,
(2) Stress concentrations that mayor may not
involve a notch may also be created by a 841.2.7 Precautions to Avoid Explosions of Gas-Air
involving thermal energy in which the sur- Mixtures or UncontroUed Fires During Construction
is heated sufficiently to its mechanical or Operations
metallurgical These are (a) Operations such as gas or electric welding and
termed notches," include an cutting with torches can be safely performed
arc burn produced by accidental contact with a welding on mains, and auxiliary provided
electrode or a grinding burn produced by excessive force that they are completely full of gas or air that is free from
on a grinding wheel. notches may result combustible material. shall be taken to prevent a
in even more severe stress concentrations than a mechan- mixture of gas and air at points where
are to be nprrnnr,p,;
ical notch and shall be or eliminated in all
pipelines intended to
20% or more of the minimum yield strength. I Complete removill of the notch created by iU1 nrc
(e) Elimillaliol1 of Arc Bllrns. The metallurgical notch burn (ill) be determined as follows: visible evidence of the
caused by arc burns shall be removed pro- arc burn has been removed grinding, swab the ilrei!
with iI 20% solution of persulfate. A spot
vided the grinding does not reduce the remaining wall is evidence of il metililurgicill notch ilnd indicates that additional
thickness to less than the minimum by this grinding is necessary.

46
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of tilis material without written consent of ASME,
 A5ME B31.8-2014

or main can be kept full of gas supplied to the line is too small to make a
during a or cutting the following similar to but the reverse of that described in (1) above
procedures are recommended: a of inert gas should be introduced to
(1) Keep a slight flow of gas the formation of an mixture at the
point where cutting or is being interface between gas and air. Nitrogen or carbon diox-
(2) Control the gas pressure at the site of the work ide can be used for this purpose.
by a suitable means. If a pipeline or main containing gas is to be
(3) After a cut is made, close all slots """nmID'; the may be carried out in accordance
or open ends with tightly fitted canvas, or other with (b), or the may be first disconnected from all
suitable materials. sources of gas and then purged with air,
(4) Do not two openings to remain uncov- water, or inert gas before any further cutting or welding
ered at the same time. This is doubly if the is done.
two are at different elevations. (4) If a gas pipeline, main, or auxiliary equipment
(c) cutting, or other operations that could is to be filled with air after been in service, and
be a source shall not be done on a pipeline, there is a reasonable possibility the inside surfaces
main, or auxiliary apparatus that contains air, if it is of the facility are wetted with volatile inflammable
connected to a source of gas, unless a suitable means has uid, or if such might have accumulated in low
been provided to the formation of an purging designed to meet this situa-
mixture in the work area. tion shall be of the facility until all com-
(d) In situations where or cutting must be bustible have been evaporated and out is
done on facilities that are filled with air and connected Filling of the facility with an inert gas
and the recommended and keeping it full of such gas the progress of
one or more of the following any work that may an mixture in the
on circumstances at the jobsite, is an alternative recommendation. The pOSSibil-
ity of striking static within the must not
or equipment upon which be overlooked as a source of
welding or done with an inert or Whenever the accidental ignition in the air
continuous with air in such a manner a of mixture may be to cause injury
combustible mixture does not form in the facility at the or property precautions, such as the following,
work area shall be taken:
of the in the of the (1) Prohibit and open flames in the area.
and at (2) Install a metallic bond around the location of
intervals as the work progresses with a combustible gas cuts in means other than
indicator or other suitable means torches.
(3) careful verification before and during the work (3) Take static
that the valves that isolate the work from a
source gas do not leak (4) Provide a fire of size
(e) Pllrging of Pipelines lind Mllins and in accordance with NFPA 10.
(1) When a pipeline or main is to be
vice, the air in it shall be The are 841.3 After Construction
some methods:
(-II) Method 1. Introduce a rapid and 841.3.1 General Provisions. All piping
continuous flow of gas into one end of the line and vent shall be tested after construction to the requirements of
the air out the other end. The gas flow shall be continued this Code except for fabricated assemblies
without interruption until the vented gas is free of air. and welded tie-in connections where construction
(-b) Method 2. If the vent is in a location where is not practical.
the release of gas into the may cause haz- single or multiple welded
ardous condition, then a slug gas shall be intro- of pipe tested in accordance with this Code
duced between the gas and air. The gas flow shall then for the purposes of or do not
be continued without interruption until all of the air a construction retest.
and inert gas have been removed from the The (II) The circumferential welds associated with con-
vented gases shall be monitored and the vent shall be assembl pipe
closed before any substantial of combustible lengfhs or sections, and welded tie-in connections not
gas is released to the pressure tested after construction shall be by
(2) In cases where gas in a or main is to radiographic or other accepted nondestructive methods
be with air and the rate at which air can be in accordance with para. 826.2.

47
 ASME B31.8·2014

(b) Nonwelded tie-in connections not pressure tested (II) The pressure test media are stated in
after construction shall be leak tested at not less than Table 841.3.2-1. The recommended test medium is water.
the pressure available when the tie-in is into Sour gas as defined in para, B803 and flammable gas may
service. only be used for testing purposes in Location Class 1,
(c) Pressure testing with water is recommended Division 2 locations. When either of these media are
whenever it is that cer- the public shall be removed to a safe distance
tain conditions may gases. When a during the test and shall be
gas is used as the test medium, test pressure shall with protective equipment. Both
not exceed the maximum values stated in sour gas flammable gas tests must meet the test
Tables 841.3.2-1 and 841.3.3-1. pressure limitations per Table 84L3,3-1.
The user is cau tioned that the release of stored energy (b) The pressure test medium of
in a gas test failure can be Significantly more hazardous
Table 841.3.2-1 for the pressure testing of pipelines in
than a similar failure with water. When with
Class Locations 3 and 4 need not if, at the time
a formal risk assessment is recommended,
the are first ready for pressure one or
are identified, and measures and
both the following conditions exist:
are to minimize
additional risks. (1) Ground at pipe is suffi-
(d) When pipeline are installed in unstable ciently low during the test to cause the test medium to
soils or the mass of the test medium contributes to addi- state and cause or that would
system, the stresses and damage the or invalidate the test, use of chemi-
reactions due to longitudinal and cal freeze is not possible,
bending shall be prior to test- (2) Approved water of satisfactory quality is not
shall confirm that the test pres- available in sufficient quantity.
sures and loads not produce stresses, (c) Where one or both of the conditions in (b) exist,
strains, deflections, or other conditions that could it is permissible to pressure test using flir or nonflamma-
;,rl'"",·""I" impact the of the to ble, nontoxic gases as the pressure test medium
that all of the conditions exist:
shall consider pressure test medium
(1) The maximum hoop stress during pressure test-
and of operations to limit
less than 50% of the minimum yield
damage to pipe from test medium and
in Class 3 Locations, find less than 40% of the
prevent detrimental due to desta-
bilization of soils, minimum yield in Class 4 Locations.
if) Each test assembly (a fabrication that is not part (2) The maximum pressure at which the
of the facility used for pressuring and is to be does not exceed 80% of the maximum
the test) shall be fabricated, and field test pressure.
installed in accordance with the provisions of this Code. (3) The pipe involved has been confirmed to be fit
Each test shall be to operate at the for service and has a longitudinal joint factor of LOO
m(1ximum test pressure, The operator is Table 841.1.7-1).
to consider pretesting of the test (d) Before in service, a newly con-
to its use to reduce risk to testing structed pipeline sh(111 be tested for a
of the test is required when the pressure minimum period of 2 hI' at a minimum pressure
test is to be conducted a sour gas medium. Subse- to or than that in Table 84L3,2-1
quent prior to reuse should be considered if the stabilization of temperatures and
test assembly to have ing has been achieved.
or between tests.
sure shall be obt(1ined and held at the
(g) Test assemblies should be located
in the system.
accessibility, sources of test medium, and the elevation
(e) Test as a function of Location Class
of the test Selected locations should
testing while limiting test pressures are summarized in Table 841.3.2-1.
the minimum test pressure and the selected In the test pressure, the
maximum test pressure. operating company should be aware of the
841.3.2 Pressure Test Requirements to Prove of section 854 and the between test pressure
Strength of and Mains to Operate at Hoop ,md pressure when the experiences
Stresses of 30"/" or More of the Specified Minimum Yield a future increase in the number of dwellings intended
Strength of the Pipe. The follOWing are pressure test for human occupancy.
to prove strength of pipelines and mains to (g) Other provisions of this Code notwithstanding,
stresses of 30% or more of the pipelines and mains highways and raiJroads
strength of the may be independently or tested in conjunction

48
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table 841.3.2-1 Test Requirements for Steel Pipelines and Mains to Operate at Hoop Stresses
of 30%) or More of the Specified Minimum Yield of the
--------
2 3 4 5 6
Maximum
Pressure Test Prescribed
Design Factor, Permissible Test Maximum Allowable Operating
location Class F Medium Minimum Maximum Pressure, the Lesser of

1, Division 1 0.8 Water 1.25 x MOP None TP 1.25 or DP

I, Division 0.72 Water 1.25 x MOP None TP 1.250rDP

0.72 Air or Gas 1.25 x MOP 1.25 x DP TP 1.25 or DP
[Note (I)J

2 0,6 Water 1.25 x MOP None TP ~ 1.25 or DP

0,6 Air [Note (11J 1.25 x MOP 1.25 x DP TP ~ 1.25 or DP

3 (Note (2)J 0,5 Water [Note (3)J 1.50 x MOP None TP 1.5 or DP

4 0,4 Water [Nole (:3)1 1.50 x MOP None TP 1.5 or DP

LEGEND:
DP design pressure
MOP = maximum operating pressure (not necessarily the maximum allowable operating pressure)
TP test pressure
GENERAL NOTES:
(a) This Table defines the relationship between test pressures and maximum allowable operating pressures subsequent to the test. If an
operating company decides that the maximum operating pressure will be than the design pressure, a corresponding reduction in
the prescribed test pressure may be made as indicated in the Pressure Test Prescribed, Minimum column. If this reduced test pressure
is used, however, the maximum operating pressure cannot later be raised to the design pressure without retesting the line to a higher
test pressure, See paras. 805,2,1(d), 845.2.2, and 845.2.3,
(b) Gas piping within gas pipeline facilities (e,g., meIer stations, regulator stations, etc.) is to be tested and the maximum allowable
operating pressure qualified in accordance with para. 841.3 and Tables 841.3,2·1 and 841.3.3·1 subject to the appropriate location
class, design factor, and text medium criteria,
(c) When an air or gas test is used, the user of this Code is cautioned to evaluate the ability of the piping system to resist propagating
brittle or ductile fracture at the maximum stress level to be achieved during the test.
NOTES:
0) When pressure testing with air or gas, see paras. 841.3,1(c) and 841.3,2(a) through (c), and Table 841.3.3·1.
(2) Compressor station piping shall be tested with water to Location Class 3 pipeline requirements as indicated in para, 843,5,1 (c),
(3) For exceptions, see paras, 841.3.2(b) and (c),

49
 ASME B31.8-2014

with the adjoining pipeline in the same man- Table 841.3.3-1 Maximum Hoop Stress
ner and to the same pressure as the pipeline on each Permissible During an Air or Gas Test
side of the location Class, Percent of
(/1) Other of this Code notwithstanding, Specified Minimum Yield
fabricated including main line valve assem-
cross connections, river headers, etc., Test Medium 2 3 4
installed in in Location Class 1 and
Air or nonflammable 75 50 40
in accordance with a factor of 0.60 as
nontoxic gas
in para. 841.1.9(a), may be Flammable gas 30 30 30
tested in conjunction with the
ments as required for Location Class 1. GENERAL NOTE: Refer to para. 841.3.2(c).
(i) Operating shall retain, in their for
the useful life of each and main, records show-
the used and the data developed in estab- 841.3.5 leak Tests for Pipelines and Mains to Operate
the maximum allowable operating pressure of at less Than 100 (690 kPa)
that p or main. Refer to section N-7 of (II) Each main, and related equipment that
Nonmandatory Appendix N for a list of rec- will operate at less than 100 (690 kPa) shall be tested
ords for retention. after construction and before in
to demonstrate that it does not
841.3.3 Tests Required to Prove Strength for (b) Gas may be used as the test medium at the maxi-
Pipelines and Mains to Operate at Hoop Stress levels mum pressure available in the distribution at
of less Than 30"/0 of the Specified Minimum Yield the time of the test. In tilis case, the soap test
Strength of the Pipe, but in Excess of 100 psig may be used to locate leaks if all joints are accessible
(690 kPa). Steel piping that is to at hoop stress during the test.
levels of less than 30% of the specified minimum yield (c) at available distribution pressures
strength in Class 1 Locations shall at least be tested in may not be adequate if substantial
in accordance with para. 841.3.4. In Class 2, 3, and 4 coatings are used that would seal a
Locations, such piping shall be tested in accordance with seam. If such are the leak test pressure
Table that gas or air may be used as shall be 100 psig kPa).
the test medium within the maximum limits set in 841.3.6 Safety During Tests. All
Table 841.3.3-1. and mains after construction shall be done
for the of and the
841.3.4 leak Tests for Pipelines or Mains to Operate test. When air or gas is used, ;'UllClUIC
at 100 psig (690 kPa) or More be taken to persons not working on the testing
(II) Each pipeline and main shall be tested after con- operations out the area when the hoop stress
struction and before being placed in to demon- is first raised from 50% of minimum yield
strate that it does not leak. If the test indicates that a leak to the maximum test stress, until the pressure is
exists, the leak or leaks shall be located and reduced to the maximum operating pressure,
unless it can be determined that no undue hazard to
841.4 Commissioning of Facilities
used sha II be capable of disclos- 841.4.1 General. Written shall be estab-
ing all leaks in the section tested and shall be lished for Procedures shall consider the
selected after giving due consideration to the volumetric characteristics of the gas to be the need to
content of the section cll1d to its location. This isolate the from other connected facilities, and
the exercise of and experienced the the constructed to those
rather than numerical bJe for its operation.
(c) In all cases where a line is to be stressed in a Commissioning devices, and fluids shall
test to a hoop stress level of 20°/', or more be selected to ensure that is introduced into the
mll11mUm strength of the system that will be incompatible with the
and gas or air is the test medium, a leak test shall be to be transported, or with the materials in the
made at a pressure in the range from 100 kPa)
to that required to produce a hoop stress of 20% of the 841.4.2 Cleaning and Drying Procedures. Consider-
minimum yield, or the line shall be walked ation shall be to the need for and
while the hoop stress is held at approximately 20% of the pipe and its components
the minimum yield, removal of the test medium.

50
 ASME 831.8-2014

(d) Allowable Thickness for Ductile Iron Pipe, The least

841.4.3 functional Testing of Equipment and ductile iron pipe thicknesses permitted are the lightest
As a part of commissioning, all pipeline and standard class for each nominal pipe size as shown in
compressor station monitor and control and ANSI A21.52. Standard wall thicknesses for
shall be fully 250 (1720 kPa) maximum working pressure and
safety such as laying conditions at several depths of cover
flow-monitoring and emergency are shown in Table 842.1.1-1.
shut-down Consideration should also be (e) Duclile 11'011 Pipe
to performing a final test of pipeline valves before the (1) Meclw 11 ienl lo! 111 s. Duc tile iron
gas is introduced to ensure that each valve is mechanical shall conform to the
ANSI A21.52 and ANSI/ AWWA
Mechanical joints shall be assembled in accordance with
841.4.4 Start-Up Procedures and Introduction of
"Notes on Installation of Mechanical in
Transported Gas. Written start-up procedures shall be
ANSI! AWWA 1l.
prepared before the gas into the
(2) Oilier 10i11/s. Ductile iron
and shall following:
with other of
(n) the be mechanically and
qualified meet the appropriate
operational
Code. Such joints shall be assembled in accordance with
(b) all functional tests be performed and accepted
standards or in accordance with the manufac-
(c) all necessary safety be operational turer's written recommendations.
(d) be available (3) Threaded The use of threaded joints to
(e) a communications be established lengths of ductile iron is not recommended.
if) transfer of the completed pipeline to those
for its 842.1.2 Installation of Ductile Iron Pipe
(a) Laying. Ductile iron pipe shall be laid in accor-
841.4.5 Documentation and Records. The dance with the field conditions described in
records shall be maintained as perma- ANSI/AWWA
nent records: (b) Cover. Underground ductile iron pipe shall be
(a) and procedures installed with a minimum cover of24 in, (610 mm) unless
(b) cleaning and drying results prevented by other underground structures. Where suf-
(c) records of pipeline monitoring ficient cover cannot be provided to protect the from
external loads or damage and the pipe is not
to withstand such external loads, the shall be cased
or to the
(c) loilll Reslmillf. Suitable or
842 OTHER MATERIALS shaLl be at points where the main deviates
842.1 Ductile Iron Piping Systems Requirements straight line and the thrust, if not restrained,
the
(14) 842.1.1 Ductile Iron Pipe Ductile Iron Field Ductile iron
(a) Deterlllination of conform to para. 842.1.1 (e) and
iron pipe shall be in accordance with the meth- assembled to American National
ods set forth in ANSI! AWWA Cl50/ A21.50. Standards or in accordance with the manufacturer's
(b) Allowable Vailies of s alld f The values of written recommendations.
hoop stress,s, and bending at the bottom
842.1.3 Testing Ductile Iron Field Joints. Ductile
of the pipe, to be used in the equations given in
iron pipe joints shall be leak tested in accordance with
ANSI/ AWWA are
para, 841.3.4 or 841.3.5.
s 16,800 psi (116 MPa)
842.2 Design of Plastic Piping
f = 36,()()0 (248 MPa)
Geileml Provisions. The of this sec-
(c) Sialldard Ductile Iron and tion are intended to limit the use of plastic piping pri-
ANSI A21.52. Ductile iron pipe shall be (60-42-10) marily to mains and service lines in I PVC
and shall conform to all of ANSI A21.52. (polyvinyl chloride) distribution operating at
Grade ductile iron has the following mechani- a pressure of 100 (690 kPa) or PE (polyethylene)
cal properties: distribution systems at a pressure of 125
Minimum tensile 60,000 psi (414 MPa)
Minimum strength 42,000 psi (290 M Pa) 1 Under ASTM D2513, PVC
Minimum elongation 10% and milintemlllce of existing

51
'An"";,,,h, © 2014 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table 842.1.1-1 Standard Thickness Selection Table for Ductile Iron Pipe
---.
Thickness, in. (mm), for
Nominal Pipe Laying
Size, NPS (ON) Condition 5 8 12 16 20 24

3 (75) A 0,28(7,1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7,1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7,1) 0.28 (7.1)
B 0.28 (7.1) 0,28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0,28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1) 0.28 (7.1)

4 (100) A 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4)
B 0.29 (7,4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4) 0.29 (7,4) 0,29 (7.4) 0.29 (7.4)

6 (150) A 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9)
B 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9) 0.31 (7.9)

8 (200) A 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4)
B 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8.4) 0.33 (8,4) 0.33 (8.") 0.33 (8.4)

10 (250) A 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0,38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7)
B 0.35 (8,9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0.35 (8.9) 0,38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7)

12 (300) A 0.37 (9.") 0.37 (9.4) 0.37 (9.4) 0,37 (9.4) 0.37 (9.4) 0.37 (9.4) 0.40 (10,2) 0.43 (10,9)
B 0.37 (9.4) 0.37 (9.4) 0,37 (9.4) 0.37 (9.4) 0.37 (9,") 0.37 (9,4) 0."0 (10.2) 0."0 (10.2)

14 (350) A 0.36 (9.1) 0.36 (9,1) 0.36 (9.1) 0,36 (9.1) 0.39 (9.9) 0.42 (10.7) 0.45 (11.4) 0.45 (1 U)
B 0.36 (9.1) 0.36 (9.1) 0.36 (9.1) 0.36 (9.1) 0.36 (9.1) 0.42 (10.7) 0.42 (10.7) 0.45 (11.4)

16 (400) A 0,37 (9,4) 0.37 (9,4) 0,37 (9.4) 0.37 (9.4) OAO (10.2) 0.43 (10.9) 0.46 (11.7) 0.49 (12,4)
B 0.37 (9.") 0.37 (9.4) 0.37 (9.") 0.37 (9.4) 0.40 (10.2) 0.43 (10.9) 0.46 (11.7) OM (12.4)

18 (450) A 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0,41 (10,4) 0,47 (11.9) 0.50 (12.7) 0.53 (13.5)
B 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.41 (lOA) 0,44 (11.2) 0,47 (11.9) 0.53 (13.5)

20 (500) A 0,39 (9.9) 0.39 (9.9) 0.39 (9.9) 0.39 (9.9) 0.45 (11.4) 0.48 (12.2) 0.54 (13.7)
B 0.39 (9.9) 0.39 (9.9) 0.39 (9.9) 0.39 (9.9) 0,42 (10.7) 0.48 (12.2) 0.51 (13.0)

24 (600) A 0.44 (11.2) 0.41 (10.") 0.41 (10.4) 0.44 (11.2) 0.50 (12.7) 0,56 (14.2)
B 0.41 (7,9) 0.41 (7.9) 0.41 (7.9) 0.41 (7.9) 0.47 (11.9) 0.53 (13.5)

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) This Table Is taken from ANSI A21.52.
(b) Laying Condition A: flat-bottom trench without blocks, unlamped backfill,
(cl Laying Condition B: fiat-bottom trench without blocks, tamped backfill.
(d) The thicknesses in this Table are equal to or in excess of those required to withstand 250 psi (1 720 kPa) working pressure,
(el All thicknesses shown In this Table for the depths of cover indicated are adequate for trench loads, Including truck superloads.
(I) For the basis of design, see ANSI/AWWA C150/A21.50.
(g) Thread engagement in taps for service connections and bag holes may require consideration in selecting pipe thicknesses, See
Appendix of ANSI A21.52.

52
© 20 14 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of til is material withollt writ1en consent
 ASME B31.8-2014

kPa) or less, and PA-l1 (polyamide 11) distribution with the listed For all other RTP
systems operating at up to the pressure use 11,000
of the material as the formulas in SDR == standard dimension ratio, the ratio of the aver-
para. 841.2.1 For other applications in Class 1 or 2 age outside diameter to the minimum
Locations, be used within the limita- wall to a
tions Plastic shall meet value from a common numbering that
the listed in Mandatory was derived from the American National
Standards Institute number series 10.
In the case of RTP SOR is the ratio of
(14) 842.2.1 Plastic Pipe and Tubing Design Formula.
the average outside of the reinforced
The design pressure for plastic gas piping or
thermoset to the minimum specified wall
the nominal wall thickness for a design
thickness of the reinforced thermoset DR
to the limitations in para. 842.2,2) shall
may be substituted for SOR in this calculation
mined by the following formulas:
when the dimension ratio is not an above
(U,S. Units) defined "standard" dimension ratio.
wall in, (mm), in the case
p wall thickness of the

or NOTE: Long-term at 73°F (23°C) for the plas-

tic materials whose specifications are incorporated by reference
2St herein 1\re given in Mandlltory D,
p = x
842.2.2 Thermoplastic Design limitations
(51 Units) (n) as provided in (e) and the
I \ sure may not exceed a gage pressure of 100
Ip = 20005
x Df) for plastic pipe used in
\ I (J) distribution ""'<TPlrn;.;
(2) Location Classes 3 and 4
or
(b) Plastic shall not be used where the
pipe will be
below -40°F In no case shall the
or piping
where the manufacturer's recommended
D == or piping component,
(2) above the at which the HOB used
the in the formula is determined.
thermoset (c) The value of I for pipe shall not be
factor == 0,32 or OAO for PA-II. The less than that shown in Table 842,2,2-l.
design factor is a number less than or to (d) For service connections made by heat
that is multiplied the calculated maximum fusion it may be necessary for some materi-
pressure to obtain the als that are intended for use at high operating
DR dimension ratio, the ratio average to require a heavier wall thickness than
fied outside diameter to the specified minimum pressure formula for sizes NPS 2
wall thickness smaller. Manufacturers of the
p design pressure, should be contacted for
S for thermoplastic design basis shall be used.
(HOB) determined in accordance with (e) The pressure for PE pipe may exceed a
ASTM 02837 at a to 73°F gage pressure 100 (689 provided that
lOO°F or 140°F (1) the design pressure does not exceed 125 psig
(60 o q. In the absence of a HOB established at kPa)
the the HOB of a the material is a PE material as within
may be used in determining a ASTM 02513
design pressure rating at the """,,-u,,,,,, rpnnn<'I'>l- (3) the or smaller
ture arithmetic interpolation using the proce- (4) the pressure is determined in accordance
dure in Part 0.2 of PPI TR-3, For RTP NPS with the design defined in para. 842.2.1
6 150) and used in Class 1 and 2 Polyamide-ll (PA-l1) pipe may be at
locations, the HOB determined in accordance pressures up to its design pressure as determined in

53
 ASME 831,8·2014

Table 842.2.2-1 Wall Thickness and Standard Dimension Ratio for

Thermoplastic Pipe
Outside Minimum Wall Thickness, In. (mm), for Standard Dimension Ratio, R
Nominal Pipe Diameter,
Size, NPS (ON) In, (mm) 26 21 17 13.5 11

% (15) 0.840 (21.3) 0.062 (1.57) 0.076 (1.93)

% (20) 1.050 (26.7) 0,095 (2,41)
1 (25) 1.315 (33.4) 0,119 (3,02)
(32) 1.660 (42.2) (3.12) 0.151 (3.84)
1 (40) 1.900 (48.3) (3.58) 0.173 (4.39)
2 (50) 2.375 (60.3) (4.4 7) 0,216 (5.49)
(65) 2,875 (73.0) 0.110 (2.79) 0.137 (3.48) 0.169 (4.29) 0.213 (5.41)
3 (75) 3,500 (88.9) 0.135 (3.43) 0.167 (4.24) 0.206 (5.23) 0.259 (6.58)
(90) 4.000 (101.6) 0.154 (3.91) 0.190 (4.83) 0.236 (5.99) 0,296 (7.52)
4 (100) 4.500 (114.3) 0.173 (4.39) 0,214 (5.44) 0.264 (6.71) 0.333 (8.46)
5 (125) 5.563 (141.3) 0.224 (5.69) 0,265 (6.73) 0.328 (8.33) 0.413 (10.49)
6 (150) 6.625 (168.3) 0,255 (6.48) 0.316 (8.03) 0.390 (9.91) 0.491 (12.47)

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Standard Dimension Ratio. The Standard Dimension Ratio System enables the user to select a number of different sizes of pipe for a
piping system, all of which will have the same design pressure. When plastic materials of the same design strengths are used, the
same Standard Dimension Ratio may be used for all sizes of pipe instead of calculating a value of t for each size.
(b) Wall thicknesses above the line are minimum values and are not a function of the Standard Dimension Ratio.

Table 842.2.3-1 Diameter and Wall Thickness for value as the maximum pressure of the corres-
Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic Pipe pipe size and wall as indicated in the
Nominal Pipe Size, Outside Diameter, Minimum Thickness,
referenced standard for the fittings and as determined
NPS (DN) in. (mm) in. (mm) in paras. 842.2,1 and 842,2,2. The manufacturer should
be consulted for advice on maximum pressure ratings
2 (50) 2.375 (60.3) 0.060 (1.52) for not covered by referenced standards,
3 (75) 3.500 (88.9) 0.060 (1.52)
4 (100) 4.500 (114.3) 0.070 (1.78) 842.2.5 Valves in Plastic Piping
6 (150) 6.625 (168.3) 0.100 (2.54) (11) Valves in be made of any suit·
able materiill by this Code. Ther-
moplastic valves comply with ASTM D2513 and
ASME 816.40.
accordance with the design equation defined in
para. 842.2.1.
~~ e~~
842.2.3 Reinforced Thermosetting Plastic (RTP) sive torsional or shearing loads when the valve or shutoff
Design limitations and from any other stresses that
(11) The value of P for RTP mains and service lines in be exerted the valve or its enclosure.
distribution in Class 3 and 4 Locations shall not
842.2.6 Protection From Hazards.
exceed 100 (689 kPa) as in (d).
Shilll conform to the applicable
(b) Reinforced plastic pipe and fittings
para. 841.1.10.
will
842.2.7 Cover and Casing Requirements Under
recommended by the manufacturer, up to 180°F Railroads, Roads, Streets, or Highways. Plastic
(c) The wall thickness for RTP shall not be less shall conform to the icable
than that listed in Table 842.2.3·1. paras.841.1.1 and (d).
(d) RTP pipe may be operated at pressures up to its cased or bridged, suitable
pressure as determined in accordance with the crushing or also
in para. 842.2.1.
842.2.4 Pressure of Plastic Fittings. The 842.2.8 Clearance Between Mains and Other
maximum pressure for fittings shall be the same Underground Structures. Plilstic piping shall conform

54
 ASME B31.8·2014

to the applicable of para. 841.Lll(c). Suffi- (3) The surfaces must be dry, and free
cient clearance shall be maintained between plastic pip- of material that may be deterimental to the joint.
and steam, hot water, or power lines and other (4) Solvent cements that conform to ASTM D2513
sources of heat to and are recommended by the or tubing manufac-
excess of the limitations of para. 842.2.2(b) or turer shall be used to make cemented joints.
842.2.9 Plastic and Tubing Joints and (5) A uniform of the solvent cement is
Connections on both mating surfaces. After the joint is made,
(£I) General Provisions. Plastic tubing, and fit- excess cement shall be removed from the outside of
tings may by the solvent cement method, adhe- the joint. The joint shal! not be disturbed until it has
sive method, heat-fusion method, or by means of properly set.
couplings or The method used
(6) The solvent cement and piping to
must compatible with the materials being The
be joined may be conditioned prior to by
recommendations of the manufacturer shall be consid-
if done in accordance with the manufacturer's
ered when the method to be used.
recommendations.
(b) !oillt Requirements
(1) or tubing shall not be threaded. A solvent cement joint shall not be heated to
(2) Solvent cement adhesive joints, and heat- accelerate the of the cement.
fusion joints shall be made in accordance with qualified (8) requirements in Appendix A of
procedures that have been established and proven by ASTM D2513 shall be followed when solvent cements
test to produce at least as as the are used.
pipe or tubing jOined. (d) Heat-Fusion Joints
(3) shall be made by personnel qualified by
(1) Sound butt heat-fusion joints the use of
PY"'lP"jp'1rp in the proper
a jointing device that holds the heater element square
for the type joint involved.
to the ends of the piping, can compress the heated ends
(4) Solvent cement shall be used only on PVC
together, and holds the piping in proper while
(5) Heat-fusion or mechanical joints shall be used
the hardens.
when joining polyethylene or polyamide 11 pipe,
or fittings. PA-ll components may be joined to PA-ll (2) Sound socket heat-fusion joints the use
components, and PE components may be joined to of a device that heats the surfaces of the
PE PE and PA-ll shall not joint uniformly and simultaneously to the
be to each other. same temperature. The completed joint must not be dis-
made of different of materials may be turbed until properly set,
provided that properly for joining (.3) Care must be used in the operation to
the components are used. combination of to the plastic material from "",,,'n,,:>,
PE materials with an ASTM D2513, Table 4, or having the material not heated to ensure
Category, melt index C may be heat a sound Direct application of heat with a torch or
fusion such as those detailed in PPI TR-33. other open flame is prohibited.
The Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI) the following
(4) When to
two heat-fusion for PE:
NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, see para. '_'_'_\~I to mini-
(-a) TR-33, Generic Butt Fusion
mize the possibility of failures.
for Polyethylene Gas Piping
(-b) TR-41, Generic Saddle Fusion 10i (e) Adhesive !oillts
Procedure for Gas Piping (1) Adhesives that conform to ASTM D2517 and
Fusion of PE components with different melt catego- are recommended by the tubing, or fitting manu-
ries may "dissimilar fusion" pro- facturer shall be used to make adhesive bonded
vided by the manufacturer. (2) When dissimilar materials are bonded
(6) joints may be used a thorough shall be made to determine
they are and used in accordance with that the materials and adhesive used are compatible
the appropriate of this Code,
with each other.
(c) Solvelll Cement !oillis
(3) An adhesive bonded may be heated in
(1) cut ends free of burrs are for a
proper joint. accordance with the manufacturer's recommenda-
(2) fit between the or tubing and mat- tion to accelerate cure.
ing socket or sleeve is to a joint. Sound (4) Provisions shall be made to clamp or otherwise
cannot normally be made between loose or very materials from until the adhe-
tight-fi tting components. sive is properly set.

55
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without written
 ASME B31,8-2014

if) Mechal1ical Joints 3 Table 842.2.9-1 Nominal Values for

(1) When compression-type mechanical joints are Coefficients of Thermal Expansion of
the elastomeric material in the fitting shall Thermoplastic Pipe Materials
be compatible with the plastic the plastic and the --------- ~-----

Nominal
elastomer shall not cause deterioration in one another's Coefficients of
chemical and physical over a period), Thermal Expansion
(2) The tubular stiffener to reinforce the General ASTM D696,
end of the pipe or tubing shall extend at least under Material x 10- 5 in./in,f°F
Designation (x 10- 5 mm/mmJ"C)
that section of the pipe the
or material. The rough PA 32312 (PM1) 8,5 (4,3)
or and shall not be a force fit in the pipe PE 2406 9,0 (5,0)
or tube, Split tubular fittings shall not be used, PE 2606 10,0 (5,6)
(3) Since pull-out resistance of r,.,,-n,~,.c>c PE 2706 10,0 (5,6)
fittings varies with and all joints PE 2708 10,0 (5,6)
PE 3408 9,0 (5.0)
shall be installed to effectively sustain the PE 3608 9,0 (5.0)
pull-out forces caused by contraction of the PE 3708 9,0 (5,0)
or by maximum anticipated external PE 3710 9,0 (5,0)
installation shall be designed and made to minimize PE 4708 9,0 (5,0)
these forces as follows: PE 4710 9,0 (5,0)
(-a) In the case of direct burial when the PVC 1120 ],0 (1.7)
PVC 1220 3.5 (1.9)
the pipe may be snaked in the
PVC 2116 4,0 (2,2)
(-b) In the case of Lnstalled by insertion in -------- -~-- ------
the shall be rather than pulled into GENERAL NOTES:
so as to it in rather than tension, (a) Individual compounds may differ from values in this Table as
(-c) Allowance shall be made for thermal expan- much as :!:10%, More exact values for specific commercial
sion and contraction due to seasonal in ,an"~"'r"_ products may be obtained from the manufacturers,
(b) Abbreviations: PA~ 11 polyamide 11, PE = polyethylene,
ture of installed pipe, The this allowance
PVC = polyvinyl chloride.
increases as the of the installation increases, Such
allowance is of paramount importance when the plastic
is used for insertion renewal inside another
it is not restrained by earth This
ance may be by appropriate combina- 842.3.2 Inspection and Handling Provisions. Plastic
tions of components are to damage by mis-
(-1) offsets cuts, kinks, or other forms of damage
(-2) anchoring may cause failure. Care shall be exercised during han-
aligning the pipe and dling and installation to such
(-4) in the case of fittings the (a) Plastic andtubingshallbecarefully
use of types and of the pipe in for cuts, gouges, and other
before use, and any pipe or tubing
or shal! be
pull-out (b) Each installation shall be field
which may harmful found
be in Table 842,2.9-1, shall be eliminated,
(e) Skillful techniques and the
842.3 Installation of Plastic Piping
condi-
842.3.1 Construction Specifications. All construc- to achieve sound joints in piping
on the solvent cement, or heat fusion methods,
with the of shall be checked visually, If there
construction specifications, The construction specifica- is any reason to believe the is defective, it shall be
tions shall cover the of this Code and shall removed and
be in sufficient detail to ensure propel' installation, (d) Care shall be exercised to avoid rough handling
of pipe and It shall not be or
Refer to the current editions of the AGA No, XR0104, over sharp or or it shall not
Plns/ie Mnllunl GIIS Service; ASTM 3; ANSI! have other on it. Care shall be taken to
GPTC G/lide GIIS Tral1slIIissioll (1I1d Disirifllllhm
of pipe and prevent kinking or buckling, and any kinks or buckles
that occur shal! be removed by cutting out as a cylinder,

56
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent
 ASME B31.8-2014

(e) Care shall be exercised at all times to the (4) When long sections of piping that have been
plastic material from excessive or harmful assembled the ditch are lowered in, care shall
chemicals. be exercised to avoid any strains that may overstress or
if) Plastic and tubing shall be buckle the piping or impose excessive stress on the joints.
during storage. Thermoplastic pipe, (5) Backfilling shall be performed in a manner to
shall be from long-term exposure to firm around the piping, The material
direct sunlight. used for shall be free of
of
842.3.3 Installation Provisions the pipe.
(a) Abovegrollnd Instlll/alion, Plastic (6) Where flooding of the trench is done to consoli-
installed if it is one of the date the backfill, care shall be exercised to see that the
(1) encased in metal pipe that is n~,'"\t"rt~.rl is not floated from its firm on the trench
atmospheric corrosion; bottom.
(e,g" high-temperature (7) A method of piping
external damage is required. A common method is the installa-
(2) installed on a bridge in accordance with tion of electrically conductive such as tracer
GRI Report 00/0154, Guide for Across coated metallic tape with the pipe
it with an electronic pipe locator,
(3) installed for service lines as methods may be used.
in para. 849.4.2(b)
Plastic pipe shall not be used to support external
loads. Encased shall be able to withstand necessary to remove any
without or abrasive material that could " " f l l r I V P
below the design limitations and after insertion.
stated in paras. 842.2.2 and 842.2.3, When nr()tp('t, (2) Plastic or tubing shall be inserted into the
against external consideration in a manner so as to the
to the need to isolate the encased during installation. The end of the
vent or contain gas that may escape the plastic pipe in shall be closed before insertion. Care shall be taken to
the event of a leak or prevent the piping from on the end of
(/J) Belowgrolilld lns/alla/iol/, Plastic piping shall not the casing.
be installed in vaults or any other below-grade enclosure (3) The portion of the plastic
unless it is encased in gas-tight metal to the removal of a section of the
and metal corrosion protection. sufficient strength to withstand the
(e) Stresses. shall be installed in such a loading, or it shall be protected with a suitable
way that shear or tensile stresses from con- of withstanding the anticipated
struction, backfill, thermal contraction, or external load-
ing are minimized, para. piping that
(d) Direc! Burial protected a
(1) buried thermoplastic or tubing piece or other means from crushing or shearing from
shall have a minimum wall thickness of external loading or settling of backfill,
0.090 in, in all sizes NPS ~ (DN (5) The piping shall be installed to for pos-
pipe and NPS % and smaller nominal diameter sible contraction, Cooling may be necessary before the
which shall have a minimum wall thickness of last connection is made when the has been installed
0,062 in. (1,6 mm). in hot or warm weather. para, 842.2.9(f).]
(2) Plastic piping shall be laid on undisturbed or (6) If water accumulates between the
well-compacted soil. If piping is to be laid in the carrier pipe where it may be subjected to
soils that may it, the piping shall be temperatures, the carrier pipe can be constricted to
by suitable rock-free materials before backfilling is com- point where the capacity is affected or the wall
pleted, Plastic shall not be blocking, could be crushed and leak, To avoid this, one or more
Well-tamped earth or other continuous shall of the following shall be taken:
be used. (-II) The annulus between the carrier and
(3) The shall be installed with sufficient shall be to a minimum so that the increased
slack to provide for contraction, Cooling may to ice will be insufficient to
be necessary before the last connection is made crush the carrier pipe,
under re conditions, (-b) draining for the shall be
para. 842.2.9(f),]

57
 ASME 831.8·2014

(-c) Filler such as foam shall be inserted into the 842.4 Testing Plastic Piping After Construction
annulus between the and the carrier pipe.
842.4.1 General Provisions
(f) Trenchless Illstalliltions - Plllstic Pipe. For general
installation see para. 841.1.9(j). In addi- (11)Pressure Testing. All
tion, the following measures shall also be taken for sure tested after construction and being
trenchless installations of plastic in operation to demonstrate that it does not
(1) Protecting Pipe (b) Tie-lns. Because it is sometimes necessary to
(-a) Precautions shall be taken to avoid
divide a or main into sections for and
or pulling the string over piping, and other neces-
or abrasive surfaces that may damage the pipe during sary appurtenances, it is not that the tie-in
installation. sections of be tested. The tie-in
(-b) Visual pipe surface shall be
and after installation. This 842.4.2 Test Requirements
would any sections at the pulling (a) The test including the duration
head and at holes dug for test pits, and branch of the test, of disclosing all leaks in the
or service connections. If damage scratches, section tested and shall be selected after
!'.V'''!'.'''''', etc.) exceeds 10% of the nominal wall due consideration to the volumetric content of
the pipe shall be in its entirety. tion and its location.
(-c) Measures shall be taken to prevent over- (b) piping shall not be tested at mate-
pipe during trenchless installations. above 140°F (60°C), and reinforced
These measures may include monitoring of the pulling plastic piping shall not be tested at mate-
use of a weak link at the pulling head, or other above 150°F The duration of
methods. For further information, see Handbook of above 100°F (38°C), how-
Pipe. ever, shall not exceed 96
(-d) For locating the pipe with an electronic pipe Sufficient time for joints to "set" properly must be
10catOl~ a tracer wire shall be pulled in with the piping, allowed before the test is initiated.
but with minimal contact with the pipe. (d) Plastic and mains shall be tested at a
(2) Additional Evaluation Measures. The minimum pressure not than 15 times the maximum
and pressure or 50 (340 kPa), whichever is
elsewhere in this that
842.3.4 Bends and Branches. (1) the test
may be made wi th tees, or plastic piping
following limitations: sure of the
(11) Plastic pipe and tubing may be deflected to a (2) the test pressure for
radius not less than the minimum recommended the not exceed 3.0 times the
manufacturer for the kind, type, wall thickness,
and diameter of the particular used.
The bends shall be free of cracks, or other
evidence of air, or water may be used as the test medium.
(c) in direction that cannot be made in accor-
842.4.3 Safety During Tests. All testing after con-
dance with (a) above shall be made with elbow-type
struction shall be done with due for the safety
of and the public during the test.
Field-fabricated miter fittings are not permitted.
(e) Branch connections shall be made only with
842.5 Copper Mains
tees or other suitable specifically
the purpose, 842.5.1 Design of Copper Mains
842.3.5 Field Repairs of and Punctures. (a) Reqllirelllenfs. When used for gas mains, copper
Injurious gouges or pipe or tubing shall conform to the following
out and replacing the portion as a cylinder
in accordance with para. 852.5.2. or tubing shall not be used for
mains where the pressure exceeds 100 (690 kPa).
842.3.6 Hot Taps. All hot taps shall be installed by (2) Copper or tubing shall not be used for
trained and crews. mains where the gas carried contains more than an aver-
842.3.7 Purging. Purging of plastic mains and ser- age of 0.3 grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100 standard
vice lines sha II be done in accordance wi th the applicable cubic feet (2.8 of gas. This is equivalent to a trace
provisions of paras, and (f). as determined by a lead acetate test.

58
 ASME B31.8-2014

(3) Copper tubing or for mains shall have a Individual catwalks shall not
minimum wall thickness 0.065 in. (1.65 mm) and shall Exits of each such building may be fixed stair-
be hard drawn. ways, etc. The maximum distance from any point on an
(4) pipe or tubing shall not be used for floor to an exit shall not exceed 75 ft (23 m),
mains where strain or external loading may the measured along the centerline of aisles or walkways.
piping. Exits shall be unobstructed located so as to
(IJ) Valves in Copper Piping. Valves installed in copper provide a convenient of escape and shall pro-
lines may be made of any suitable material vide unobstructed passage to a of Door
by this Code. latches shall be of a type that can be
(c) Fiflings in Copper Piping. It is recommended that the inside without a key. All in
in copper piping and 0",,,,\,,,,,,£1 an exterior wall shall
as service tees, pressure etc., be made 843.1.4 Fenced Areas. Any fence that may
of bronze, copper, or brass.
or escape of persons from the vicinity of a com-
(d) Joints in Pipe alld 'nlbing. pressor station in an emergency shall be with
be or a minimum of two These
joint. The filler material used so as to provide a convenient opportunity for
alloy or silver a place of Any such gates located wi
for 200 ft m) of any compressor plant building shall
tubing shall not open outward and shall be unlocked (or of being
pipe wall thickness equivalent from the inside without a key) the area
size of Schedule 40 steel i.e., within the enclosure is Alternatively, other
from 0.068 in. mm) for NPS Ys (DN 6) to facilities affording a similarly convenient exit from the
0.406 in. (10.31 mm) for NPS 12 (DN 300), may be area may be provided.
threaded and used for connecting screwed fittings or
valves. 843.2 Electrical Facilities
(e) Protection Against Galvallic Corrosion. Provision All electrical equipment and wiring installed in gas
shall be made to harmful action where transmission and distribution stations shall
copper is connected to steel. conform to the requirements of 70, insofar as the
para. 861.1.3(a).J commerCially available permits.
842.5.2 Testing of Copper Mains After Construction. installations in hazardous locations as
All copper mains shall be tested after construction in defined in NFPA 70 and that are to remain in
accordance with the provisions of para. 8413.5. during compressor station emergency shutdown ClS pro-
vided in para. 843.3.3(a)(1) shall be designed to conform
to NFPA 70 for Class r, Division 1
843 COMPRESSOR STATIONS
843.1 Compressor Station Design 843.3 Compressor Station Equipment

843.1.1 location of Compressor 843.3.1 Gas Treating Facilities (14)

for offshore the main NnY'l"rp""nr (a) Uq1lid Removal. When condensable vapors are
compressor stations should be at such in the gas stream in sufficient quantity to liquefy
from property not under control of under the pressure and condi-
as to minimize the hazard of tions, the suction stream to each
communication of to the compressor building from to each unit for centrifugal rAynn"'p<:"",,
structures on adjacent property. Sufficient open space the introduction of
should be around the building to permit the ties of entrained liquids into the compressor.
uid used for this shall be
with manually for removal liquids
843.1.2 Building Construction. All compressor sta-
therefrom. ln addition, automatic liquid removal facili-
tion buildings that house gas piping in sizes than
ties, an automatic compressor shutdown
NPS 2 (ON 50) or equipment handling gas (except equip- high liquid level alarm shall be used where
ment for domestic shall be constructed of
liquid might be carried into the compressors.
noncombustible or limited combustible materials as
(b) Liq1lid Removal Equipmellt. Liquid separators shall
defined in NFPA 220.
be manufactured in accordance with Section VIII of the
843.1.3 Exits. A minimum of two exits shall be ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
provided for each floor of a main compressor separators constructed of and fittings no inter-
building, basements, and any elevated walkway or nal welding may be constructed in accordance with
form 10 ft (3 or more above ground or floor ASME 831.8 utilizing a factor of 0.4.

59
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
may be made of this matcl'ialwitholit written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

843.3.2 Fire Protection. Fire protection facilities established by the is

should be in accordance with the American exceeded.
Insurance Association's recommendations. If the fire
843.3.4 Pressure-limiting Requirements In
are a part of such facilities, their operation shall
Compressor Stations
affected by emergency shutdown facilities.
(a) Pressllre l~elief. Pressure relief or other suitable
843.3.3 Safety Devices protective devices of sufficient and sensitivity
(n) Emergency Shutdowll Fncililies shall be installed and to ensure that the
(1) as noted or clarified in through maximum allowable operating pressure of the station
(a)(4), compressor station shall be provided with an piping and equipment is not exceeded by more than
emergency shutdown by meilns of which the gilS 10%.
can be blocked out station and the station gas (b) Pressllre Relief Valves. A pressure relief valve or
blown down. Operation of the emergency shut- device, such as a pressure switch or
also shall cause the shutdown of all gilS device, shall be installed in the line
equipment and illl dl~;Pl;~CE!m,mt transmission compressor
this shall 0"""0;'70 and the first block
is the primary "',"'""WC)
compressor room, emergency shall be equal to
lighting for personnel protection and those that are nec-
essary for of The emergency shut-
down shall be from anyone of at least
two locations outside gas area of the station,
near exit gates in the station but not more than
500 ft (150 m) from the limits of the stations. Blowdown
shall extend to a location where the of Code.
gas is not to creilte a hazard to the compressor (e) Venting. Vent lines provided to exhaust the
station or surrounding area. from the pressure relief valves to atmosphere shall
(2) Unattended field compressor stations of extended to a location where the gas be discharged
1,000 hp (746 kW) and less are excluded from the without undue hazard. Vent lines have sufficient
sions of (a)(1). so that they will not inhibit the n<>crr.l'rn
(3) Each compressor station supplying gas directly relief valve. For additional considerations,
to a distribution shall be provided with emer- see para. 841.1
gency shutdown located outside the compres- 843.3.5 Fuel Gas Control. An automatic device
sor station buildings by means of which all gas can be designed to shut off the fuel gas when the
blocked out of the station, provided there is another shall be provided on each gas engine
adequate for the distribution system. These gas injection. The distribution manifold
shutdown facilities can be either automatic or manually vented simultaneously.
as local conditions When no other
source is available, no shutdown facilities that 843.3.6 Cooling and lubrication Failures. All gas
at the wrong time and cause an on the compressor units shall be equipped with shutdown or
distribution shall be installed. alarm devices to in the event of eool-
(4) the in (a )(2) and or lubrication of the units.
(a)(3), each compressor station handling gas that con- 843.3.7 Explosion Prevention
tains quantities or concentrations of hydrogen sulfide (n)Mufflers. The external shell of mufflers for
and/or liquids sufficient to an environmental using gas as fuel shall be in accordance with
or hazard shall be with an emergency good shall be constructed of
shutdown The emergency shutdown system ductile materials. It is recommended that all compart-
and automatic or manual blowdown processes and ments of the muffler be manufactured with vent slots
must be designed to the automatic or holes in the baffles to prevent gas from being trapped
of hydrogen sulfide, vapors; or free in the muffler.
into the in concentrations that may (b) Bllilding Venlilation. Ventilation shall be ample to
hazardous to the or the public. ensure that are not under normal
(b) Engine Overspeed Slops. compressor prime operating sllch abnormal conditions as a
electrical induction or synchronous blown gasket, packing gland, by accumulations
provided with an automatic device that of hazardous concentrations of flammable or noxious
to shut down the unit before the maximum vapors or gases in rooms, sumps, attics, pits, or similarly
mover or driven unit, as enclosed places, or in any portion thereof.

60
© 2014 by the American Society of Meclmnical
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

(c) Testing of Gas Piping. All piping within a com-

pressor station shall be tested installation in accor-
dance with the of para. 841.3 for
mains in Location Class 3, that small
installed in or in stations need not be tested where
cases where suitable conditions make it to test.
are made. (d) Identification of Valves and Piping. All emergency
(d) LPG Special Precautions. Special care is in valves and controls shall be identified The
the location of relief valve vents releasing LPG function of all important gas pressure piping shall be
to the to prevent accumulation of the heavy identified or color codes.
ground level.
843.4.2 Fuel Gas Piping. The following are
for
for applicable to compressor station fuel gas
ing only:
(a) All fuel gas lines within a compressor stRtion that
843.3.8 Gas Detection and Alarm Systems serve the various buildings and residential areas shall
(a) Each compressor building in a compressor station be with mRster shutoff valves located outside
where hazardous concentrations of gas may accumulate of any building or residential area.
shall have a fixed gas detection and alarm unless (b) The facilities for the fuel gas
the building is for a compressor station shall be with
(1) constructed so that at least 50% of its pressure-Ii devices to prevent the normal
open to the of the from being exceeded
forced or natural or 25%, or the maximum allowable
(2) in an unattended field compressor station IOGl- pressure more than 10%.
tion of 1,000 kW) or less and (c) Suitable shall be made to fuel
ventilated the power cylinders of iln and
(b) when shutdown of the system is necessary while work is in progress on the
for maintenance para. each gas detection or on driven the
and alarm by this section shall (d) All fuel gas used for domestic
(1) continuously monitor the compressor building pressor station that has an insufficient of its own
for a concentration of in air of not more than 25% to serve as a in the event of its escilpe shall be
of the lower odorized as in section 856.
(2) warn persons about to enter the and
843.4.3 Air Piping System
persons inside the of the danger if that concen-
(a) All air
tration of gas is eXlceE:dE'd
shall be
(c) The compressor building configuration shall be
volume, and size
considered in the number, and placement
to rotate the
of detectors and alarms.
and the number of
(d) Alium shall be unique and immediately
revolutions necessary to the fuel gas from the
considering background noise and
cylinder and The recommendations of
"''''CAn ""I who are inside or immediately outside
manufRcturer may be used as a in
compressor building.
these factors. Consideration should be
number of engines instil lied and to the
843.4 Compressor Station Piping
of to start severRI of these engines
843.4.1 Gas Piping. The following are pro- within a short of time.
visions applicable to all gas piping: A check valve shall be installed in the air
(a) Specifications for Gas All compressor sta- line near eRch back flow from the
tion gas piping, other than instru ment, control, and sam- engine into the air system. A check valve shall
ple piping, to and connections to the main also be in main air line on the immediate
shall of steel and use a F, outlet side of the Rir tank or tanks. It is recommended
per Table 841.1.6-2. Valves having shell components that for cooling the air Rnd the
made of ductile iron may be used to the limita- moisture and entrained oil be installed between the start-
tions in para. 831.1 ing Rir compressor and the air tanks.
(b) Ills/al/alioll of Gas Pipillg. The provisions of (d) Suitable provision shall be made to prevent start-
para. 841.2 shall apply where to gas air from the power of an engine
in compressor stations. Rnd while work is in progress

61
2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent
 ASME B31.8·2014

or on equipment driven by the engines. Table 844.3-1 Design Factors, F

means of accomplishing this are instaHing Factors, F
a blind flange, a portion of the air
For Minimum
or locking a stop valve and locking open
For Minimum Clearance Clearance Between
a vent downstream from it. Between Containers and Containers and Fenced
(e) Air receivers or air bottles for use in com- Holder Size Fenced Boundaries of Site Boundaries of Site of
pressor stations shall be constructed and in location of 25 It (7.6 m) to 100 It (30 m)
accordance with Section VIII of the BPV Class 100 ft (30 m) and Over
----~ ~-- •.. --~--------

843.4.4 Lubricating Oil Piping. All oil 1 on 0,72

within gas compressing stations shall be con- 2 0.60 0.72
3 0.60 0.60
in accordance with ASME B31.3.
4 0.40 0.40
--- .--~ ...--~.------- ---
843.4.5 Water Piping. All water within gas
stations shall be in accordance
ASME B31.1. Table 844.3-2 Minimum Clearance Between
843.4.6 Steam Piping. within gas Containers and Fenced Boundaries
stations shall be in accordance Maximum Operating Minimum
B31.1. Pressure, psig (kPa) Clearance, rt (m)

843.4.7 Hydraulic AU Less than 1,000 (6900) 25 (7.6)

ing within gas stations 1,000 (6 900) or more 100 (30)
in accordance with ASME B31.3.

(c) The minimum clearance between containers and

844 PIPE-lYPE AND BOTTLE-lYPE HOLDERS the fenced boundaries of the site is fixed by the maxi-
844.1 Holders in Rights-of-Way Not Under mum pressure of the holder as shown in
lable 844.3-2,
Exclusive Use and Control of the Operating
(d) The minimum clearance in inches (millimeters)
Company
between pipe containers or bottles shall be determined
A pipe-type holder that is to be installed in streets, the following formula:
highways, or in private not under the
exclusive control and use of company shall (U,S. Clls/oll1ary Units)
be installed, and tested in accordance with
the provisions of this Code applicable to a pipeline c == 3DPF
installed in the same location and at the same
maximum pressure. (SI Units)

844.2 Bottle-Type Holders

t-)()lcrlt"'-tVJ)P holders shall be located on land owned

or under the exclusive control and use of the where

company. C minimum clearance between pipe containers or
in. (mm)
844.3 Pipe-Type and Bottle-Type Holders on Property D outside diameter of container or bottle,
Under the Exclusive Use and Control of the in. (mm)
Operating Company F factor (b)
(a) The site shall be entirely surrounded with P maximum allowable operating pressure,
to prevent access by unauthorized persons. (kPa)
(b) A pipe-type or bottle-type holder that is to be
(e) Pipe containers shall be buried with the top of
installed on under the exclusive control and each container not less than 24 in. mm) below the
use of the shall be in accor- surface.
dance with construction factors. The selection of Bottles shall be buried with the top of each con-
these factors depends on the Location Class in which tainer below the normal frost line but in no case closer
the site is situated, the clearance between the pipe con- than 24 in. (610 to the surface.
tainers or bottles and the and the maximum holders shall be tested in accordance
operating pressure, as shown in Table 844.3-1. 841.3.2 for a located

62
Society of Mechanical
 ASME 831.8·2014

in the same Location Class as the holder site, 845 CONTROL AND LIMITING Of GAS PRESSURE
however, that in any case where the test pressure will 845.1 Basic Requirement for Protection Against
a hoop stress of 80% or more of the Accidental
minimum strength of the water shall
as the test medium. distribution customer's
meter and cOlulected facilities, compressor station,
holder, bottle-type holder, containers fabricated
844.4 Special Provisions Applicable to Bottle-Type
and fittings, and all equipment, if
Holders Only
to a compressor or to a gas source where the
A holder may be manufactured from steel failure of pressure control or other causes might result
that is not weldable under field subject to in a pressure that would exceed the maximum allowable
all of the following limitations: pressure of the facility to para. 805.2.1),
(a) holders made from shall be equipped with suitable or
meet the chemical and tensile the vari- devices.
ous of steel in ASTM A372. are set forth in para. 845.2.7.
(b) In no case shall the ratio of actual 845.2 Control and limiting of Gas Pressure
to actual tensile exceed 0.85.
(c) Welding shall not be performed on such bottles
845.2.1 Control and Limiting of Gas Pressure in
have been heat treated andlor stress Holders. Pipelines, and All Facilities That Might at Times
that it shall be to attach small copper Be Bottle Tight. Suitable types of protective devices to
wires to the small diameter of the bottle end prevent overpressuring of such facilities include
(a) relief valves of the
closure for cathodic purposes a local-
prOVISions Section VIII
ized thermit welding process (charge not to exceed 15
(b) pilot-loaded back-pressure
(d) Such bottles shall be given a test in
relief so designed that failure
the mill and need not be retested hydrostatically at the
or control lines will cause the
time of installation. The mill test pressure shall not be
(c) disks of the type
less than that required to a hoop stress
of BPV Section VIII, Division 1
to 85% of the
steel. Careful the time of 845.2.2 Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure for
installation shall bottle shall Steel or Plastic Pipelines or Mains. This pressure is by
be used. definition the maximum operating pressure to which
(e) Such bottles and piping shall be tested the pipeline or main may be subjected in accordance
for tightness after installation using air or gas at a pres- with the requirements of this Code. For a or
sure of 50 (340 kPa) above the maximum main, the maximum allowable pressure shall
pressure. not exceed the lesser of the following items:
(a) The design pressure (defined in para. 805.2.1) of
the weakest element of the or main.
844.5 General Provisions Applicable to Both Pipe-
that all fittings, and accessories in the line
Type and Bottle-Type Holders
have an pressure the maximum allow-
(a) No gas containing more than 0.1 able pressure of a or main shall be
sulfide per 100 standard cubic feet the determined in accordance with
stored when free water is or without para. 841.1.1 steel or para. 842.2 for
employing suitable means to identify, mitigate, or pre- (11) The pressure obtained by dividing the pressure to
vent detrimental internal corrosion. section 864.) which the pipeline or main is tested after construction
(b) Provision shall be made to the formation the appropriate factor for the Location Class involved,
or accumulation of in the holder, connecting as shown in Table 845.2.2-1.
and aUXiliary that cause corro- (c) The maximum safe pressure to which the
sion or interfere with the safe operation of the or main should be based on its
maintenance (for pipelines, see para.
Relief valves shall be installed in accordance with (d) When service lines are connected to the pipeline
capacity or main, the limitations set forth in paras. 845.2.4(c)(2)
to limit the pressure on the and (c)(5).
line and on the storage holder to 100% of the 845.2.3 Qualification of a Steel Pipeline or Main to
pressure of the holder or to the pressure that Establish the MAOP
a hoop stress of 75% of the mlllimum (a) Pipeline Operatillg at JOO psig (690 kPa) Of More.
yield strength of the steel, whichever is the lesser. This paragraph applies to natuxal gas

63
 ASME 831.8-2014

(14) Table 845.2.2-1 Maximum Allowable Operating Table 845.2.3-1 Maximum Allowable Operating
Pressure for Steel or Plastic Pipelines or Mains Pressure for Pipelines Operating at
---"---
Location Pressure for Steel Pressure for
100 psig (690 kPa) or More
((ass [Note (1)J Plastic location Maximum Allowable
Class Operating Pressure
1, Division 1
N,A, -----------
1, Division 1
1.25
Test pressure
1, Division 2
1.25 1.50
1, Division 2
Test pressure Test pressure
2
1.25 1.50
2
Tes!
3
1.50 1.50
3

4
1,50 1.50
4
NOTES:
(1) See para, 8/15.2.3 for test factors applicable to conversion of
pipelines With unknown factors,
(2) other factors should be used if the line was tested under the Table 845.2.3-2 Maximum Allowable Operating
special conditions described in paras, 841.3,2(d) and 0), and Pressure for Pipelines Operating at less Than
8/11.3.3, In such cases, use factors that are consistent with the
100 psig (690 kPa)
applicable requirements of these sections, ----.------ --- ---.- ..
location Maximum Allowable
Class Operating Pressure
----...:.

or to converted to natural gas

service where one or more factors of the steel
formula (see para, 841.1,1) is unknown, and the pipeline
is to be at 100 kPa) or more, The
maximum allowable shall be deter-
Test pressure
mined by the pipeline. 3
1.5
(1) The maximum allowable operating
shall be limited to the pressure obtained by
the pressure to which the or main is tested
the appropriate factor for the Location Class
as shown in Table 845,2,3-1.
(2) The test pressure to be used in the maximum
allowable operating calculation shall be the (b) Operating lit Less Thllil 100 (690 kPII) ,
test pressure at the high elevation point of the This applies to existing natural gas pipelines
~'r"n'''tn test section and shall not be higher or to pipelines converted to natural gas
required to produce a hoop stress equal service where one or more factors of the steel pipe
to the strength as determined by Only the formula para. 841.1.1) is lmknown, and the pipeline
first test to yield can be used to determine maximum is to be at less than 100 (690 The
allowable operating pressure. maximum allowable operating pressure shall be deter-
(3) Records of hydrostatic pressure tests and line mined by pressure the
shall be preserved as long as the facilities (1) The maximum allowable operating pressure
involved remain in service, shall be limited to the pressure obtained by dividing
(4) Determine that all valves, the pressure to which the or main is tested by
pressure rated have the appropriate factor for Location Class involved
(5) While the maximum pressure of a test used to
as shown in Table 845,2,3-2.
establish the maximum allowable (2) TIle test pressure to be used in the maximum
not limited by this allowable calculation shall be the
due caution should test pressure elevation point of the
mum test pressure. minimum strength test section and shall not be

64
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

to a hoop (410 kPa) if the service lines in the

to the as determined by Only the with series or other
can be used to determine maximum devices as in
pressure. para.
(3) Records of pressure tests and line repairs shall (3) 25 psig (170 kPa) in cast iron
be as as the facilities involved remain in caulked bell and spigot which have not been
service. with bell joint or other effective leak
(4) Determine th<lt all v<llves, methods
pressure r<lted components have (4) the pressure limits to which any joint could be
(5) Although the maximum pressure of a test uti- without possibility of parting
lized to establish the m<lximum allowable
(5) 2 (14 kPa) in distribution
sure is not limited by this
with service
above, due caution should
irPlmpnt" of para.
maximum test pressure.
an overpressure in
845.2.4 Control and limiting of Gas Pressure in para. 84S.2.7(b)
High-Pressure Steel, Ductile Iron, Cast Iron, or Plastic (6) the maximum safe pressure to which the
Distribution Systems should be subjected based on its operation and mainte-
(a) Each high-pressure distribution or main, nance
supplied from a source of that is at a pressure
than the maximum al pressure for the
845.2.5 Control and of Gas Pressu re in
shall be with pressure-regulating
low-Pressure Distribution Systems
devices of capacity and designed to meet the
load, and other service condi tions under which (a) Each distribution system or low-
will or to which they may be subjected. pressure main supplied from a gas source that is at a
(b) In addition to the devices pre- pressure than the maximum allowable operating
scribed in (a), a to pressure for the shall be
prevent accidental with devices of adequate
distribution system. must be designed to meet the
Suitable of devices to prevent over- and other service conditions under which
ressure distribution
include devices pre-
(1) relief valves as in paras. device shaH be provided to
and (b). Suitable types of pro-
(2) weight-loaded relief valves. ng of
(3) a monitoring installed in series with include
the primary pressure regulator. (1) a seal relief device that can be set to open
(4) a series regulator installed upstream from the accurately and at the desired pressure
primary regulator imd set to limit the on the (2) weight-loaded relief valves
inlet of the primary to the maxi-
(3) an automatic shutoff device as described in
mum allowable operating pressure of the distribution
system or less. para. 845.2.4(b)(S)
(5) an automatic shutoff device installed in series (4) a back-pressure as
with the primary pressure and set to shut off described in para. 84S.2.1(b)
when the pressure on the distribution (5) a monitoring regulator as described in
the maximum allowable para.
device must remain closed unti manually reset. It (6) a series regulator as described in
should not be used where it might cause an interruption para. 845.2A(b)(4)
in service to a large number of customers.
(e) MaximulII Allowable Operating Pressure for Low-
(6) diaphragm-type relief valves.
Pressure Distribution Systems. The maximum allowable
(e) MaximulII Allowable Press1Ire
pressure for a distribution sys-
Pressllre Distrib1ltion This pressure shall be the
tem shall not exceed either of the following:
maximum pressure to which the system can be JWJI~'~'~"
in accordance with the of this (1) a pressure that would cause the unsafe opera-
shall not exceed tion of any connected and properly low-
(1) the design pressure of the weakest element of pressure gas burning
the as defined in para. 805.2.1 (2) a pressure of 2

65
 ASME 831.8-2014

845.2.6 Conversion of low-Pressure Distribution (4) pipe connections to the regulator not
to High-Pressure Distribution sv·,tf'ms NPS 2 (DN 50)
(a) Before a 1"""-l~l'P~~l (5) the capability under normal operating condi-
tem to a distribution tions of regulating the downstream within the
that the following factors be considered: necessary limits of accuracy and of the buildup
(1) the design of the including kinds of of under no-flow conditions to no more than
material and equipment used pressure maintained
under flow conditions
(2) maintenance records, including results of (6) a self-contained service regulator with no exter-
any leakage surveys nal static or control lines
(b) Before the pressure, the following (b) If the maximum allowable operating pressure of
(not necessarily in sequence shown) shall be taken: the distribution is 60 (41O kPa) or and
(1) Make a leakage survey and repair leaks found. a service regulator not all of the characteristics
(2) parts of the found listed in is or if gas contains materials
to be pressures. that interfere with the operation of service
(3) Install a service regulator on each service line,
regulators, suitable devices shall be installed
and test each regulator to determine that it is function- to prevent unsafe overpressuring of the customer's
appliances, should the service fail. Some of
ing. In some cases it may be necessary to raise the pres-
the suitable of protective to over-
sure slightly to permit proper of the service
customers'
(1) a monitoring regulator
(4) Isolate the low-pressure (2) a relief valve
systems.
(3) an automatic shutoff device
(5) At bends or offsets in coupled or bell and spigot These devices may be installed as an integral of
pipe, reinforce or determined to be the service regulator or as a unit.
inadequate for the (c) If the maximum allowable of
(c) The converted shall the distribution exceeds 60
be by with a period to check the effect able methods shall be used to
of the previous increase before the next increase. pressure of the gas delivered to the customer to the
The desirable of each increase and the length maximum safe value. Such methods may include
of the check will vary on conditions. (1) a service having the characteristics
The of this procedure is to an opportu- listed in and a regulator located upstream
nity to discover any unknown open and from the service In no case shall the
connections to or to indi-
vidual customers before excessive pressures are reached.
the secondary and the service
(14) 845.2.7 Control and limiting of the Pressure of Gas the pressure on the inlet of the service
Delivered to Small Commercial, and Small (410 kPa) or Jess in case the secondary
Industrial Customers From Distribution function properly. This device may be either a relief
Systems valve or an automatic shutoff that shuts if the pressure
(II) If the maximum allowable
on the inlet of the service regulator exceeds the set pres-
the distribution sure [60 (410 kPa) or and remains closed until
a service regulator manually reset.
is no other (2) a service and a monitoring
set to limit to a maximum safe value the pressure of the
(1) a pressure
gas delivered to the customer.
bution line pressure,
(3) a service with a relief valve vented to
mended for household
the outside with the relief valve set to open
of water column
so that the pressure of gas to the customer shall
(2) a port valve with orifice diameter no not exceed a maximum safe value. The relief valve may
than that recommended by the manufacturer for be either built into the service regulator or may be a
the maximum gas pressure at the regulator inlet unit installed downstream from the service reg-
(3) a valve seat made of resilient material This combination may be used alone only in cases
to withstand abrasion of the gas, impurities in gas, and where the inlet pressure on the service does
cutting by the and to resist permanent not exceed the manufacturer's safe working pressure
deformation when it is the valve of the service and it is not recommended

66
 ASME 831.8-2014

for use where the inlet on the service that can lock it in the open before they
exceeds 125 psig (860 For higher inlet pressures, leave the location.
the method in (c)(l) or should be used. (2) Install relief valves, each having ade-
(d) When the pressure of the gas and the demand quate ty by itself to protect the and
the customer are than those applicable under arrange the valves or three-way valve so that
the of (b), and (c), the requirements for mechanically it is possible to render only one
control and limiting of the pressure of gas delivered are device at a time.
included in para. 845.1. Precautions shall be taken to prevent unauthorized
of any valve that will make
845.3 Requirements for Design of Pressure Relief This to isolating
and Pressure-limiting Installations
valves, and valves on control or floa t lines
(a) Pressure relief or devices that are located between the device
rupture disks shall and the that the device A method simi-
(1) be constructed of materials such that the opera- lar to that described in shall be considered
tion of the device will not normally be by able in complying with this provision.
corrosion of external by the or internal When a moni toring series sys-
by gas tem or system shutoff is installed at a district
(2) have valves and valve seats that are regulator station to protect a system from over-
not to stick in a position that will make the device the installation shall be designed and
ative and result in failure of the device to installed to prevent any single incident, such as an
the manner for which it was intended sion in a vault or by a vehicle or icing (both
(3) be and installed so that internal and from affecting the operation of
to determine if the valve is can both the overpressure device and the district
to determine the pressure at which they will regulator. sections 846 and
()n,pratp and can be tested for when in the closed
(11) attention shall be given to control lines.
All control lines shall be from falling
or other foreseeable causes of
and installed to
t1"m;,a" to anyone control line from both the
and the overpressure device

845.4 Capacity of Pressure-Relieving and

to all exposures in
Pressure-limiting Station and Devices
the immediate where gas pipelines
overhead electric transmission lines on the same 845.4.1 Required of Pressure-Relieving and
right-of-way to ensure that the blowdown connections Pressure-limiting Stations
will direct the away from the electric conductors. (a) Each pressure relief station, nr''''''"I'~,-li'"Y1i1"irHJ
Where devices, the d stacks tion, or group of such stations installed to a
with rain caps to preclude
system or pressure vessel shall have sufficient
the entry of water.
and shall be set to operate to prevent the pres-
(d) The size of the openings,
sure from the following levels:
between the to be
(1) Wilh or
device and the vent line shall be of
Sf ress Levels Over 72 % ofIlie SM YS. The
required is the maximum allowable operating
pressure plus 4%.
(e) Precautionsshall be taken to prevent unauthorized
operation of any valve that will make a pressure (2) Systellls With Pipe or Compollents
relief valve This provision shall not apply at Stress Levels III or Below 72% of Ille
to valves that isolate the under SMYS OilIer Tllall ill Low-Pressure Disfributioll
from its source of pressure. The capacity is the Jesser of the
with this are as follows: items:
(1) Lock the stop valve in the open Instruct (-11) the maximum allowable operating pressure
authorized personnel of the importance of not inadver- 10%
the stop valve closed and of (-b) the pressure that a hoop stress of
during the entire that the valve is 75% of the specified minimum strength

67
 ASME 831.8-2014

(3) Low-Pressllre Distribution The required (d) Brass pipe or copper or tubing shall not be
is a pressure that would cause the unsafe opera- used for metal temperatures than 400 0 P (204°q.
tion of any connected and properly adjusted gas burning (e) Piping subject to from solids or
shall be provided with connections for cleaning.
(b) When more than one pressure-regulating or com- or tubing under this section may be
pressor station feeds into the pipeline or distribution by the of the control
and pressure relief devices are installed at such apparatus, or sampling provided that the
stations, the capacity at the remote station may of the or tubing as installed is at least to that
be taken into account in the relief devices at each otherwise under the Code.
station. In doing this, however, the assumed remote (g) that may contain liquids shall be protected
must be limited to the capacity of the by heating or other suitable means from damage due
system to transmit gas to the remote location or to
to the of the remote relief whichever (h) Piping in which liquids may accumulate shall be
is less. provided with drains or drips.
(i) The of piping and
845.4.2 Proof of Adequate Capacity and Satisfactory not only for
Performance of Pressure-limiting and Pressure Relief stresses, but also to provide protection for plpll1g
Devices. Where the device consists of an addi- detrimental external mechanical i.njury,
tional regulator that is associated with or functions in and to unusual service conditions
combination with one or more in a series other than those connected with pressure, temperature,
n",,'''"''o,V to control or limit the pressure in a and service vibration.
suitable checks shall be made. These checks Suitable shall be taken to
shall be conducted to determine that the will corrosion. section
operate in a manner to any pressure (k) Joints between sections of tubing and/or pipe,
in excess of the established maximum allowable between tubing and/ or and valves or fittings shall
operating pressure of the should anyone of the be made in 0 manner for the and tem-
associated malfunction or remain in the wide- conditions, such as by means flareless,
open position. fittings, or may
screwed, or type. If
845.5 Instrument, Control, and Sample Piping screwed-end valves are to be used with flared, flareless,
fittings, adapters are
845.5.1 Scope joints shall not be expansion
(11) The requirements in this section apply to rrw,.,n"nc:"h",(j for by flexibility within
the of instrument, and or tubing itself.
for safe and proper of the piping and Plastic shall not be used where operating tan"'''l''''_
do not cover of piping to secure proper function- tures exceed limitations shown in paras. 842.2.2(b) and
ing of instruments for which the piping is installed. 842.2.3(b).
(b) This section does not apply to permanently closed (1/1) Plastic piping shall not be pointed. If identifica-
piping systems, such as fluid-filled, temperature- tion other than that already provided by the manufactur-
responsive devices. er's marking is required, it shall be by
other means.
845.5.2 Materials and
(a) The materials employed for valves,
846 VAlVES 4
ing, and piping shall be to meet the
conditions of service. 846.1 Required Spacing of Valves
(b) Takeoff connections and fittings, 846.1.1 Transmission lines. Onshore block valves
or shall be made of suitable material and shall shall be installed in new transmission
be capable of withstanding the maximum and minimum time of construction for the purpose
operating pressures and temperatures of the piping or pipeline for maintenance and for response to
equipment to which they are attached. They shall be errlen2:erlcit~s When determining the placement of such
designed to withstand all stresses without valves for the primary consider-
failure fatigue. ation shall be continuous
(e) A shutoff valve shall be installed in each takeoff accessibility to the valves.
line as near as to the point of takeoff. Blow-
down valves shall be installed where necessary for the 1 See 849.1.2 and 849.1.3 for provisions covering valves in
safe of piping, instruments, and servke

68
 ASME B31.8-2014

(fI) In of valves be suitably supported to prevent settlement or move-

to be installed, the operator shall an assessment ment of the attached
that consideration to fndors such ns (c) Btowdown valves shall be provided so that each
(1) the nmount of gas released due to repair and section of pipeline between main line valves can be
maintenance blowdowns, or blown down. The sizes and capacity of the connections
(2) the time to blow down an isolated section for blowing down the line shall be such that under
(3) the impact in the area of gas release emergency conditions the section of line can be blown
nuisance and any hazard resulting from down as rapidly as is
blowdowns) (d) This Code does not the use of automatic
(4) continuity of service valves nor does the Code that the use of automatic
(5) and maintenance flexibility of the valves developed provide full protection
to a piping system. Their use and installation shaH be
(6) future development in the vicinity of the at the discretion of the company.
pipeline 846.2.2 Distribution System Valves
(7) conditions that may affect (n) A valve shall be installed on the inlet piping of
the and security of the line each station the flow or pressure
(b) In lieu of (a) the following maximum spac- of gas in a distribution The distance between the
between valves shall be used: valve and the regulator or shall be sufficient to
(1) 20 mi (32 k in areas of predominantly permit the of the valve during an emergency,
Loc(1tion Class 1 such as a gas leak or a fire in the station.
(2) 15 mi (24 km) in areas of predominantly (b) V(1lves on distribution mains, whether for
Location Class 2 ",.,."p,·,:re>rlr\l purposes, shall be located in (1
(3) 10 mi (16 km) in areas of access and facilitate their
Location Class 3 operation during an emergency. Where a valve is
(4) 5 mi (8 km) in areas of predominantly Location installed in a buried box or enclosure, access
Class 4 to the operating stem or mechanism is The box
The defined above may be to permit or enclosure shall be installed in a manner to avoid
a valve to be installed in a location that is more external loads to the main.
accessible.
846.1.2 Distribution Mains. Valves on distribution 847 VAULTS
mains, whether for operating or emergency purposes,
847.1 Structural Design Requirements
shall be as follows:
Disfribution Sysfems. Valves shall be vaults or for valves and pressure-
in distribution in pressure-limiting, or sta-
accessible locations to reduce the time to shut down a tions, etc., shall be designed
section of main in an emergency. In determining the dance with the
spacing of the valves, consideration should be given to (n) Vaults and pits shall be designed and constructed
the operating pressure and size of the mains and local in accordance with good structural engineering nr;,rtlri"
conditions as well as the number and type of to meet the loads that may be imposed on them.
consumers that be affected by a shutdown. (b) Sufficient shall be provided so that
(b) Low-Pressure DistrilJllfioll Valves may be all of the in the vault can be properly
but are not installed, operated, and maintained.
In the design of vaults and for pressure-
limiting, and pressure-regu
846.2 Location of Valves be to the
such as
846.2.1 Transmission Valves within the vault or pit
(n) Sectionalizing block valves shall be accessible and nr.lct"",,, of the roof or cover to fall into
from and tampering. If a blowdown
valve is involved, it shall be located where the gas can (d) entering and within vaults or
be blown to the without undue hazard. shall be steel for NPS 10 250) and smaller sizes,
(b) valves may be installed above that control and gage piping may be copper.
ground, in a vault, or buried. In a.ll installations an extends through the vault or structure,
device to open or close the valve shall be shall be made to the passage of gases
readily accessible to authorized persons. All valves shall or liquids through the opening and to avert strains in

69
© 2014 by the American Society ofMechallical
be made of this materialwithollt written
 ASME B)1.8·2014

the piping. sus- horizontal section of the ducts shall be as short as practi-
tained masonry! or concrete The cal and shall be to prevent the accumulation of
control piping shall be placed and liquids in the line. The number of bends and offsets
or pit so that its exposure to shaH be reduced to a minimum, and shall be
to a minimum. to facilitate the of the
(e) Vault or shall be located so as to ducts.
minimize the of tools or other objects on (d) Such vaults or pits having an internal volume
the regulator, piping, or other The control between 75 ft3 and 200 ft3 (2.1 m 3 and 5.7 m 3) may be
pi and the operating of the equipment either sealed, vented, or ventilated. If all open-
installed shall not be located under a vaultor pit shall be with tight-fitting covers without
where workmen can on them when or open holes through which an explosive mixture might be
the vault or pit, unless such parts are suitably Means shall be provided for the internal
fmn'"m,prp before the cover. vented, the
if) Whenever a vault or pit is to be located external sources of ignition
above that could be by a falling must be provided.
cover, a circular cover should be or other suit- either (b), and
able should be taken. above or (e) below shan apply.
(e) If vaults or pits referred to in (d) above are venti-
847.2 Accessibility lated by means of in the covers or
and the ratio of the internal volume in cubic
Accessibility shall be considered in a site for
to the effective ventilating area of the cover or grating
a vault. Some of the important factors to consider in
in square feet (m 2) is less than 20 to I, no additional
the location of a vault are as follows:
ventilation is required.
(a) Exposure to The location of vaults in street if) Vaults or pits
intersections or at points where traffic is or dense 75 ft3 (2.1 have no
should be avoided.
(b) Exposure to Vaults should not be located 847.4 Drainage and Waterproofing
at of minimum elevation, near catch or (11) Provisions shall be made to minimize the entrance
where the access cover will be in the course of surface of water into va ults. vault shall
waters. be if
(c) to Adjacent Hazards. Vaults (b) No vault containing gas
should be located as far as is from water, elec- by means of a drain connection to any other substruc-
tric, steam, or other facilities. ture, such as a sewer.
(c) Electrical equipment in vaults shall conform to the
847.3 Vault Sealing, Venting, and Ventilation of Class 1, 0 of NFPA 70.
vaults and closed top pits
or reduction station, or a
848 CUSTOMERS' METERS AND REGULATORS
or relieving station shall be sealed,
or ventilated as follows: 848.1 location for Customers' Meter and Regulator
(a) When the internal volume exceeds 200 ft 3 m 3), Installations
such vaults or shall be ventilated with two ducts (II) Customers' meters and regulators may be located
each at least the ventilating effect of an NPS 4 either inside or outside of buildings, depending on local
(ON 100) conditions, that on service lines
shall be sufficient to min- regulation, in accordance with para.
formation of a combustible atmo- m regulator shall be located outside of the
vault or pit. Vents associated with the
or equipment (b) When installed within a building, the service
must not be connected to the vault or pit ventilation. lator shall be in a accessible .Iocation near
(c) The ducts shall extend to a height above of gas service line entrance, and whenever practi-
adequate to mixtures that might cal, the meters shall be installed at the same location.
be discharged. The of the ducts shall be Neither meters nor shall be installed in bed-
equipped with a suitable fitting or vent rooms, or bathrooms; under combustible stair-
head designed to matter from entering ways; in unventilated or inaccessible or closer
or the The effective area of the than 3 ft (0.9 m) to sources of ignition, including furnaces
in such or vent heads shall be at least equal to and water heaters. On service lines supplying large
the cross-sectional area of an NPS 4 (ON 100) duct. The industrial customers or installations where gas is used

70
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 AS ME B31.8-2014

at higher than standard service pressure, the 848.3.4 Pit and Vault Design. Pits and vaults hous-
may be installed at other readily accessible locations. shall be designed
(c) When located outside of buildings, meters and instaHed in the follow-
service shall be installed in accessible
locations where will be protected from (11) traveled portions of streets, and
damage. (b)
(d) requiring vents for their and
shall be vented to the almo- 848.4 Installation of Meters and Regulators
in accordance with the of para. 848.3.3. All meters and regulators shall be installed in such a
Individual vents shall be for each regulator. manner as to undue stresses on the connecting
piping and/ or the meter, Lead (Pb) connections or other
848.2 Operating Pressures for Customers' Meter connections made of material that can be easily damaged
Installations
shall not be used. The use of standard weight close (all
Iron or aluminum case meters shall not be used at a thread) is prohibited.
maximum pressure than the manufac-
turer's rating the meter. New tinned steel case meters
shall not be used at a pressure in excess of 50% of the 849 GAS SERVICE LINES
manufacturer's test pressure; rebuilt tinned steel case 849.1 General Provisions Applicable to Steel,
meters shall not be used at a in excess of 50% Copper, and Plastic Service lines
of the pressure used to test meter after rebuilding.
849.1.1 Installation of Service lines
848.3 Protection of Customers' Meter and Regulator (11) Service lines shall be installed at a depth that will
Installations From them from excessive external loading and local
activities, such as It js that a mini-
848.3.1 Corrosive Area. Meters and service regula-
mum of 12 in. (300 mm) of cover be provided in private
tors shall not be installed where deterioration from
property and a minimum of 18 in. (460 mm) of cover
corrosion or other causes is likely to occur, unless proven
be provided in streets and roads. Where these cover
measures are taken to such deterioration.
requirements cannot be met due to substruc-
848.3.2 Protective Device. A suitable tures, less cover is permitted of
these service lines that are to excessive
posed loads are cased or bridged or the
as required under the conditions: ately
(11) If the nature of the utilization equipment is such (b) Service lines shall be properly supported at all
that it may induce a vacuum at the meter, install a back- on undisturbed or well-compacted soil so that
pressure regulator downstream from the meter. the will not be to excessive external
(b) Install a check valve or jf by backfill. The material used for the backfill shall
(1) the utilization equipment may induce a back- be free of
pressure. to the pipe or coating.
(2) the gas utilization is cOlU1ected to a (c) Where there is evidence of condensate in the gas
source of oxygen or air. in sufficient quantities to cause interruptions in the gas
(3) Jiq uefied gas or other supplementary supply to the customer, the service line shall be graded
gas is used as and may flow back into the meter. so as to drain into the main or to at the low
A valve, installed to admit the standby supply in the service line.
and at the same time shut off the regular supply, can 849.1.2 Types of Valves Suitable for Service line
be substituted for a check valve if desired. Valves
848.3.3 Termination of Vents. All service (11) Valves used as service line valves shall meet the
vents and relief vents, where shall terminate of section 810 and para. 831.1.
in the outside air in rain- and insect-resistant fittings. (b) The use of soft seat service line valves is not recom-
The open end of the vent shall be located where the gas mended when the of the valves is such that expo-
into the atmosphere and away from sure to excessive heat could adversely affect the ability
into the if a failure of the valve to the flow of gas.
occurs. At locations where (c) A valve in a meter bar that
may during floods, the meter to be bypassed does not qualify under this
antiflood breather vent fitting shall Code as a service line valve.
or the vent line shall be extended above the (d) Service line valves on
of the flood waters, installed either inside buildings or

71
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engilleers.
be made of this material without wri11en consent of ASM E.
 ASME B31.8-2014

outside buildings where the blowing of gas would be of 1 (7 kPa) or more, shall be
hazardous, shall be and constructed to mini- air or gas pressure test for at least 5 min at
mize the possibility of the removal of the core of the valve pressure or 90
accidentally or willfully with ordinary household tools. lines of
(e) The operating company shall make certain that however, that are VI_J!:laUl at hoop stress levels of 20%
the service line valves installed on high-pressure service or more of the .>,.,'"_H''''' strength shall
lines are suitable for this use either by their be tested in with the for
own tests or by reviewing the tests made by the mains. para. 841.3.)
manufacturers. (3) The requirements of (a) and (b) above shall
if) On service lines designed to at pressures apply to plastic service lines, that plastic service
in excess of 60 psig (410 kPa), the service line valves lines shall be tested to at least 1.5 times the maximum
shall be the equivalent of a valve or pressure, and the limitations on maximum
a needle-type valve. Other of valves may be used test pressure, and duration set forth in
where tests by the manufacturer or by the user indicate para. 842.4.2 shall
that are suitable for this kind of service.
849.2 Steel Service lines
849.1.3 location of Service line Valves
(a) Service line valves shall be installed on all new 849.2.1 Design of Steel Service lines
service lines (including in a location (a)Steel when used for service lines, shall con-
readily accessible from the outside. form to the of l.
(b) Valves shall be located of the meter if shall be in accordance
there is no regulator, or upstream of the ,c)"u"mu'" if rcm,,,,n'c. of paras. 841.1.1 and 841.1.9(a).
there is one. Where the pressure is less than 100 (690 kPat the
(e) All service lines at a pressure greater steel service shall be at least 100
than 10 psig (69 kPa) lines NPS 2 (DN (690 kPa) pressure.
or shall be with a valve located on the (c) Steel used for service lines shall be installed
building, except that whenever in such a manner that the piping strain or external load-
to a theater, church, school, or shall not be excessive.
other where large numbers of persons assem- (d) All underground steel service lines shall be joined
ble, an outside valve will be of the by threaded and coupled joints, compression-type fit-
size of the service line or the service line pressure. tings, or by qualified welding or proce-
(d) valves shall be located in a covered and
durable curb or standpipe to
of the valve. The curb box or 849.2.2 Installation of Steel Service lines
supported independently of the service line. (a) Installation of Steel Service Lines in Bores
(1) When coated steel is to be installed as a
849.1.4 location of Service line Connections to Main service line in a bore, care shall be exercised to prevent
Piping. It is recommended that service lines be con- to the during installation.
nected to either the top or the side of the main. The (2) When a service line is to be installed
connection to the top of the main is to mini- or driving, and coated steel is to be
mize the possibility of dust and moisture being carried not be used as the bore pipe or drive
from the main into the service line, the as part of the service line unless it has been
849.1.5 Testing of Service lines After Construction demonstrated that the coating is durable to
(a) General Provisions. Each service line shall be tested withstand the boring or driving in the type of
after construction and before being in service soil involved without significant to the coating.
to demonstrate that it does not service line Where to the coating may result from
connection to the main need not be included in this test or driving, the coated service line should be
if it is not feasible to do so. installed in an oversized bore or pipe of sufficient
(b) Test Requirements diameter to accommodate the service
(V Service lines to at a pressure less than (3) In exceptionally coated
(7 kPa) that do not have a coating be inserted an open if
of temporarily a shall be a to the coating is likely.
standup air or pressure test at not less than 10 (b) [Ils/allatioll of Service Lilies hila or Under Bllildings
(69 kPa) for at 5 min. (1) Underground steel service lines, when installed
(2) Service lines to operate at a pressure less than below through the outer foundation wall of a
1 psig (7 kPa) that have a protective coating that building, shall be either encased in a sleeve or otherwise
seal a and all service lines to corrosion. The service line and/or

72
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without writ1en consent
,-~~..~.~:-------~--
 ASME B31.8-2014

sleeve shall be sealed at the foundation wall to (c) Instnllation of Plastic Service Lilies Into or Under
entry of gas or water into the B1/ildings
(2) Steel service where installed underground An plastic service line installed
under buildings, shall be encased in a conduit. through the ou tel' or wall of a shall
When such a service line supplies the it sub- be encased in a rigid sleeve with suitable
the conduit shall extend into a normally usable from action or backfill settlement. sleeve
and accessible of the building. At the shall extend past the outside face of the foundation a
where the terminates, the space between the sufficient distance to reach undisturbed soil or thor-
conduit and the service line shall be sealed to prevent compacted backfill. At the where the sleeve
the entrance of any gas The casing terminates inside the foundation or wall, the space
shall be vented at a safe location. between the sleeve and the service line shall be sealed
to prevent into the The plastic service
849.3 Ductile Iron Service lines line shall not be exposed inside the building.
When used for service lines, ductile iron shall (2) A plastic service line installed underground
meet the of section 842. Ductile under a building shall be encased in a conduit.
iron may be for service lines for the When such a service line the it sub-
portion of the service line that extends build- the conduit shall extend into a usable
ing wall. Ductile iron service lines shall not and accessible portion of the building. At the point
in unstable soils or under buildings. where the conduit terminates, the space between the
conduit and the service line shall be sealed to prevent
849.4 Plastic Service lines into the The plastic service line shall
building. The casing shall be
849.4.1 Design of Plastic Service lines
(a) Plastic pipe and shall be used for service
lines only where the strain or external 849.5 Service lines
will not be excessive.
(b) Plastic tubing, cements, and fittings used for
849.5.1 Design of Copper Service lines
conform to the applicable (n) Use of Copper Service Lilies. Copper or tubing,
when used for service shall conform to the follow-
1.
requirements:
in accor-
(1) or shall not be used for
dance with the applicable of para. 842.2.
the pressure exceeds
(d) Plastic service lines shall be in accordance
100
with the applicable requirements of para. 842.2.9.
pipe or tubing shall not be used for
849.4.2 Installation of Plastic Service lines service lines where the gas carried contains more than
(n) Plastic service lines shall be installed in accordance ;.nT.'rrle'p of 0.3 of sulfide per 100
wi th the of paras. 842.3 and m 3 ) of is equivalent to
849.1.1. Particular care must be taken to a trace as determined by a test.
to service line piping at the connection to (3) The minimum wall thickness for pipe
main or other Precautions shall be taken to pre- or tubing used for service lines shall be not than
vent crushing or shearing of piping due to exter- ilL" as specified in ASTM B88.
nal of and to Copper or shall not be used for
or pullout the connection resulting from thermal service lines where strain or external loading may dam-
expansion or contraction. paras. 842.3.3(d) and age the piping.
(b) Notwithstanding the limitations imposed in (b) Vnlves ill Piping. Valves installed in
para. 842.3.3, a service line may terminate above service lines may be made of any suitable
and outside the building, that mined this Code.
(1) the of the plastic service (e) il1 Copper It is recommended that
line is enclosed in a conduit or of in copper piping exposed to the soil, such
sufficient to protection from external as service line tees, pressure control fittings, etc., be
and deterioration. Where a flexible conduit is made of bronze, copper, or brass.
top of the riser must be attached to a solid (d) Joints il1 Pipe and Copper
The conduit or casing shall extend a minimum be by using either a compression-type
in. (150 mm) below grade. or a brazed or soldered The filler
(2) the service line is not subjected to exter- for shall be a alloy or silver
nal loading stresses by the customer's meter or its con- for joining
necting shall not be

73
 ASME 831.8-2014

threaded, but copper 849.6.2 Service line Connection to Cast Iron and
lent to the size of Schedule 40 pipe, Ductile Iron Mains
i.e., from 0.068 in. (1.73 mm) for NPS is (DN 6) Service lines may be connected to cast iron and
to 0.406 in. mm) for NPS 12 (DN 300), may be ductile iron mains by
threaded and used for connecting screwed fittings or (1) drilling and tapping the provided the
valves. diameter of the hole shall not exceed the limita-
(e) Protection Against Ga/vallie Action Cnllsed by tions by para. 831.3.3(b), or
Copper. Provisions shall be made to harmful (2) using a sleeve
galvanic action where copper is (b) Service line connections shall not be brazed
to steel. para. to cast iron or ductile iron mains.
fittings rubber or rubber-like
849.5.2 Installation of Copper Service Lines. The
or welded connections may be used to connect
following requirements shall apply to copper service
service line to the main connection fitting.
lines within buildings:
(d) Gaskets used in a manufactured gas system shall
(a) service lines may be installed within build-
be of a type that resists that of gas.
that the service line is not concealed and
external ,,;!en,tap 849.6.3 Service line Connections to Plastic Mains
service line installed (n) Plastic or metal service lines shall be connected
wall of a building shall to mains with suitable
be either encased in a sleeve or otherwise (b) A service line to main connec-
corrosion. The annular space between service installed to effectively sustain
and sleeve shall be sealed at the foundation wall to the longitudinal pullout forces caused by contraction of
prevent entry of gas or water. the or external loading.
(c) A service line installed 849.6.4 Service line Connections to Copper Mains
buildings be encased in a conduit Connections a copper or cast bronze service
vent gas from the service line from line tee or extension sweat-brazed to the copper
the building. When joints are they main are recommended for copper mains.
brazed or soldered type in accordance with (b) Butt welds are not
para. (c) Fillet-brazed joints are not recommended.
(d) The of para. 849.5.1(d) shall apply to
849.6 Service line Connections to Mains
(1) joints not ly mentioned in (a)
849.6.1 Service Line Connections to Steel Mains. through
Service lines may be connected to steel mains by (2) all material
(a) a service line tee or similar device to 849.6.5 Plastic Service line Connections to Metal
the main. Mains
using a service line clamp or saddle. (a) Plastic service lines shall be connected to metal
with rubber or rubber- mains with a suitable metallic or plastic main as
provided in para. 849.6.1, 849.6.2, or 849.6.4 having a
line to the main connection fitting. Gaskets used in a ('()rl'lnrp~~in,n end or other suitable transition fitting.
manufactured gas shall be of a that effec- (b) A service line to main connec-
tively resists that type of gas. installed to sustain
(d) welding a steel service line directly to the main the longitudinal pullout forces caused by contraction of
para. 831.4.2 and Table 831.4.2-1). the piping or external

74
 ASME B31.8·2014

Chapter V
Operating and Maintenance Procedures

850 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE 850.3 Essential Features of the Operating and
PROCEDURES AFFECTING THE SAFETY OF GAS Maintenance Plan
TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION The plan in para. shall include
FACILITIES (n) detailed plans and instructions for errIDI,DV1'escov-
and maintenance for gas
850.1 Genera! normal operations and
(b) items recommended for inclusion in the plan for
(n) Because of many it is not possible to classes of facilities that are in paras. 851.2,
in a code a detailed set of and main- 851.6, and
tenance that will encompass cases. It is attention to those portions
pOSSible, however, for each opera presenting the hazard to the
develop operating and maintenance public in the event of an emergency or because of con-
on the of this its struction or extraordinary maintenance
of its facilities and conditions under which (d) for
they are operated that will be from the stand- of
point of For minimum
material to consider the
(b) Upon gas service In a of Location Class changes. It is not intended these
and constructed or converted to gas service in aCCOf- include surveys of the number of buildings
dance with this Code, the company shall intended for human occupancy. (See section
determine the Location Class in accordance with
Table 854.1-1. 850.4 Essential Features of the Emergency Plan
850.4.1 Written Emergency Procedures. Each
operating company shall establish written
850.2 Basic Requirements tha t will provide the basis for instructions to
operating and maintenance that will
Each operating company having facilities within the
rnize the hazard resulting from a gas prr,pr,:rpr,rv
scope of this Code shall
At a minimum, the
(11) have a written plan and main-
following:
tenance procedures in accordance with the scope and
(n) a for identifying, and
intent of this Code.
that require immediate response by the
(b) have a written emergency covering facility operating company
failure or other (b) indicating the responsibility for
(c) and maintain its facilities in conformance in the listed in the emergency
with plans and for in the execution of
(d) dic- those
and (c) clearly those responsible for updating
the plan
in ures (d) establishing a plan for prompt and han-
and maintenance func- dling of all calls that concern
tions that is and to prepare are from customers, the public, company or
for service in their area of responsibility. See other sources
section 807 for guidance on the training and qualification (e) establishing a plan for the prompt and effective
of performing tasks that could the response to a notice of each type of emergency
or integrity of a pipeline. (f) controlling emergency situations, including the
keep records to administer the plans and training action to be taken the first arriving at
the scene

75
of Mechanical
 ASME 831.8·2014

the dissemination of information to the public This plan shall include a to select of
(11) the safe restoration of service to all facilities the failed or equipment for examina-
affected by the emergency after proper corrective mea- tion when necessary,
sures have been taken
(i) reporting and documenting the emergency 850.6 Prevention of Accidental Ignition
850.4.2 Training Program. Smoking and all open flames shall be prohibited in
shall have a program for and around structures, or areas under the control of
employees rp,cnCin", the operating company gas facilities (such
The program shall acquaint as compressor stations, meter and regulator stations,
with the emergency and how to and other gas where leak-
and situations, The pro- age of gas constitutes a of fire or Each
instruction, written operating company shall take to minimize the
and, in some group instruction, danger of accidental ignition of gas,
followed by sessions, The program shall be (11) When a hazardous amount of gas is to be vented
established maintained on a continuing basis with into open ail~ each potential source of ignition shall first
for as necessitated by revision of the be removed from the area and adequate fire
Program records shall ers shall be provided, All lighting fixtures,
be maintained to what training each employee extension and tools shall be of a approved
has received and the date of such training, for hazardous atmospheres, Blowdown connections that
850.4.3 liaison will direct the gas away from any electrical transmission
(11) Each shall establish and main- lines must be instaJled or used,
tain liaison with fire, (b) Suitable signs and if necessary,
lic entities in or near the pipeline shall be to warn or entering
electrical and other utilities, highway the area of the hazard,
and news media, (c) To prevent accidental ignition by electric
(b) Each operating company must have a means of an adequate bonding cable should be connected to each
communication with publiC officials during side of any that is to be tapped,
an emergency, off, or joined, and any cathodic protection rectifiers in
(c) the area shall be turned ofL Where gas parallel
overhead electric transmission lines on the same
the company operating the pipeline shall ensure
that the current carrying of the bonding conduc-
850.4.4 Educational Program. An educational
tor should be at least one-half of the current
gram shall be established to enable customers
of the overhead line conductors, also
public to a gas emergency and
para, 861,1.3(b),] The bonding connection is to be main-
it to the appropriate The educational program
shall be tailored to the type of pipeline operation and tained while the When pipe
the environment traversed by the and shall be is being attention must be
conducted in each that to the static electrical that may be
community served, of distribution "'f'.rpm" on both the inside and outside diameters of the
shall communicate their programs to consumers and the These charges can be dissipated antistatic fluids
general public in their distribution area, of or a water-and-detergent solution in combination with
transmission shall communicate their ''H''1aY''rYl'' a moisture retaining material that must be in contact
to residents their with the pipe and the earth, Cutting tools and
of sour gas equipment used on pipe
residents by the plan under where static charges may be shall be grounded
para, B8S4.5(e) of the hazards of sour gas, the potential to drain these from the pipe,
source of the and measures to take in an (d) When cutting torch or is to be per-
emergency. programs of operators in the same area formed, a check shall first be made for the
shall be coordinated to properly direct reports of emer- presence of a combustible gas mixture in the area outside
gencies and to avoid inconsistencies, of the If found, the mixture shall be eliminated
before or cutting, Monitoring of the air
850.5 Pipeline Failure Investigation mixture should continue throughout the progress of the
Each operating company shall establish work,
to analyze all failures and accidents for (r) Should welding be on a pipeline filled
cause and to minimize the possibility of a recurrence, with gas and the check under (d) above has been

76
 ASME B31.8·2014

sa tisfactorily, the gas the of the pipeline, the

by a suitable means to a ated in accordance with established
pressure in the pipeline at the welding area start- (e) maintaining maps indicating the location of facili-
ing work. Precautions should be taken to prevent a back- ties. The should be updated to reflect new and
draft from at the welding area.
m Before by torch or welding on a line that to ensure the effectiveness of the pro-
may contain a mixture of gas and air, it shall be made gram. process may include: trending of excavation
safe by displacing the mixture with gas, air, or an inert IrH'n""IJ" and location, investigation of excavation dam-
gas. Caution must be taken when an inert gas to and identification of root cause, and identification
ventilation for all workers in the area. measures excavators or locations
high rates.
850.7 Blasting Effects A useful reference for identifying elements of an effec-
company shall establish tive program is the Best PmC/ices
offacilities in the
rr. ••or>.,rm of Gllide, maintained and published by the Common
ities. The company shall Ground Alliance.
«(I) locate and mark its pipeline when
to be detonated within distances as 851 PIPELINE MAINTENANCE
plans. Consideration should be
minimum blasting distances 851.1 Periodic Surveillance of Pipelines
depending upon the of
(b) determine the
or monitoring blasting activities based upon the su rveillance of its
ity of the blast with to the pipelines, the size of shall be initiated and
and soil conditions. action shall be taken where unusual
(e) conduct a leak survey folJm.ving each tenance conditions occur, such as
operation near its pipelines. tory, in flow efficiency due to internal corrosion, or
substantial in cathodic nl'{,tprt,()n
850.8 Prevention Program When such indicate facility is in unsatisfac-
Each company shall have a program shall be initiated to
reduce the risk associated with to gas abandon, or recondition and proof test. If such
from excavation activities. a carmot be reconditioned or phased out, the
consider the following elements within the program: maximum allowable pressure shall be reduced
(a) participation in excavation notification systems,
commensurate wi requirements described in
in places where such a exists. Excavation notifica- para. 845.2.2(c).
tion allow excavators to notification to 851.2 Pipeline Patrolling
a point of contact, which in turn forwards the
excavation details to owners I Each operating company shall maintain a
patrol to observe surface conditions on
(b) identification of persons who normally
adjacent to pipeline right-of-way, indications of
excavations in the area in which the construction activity other than that performed
ties, including the and periodic the company, natural and any other factors
communication with these parties. The communication affecting the safety and operation of the Patrols
could include such items as: how to determine the loca- shall be at least once every year in Location
tion of how to the facilities field marked Classes 1 and 2, at least once every 6 months in Location
and who to contact in the event of Class 3, and at least once every 3 months in Location
r.nar,,'''''·'C facility.
Class 4. Weather, terrain, size of line, operating pres-
sures, and other conditions will be factors in determin-
(e) a process for notifications of planned
ing the need for more frequent patrol. Main
excavations, providing the excavators with locations of
and railroad shall be inspected with greater
the operator's facilities through field mark-
frequency and more closely than in open
lines of communication with the exca-
country.
vator to ensure the immediate protection and future
operation of the facility, and consideration of monitoring 851.2.1 Maintenance of Cover at Road Crossings and
excavation activities. Ditches. The operating company shall deter-
where there surveys if the cover over the
are ~".~~ ... ,,~ and drainage ditches has been reduced
as a result of excavation. If damage occurs that affects of the If the

77
 ASME B31.8-2014

company determines that the normal cover the shall be at a pressure no

provided at the time of pipeline construction has become than 80% of the operating pressure at the time of d iscov-
reduced due to earth removal or line move- ery. The pressure shall remain at or below this
ment, operating company shall additional reduced pressure these activities unless sufficient
protection by provid ing culverts, concrete pads, information becomes available to determine a different
casing, of the or other suitable means. pressure.
Nonleaking corroded areas that must be repaired or
851.2.2 Maintenance of Cover in Cross-Country
are defined in para. 860.2(a). Longitud inal weld
Terrain. If the operating company as a result
seams are commonly identified by visual inspection,
of patrolling, that the cover over the pipeline in cross-
or ultrasonic testing.
country terrain does not meet the it shall
A full encirclement welded sleeve with welded
determine whether the cover has reduced to an
ends shall have a design pressure at least equal to that
unacceptable level. If the level is unacceptable, the
required for the maximum allowable operating pressure
operating company shall provide additional
of the being repaired para. 841.1.1(a)J. If condi-
by replacing cover, the line, or other suitable
tions require that the sleeve carry the full longitudinal
means.
stresses, the sleeve shall be at least to the
851.3 leakage Surveys of the being Full encirclement
sleeves shall not less than 4 in. (100 mm) in width.
of a transmission line shall If the defect is not a leak, the circumferential fillet
surveys of the line in its welds are optional in certain cases as described in the
operating maintenance plan, The of following sections of para. 851.4. If circumferential fillet
selected shall be effective for rlDtDrr~' welds are the sleeve's longitudinal welds shall be
hazardous exists. The extent butt welds. The for the circumferen-
the leakage surveys shall bedetermined tial fillet welds shall be suitable for the materials and
age, Location Class, and whether shall consider the potential for underbead cracking.
line gas without an odorant. Backup strips are not If the circumferential
(14) 851.4 Repair Procedures for Steel Pipelines fillet welds are not made, the welds may
be butt welds, or fillets to a side bar. The circumferential
Evaluation of pipeline defects and associated which would have been sealed had the fillet weld
methods are discussed in paras. 851.4.1 through 851.4.5, been made, should be sealed with a coating material
Additional may be found in Parts 2 and 3 of such as enamel or mastic, so that the soil environment
ASME PCC-2, of Pressure and Piping, will be kept out of the area under the sleeve.
and in the following PRCI documents: Pipeline Prior to the installation of a the
Manual (original or u and shall be inspected by ultrasonic methods for laminations
Defect Assessment A Review and where sleeve fillet welds will be onto the
Commonly Used Methods, Information on these docu- body.
ments is found in Mandatory A. Consideration shall be to the toughness charac-
If at any time a defect mentioned in the teristics and of seam welds when depositing
subsections of para. 851.4 is evident on a pipeline, tem- welds across the seam in the course of
porary measures shall be employed to pro-
tect the and the public. If it is not feasible to 851.4.1 Definition of Injurious Dents and Mechanical
make at the time of discovery, permanent Damage
shall be made as soon as described herein. The use of (a) Dents are indentations of the pipe or distortions
a welded of the circular cross section caused by external
as forces.
(b) Plain dents are dents that vary smoothly and do
not contain creases, mechanical [such as
described in (c)], corrosion, arc or seam
andlor repair operations. welds.
(11) If there is sufficient information about the defect (c) Mechanical is to the pipe surface
to determine through analysis the pressure caused by external forces. Mechanical damage includes
at which investigation, and lor opera- features such as of the wall, gouges,
tions may be conducted safely, the shall be oper- "rl',,,,,,,",, smeared metal, not due to C01TO-
ated at or below this pressure these activities. sion. mayor may not be in conjunction
If there is insufficient information <lbout the defect with mechanical of the mayor
to determine the pressure at which excavation, may not be in conjunction with mechanical
tion, andlor may be conducted

78
 ASME B31.8·2014

(d) Plain dents are defined as injurious if they exceed the defect by hot the
of of the nominal pipe diameter. Plain dents entire defect is removed.
are provided strain levels associ- (c) of dents or mechanical
ated with the deformation do not exceed 6% strain. shaH be as described below.
Strain levels may be calculated in accordance with (1) Plain dents, dents
R or other meth- containing stress corrosion
the depth of plain dents, the need ductile girth welds or seams may
"",,e'rY\,:mr to be able to safely pass an internal a full encirclement steel sleeve with open ends or with
or device shall also be considered. ends welded to the pipe.
dents that are not acceptable for this purpose should (2) External mechanical and all dents
be removed to passing these devices the affecting acetylene girth welds or seam welds that are
even if the dent is not injurious. known to exhibit brittle fracture characteristics may be
(e) All external mechanical damage with or without '''<In,,,,,,, with a full encirclement steel sleeve with ends
concurrent visible indentation of the pipe is considered to the pipe.
(3) External mechanical
Dents that contain corrosion are may be repaired by grinding out
corrosion is in excess of what is allowed by para. associated indentation of the
or if exceed a of 6% of the nominal of 4% of the nominal
diameter. to a depth of 10%
Dents that contain stress corrosion cracks or other no limiton length. is
cracks are than 10% up to a maximum of
(II) Dents that affect ductile girth or seam welds are with metal removal confined to a
if exceed a depth of 2% of the nominal the following equation:
those evaluated and determined
an engineering analysis that considers weld (u.s. Cllstomary Units)
quality, nondestructive examinations, and of
the are acceptable provided strain levels associ-
ated with the deformation do not exceed 4%. It is the
to establish the quality level of

l~
the weld. (SI U1Iits)
(i) Dents of any depth that affect nonductile
such as girth welds or seam welds that are
prone to are injurious. L 2R4S[{OI)
of mild ripples in carbon steel
the cold bending process can be
851.4.1-1, where d is the maximum where
dimension of the and D n measured maximum of area, in.
outside diameter of the (mm)
are acceptable if their D
with heights above line may L maximum allowable
acceptable using a more ground area, in. (mm)
nominal wall thickness of pipe, in. (mm)

851.4.2 Permanent Field Repairs of Injurious Dents Grinding shall a smooth contour in the pipe
and Mechanical Damage wall. The remaining wall thickness shall be verified
(a) dents and mechanical using ultrasonic testing. After the surface shall
by one of the methods or be inspected for cracks a nondestructive surface
pressure shall be reduced. The reduced examination method of cracks and the
pressure shall not exceed 80% of the pressure surface shall be with a suitable etchant per
pl(lnPr·jPrlrp·rl by the feature at the time of dis- para. 841.2.4(e). If within the depth and length
covery. Pressure reduction does not constitute a perma- limitations fails to remove the damage, the
nent shall be removed or in accordance
(b) Removal of injurious dents or mechanical
shaH be taking the pipeline out of service (4) Dents stress corrosion may
and out a cylindrical piece of and be repaired by out the cracks to a length and
same with of equal or greater pressure, or depth permitted in para. for corrosion in plain

79
 ASME 831.8·2014

Fig. 851.4.1-1 Allowable Ripple Heights

Hoop Stress at MAOP, MPa

o 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

0.030 = 3%
~ I
\:j
'-"
<J.) I
li) 0.025 2.5% ;
I
E
'"
(5 I
<J.) 0.020 2%
a. I

"
n: Gas pipelines
';:> I
J::
i l\.

I'"
O'l
'iii 0.015 = 1.5% I
::r: I
<J.)
a. I
a. 0,010 = 1% ;

oc I
<J.)
:n(\)
~ 0,005 0.5%
I ; I,
.f> •

<i
0
I ; I
o 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000

Hoop Stress al MAOp, psi

GENERAL NOTE: Source: "Development of Acceptance Criteria for Mild Ripples in Pipeline Field Bends" paperlPC02- 27124 from the International
Pipeline Conference 2002, Copyright © 2002 by The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

The wall thickness shall be checked ultra- has been reduced to a pressure that will not
sonic testing. After the surface shall be a hoop stress in excess of 20% of the
for C[[lcks using a nondestructive surface minimum yield of the and of the defective
examination method capable of detecting cracks and the area can be limited so that there will remain at least
surface shall be with a suitable etchant as per Ys in. thickness in the weld.
para. 841.2.4(e). If within the depth and length (b) Defective welds mentioned in (a) above, which
limitations fails to completely remove the the
cannot be under (a) above and where it is not
shall be removed or repaired in accordance
feasible to remove the defect from the
with (c)(1).
replacement, may be the installation of a full
(d) If a dent or mechanical is with
encirclement welded split sleeve using circumferential
to carry maximum allowable
fillet welds.
'~J,"L"L, the dent shall first be filled with
filler. If the sleeve is (c) If a defect is found in a double
seam or high ERW
seam, a full encirclement welded split sleeve shall be
installed.
(d) If a manufacturing defect is discovered in a low
ERW weld seam or any seam a factor
E less than 1.0 in Table 841.1.7-1, or if hydrogen stress
under para, 851.4,2 shall pass nonde- is found in any weld zone, a full encirclement
ncu-hr,no and tests as in para, 851.5. welded sleeve to carry maximum allow-
851.4.3 Permanent Field Repair of Welds Having able operating pressure shall be installed.
Injurious Defects (e) All performed under (b), (c), and (d)
(11) All circumferential butt welds found to have unac- above shall be tested and inspected as provided in
defects to API] 104) shall be repaired para. 851.5.
of section 827, pro- Corroded areas may be
vided the pipeline can taken out of service. Repairs with weld metal using a
on welds may be made while the is in service,
ing process. Repairs shall be accomplished in accordance
the weld is not leaking, the pressure in the

80
 ASME B31.8·2014

Table 851.4.4-1 Wall Thickness

ft/sec (m/s)
psia (kPa) o 5 (1. 5) 10 (3.0) 20 (6.1)

15 (100) 0.320 in. (8.13 mm)

500 (3,450) 0.300 in. (7.62 mm) 0.270 in. (6.86 mm) 0.240 in. (6.10 mm) 0.205 in. (5,21 mm)
900 (6,200) 0.280 in. (7.11 mm) 0.235 in. (5.97 mm) 0.190 in. (4.83 mm) 0.150 in. (3.81 mm)

This method of repair should not be on

wall thick- that is to be to brittle fracture.
pipeline. The All repairs under (a), (b), and above
welders shall be qualified be tested in para. 851.5.
under para. 823.2.1. The shall provide suffi-
cient direction for avoiding burn-through and minimiz- 851.4.5 Permanent Field Repair of Hydrogen Stress
ing the risk of cracking on in-service Cracking in Hard Spots and Stress Corrosion
For (II) If the shall be taken out of service
elines and of
Deposition Repair on Pipelines" and design
Catalog L51782) in Mandatory Appendix A. This strength.
method of repair shall not be attempted on that is (b) If it is not feasible to take the pipeline out of sere
thought to be to brittle failure. vice, shall be made by the installation of a full
encirclement welded sleeve. In the case of stress
851.4.4 Permanent Field of leaks and
the fillet welds are If the
Nonleaking Corroded Areas
(n) the pipeline shall be taken outof service
The same applies to hydrogen stress cracking
cutting out a cylindrical of
in hard except that a flat hard spot shall be pro-
with pipe of equal or design
tected with a hardenable filler or of
a fillet welded sleeve. Stress corrosion cracking may
(b) If it is not feasible to take the pipeline out of ser-
also be repaired per para. which describes
vice, shall be made by the installation of a full
for stress corrosion cracking in dents.
encirclement welded split sleeve unless a patch is chosen
(e) All repairs performed under (a) and shall be
in accordance with (e) below, or unless corrosion is
tested and as provided in para. 851.5.
with weld metal in accordance with
below. If is with a
full encirclement the circumferential 851.5 Repairs to Steel Pipelines or Mains
fillet welds are optional. 851.5.1 Testing of Replacement Sections.
(e) If the leak is due to a corrosion When a scheduled repair to a pipeline or main is made
be made by the installation of a by cutting out the damaged of the pipe as a
on leak cylinder and it another section of pipe,
(d) A small leak may be by a nipple the section of pipe shall be to a
over it to vent the gas while and then installing pressure test. The section of pipe shall be
an appropriate fitting on the tested to the for a new pipeline or
(e) or non leaking corroded areas on of main the same location. The tests may be
not more than 40,000 (276 MPa) specified minimum made on the to nonde-
strength may by a steel the of section 826
with rounded corners and with not butt welds after installation.lf
in excess of one-half the circumference of the pipe fillet the replacement is under controlled fire conditions
welded over the pitted area. The of the in the pipeline), full encirclement welded
plate shall be the same or greater than the may be used to the pipe sections of
Small corroded areas may be butt welds. All sleeve welds should be radiographed.
them with weld metal from para. 851.5.2.)
electrodes. The higher the pressure and the greater
flow rate, the lesser the chance of burnethrough. At 20 V 851.5.2 Nondestructive
and 100 A, burn-through is unlikely to occur when the Grooves. Dents, and Welds.
actual wall thicknesses exist, as shown in Table 851.4.4-1. weld in accordance with the

81
 ASME 631.8-2014

para. 851.4 and any of its the welding shall (b) facilities to be commissioned with an inert
be examined in accordance with section 826. material and effectively seal the ends. For facilities
where purging is not necessary and where a need to
851.6 Pipeline leak Records restore to service a small amount of gas can
Records shall be made all leaks discovered remain in the facility provided the gas amount poses no
and made. All pipeline breaks shall be reported and contains no corrosive contami-
in detail. These records along with ,....","",,,.... nants pipeline quality standards such as
line and other watel~ carbon dioxide, and sulfides.
routine or unusual inspections shall be kept in the (c) After the facilities have been
of the company, as long as the section of line maintenance as
remains in service. if the were still in service.
(d) The cathodic shall be maintained with
851.7 Pipeline Markers the periodic and record keeping to continue
(n) or markers shall be installed where it is con- as if the facility were still in service.
sidered necessary to indicate the presence of a (e) For stations where blanket gas remains, the
at road, highway, railroad, and stream Emergency Shut Down (ESD) system shall remain in
tional and markers shall be installed service. Some modification to the ESD may be
of the at locations where there is a wlt~:>:>'un:: ESD. The hazardous
probability of damage or interference. gas and fire detectors remain in service to blow
(b) or markers and the surrounding right-of- the units and down, if necessary.
way be maintained so markers can be read
851.10 of Transmission Facilities
and are not obscured.
(c) The signs or markers shall include the words "Gas Operators
(or name of gas transported) " the name of the transmission removed from service
operating and the number (indud- shall develop written for
area company can be facilities to service. shall include the
contacted. following:
(11) Before a facility all mainte-
851.8 Abandoning of Transmission Facilities nance and cathodic records shall be reviewed
Each company shall have a plan in its to ensure that the condition and
and maintenance for abandoning has been maintained during the
transmission facilities. The plan shall include the follow-
ing (b) Facilities to be recommissioned that have been
(n) Facilities to be abandoned shall be disconnected decommissioned for an extended period of time shall
from all sources and of gas such as other be incrementally.
meter stations, control (e) A leak survey shall be after the facility
has been recommissioned. Any defects or leaks discov-
Facilities to be abandoned in shall be purged ered shall be before the facility is back in full
of gas with an inert material and the ends shall be
except that
851.11 Repositioning a Pipeline in Service
(c) After are taken to determine that no
"'''''''''Ik",,,, remain in the facilities to be aban- When the follow-
such facilities may be with air. If ing are some of the
the facilities are with then must (11) deflection
be taken to determine that a mixture is not (b) wall and of pipe
after para. 841.2.7(e).] (e) pressure
(d) of girth welds
851.9 Decommissioning of Transmission Facilities (e) test and operating
the decommissioning presence of defects
disconnect) transmission facilities shall develop pro- curvature
cedures for the of facilities from ser- (11) bends
vice. The the following: (i) valves and
(11) Facilities to be decommissioned shall be isolated (j) terrain and soil conditions
and sealed from all sources and of gas, such as (k) personnel considerations
other pipelines, mains, crossover meter stations, (J) additional stresses cClused repositioning of the
control lines, and other

82
 ASME 631.8·2014

851.12 Pressure Testing for Integrity Assessment of of test media, Additional leak test methods may
lCO"'O"'"

In-Service Pipelines if detection of of the test media is

The integrity of an in-service may be deter- not practical due to very small such as may be
mined by pressure for strength and leaks. Com- experienced after for SCc.
of new test pressures with test 851.12.3 Time Interval Between Tests. The time
pressures will demonstrate that the integrity of the interval between pressure tests, or performing the initial
line has not been reduced if new test pressures are pressure test if the was not post-construction
to or than test pressures. Jf there was tested, should be based upon an critical
no previous test with which to compare the assessment to defects from growing to critical
current test, a minimum specified of safety can sizes. That critical assessment should
be established. A test, however, will not indicate the factors:
deterioration of the pipeline that has not pro- The first consideration in a test
to the point where defects fail the or retest should be the exposure that the could
strength test. Refer to Appendix N for have to a failure of a pipeline.
hydrostatic (b) Stress Level of Previolls Test.
851.12.1 Pressure Test Levels. When establishing higher the stress level of the
test pressures for a test section, the maximum test pres- the remaining flaw will be. Smaller
sure shall be determined by the operator to prevent result in a longer time before the flaw could expected
to the pipeline and its components. Consider- to grow to a critical size, if not mitigated. This means that
<Ilion must be to the effect of test section elev<ltion the ratio of the test pressure to the operating
differences on the test pressure. Whenever test pressure pressure may potentially increase the retest interval.
will cause a hoop stress in excess of 100% of the SMYS, (e) Corrosion Growtli Rate. The corrosion growth rate
refer to Nonmandatory Appendix N, section N-5 for on a given depends the
on yield The minimum test pres- of the corrosive environment the
sure shall be as required through (c). corrosion control measures.
(n) To determine the (d) Mail/lennl1ce. Deterioration of the is also
by the a function of the timing and effectiveness of actions to
at a pressure that will cause a stress correct such conditions as corrosion control ,;p!tlrl,pn('tP<:
90% of the SMYS in the segment the lowest design external force and conditions that
or rated pressure in the section tested as provided increase the for corrosion. effectiveness
in (b) or of programs to nr<"""""lr damage excavation affects
(b) For pipelines in which SCC (Stress Corrosion maintenance.
Cracking) has been defects may be Olher [nspeclion Methods. In-line exter-
pressure to a that will create a nal electrical surveys of condition and cathodic
stress of at least 100% the SMYS at the high protection direct of the monitor-
elevation. of internal corrosion, of gas quality, and
(e) For those in-service pipelines for which the hoop
monitoring to detect encroachment are methods that can
stress of the SMYS cannot be deter- be used to predict or confirm the presence of defects
or those pipelines that operate at stress that may reduce the of the
levels lower than maximum pressure, the mini-
mum strength test pressure be 1.10 times the 852 DISTRIBUTION PIPING MAINTENANCE
MAOr.
852.1 Patrolling
(d) Following the strength test a leak test
should be The leak test pressure should be Distribution mains shall be in areas where
at least 1.10 times the MAOr of the necessary to observe factors may affect safe
tion, The patrolling shall be considered in areas con-
851.12.2 Pressure Hold Period struction activity, deterioration of exposed
The strength test pressure shall be held for a mini- and supports, or any natural causes, which could
mum time period of Yz hI', for those Jines with result in to the The frequency of the patrol-
known SCc, which are to be pressure tested in accor- ling shall be the of the conditions
dance with (b), that could cause failure or and the
(b) The test for SCC shall be held hazards to public
enough for
Yz hr or less. 852.2 leakage Surveys
(e) The leak test pressure should be maintained for Each company having a gas distribution
as as necessary to detect and locate or evaluate any system I set up in its and maintenance

83
 ASME B31.8-2014

a provision for making surveys by such emergency actions as evacuation, blocking an

on the area off, rerouting traffic, sources of ignition,
ventilating, or stopping the flow of gas. The
852.2.1 of Surveys. The types of surveys
provided in section M-6 of Nonmandatory
selected shall be effective for if
Appendix M should be followed.
hazardous
dures that may 852.3.2 Investigation of Reports From Outside
(Il) surface gas detection surveys Sources. notification from an outside source
(b) subsurface gas detector survey bar hole other
public)
surveys may involve gas or gas
pressure tests shall be investigated promptly. If the investiga-
(e) bubble leakage tests tion reveals a leak, the leak should be classified and
ultrasonic tests action should be taken in accordance with the criteria
A detailed of the various surveys and leak- in section M-5 of Nonmandatory AppendiX M.
age detection is shown in Nonmandatory 852.3.3 Odor or Indications From Foreign Sources.
Appendix M. When potentially hazardous leak indications (such as
852.2.2 Frequency of Surveys. The extent and fre- natural, sewer, or marsh vapors) are
of surveys shall be determined by the found to from a source or facility or
service area, building concentra- they be to the
tions, piping age, system condition, operating of the facility where appropriate, to the
and any other known condi lion (such as surface fire department, or other govern men-
subsidence, flooding, or an increase in pres- When the is connected
that has significant to either initiate a to a facility (such as the customer's
leak or to cause leaking gas to migrate to an area where essary action, such as disconnecting or
it could result in a hazardous condition. one- now of to the shall be taken to the
time surveys should be considered following exposure
of the gas distribution to w1usuaJ stresses (such 852.3.4 Follow-Up Inspections. While the excava-
as those from or blasting). The tion is open, the of leak shall be
survey frequencies shall be based on checked by using of
sound and a the leak area shall be checked with a gas In
Once shall be reviewed the case of a Grade 1 leak repair as defined in
periodically to affirm that they are still The Appendix M, where there is residual
frequencies of the survey shall at a followup inspection should be
following: as soon as practicable after allowing the soil to vent to
(Il) Distribution in a principal business dis- the atmosphere and stabilize, but in no case later than
triet should be at least armually. Such surveys 1 month following the repair. In the case of other leak
a detector and shall include the need for a foJlowup should be
tests of the atmosphere will indicate the presence determined by personnel.
of in utility manholes, at cracks in the pavement
and at other locations that 852.4 Requirements for Abandoning, Disconnecting,
opportunities for finding gas leaks. and Reinstating Distribution Facilities
(b) The underground distribution outside the 852.4.1 Abandoning of Distribution Facilities. Each
areas covered by above should be surveyed as fre- shall have a plan for abandoning
quently as indicates necessary, but not less sllch as service lines, mains, control
than once every 5 yr. and for which there is
use.
852.3 leakage Investigation and Action
plan shall also include the
852.3.1 leakage Classification and Repair. Leaks (Il) If the facilities are abandoned in
located and! or should be eval- be physically disconnected from the
uated, and controlled in accordance with the ends of all abandoned facilities shall be
criteria set forth in section M-5 of Non or otherwise sealed. The
M. the abandoned facility to prevent the
Prior to taking action, leaks should be pin- ment a potential combustion hazard shall be consid-
pointed but only it has been established that an ered and appropriate measures shall be taken.
immediate hazard does not exist or has been controlled Abandonment shall not be completed until it has been

84
 ASME B31.8·2014

or liquid (b) when the service line has been designed,

bons contained within the section and maintained in accordance with the
hazard. Air or inert may be used purg- ments of this Code
or the facility may be with water or other inert
material. [See para. If air is used for 852.5 Plastic Maintenance
the operating company shall determine that a 852.5.1 Squeezing-Off and of
ble mixture is not after purging. Consideration Thermoplastic Pipe or Tubing for Pressure Control
shall be given to any effects the abandonment may have (II) Before pipe or tubing is
on an active cathodic system, and off and reopened, it is that
action shall be taken. tests be made to determine that the
(b) In cases where a main and the service lines con- size, and wall thickness of pipe or
nected to it are insofar as service lines are same manufactme can be squeezed-off and
concerned, only the customer's end of such service lines without failure under the conditions thai will
needs to be sealed as above. at the time of the
(e) Service lines abandoned from the active mains (b) After with (a), whenever
should be disconnected as close to the main as tic pipe or is squeezed-off and
practicable. required that
(d) All valves left in the abandoned segment should (1) the work be done with equipment and proce-
be closed. If the is long and there are few line dures that have been established and proven test
valves, consideration should be given to the to be capable of the operation and
at intervals. effectively
(e) All abC)Ve"2'fiWe and vault and valve (2) the and reopened area of the
box covers shall be removed. Vault and valve box voids or be reinforced in accordance with the
shall be filled with suitable compacted backfill material. priate of para. 852.5.2, unless it has
determined and test that ue~)ze··olt
852.4.2 Temporarily Disconnected Service. When- the long-term ,"\rr"",di,,,, of
and reopening do not
ever service to a customer is temporarily
the pipe or
one of the following shall be complied with:
(e) Squeeze-off and reopening shall be done in accor-
(n) The valve that is closed to prevent the flow of gas
dance with ASTM FI041, Standard Guide for
to the customer shall be with a locking device
Off of Polyolefin Gas Pressme Pipe and
or other means to prevent the of the
ASTM Standard Specification for Tools to
persons than those the
Gas or
company.
(d) Refer to Appendix C for a list of
(b) A mechanical device or that will other pertinent ASTM standards and Ii lera ture.
the flow of gas shall be installed in the service line or
in the meter assembly. 852.5.2 Repair of Plastic Pipe or Tubing. If at any
(e) The customer's shall be physically discon- time an injurious groove, gouge, or dent is found
nected from the gas and the open pipe ends shall in plastic pipe or tubing, the damaged or defective sec-
be sealed. tion shall be unless satisfactory are
made.
852.4.3 Test ulrements for Reinstating The section can be cut out and in
Abandoned Facilities and Temporarily Disconnected accordance with provisions of para. 842.3,
Service lines. Facilities abandoned shall be Installation of Plastic The or
tested in the same marmer as new facilities before tubing shall be 100% inside out.
reinstated. There shall be no visible defects on the inside or outside
Service lines abandoned shall be tested of the or tubing. The
in the same manner as new service lines before tested at available
reinstated. pressure.
Service lines disconnected because of Repairs shall be made in accordance with qualified
main renewals or planned work shall be tested procedmes that have been established and proven by
from the point of discQrmection to the service line valve test and in accordance with the following
in the same manner as new service lines before sideration shall be to ensure that the
at the ambient
r....r"'''"If''~<: to maintain continuous service
are made, such as installation of a bypass, any (II) The recommendations of the
of the original service line used to maintain continuous shall be taken into consideration when
service need not be . or type of to be made. Special consideration

85
 ASME B31.8-2014

be to the extent of fiber damage in the case of at pressures of less than 25 psig (170 kPa) that is ext:)OSt~a
thermosetting pipe. for any reason must be sealed a means other than
(b) If a patch orfull encirclement sleeve is it shall
extend at least Y2 in. mm) beyond the damaged area.
852.7.3 Inspection for Graphitization. When a sec-
(c) If a full encirclement is the joining
tion of cast iron pipe is for any reason, an
line between the halves of the sleeve shall be as far as
inspection shall be made to if
possible from the defect, but in no case closer than ~ in.
exists. Ifdetrimental graphitization is
(13 Suitable precautions shall be taken to ensure
must be replaced.
a proper fit at the longitudinal seam.
(d) The patch or sleeve material shall be the same 852.7.4 Disturbed Pipeline Support. When an
type and as the pipe or tubing operating company has that the support for
Wall thickness of the or sleeve shall a segment of a buried cast iron pipeline is disturbed
equal to that of the or tubing. (a) that of the pipeline must be as
(e) The method of attachment of the or sleeve the disturbance
shall be compatible with the material shall conform appropriate steps must be
to the applicable of para. 842.2.9(b), Precau- permanent protection for the disturbed
tions shall be taken to ensure a proper fit and a rr"",,',lol'D that result from external
bond between the or sleeve and the
repaired. The or sleeve shall be
other suitable means during or
853 MISCElLANEOUS FACILITIES MAINTENANCE
material or during the hardening
Excess solvent cement shall be 853.1 Compressor Station Maintenance
of the patch or sleeve,
853.1.1 Compressors and Prime Movers. The start-
852.6 Piping Maintenance Records operating, and shutdown for all gas
compressor units shall be established by the
852.6.1 Inspection of Underground Piping. When-
company, The operating company shall take appropriate
ever any portion or section of an underground
to see that the approved are followed.
distribution is for
or for the installation of new 853.1.2 Inspection and of Relief Valves. All
information shall be recorded: devices in compressor stations shall
(a) the condition of the surface of bare pipe, if pitted ted and/or tested in accordance with
or corroded 853.3, and all devices rupture disks shall
the condition of the pipe surface and of the operated to determine that they open at
tive where the coating has deteriorated to the the correct set pressure, defective or
extent that the underneath found shall be
(c) any coating remote control shutdown
(d) any and tested at least annually to determine that they func-
tion
852.6.2 Cause of Cast Iron Breakage. Whenever
broken cast iron facilities are uncovered, the cause of 853.1.3 Repairs to Compressor Station Piping. All
such as thermal backfill, or construction scheduled repairs to station
shall be recorded if it can be determined. at hoop stress at or above 40%
<empn<:nnshall be done in accor-
852.6.3 Analysis of Condition Records. Distribution
that the use of a welded
condition records shall be analyzed periodically,
is Testing of shall be done in
Any indicated remedial action on the piping system
accordance with para. 851.4.
shall be taken and recorded,
853.1.4 Isolation of Equipment for Maintenance or
852.7 Cast Iron Pipe Maintenance Alterations. The company shall establish
852.7.1 Sealing Joints of 25 (170 kPa) or More. cedures for isolation of units or sections of piping
Each cast iron caulked bell and joint operating maintenance, and for purging prior to units
at pressures of 25 (170 or more that is to service, and shall follow these established
for any reason must be sealed with a mprl,c.n in all cases,
clamp or a material or device that does not reduce the
853.1.5 Storage of Combustible Materials. All flam-
flexibility of the joint and seals and bonds,
mable 01' combustible materials in
852.7.2 Sealing Joints Under 25 psig (170 kPa). those required for everyday use or other than those
Each cast iron caulked bell and spigot joint operating normally used in compressor buildings shall be stored

86
 ASME B31.8-2014

in (I structure built of noncombustible m(lterial 853.3 Maintenance of Pressure-limiting and

loc(lted a suit(lble distance from the compressor build- Pressure-Regulating Stations
ing. All (lboveground oil or t(lnks shall
be in (lccordance with NFPA 30. 853.3.1 Condition and Adequacy_ All pressure- (14)
limiting stations, relief and other pressure-
853.1.6 Maintenance and of Gas Detection regulating stations and shall be to
and Alarm Systems. Each g(ls detection and alarm sys- ic and sui table tests, or
tem required by this Code shall be m(lintained to func- reviewed to determine that they are
tion reliably. The shall develop maintenance (a) in mechanical condition. Visu<1l inspections
and c(llibration to periodic(llly verify the shall be made to determine that equipment is r)t'("~"'rl"
of the gas detectors (lnd (liarm sys- installed and protected from dirt, liquids, or other condi-
tems installed. tions that might The following
shall be included in the where appropriate:
853.1.7 Monitoring Effects of Pulsation and (1) station piping pits, and vaults for gen-
Vibration. Facilities eral condition and indications of settlement. See
and pulsation induced by as para. 853.5 for vault maintenance,
well (IS vibration induced by gas flow or may (2) station doors and and pit vault covers to
be to fatigue crack growth in fabrication and determine that they are functioning and that
att(lchment welds. Susceptible facilities include access is and free from obstructions.
(a) compressor station piping an observed his- (3) ventilating installed in station build-
tory of vibration ings or V<1ults for proper and for evidence of
(b) blowdown piping accumulation of water, ice, snow, or other obstructions.
(c) pulsation bottles and manifolds (4) control, and supply lines for cond itions
(d) piping not the requirements of that could result in a failure.
para. 833.7(a) (5) all locking devices for proper operation.
Such facilities may warrant assessment (6) station schematics for correch.ess.
and/or nondestructive eX(lmination for fatigue (b) adequate from the of capacity and reli-
in fabrication and attachment welds. for the service in which are
set to function at the correct pressure
853.2 Procedures for Maintaining Pipe-Type and is not obtained during
Bottle-Type Holders in Safe Operating the cause of the malfunction shall
Condition be determined, and the components shall
be or as . After
(11) Each company having a or r()lmn,()npnt shall again be checked for proper
bottle-type holder shall prepare and in its files a operation.
plan for the routine inspection and (2) At least once each calendar year, a review sh<11l
of the facilities that has the folloWing be made to ensure that the combined of the
(1) Procedures shall be followed toenable thedetec- relief devices on a piping or faCility is
tion of external corrosion before the strength of the con- to limit the pressure at all times to values
tainer has been impaired. this Code, This review should be based on the
(2) Periodic and of gas in storage conditions that create the maximum probable
shall be made to determine the dew of vapors ment for relief capacity in each case, even though sllch
contained in the stored gas that might cause internal conditions occur infrequently and/ or
corrosion or interfere with the safe of the of time. If it is determined that
plant. is of insufficient capacity,
(3) The pressure control and pressure-limiting
shall be taken to install new or additional equipment
equipment shall be and tested periodically to to provide adequate
determine that it is in a safe condition and 853.3.2 Abnormal Conditions. Whenever abnormal
has adequate conditions are imposed on pressure or flow control
(b) Each operating company, having such a devices, the incident shall be and a determi-
plan as in (a), shall follow the plan and keep nation shall be made as to the need for inspection and/
records that detail the and work done or repairs. Abnormal conditions may include
and the conditions found. bodies that are to erosive service
(e) All unsa conditions found shall be .nC:fl'P"1T1 construction and hydro-

promptly corrected.

87
© 2014 by tile American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent
 ASME 831.8·2014

853.3.3 Stop Valves valve maintenance include

(a) An and/or test of stop valves shall be written to be followed during
made to determine that the valves will operate and are any of emergency
rr..,·,·c>('Hu positioned, (Caution shall be used to avoid (2) training personnel to anticipate all potential
any effect on operational hazards
checks.) The following be included in the (3) tools and equipment as
tion test: including auxiliary equipment, to meet antici-
(1) station inlet, and valves pated emergency valve and/or maintenance
(2) relief device isolating valves requirements
(3) control, and supply line valves
853.4.2 Distribution System Valves.
(b) The final shall include the
of which may be necessary for the safe
gas distribution system, shall be checked and C:P,'\!lI'p(j
(1) a check for proper
lubrication where at
attention shall be given to sta tion quent intervals to ensure their operation.
relief device isolating and valves in con-
Inspection shall incJ ude checking of alignment to permit
trol, sensing, and supply lines. use of a or wrench and from the valve box
(2) restoration of all devices or vault any debris that would interfere with or delay
to proper the of the valve, System maps showing valve
locations should be available.
853.4.3 Service line Valves. Outside shutoff valves
one installed in service lines supplying of public
telemetering or recording pressure gages to assembly, such as churches, and hospi-
gas pressure in the district tals, shall be and lubricated where required at
(b) On distribution supplied by a sufficiently frequent intervals to ensure their satisfactory
station, the company The inspection shall determine if the valve
shall determine the necessity of installing such gages in is if the is satisfactory, and if the
the district, In this determination, the operating valve box or vault, if used, contains debris that would
company shall take into consideration interfere with or the opemtion of the valve. Unsat-
ditions such as the number of customers c:rrlrr,lI'V conditions encountered shall be corrected.
of the
853.4.4 Valve Records. A record shall be maintained
for locating valves covered by pams, 853.4,1 and 853.4.2.
These records may be maintained on maps,
and the information

or
to determine that the 853.4.5 Prevention of Accidental Operation. Precau-
properly. tions shall be taken to accidental operation of
any valve covered by paras, 853.4.1 and 853.4.2, Acciden-
853.4 Valve Maintenance tal valve by operating company npr"n,nnp,
valves that would and the public should be considered in taking
be an emergency shall these precautions. Some recommended actions to be
be and partially at least where applicable, are as follows:
safe and proper operating (a) Lock valves in «v,;ve",' acces-
sible to the public that are not enclosed by a
(a) Routine valve maintenance procedures shall building or
but not be limited to, the following: (b) Lock valves located in vaults, if accessible to the
(1) in accordance with written
by adequately trained personnel
(2) accurate maps for use during routine or
emergency conditions
(3) valve to nne,,,,,,,,,. service 853.5 Vault Maintenance

training programs to familiarize per- or

sonnel with the correct valve maintenance procedures to determine its condition each time the equipment is

88
om.',.."I,1 © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without writ1en consent
 ASME 831.8-2014

and tested in accordance with pnra. 853.3. For (5) the actual area affected by the increase in the
any vault that personnel enter, the shall be number of intended for human occupancy
tested for combustible gas. If the is hazard- and physical barriers or other factors that may limit the
ous, the CRuse shall be determined. The vault shall be further expansion of the more
for ventilation. The condition of the (d) Following this if a
vault covers be examined for hazards. is the patrols
conditions disclosed shall be corrected. diately be adjusted to the intervals by the
of para. 821.6 shall be met operating company for the new Location Class.
is in the vault. Mainte-
,.fr.:rm,',-j in the vault shall be in accordance
854.2 Confirmation or Revision of MAOP (14)

per para. 850.2(a), giving If the study described in para. 854.1 indicates that the
consideration to the of the atmo- established maximum allowable operating pressure of
and protection for in the vault. a section of or main is not commensurate with
Location Class 2, 3, or 4, and such section is in
condition, the maximum allowable
854 LOCATION CLASS AND CHANGES IN NUMBER operating pressure of that section shall be confirmed or
OF BUILDINGS INTENDED FOR HUMAN revised within 18 months following of the
OCCUPANCY study as follows:
854.1 Monitoring (a) If the section involved has been
in place for not less than 2 hr, the maximum
steel pipelines or mains at pressure shall be confirmed or reduced so that
stress levels in excess of 40% not exceed that allowed in Table 854.1-1.
shall be monitored to If the previous test pressure was not high enough
buildings intended for human have been con- to allow the to retain its MAOP or to achieve
structed. The total number of intended for an MAOr in the Location Class
human shall be counted to determine the according to above, the pipeline may either retain
current Location in accordance with the proce- its MAOP or become qualified for an lower
dures in paras. 840.2.2(a) and MAOP if it is retested at a higher test pressure for not less
(b) In accordance with the stated in than 2 hr in with the applicable provisions of
840.1(c), and with the this Code. If new test is not performed
intended for human the IS-month the Location Class
exact or means of change, the MAOr must be so as not to exceed
activities, judgment must be used to determine the the design pressure commensurate wi th the
th(1t should be made to items, such as operating ments of IV at the end of the 18-month
stress of patrolling and cathodic protec- If the test is performed any time after the
tion requirements, as additional buildings intended for period has however, the MAOP may be
human occupancy are constructed. increased to the level it would have achieved if the test
(c) When there is an increase in the number of build- had been that IS-month
intended for human occupancy to or near the upper (e) An MAOr that has been confirmed or revised
limit of the Location Class listed in Table 854.1-1 to the to (a) or above shall not exceed that estab-
in Location Class is likely, a lished by this Code or previously established by
r{}l'<>n.iPtc'rl within 6 months of of the ble editions of the 831.8 Code. Confirmation or revision
the following: according to para. 854.2 shall not preclude the
(1) the construction, and testing tion of section 857.
followed in the original construction and a comparison (d) Where opera conditions require that the
of such with the of this existing maximum allowable pressure be
Code. and the cannot be brought into
(2) the phYSical conditions of the as in (b), or above, the
to the extent that this can be the area of the Location Class shall
tests and evaluation records. replaced with pipe commensurate with the requirements
(3) and maintenance of the of IV, the factor obtained from
line or main. Table 841.1.6-1 for the Location Class.
(4) the maximum and the cor-
hoop stress. pressure grad ient 854.3 Pressure-Relieving or Pressure-limiting
into account in the section of the Devices
affected by the Where the MAOP of a section of or main is
for human occupancy. revised in accordance with para. 854.2 and becomes less

89
2014 by the American of Mechanical LJI';"le:<OI>.
be made of this material without written consent
 A5ME B31.8·2014

Table 854.1-1 location Class

Original
Current
location Number of location Number of Maximum Allowable
Class Buildings Class Buildings Operating Pressure (MAOP)

1, Division 1 0-10 11-25 Previous MAOP but not greater than 80% SMYS
1, Division 2 0-10 11-25 Previous MAOP but not greater than 72% SMYS
1 0-10 2 26-45 0.800 x test pressure but not greater than 72% SMYS
1 0-10 2 46-65 0.667 x test pressure but not greater than 60% SMYS
0-10 3 66+ 0.667 x test pressure but not greater than 60% SMYS
0-10 4 [Note (2)) 0.555 x test pressure but not greater than 50% SMYS

2 11-45 2 46-65 Previous MAOP but not greater than 60% SMYS
2 11-45 3 66+ 0.667 x test pressure but not greater than 60% SMYS
2 11-45 4 [Note (2)J 0.555 x lest pressure but not greater than 50% SMYS

3 46+ 4 [Note (2)J 0.555 x test pressure but not greater than 50% SMYS

NOTES:
(1) At time of design and construction.
(2) Multistory buildings become prevalent.

than the maximum allowable operating pressure of the consequence of a failure, even though the probability of
pipeline or main of which it is a a suitable pressure- such an occurrence is very if the line is
or pressure-limiting shall be installed constructed, and in accordance with this Code.
with of paras. 845.2, and (1) Where such a facility described in
845.2.1. results in concentrations of people, the
ments of below shall apply.
854.4 Review of Valve Spacing
(2) However, (b) below need not be applied if the
Where the in para. 854.1 indicates that
facility is used The lesser usage combined
the established maximum allowable pressure
with the very remote of a failure at that
of a transmission is not commensurate with
ular point on the pipeline eliminates the
that permitted by for the new Location
bUity of an occurrence.
the sectionalizing valve spacing shall be reviewed and
revised as follows: (b) near places of public assembly as out-
(a) If the section of is for continued lined in (a) above shall have a maximum allowable hoop
service because of a prior test 854.2(a)J, or can stress not 50% of SMYS. Alternatively, the
be brought into compliance by lowering the maximum company may make the described in
allowable operating [para. or para. and determine that with the
[para. 854.2(b)], no valves will normally following will result in an
(1) The is hydrostatically retested for at
(b) Where a must be to least 2 hI' to a minimum stress level of one of the
maintain the established maximum allowable operating following:
pressure as provided in para. 854.2(d), consideration (-a) 100% of SMYS if the is at
should be to valve as follows: a hoop stress level over 60% and up to 72% of SMYS
(1) Where a short section of line is replaced, addi-
(-b) 90% of SMYS if the is
tional valves will normally not be required. a hoop sh'ess level over 50% and up to 60% of
(2) Where the section involves
unless the was tested to a pressure
1 mi (1.6 km) or more transmission additional
of at least 1.5 times the MAOP
valve installation shall be considered to conform to the
If the contains pipe of various
in para. 846.1.1.
stress the minimum test hoop stress levels stated
854.5 Concentrations of People in location above should be based on the SMYS of the pipe with
(lasses 1 and 2 the stress level.
(a) Where a the criteria of para. 840.3 surveys are conducted at
is built near an steel pipeline in Location intervals consistent with those established by the
Classes lor 2, consideration shall be to the company for Location Class 3.

90
Copyright © 20 f q by the American Society
be made of this material withoulwritten
 ASME 631.8-2014

(3) When the maximum allowable hoop stress (3) Replace facilities necessary to make sure the
exceeds 60% of SMYS, visual level is commensurate with the Location
tions are conducted by an appropriate sampling tech- Class.
or instrumented capable of (d) If necessary, make inspections of appropriate sec-
gouges and corrosion are made to confirm the tions of piping to determine the condition
continuing physical condition of the pipe. of the pipeline.
(4) If the facility is likely to encourage addi- (e) Make replacements, or alterations that in
tional construction activity, provide appropriate pipe- the operating company's judgment are advisable.
line markers. (f) Perform a strength test in accordance with this
Code to establish the maximum allowable
unless the pipeline has
855 PIPELINE SERVICE CONVERSIONS

855.1 General Perform a leak test in conformance with this Code.

(11) Wirhin 1 yr of the date tbat the converted pipeline
The intent of this section is to
is placed in gas service, provide cathodic protection as
to allow an operator of a steel pipeline set out in para. that wherever
for service not covered this Code replacement sections and new piping shall be
for service under this Code. For a dual service
cathodically for new
used alternately to liquids in confor-
mance with an Code, such as ASME B31.4, 855.4 Conversion Procedure
a written
gas service
the study and conversion of the
855.2 Historical Records Study Note any unusual conditions
conversion.
Review the following historical data and make an
evaluation of the condition: 855.5 Records of the Conversion
(n) all available information on the Maintain for the life of the pipeline a record of the
and testing. Particular atten- studies, tests, and
used and alterations made in connection with conversion of the
other methods, internal and external steel pipeline to gas service under this Code.
pipe, and other material
(b) available operating and maintenance data
leak failures, cathodic 856 ODORllATION
protection, and internal corrosion control 856.1 General
(e) Consider the age of the pipeline and the
Any gas distributed to customers through gas mains
time it may have been out of service in preparing a
or service lines or used for domestic purposes in com-
evaluation to convert the to gas service.
pressor which does not naturally possess a dis-
tinctive odor to the extent that its presence in the
855.3 Requirements for Conversion to Gas Service
is detectable at all gas concentrations
previously used for service not of the lower limit and above, shall
to this may be qualified for service under this have an odorant added to to make it so detectable.
Code as follows: Liquefied petroleum gases are usually nontoxic, but
(11) Review historical records of the as indi- when distributed for consumer use or used as fuel in a
cated in piHa. 855.2. place of employment, they shall also be odorized for
(b) a II l

for physical condition. Odorization is not for

the material where possible for (n) gas in or other
able records. (b) gas used for further or use where the
(e) Operatillg Stress Level odorant would serve no useful purpose as a
(1) Establish the number of buildings near the or would be a detriment to the process
line or main intended for human occupancy, and deter- (e) gas used in lease or field
mine the design factor for each in accordance is delivered for use
with para. 840.2 and Table 841.1.6-1. exempted activities or
(2) Conduct a to compare the proposed of those activities for space refrigeration, water
operating stress levels with those allowed for the
Location Class. I Refer to NFPA 58 and NFPA 59.

91
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society ofMechullical
be made of this material without written
 ASME B31.8·2014

heating, cooking, and other domestic uses, or if such

is used for furnishing heat or air conditioning for
or quarters, the gas shall be odorized.

856.2 Odorization Equipment shall be prepared for uprating that shall

Each company shall use odorization include a written that will ensure
the type and injection rate of odorant with each of this section.
(c) Before increasing the maximum allowable
pressure of a segment that has been
856.3 Odorant Requirements less than that determined by para.
Each and corrective measures
shall be taken:
(1) The deSign, initial installation, method, and
date of previous Location materials,
and equipment shall be reviewed to determine that the
proposed increase is safe and consistent wi th the
ments of this Code.
(2) The condition of the line shall be determined
be nontoxic to humans breathing air the prod- by surveys; other field inspections, and exami-
ucts of combustion and shall not be corrosive or harmful maintenance records.
to the materials with which such of combustion or alterations disclosed
would come in contact. to be necessary by (c)(l) and (c)(2) above shall be made
(c) TI1e combination of the odorant and the natural prior to the uprating.
odor of the gas shall a distinctive odor so that (d) A new test of this
when gas is in air at the concentration of as little Code should be evidence is
as 1% volume, the odor is readily detectable by a not available to ensure safe at the proposed
person with a normal sense of smell. maximum allowable operating pressure.
(e) When gas are tted under
856.4 Records paras. 857.2, 857.3, 857.4, and 857.5, the
For all odorizers, or shall be increased in increments, with a survey
type, or similar odorizers individual customers na .. tnr""ari after each incremental increase. The number

or small distribution each operating company increments shall be determined the after
shall maintain records the following items: the total amount of the
(II) the type of odorant introduced into the gas the stress level at the final maximum
(0) the amount of odorant per million cubic pressure, the known condition of the line, and
feet (m 3) imity of the line to other structures. The
increments shall be sufficient to ensure that any leaks
856.5 Odorant Concentration Tests are detected before they can create a potential hazard.
Each company shall conduct odorant con- Potentially hazardous leaks discovered shall be
tests on gas supplied through its facilities before further the pressure. A final leak sur-
odorization. Test shall be remotely vey shall beconducted at the higher maximum allowable
the odorizing equipment to data pressure.
of gas at all of the Records for uprating, including each investigation
required by this section, corrective action taken, and
test shall be retained as long as the
857 UPRATING involved remain in service.
This section of the Code prescribes minimum
ments for uprating or mains to maxi- 857.2 Uprating Steel Pipelines or Mains to a
mum allowable operating pressures. Pressure That Will Produce a Hoop Stress of
30% or More of SMYS
857.1 General
(II) A maximum allowable pressure increased after
established under this section may not exceed the design of the following
pressure of the weakest element in the segment to be (II) If the physical condition of the line as determined
It is not intended that the of this by 857.1(c) indicates the line is of with-
be retroactively to the desired pressure, is in

92
Copyright © 20 14 by the AIl1erican Society of Meehan icnl
be made of this material without written consent
 ASME B31.8·2014

with the of this maximum allowable

Code, and has pressure of a that has been operating
to or greater than that at the applicable maximum pressure to a
line for the proposed maximum allowable maximum allowable pressure, the following
pressure, the line may be at the factors shall be considered:
mum allowable operating pressure. (1) the physical condition of the line as determined
(b) If the condition of the line as determined para.
by para, 857.1(c) indicates that the ability of the line to (2) information from the manufacturer or
withstand the higher maximum operating pressure has determining that each component of a
not been satisfactorily verified or that the line has not ca of
been tested to the levels required by this pressure
Code for a new line for the proposed higher maximum (c) Before increasing the pressure, the following
allowable pressure, the line may be shall be taken:
at the higher maximum allowable operating I-'''''''''~'C (1) Install suitable devices on the service Jines to
it shall successfully withstand the test by this regulate and limit the of the gas in accordance
Code for a new line to under the same with para. 845,2.7(c) the new maximum allowable
cond i tions. pressure is to be over 60 (410 kPa),
(c) If the physical condition of the line as determined reinforce or anchor offsets, bends,
by para. 857.1(c) verifies its capability of at a to avoid movement of
higher pressure, a higher maximum allowable bend, or dead end be
pressure may be established to para. 845.2.2 in an excavation,
using as a test pressure the pressure to which (3) Increase pressure in increments as provided in
the line has been in a strength test or para.
in actual operation.
(d) If it is necessary to test a pipeline or main before 857.4 Uprating a Ductile Iron Main or
it can be uprated to a higher maximum allowable System to a New and Higher Maximum
pressure, and if it is not to test the Allowable Operating Pressure
line either because of the expense or created (II) The maximum allowable operating pressure of a
by taking it out of service or because of other operating ductile iron main or shall not be increased to a
conditions, a higher maximum allowable pressure in excess of that in para, 842.1.1(a).
may be established in Location Where records are not complete to permit the
direct application of para, 842.1.1(a), following pro-
(1) Perform the of para. 857, l(c). cedures shall be used:
(2) Select a new maximum allowable operating (1) Lnying Conditioll. Where the original laying con-
pressure consistent with the condition of the line and ditions carmo! be it shall be assumed that
the of this Code, provided Condition D (pipe on blocks, ,,,,,,n",r\
(-II) the new maximum allowable exists for cast iron and Condition B (pipe laid with-
sure does not exceed 80% of that out blocks, backfill) exists for ductile iron
line to under the same conditions (2) Cover. Unless the actual maximum cover depth
(-b) the pressure is increased in increments as is known with it shall be determined by
provided in para, 857.1(e) exposing the main or at three or more points
and making actual measurements. The main or
857.3 Uprating Steel or Plastic Pipelines to a
shall be in areas where the cover depth is most
Pressure That Will Produce a Hoop Stress
The greatest measured cover
Less Than 30% of SMYS
(3) Nominlll Wnll Thickl1ess. Unless the nominal
(n) This steel mains and thickness is known with it shall be determined
maximum allowable operating with ultrasonic devices, The average of all
pressure is less than that required to produce il hoop measurements taken shall be increased by the allowance
stress of 30% of the minimum yield strength indicated in Table 857.4-1-
of the pipe and to all high-pressure distribution The nominal wall thickness of cast iron shall be the
If the higher maximum allowable standard thickness listed in Table 10 or Table 11, which-
pressure of a steel or mam IS ever is of AWWA C101 that is nearest the
stress level more than 30% of the minimum value obtained. The nominal wall thickness of ductile
yield of the pipe, the provisions of para. 857,2 iron shall be the standard thickness listed in Table 6 of
shall apply. ANSI! AWWA Cl50! A21.50 nearest the value obtained.

93
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

Table 857.4-1 Wall Thickness Allowance for Uprating a Ductile Iron High-
Pressure Main or System

Cast Iron
Nominal Pipe Size, in. (DN) Pit Cast Pipe Centrifugally Cast Pipe Ductile Iron Pipe

3-8 (75- 200) 0.075 (1.9) 0.065 (1.7) 0.065 (1.7)

10-12 (250-300) 0.08 (2,0) 0.07 (1.8) 0.Q7 (1,8)
14-24 (350-600) 0,08 (2,0) 0,08 (2.0) 0.Q75 (1.9)
30-42 (750-1050) 0.09 (2.3) 0,09 (2.3) 0.075 (1.9)
48 (1200) 0.09 (2,3) 0.09 (2,3) 0.08 (2.0)
54-60 (1350-1500) 0.09 (2.3)

(4) MllIlIIjllctllril1g Process. Unless the cast iron the new and higher maximum allowable
manufacturing is known with it operating pressure, the shall be increased as
be assumed to pit cast pipe having a bursting tensile provided in para,
strength,S, of 11,000 (76 MPa) and a modulus of
rupture, R, of 31,000 psi (214 MPa), 857.5 Uprating a Distribution System That Has Been
(b) Before increasing the maximum allowable Operating at Inches (Millimeters) of Water
pressure, the following measures shall be (Low Pressure) to a Higher Pressure
(n) In addition to tions outlined in
(1) Review the physical condition as required para. 857.1(c) and the requirements contained
para. 857,1(c). in paras. 857,3 and the following must be
(2) Adequately reinforce or anchor offsets, bends, taken:
and dead ends in coupled or bell and pipe to (1) Install devices at each cus-
avoid movement of the pipe, should the bend, or tomer's meter.
dead end be by excavation. (2) that the ""''''tTl"""f
(3) Install suitable devices on the service lines to cally disconnected from
reguJate and limit the pressure of the continue to operate at inches
with para, 845,2.7(c) if the new and maximum (b) After performing the outlined in (a) above,
allowable operating pressure is to be over the pressure shall be increased in increments as outlined
60 (410 kPa). in para, 857.1(e). After the first incremental increase,
(c) If after and (b) it is established however, shall be taken to verify that the custom-
that the main system is of er's are performing

94
© 20 I4 by the American Society of Mechanical
reproduction be made of this material without written consent of ASME,
 ASME 831.8-2014

Chapter VI
Corrosion Control

860 CORROSION CONTROL - GENERAL its maximum allowable operating pressure, that portion
shall be reconditioned, or or the
860.1 Scope
pressure shall be commensurate with
(a) This Chapter contains the minimum requirements of the corroded pipe. For steel
and procedures for corrosion control of expo:sed pipelines, the remaining strength of corroded may
and metallic and components. be determined in accordance with ASME B31G, Manual
Chapter VIII for requirements.) This for the Remaining of Corroded
Chapter contains minimum and
dures for controlting external surveys
and internal corrosion. This and normal maintenance work in accordance with
and installation of new 852.2 and 852.6 shall be continuously reviewed
operation and maintenance evidence of continuing corrosion.
(c) Electrical survey methods may be used as an indi-
cation of corrosive areas where surface condi-
tions permit sufficiently accurate measurements. Such
surveys are most effective in non urban environments.
Common methods of electrical survey include
(1)
(2) surface potentials (cell-to-cell)
(3) soil measurements
company can (d) The continued effectiveness of a cathodic
herein have been achieved. lion shall be monitored in accordance with
(d) Corrosion control section 863.
may, in many instances, require measures in addition (e) Whenever a buried facility is during nor-
to those shown in this Chapter. Each operating company mal maintenance or construction activities, a visual
shall establish to its corrosion ncnDt't,"'n shall be made of the coating condition, the
control program, including the of this or both, if The extent of any
Chapter, to achieve the desired corrosion shall be evaluated in accordance with
including those for installation, and mainte- para. 860.2.
nance of cathodic systems; shall be When any part of a nll''''In''
and implemented or under the direction internal surface is
qualified training and/or in corrosion examined and evaluated for internal corrosion.
control methods. (1) If evidence of internal corrosion is
(e) Records the gas shall be analyzed to determine the types and
and other structures concentrations of any corrosive
or the cathodic protection system (2) or solids removed from the pipeline
shall be maintained by the by or cleanup shall be analyzed as
if) Records of tests, surveys; necessary determining the presence of corrosive
etc.; necessary for the of corro- materials and evidence of corrosion
sion control measures shall be maintained and retained
for as long as the piping remains in service. 860.3 Corrective Measures
(a) If external corrosion that, unless con-
860.2 Evaluation of Installations in a condition that is detrimental
(a) Procedures shall be established for evaluating the to public or is found
need for and effectiveness of a corrosion control pro- made under para. 860.2(a) or section
gram. Appropriate corrective action shall be taken com- corrective measures shall be taken to 'mrlvrl' ....
mensurate with the conditions found. If the extent of corrosion on the piping or segment. Corrective
corrosion has reduced the of a below measures shall be continued in effect as long as

95
 ASME 631.8·2014

to maintain a safe Appropriate correc- through the such shall be

tive measures may the following: removed. Further information can
(1) provisions for and continuous NACE SP0169.
of cathodic
(2)
alion to handling,
tion, moisture adsorption, operating
pipeline, environmental factors (including the nature of
current control the soil in contact with the coating), adhesion character-
(7) other effective measures istics, and dielectric ctr.on{yth
(8) any combination of the above (c) Coating shall be applied in a manner that ensures
(b) Where it is determined that internal corrosion tak- effective adhesion to the Voids, wrinkles, holidays,
ing could affect public or employee one or and gas be avoided.
more of the following or corrective measures (d) The for defects
shall be used to detrimental internal corrosion: before the pipe is Insulating type
(1) An effective corrosion inhibitor shall be applied on mains and transmission lines shall be
in a manner and quantity to protect all affected portions for by the most method.
of the piping that
(2) Corrosive shall be removed by recog- corrosion control shall be repaired is
nized methods, such as acid gas or ration treating installed in the ditch.
(e) In addition to the provisions of paras.
(3) shall be added for removal of water and 841.2.5(c), care shilll be exercised in han-
from low spots, or piping shall be positioned to reduce and insti1l1ation to to the
sump coating, including measures noted as follows:
(4) Under some of a (1) Minimize handling of coated Use
suitable internal may be effective. ment least likely to the coating, e.g., belts or
(c) When or indicates the above cradles instead of cables.
will not control corro- (2) Use skids where
sion to an level, the segment shal.l be recondi- (3) Stack or store pipe in a manner that minimizes
tioned or replilced and to
861.1.2 Cathodic Protection Requirements. Unless
861 EXTERNAL CORROSION CONTROL FOR STEEl it Ci1n be demonstrated by tests or that
PIPELINES cathodic protection is not needed, all buried or sub-
rnpra~',; facil ities with type
861.1 Buried/Submerged Installations facilities installed for a service
All new transmission compressor stilt ion cathodically protected as soon as feasible following
piping, distribution mains, service lines, and installation. Minor replacements or extensions, however,
and bottle-type holders installed under this Code shall be as covered by para. 860.3.
except as permitted under para. 862.1.2, be externally Facilities installed for a limited service life need not
coated and cathodically unless it can be dem- be cathodically if it can be demonstrated that
onstrated by test or that the materials are the facility will not corrosion that will cause
resistant to corrosion in the environment in which it to be harmful to the public or environment. Cathodic
are installed. Consideration shall be to the han- shall be to the bur-
shipping, installation cond itions, and the ied or in its is
service environment and cathodic rwr'~'''-~;r'n considered to be cilthodically when it meets
ments when the coa materials. The one or more of the criteria established in Mandatory
Corrosion Data Survey, by NACE International, K.
is a source of information on materials in
861.1,3 Electrical Isolation
corrosive environments.
(a) All coated trilnsmission and distribution
861.1.1 Coatings shall be electrically isolated at all interconnections with
(a) The surfilce preparation should be including customer's fuel lines,
with the to be applied. The surface shall metallic structures are electrically
be free of deleterious such as rust, scale, mois- and as a unit.
ture, dirt, oils, and varnish. The surface shall shall be from cast
be for that could iron, ductile iron, or nonferrous metal and

96
 ASME 831.8-2014

Electrical tests shall be made of transmis- 861.1.5 Electrical Interference

sion and distribution to locate unintentional current cathodic protection
contacts with other metallic structures. If such contacts installed, and operated so as to mini-
exist, shall be corrected. See para. 841.1.11(c) for mize adverse effects on metallic structures.
clearance (b) Field tests shall be conducted to determine the
(b) Where a gas overhead electric adverse electrical interference from structures,
transmission consideration shall be including DC electrical facilities. The shall be
(1) investigating the of mitigated by such means as control bonds, supplemen-
ing joints in the pipeline induced tary cathodic protection, and insu-
devices.
resulting from ground faults and lightning. Such
tion can be obtained buried galvanic 861.1.6 Isolation From Casings. The use of metallic
anodes to the near the insulating joints and/or by should be avoided as much as as
the insulator with a gap, or by a corrosion control It is however,
means. that installation of is frequently
a study in collabora tion with the electric or desirable to facilitate construction, as an economical
the following factors into consideration method of protecting to
remedial measures as appropriate: structural protection from
to facilitate as required by a governmental
(-a) the need to induced AC or
agency and as by the landowner or permit
their effects on during construction and
grantor, and for reasons. Where metallic
operation of the pipeline by means of suitable
used, care should be exercised to ensure that
for bonding, shielding, or grounding
the carrier pipe is not during installation.
(-b) the possibility of or fault currents carrier pipe should be insulated from metallic
sufficient to puncture pipe and the ends should be sealed with a
or pipe materifll to minimize the accumulation of solids and
(-c) adverse effects on cflthodic liquids in the annular space. Special attention should
tion, communications, or other electronic facilities be to the ends to electrical
(-d) the corrosive effects of high voltage direct due to backfilling movement or settling. Where
current power isolation is not achieved, action shall be taken to correct
(3) obtaining further information from the condition or mitigate corrosion inside of the casing
NACE SP0177 and EPRI EL-3106. by supplemental or localized cathodic protection, instal-
lation of a inhibited material in the annu-
861.1.4 Electrical Connections and Monitoring lar space, or other effective means.
Points 861.1. 7 Electrical Interference
(a) for offshore sufficient test points (a) Adverse electrical interference from or to foreign
should be installed to demonstrate the effectiveness of structures as determined by field tests shall be mitigated.
corrosion control or the need for cathodic (b) Facili ties for mitigating electrical interference shall
VIlJ for considerations for offshore be periodically monitored.
pipelines.)
861.2 Aboveground Piping Atmospheric Protection
(b) attention shall be to the manner of
installation of electric<1lleads used for corrosion control 861.2.1 Coatings. Facilities to the atmo-
or testing to avoid harmful stress concentration at the shall be from external corrosion by a
of attachment to the Acceptable methods suitable r""hniO"
include, but are not limited to 861.2.2 Surface Preparation. The surface to be
(1) electrical leads attached directly on the pipe or coated shall be free of deleterious such as
the thermit process, copper oxide and rust, moisture, dirt, oil,
aluminum powder. The size of the rhermit surface preparation shall be
shall not exceed a or to be
(2) attachmentof electrical leads directly to the 861.2.3 Coating Characteristics. The or
by the use of soft solders or other materials that do not jacket selected shall possess characteristics that will pro-
involve temperatures those for soft solders. vide adequate protection from the environment. Coat-
(d All that is barred for electrical lead connec- and shall completely cover the
structure and shall be applied in accordance with
by electrical insu material established or manufacturer's
coating. recommendations.

97
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of Ihis material withoul writ1en consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

861.2.4 Air/Electrolyte Interface. consider- 863.4 Appropriate Correction Measure

ation shall be to surfilces near the ground line or Where the tests or surveys indicate that adequate pro-
in il zone. tection does not exist, appropriate corrective measure
shall be taken.
861.3 Harsh Environments
Where or indicates thilt the
864 INTERNAL CORROSION CONTROL
environment in which the pipe or component is to be
installed is corrosive, the following shall 864.1 General
be considered: When corrosive gas is transported, provisions shall
(a) materials component geometry shall be be taken to the piping system from detrimental
Dc"en",,' to resist detrimentill corrosion corrosion. containing free water under the condi-
(b) a suitable coating tions at which it will be transported shall be assumed
(e) cathodic protection to be corrosive, unless proven to be noncorrosive
tests or p",,,'r;pn
Internal corrosion control measures shall be eVilluated
862 CATHODIC PROTECTION CRITERIA by im inspection and monitoring program,
862.1 Standard Criteria but not limited to, the following:
(II) The inhibitor and the inhibitor injection system
A facility is considered to be cathodically should be periodically checked.
when it meets one or more of the criteria established in (b) Corrosion coupons and test spools shaH be
Mandatory K. removed and evaluated at intervills.
(c) Corrosion should be checked manually at
862.2 Alternative Criteria
intervals, or continuously or monitored,
It is not intended that cathodic protection be limited rpr(wrj"rl or both, to evaluate control of pipeline internal
to these criteria if it can be demonstrated other means corrosion.
that control of corrosion has been achieved. (d) A record of the internal condition of the pipe, of
leaks and from corrosion, and of liquids; or
solids quantities and be kept and
863 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF
used as a basis for in the pigging schedule,
CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEMS
inhibitor program, or gas treatment facility.
863.1 Inspection of Equipment (e) When is uncovered or on eXloo:,ed
where corrosion may be
shall be made as
thickness measurement or
continuous and effective operation
internill corrosion.
tection
if) Where
863.2 Measurement of Cathodic Protection indicates internal corrosion is to an extent
that may be detrimental to public or employee safety,
Electrical tests shall be made periodically to determine that portion of the system shall be or recondi-
that the piping is in accordance with tioned, and taken to mitigate the inter-
the applicable criteria. nal corrosion.
863.3 Frequency of Testing 864.2 Design of New Installations
The type, and location of and When a new or replacement pipeline sys-
tests shall be to establish with reasonable accu- tem, or additions or modifications to existing
racy the of protection measures shaH be considered to and/ or inhibit
Frequency should be internal corrosion. To integrity and effi-
ation of items including, but not limited to, the of a in it is known or anticipated
following: that corrosive gas will be the following
(a) condition of factors should be included in the and construc-
(b) method of cathodic lion, ei ther or in combination.
(c) corrosiveness of the environment 864.2.1 Use of Internal Protective Coating. When
(d) probability of loss or interruption of n"r,f",,~hr\n internal coating is to be used to a piping
(e) operating including inspections and (a) the coating shall meet the quality
leak investigations and the minimum film thickness shall
if) life of the cathodic installation to the facility the corrosive mediil involved,
public or 0""''''''''''0 based on the type of and methods of application

98
Copyright @ 20 I'1 by the American of Mechanical
[J'UiJUlClIUII may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

(b) in accordance (n) materials selected for pipe and

with practice compatible with the components of the gas, liquids
joint corrosion, carried by the gas, and with each other. A source of
continuing use of a information on materials performance in corrosive envi-
sui table inhibitor when coated or other components ronments is The Corrosion Datn SlIrvey, by
are joined by welding or other methods that leave the NACE International.
parent metal exposed (b) where plastic, nonferrous, or alloy steel and
(d) the types of coating and components are used to prevent or control internal corro-
be evaluated and chosen to to the inter- such materials shall have been determined to be
nal coating if or <;"hplrp<: effective under the conditions encountered.
864.2.2 Use of Corrosion Inhibitor. When a corro- paras. 842.5.1(a)(2) and 849.5.1(a)(2) for limitations on
sion inhibitor is to be used as an additive to the gas copper.]
(c) erosion-corrosion effects from
streams
(n) the equipment for the holding,
des at probable points of turbulence and
hon of the inhibitor into the stream shall be should be minimized by use of erosion-resistant materi-
the als, added wall thickness, or flow configuriiltion,
(b) the operation of the program should be and size or dimensions of the pipe and fittings.
a part of the 864.2.7 High-Temperature Considerations. When
(e) sufficient test coupon holders or other monitoring gas or a mixture of gas and or solids known or
equipment shall be provided to allow for continued pro- anticipated to be corrosive is transported at elevated
gram evaluations temperatures, consideration shall be to the
(d) the corrosion inhibitor selected shall be of a type identification mitigation of internal corro-
that will not cause deterioration of any of sion. Such measures are
the system reaction rates increase with
864.2.3 Use of Pigging Equipment. When a are not stable.
pigging is planned measures are
(n) scraper traps for the insertion and removal of
864.2.8 lOW-Temperature Considerations. Where
spheres, or both, shall be provided the gas stream is chilled to melting of frozen
(b) sections of to be traversed by soil the pipeline, there will not normilily
<;nt1t""'p<: shall be to prevent to be free water in the gas to result in internal
pipes, or fittings operations corrosion in the presence of contaminants, such as sulfur
for or shall be riD'''",',,,,., compounds or If it is however, that
tool materials they propel free water or water /alcohol solutions will be present in
the pipeline along with potentially corrosive contami-
shall be made for effective accumula- nants, suitable corrective measures shall be taken ilS
tion handling of liquid and solid materials removed nn'''CT'C1Pfl in section 864.
from the by or
864.2.4 Use of Corrosion Coupons. When corrosion
coupons, corrosion probes, and/or test spools are to 865 STEEl PIPELINES IN ARCTIC ENVIRONMENTS
be used 865.1 Special Considerations for Arctic Environments
(n) corrosion coupons, probes, or test shall be
installed where practical at locations where the CY""","'" consideration must be given to the corrosion
potential for internal corrosion exists control requirements of buried pipelines and other facili-
(b) corrosion coupons, and test must ties installed in arctic environments, in per-
be designed to passage of pigs or when mafrost For in contact with frozen
installed in sections traversed thereby earth, the corrosion fate is reduced because of the
extremely high of the soil and low ion mobil-
864.2.5 Sweetening or Refining of Gas. When gas ity, but it does not reach zero. corrosion can
is to be treated to reduce its corrosivity occur, however, in unfrozen discontinuous
(n) and/or equipment may be permafrost, or thaw areas such (1S those that may occur in
the vicinity of rivers, lakes, or pipeline sections
(b) equipment for the removill of other deleterious
where the pipe surface temperature is above the
material from the gas should be considered of the environment. Cathodic protection in local-
864.2.6 Use of Corrosion-Resistant Materials. The ized thaw areas may be more difficult due to the
material of the pipe and other of cathodic currents by the sur-
the gas stream must resist rounding frozen soil. Other detrimental effects can be

99
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of Ihis material without wriUen consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8·2014

caused by seasonal thaws that increase biological and adjacent underground metallic facilities must be electri-
in the areas or in cally interconnected to prevent detrimental interference.
the "active above underlying
865.1.3 Galvanic Anode Considerations. Galvanic
Pipeline facili ties installed in arctic environments shall
anodes (packaged or ribbon) may be needed on pipelines
be coated and cathodically protected in the same manner in permafrost areas to
as in temperate locations, and the same consid- facilities in localized thawed areas. This
eration shall be to the need for protection from ized cathodic to those sections of
internal and atmospheric corrosion, as might be shielded by the high
cally provided in this section. the surrounding soil.
865.1.1 External Coating Requirements. 865.1.4 Monitoring Considerations. Installation of
for in environments shall be calibrated current should be consid-
selected to the particular of that ered in addition to the normal test points. These should
environment. These include resistance to be installed at sufficient intervals to evaluate current
during handling and installation distribution along the protected and the effects
applicability of field joint of telluric currents in polar These
coatings or compatibility with any spans also provide contact for indica-
applied cathodic protection, and resistance to soil tions of coating damage due to stresses induced
stresses due to frost heave, thaw settlement, seasonal by a frozen environment.
changes, or other reasons.

865.1.2 Impressed Current Considerations. Criteria 866 STEEl PIPElINES IN HIGH-TEMPERATURE

for cathodic shall be the same as those for SERVICE
866.1 Special Considerations for High-Temperature
Service

is not consideration must be given to the corrosion

control of pipelines and other facilities in
or excessive current
high-temperature service [above IS0°F (66°C)}. Elevated
V,""""," current facilities shall be used on
tend to decrease the resistivity of buried
lines in permanently frozen where the
environments and to increase the
gas is chilled to prevent thawing of the earth. Such facili- corrosion reaction as a result of acceler-
ties are capable of providing the ated ionic or molecular Elevated r!-'rnn!-'r~rl'"
needed to overcome the high resistivity of frozen soil. typically occur downstream compressor stations or
can be installed at compressor stations or other in gathering
facilities where power is available and access for
ment and maintenance is ensured. The effects of seasonal 866.1.1 External Coating Considerations.
variations in soil should be for shall be selected based on the
constant potential rectifiers or manual for pipeline facilities in high-temperctture service. These
include resistance to damage from soil or ",""'"r'fl,,rv
current anode beds shall be installed stresses, compatibility with any cathodic
tion, and resistance to
whenever feasible at a sufficient distance from the
In rocky environments, the use of a protective outer
line or other underground structures to achieve maxi-
select backfill, or other suitable measures shall be
mum the and to reduce the peak
to minimize physical
potential at the pipeline.
(c) Anode beds shall be installed, where 866.1.2 Impressed Current Considerations. Criteria
below the permafrost level or in other unfrozen loca- for cathodic protection shall be the same as those for
tions, sLlch as a stream or lake, to achieve better cathodic normal that recognition
current distribution. Where anodes must be installed in should be
permanently frozen the volume of the anode and current
backfill material should be increased to reduce the effec- service on any IR component
tive resistance between the anode and the measurement. Possible
earth. depolarization effects due to high-temperature opera-
tion shall also be considered.
(d) current facilities distributed or
anode ground beds should be used to bur- 866.1.3 Galvanic Anode Considerations. Consider-
ied station facilities and pilings where used to support to the impact on the performance
plant facilities. The pilings and any other of close anodes (especially bracelet or ribbon

100
n"''''''oh' © 201'1 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
may be made oflhis material without writ1en consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

to elevClted quality of pipe surface prepa-

imity to Cl hot pipeline. Higher ration and stress levels,
increase the current output Clnd fate of degradation of and soil conditions shall be considered in pipeline
most anode materials. Some anode materials may and operations.
become more noble than steel at temperatures above
140°F (60°C) in certain electrolytes. Zinc anodes con-
aluminum are also to
868 CAST IRON, WROUGHT IRON, DUCTILE IRON,
corrosion above 120°F (49°C). AND OTHER METAlliC PIPELINES
868.1 Requirements for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron
867 STRESS CORROSION AND OTHER Facilities Exposed to Atmosphere
PHENOMENA Aboveground cast iron and ductile iron
suitably in areas where severe
induced and other corrosion-related
corrosion may occur.
phenomena, including stress corrosion cracking, corro-
sion hydrogen stress and hydrogen 868.2 Other Metallic Materials
embrittlement have been identified as causes of pipeline
failure. Considerable knowledge and data have been When a nonferrous metal or ferrous alloy rrnnn{)n,onr
Clnd assembled on these is found to have corroded to the point where public or
research is continuing as to their causes and safety may be affected, it shall be recondi-
Operating companies should be alert for evidence of in accordance with pma. 861.3 or replaced. ll1e
such during Clll pipe Clnd Cl t other shall meet one of the following criteria:
such opportunities. Where evidence of such a condition (11) It shall be constructed with other materials, geom-
is found, Cln shall be initiated, etry, or for the life of the
and remedial meClsures taken as Any facility.
such evidence should be given considerCltion in pipe- (b) It shClII be cathodically or otherwise protected.
line failure should
868.3 Installation of Electrical Connections
on the subject
and/or consult with experts. (a) ElectricClI connections may be attached directly
This must be limited to statements onto the cast or ductile iron pipe by the thermit
rather than specific limits in to stress corrosion. process llSing copper oxide and aluminum powder.
Stress corrosion is currently the of size of the thermit shall not exceed a
research programs, and more specific data will 32-g
be available to the pipeline and operating com- (b) All that is bared for test lead connections and
in the future. In the interim, this Code Clll bared test lead wires shall be protected
that user refer to the current state of the art mClterial compatible with

101
© 2014 by the American or Mechanical Engineers.
reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8·2014

Chapter VII
Intentionally Left Btank

The material previously shown in this Chapter has

been moved to other in this Code.
This left blank and is
reserved for future use.

102
© 2014 by the Americall of Mechanical
be made of this material without wriMen consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

Chapter VIII
Offshore Gas Transmission

ABOO OFFSHORE GAS TRANSMISSION biafaliling: an accumulation of deposits. This includes

accumulation and of marine on a
ABOl GENERAL submerged metal surface and the accumulation of
only to offshore gas transmis- deposits (usually inorganic) on heat tubing.
sion as in para. A802.1. With the excep- breakaway coupling: a component installed in the pipeline
tion of sections A840 through A842, A844, and A847, to allow the to when a
this is to the and axial load is applied to the rnl"~'lna
the content of the first six of the All
buckle: a condition in which the pipeline has undergone
provisions of the remainder of this Code are
sufficient plastic deformation to cause wrin-
requirements of this unless specifically
kling in the wall or excessive cross-sectional defor-
modified herein. With the noted above, para-
mation ca by bending, axial, impact, and/or
follow those in the first six chapters
torsional loads alone or in combinCltion with
with the prefix "A.
hydrostatic pressure.
en/hodic disbolldmell/: the loss of adhesion between a coat-
(14) AB02 SCOPE AND INTENT and the coated surface caused of a
cathodic reaction.
AS02.1 Scope
of a beam or under com-
This
axial in which loads cause unstable lateral
requirements, installation,
also referred to as 1Ipheilvill bllckling.
ing, and of operation and maintenance
of offshore gas transmission For this COllllec/ors: any used for
offshore gas transmission systems include offshore gas mechanically
risers, offshore gas compressor sta- disbondlllent: the loss of adhesion between a and
tions, appurtenances, the substrate.
tors, and other components as
this Code. docIlmented: the condition of in written form.
external hydrostatic pressure: pressure on any exter-
AS02.2 Intent nal surface from its hn'oruP"N> in water.
The intent of this is to provide adequate flexible pipe: pipe that is
for the safe and reliable installa- (11) manufactured as a from both metal and
tion, and operation of offshore gas transmission
of this Chapter the require- of allowing large deflections without
ments of the remainder of this Code. It is therefore not the integrity
the intent of this Chapter to be all inclusive, and provi- (c) intended to be an part of the
sions must be made for any considerations that product transportation
are not addressed. Flexible does not include solid metallic steel pipe,
It is not the intent of this to prevent the devel- plastic reinforced plastic pipe, rubber hose, or
opment and application of new equipment and technol- metallic lined wi th nonmetallic linings or
Such activity is encouraged as as the
and reliability of this Code are satisfied.
fmc/ure lIIec/w/1ics: a quantitative for evaluating
structural reliability in terms of applied stress, crack
length, geometry, and material properties.
(14) AB03 OFFSHORE GAS TRANSMISSION TERMS weld: a weld
'''7{'mlll"11 at ambient hydrostatic
AND DEfiNITIONS in a chamber from which the water
accidell/al loads: any unplanned load or combination of been removed from the surfaces to be welded.
unplanned loads caused by human intervention or natu- lIellr wilite blast clem/ed: a surface that, when viewed with-
ral out magnification, is free of all visible oil, grease, dust,

103
of Mechanical "")~""'~'
 ASME 831.8·2014

dirt, mill corrosion products, re/llm interval: determined time interval

and other is limited to between successive events of environmental con-
of each unit area of [approxi- ditions or typically calculated
mately 9.0 in? cm 2)], and may consist of shad- as the of the annual probability of occurence
ows, streaks, or minor discolorations caused of the event.
stains rust, stains of mil! or stains of
riser: see offshore pipeline riser.
applied (see NACE No. 2/SSPC-SP 10).
offshore: the area beyond the line of ordinary water
sell floor bathymetry: refers to water depths along the
route.
the portion of the coast that is in direct contact
with the open seas and the line the soil liquefllction: a soil typically caused by
seaward limit of inland coastal waters. dynamic loading waves), where
offshore pipelille riser: the vertical or near vertical portion the effective shear in the soil is reduced such
that the soil exhibits the nrrH-'''r~ ..'':: of a liquid.
of an offshore pipeline between the platform and
the at or below the including a length zOlle: the area of the riser or other pipeline
of pipe of at least five diameters beyond the bottom components that is intermittently wet and dry due to
elbow, bend, or fitting. Due to the wide variety of wave and tidal action.
urations, the exact location of transition between
line, riser, and platform piping must be
steel catenllry riser (5CR): a
a subsea pipeline that is attached to a or fixed
on a basis.
offshore platform.
offshore pipeline system: all
installed offshore for trawl board: a structure that is attached to the bottom
of commercial fishing nets and is '-''''1''.,;<:'-' the
are not sea floor.
offshore platform: any man-made fixed or vorl ex shedding: the of fluid vortices
anchored structure or artificial island located offshore. and resulting flow patterns of a
span that may introduce dynamic forces on the
pipe collapse: flattening deformation of the pipe resulting
in loss of cross-sectional strength and circular pipeline.
which is caused by excessive external coalillg: any coating to the pipeline for
<11.J1'-'"<'"
sure alone. increasing the pipeline gravity.
pillstic deforllllllion: a deformation caused by
beyond the elastic limit.
AS11 QUALIFICATION OF MATERIALS AND
plalform piping: EQUIPMENT
(n) On offshore platforms producing hydrocarbons,
platform is all the gas transmission Plastic pipe with nonmetallic reinforce-
and between the ment, cast iron and ductile iron shall not be
tion facility and the ine used for transporting natural gas.
includes any gas compressors and piping that are not a
parr of the
(b) On offshore not producing A814 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
bons, platform piping is all the A814.1 Pipe Conforming to Referenced Standards
and Specifications
risers.
Because of a wide variety of configurations, the A814.1.1 Steel Pipe. Steel line with a longitu-
exact location of the transition between the offshore dinal joint factor of 1.00 in Table 841.1.7-1 shall be used.
pipeline the platform and the
facility must be selected on a r"'''''-lcl\I-r'''' .... A814.3 Weight Coating
propllgating buckle: a buckle tha t ncr,art'"""" Concrete materials
a pipeline caused the effect external hydrostatic reinforcing shall meet or exceed the
pressure on a previously formed buckle, local of ASTM standards.
or other cross-sectional deformation.
pI/II tube: a conduit attached to an offshore platform A814.4 Flexible Pipe
through which a riser can be installed, shall be manufactured from materials
installed through a requirements of applicable ASTM or ASME
standards.

104
© 2014 by the American of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 631.8·2014

A814.5 Other Requirements

In addition to the requirements contained in refer-
enced standards, certain other may be con-
sidered for and other used offshore, A821.2 Welding Processes
depending on water depth, water temperature, internal
The welding may be done by any process or combina-
pressure, composition, product temperature,
tion of processes that produce welds that meet the proce-
installation method and/or other loading conditions.
dure requirements of this Code and can be
consideration may include one or more of the
by conventional means.
following:
(aJ wall thickness tolerance
(b) outside diameter tolerance A821.3 Welding Procedure
(c) out-oF-roundness
(a) Prior to welding of any plpmg
(d) maximum and minimum and tensile or related Welding Procedure
shall be written and the procedure shall
(e) maximum carbon equivillent The approved shall include all
(f) frilcture toughness details listed in API 1104.
(g) hardness (b) Prior to hyperbaric welding of pipe, piping
(II) pipe mill hydrostatic and other mechanical components, or related Procedure
shall be written and the procedure shall
be qualified. The shall include all of
A81? CONDITIONS FOR THE REUSE AND the applicable listed in API 1104 and AWS D3.6.
REQUALIFICATION OF PIPE (c) Each welder or welding shall be
for the established before performing any
A81?1 Reuse of Steel Pipe component, or related
Used pipe may be subject to the following with this Code.
conditions:
(a) The meets the considerations in
A842, and A843.
meets the requirements in
section A847.
(c) The per para. 817.1.3 to
identify any that impair the serviceability of the
If such defects are they shall be removed
or
Unidentified line pipe shall not be used for subsea

A81?4 Requalification of Pipeline Systems A823 QUALIFICATION OF PROCEDURES AND

A pipeline that has previously been used for WELDERS
gas transmission service may be requalified, subject to
the following conditions: of and welders shall be in
(a) The pipeline meets the considera- accordance with the requirements of 823, except
tions in sections A841, A842, and A843. paras. 823.1 and 823.2 do not apply
(b) The meets the (a) Welding procedures and welders performing
requirements in paras. through A847.6. In addi- atmospheric welding under this section shall be quali-
system is moved, it shall also meet fied under API 1104, except that for applications in
buckles in para. A847.7. which fabrication, and
testing are in accordance with BPV Section VlIl,
procedures and welders shall be
A820 WElDING OFFSHORE PIPEUNES under BPV Code, Section IX.
A821 GENERAL (b) Welding procedures and welders performing
welding under this section shall be
A821.1 General Requirements in accordance with the of API 1104
This section concerns the weld of Carbon steel as by AWS D3.6, tion for
materials that are used in a pipeline in the offshore Underwater Welding for "0" Welds.

105
© 2014 by the American of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent
 ASME 631.8-2014

A825 STRESS REUEVING A831 PIPING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Stress relieving may be waived, Cast iron or ductile iron shall not be used in
less of wall thickness, provided that it can be demon- fittings, or valve shell components.
strated that a without All system components for offshore applications shall
the use of postweld heat treatment been be capable of safely the same loads as the pipe
Such a demonstration shall be conducted on materials in the run in which they are included, "weak
and under conditions that simulate, as as links" (e.g., breakaway couplings) designed into a
cal, the actual production welding. Measurements shall tem to fail under loads. Consideration
be taken of the tensile, toughness, and hardness be to minimizing stress concentrations.
ties of the weld and heat-affected zone. No stress System components that are not specifically covered
will be required if in para. 831 shall be validated for fitness by either
(n) the measurements indicate that the (n) documented full scale of the
and mechanical are within the "o,npn,r< or special or
for the materials (b) a history of successful usage of these
(b) an is conducted to ensure assemblies produced the same
that the mechanical properties of the weldment and the Care should be exercised in any new
residual stresses without postweld heat treatment are tion of eXisting to ensure suitability
for the intended service. In some cases, mea- intended service.
residual stresses may be required.
A831.1 Valves and Pressure-Reducing Devices
A826 INSPECTION Of WELDS AS31.1.1 Valves. In addition to the valve standards (14)
A826.2 Inspection and Tests for Quality Control of listed in para. 831.1.1(a), the following
Welds on Piping Systems may be used:
A826.2.1 Extent of Examination. One-hundred per- API 6DSS/ISO 14723 Specification for Subsea
cent of the total number of field welds on offshore Pipeline Valves
lines and tha tare API 17D Design and Operation of
loading by pipeline internal pressure shall nonde- Subsea Production
structively if practical, but in no case shall - Subsea
Jess than 90% welds be The Wellhead and Tree
shall cover 100% of the length of such
A826.2.2 Standard of Acceptability. All welds that
are must meet the standards of acceptability A832 EXPANSION AND fLEXIBILITY
of API 1104 or BPV Section VIII, as appropriate
for the service of the weld, or be appropriately Thermal and contraction calculations shall
and or removed. consider the differential between material
during and material
A826.2.3 Alternative flaw Acceptance limits. For
ture during installation.
welds on a pipeline, alternative flaw
may be established based on fracture
analyses and criteria as described in A834 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE FOR EXPOSED
API 1104. Such standards shall PIPING
be supple-
test requirements, and non- No attachment other than an member shall
examinations the minimum be welded to the pipeline
specified herein. accuracy of the non-
destructive techniques for flaw depth measurement A835 ANCHORAGE FOR BURIED PIPING
shall be verified by sufficient data to establish probabili-
ties for the proposed error allowance. Thermal and contraction calculations shall
of fully saturated backfill material
on soil restraint.
A830 PIPING SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND
When a is to be laid across a
fABRICATION DETAILS
known fault zone, or in an earthquake-prone area where
A830.1 General new faults are a possibility, consideration shall be given
paras. A831 through A835 is to provide to the need for flexibility in the and its
a set criteria for components to be used in an n""on~" to minimize the possibility due
offshore application. to seismic activity.

106
Copyright © 2014 by the Americlln Society of Mechanical
may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

The requirements of para. for header and The of offshore pipelines is often controlled
branch connections are not applicable to offshore sub- installation considerations rather than by operating
merged piping An means of pre- load conditions.
venting undue stresses at piping Additioni'll information for conditions can be
connections is to provide flexibility at branch found in API RP 1111, para. 4.1.
connections on the seabed.
A841.2 Installation Design Considerations
The of an offshore pipeline suitable
A840 DESIGN, INSTALLATION, AND TESTING
for safe insti'lllation i'lnd the development of offshore
A840.1 General Provisions pipeline construction procedures shall be based on con-
sideration of the parameters listed in paras. A841.2.1
The installation, and of offshore gas
A841.2.5. These shall be considered
shall be in accordance with
to the extent thi'lt they are to the pn)p()se'd
modified by the of
of system and applicable to
considered.
on Location Class do not apply to offshore gas
transmission that offshore pipelines A841.2.1 Weight. The effect of or pipeline
shoreline areas shall be addi i'lssembly (in i'lir and submerged) on installation
tested with Location Class stresses i'lnd stri'lins shall be considered. Varii'lbility due
provisions as determined in para. A840.2. to manufacturing tolernnces i'lnd water
absorption shall also be considered.
A840.2 Shoreline Approaches
A841.2.2 Profile. Varii'ltions in water depth
Offshore pipelines the pipeline route shall be considered. The effect of tides
be additionally
shall be included for loci'ltions where such variations
Location Class
are i'l fraction of the water Bottom
that
slope, or that installi'l-
(17) offshore pipelines in Location Cli'lsses 3 i'lnd 4 mi'ly
tion stresses shall be
i'llternatively be hyd tested to a pressure not
less than 1.25 times the maximum pressure A841.2.3 Environmental Loads. Local environmen-
so long as the of section A826 are met tal forces those induced by wind, wave, cur-
(b) for offshore pipelines, the provisions of rents, ice, seismic and other natural
section A847 para. 841.3.2 phenomenon are in offshore
areas. These
installation design and
A841 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A841.2.4 Loads by Construction Equipment
A841.1 Design Conditions and Vessel Motions. Limitations i'lnd behi'lvioral chi'lri'lc-
A number of physical henceforth referred teristics of installation shall be considered in
to i'lS conditions, govern design of the offshore the installation
so that it meets installation, operntioI1, Vessel motions be considered if they are
other postinstallation Some of the to result in pipe stresses or
factors that may influence the of clent to impair the ca,'""-",,
i'ln offshore and riser A841.2.S Bottom Soils. Soil characteristics shi'll! be
(17) waves considered when installation are
(b) current for the following:
(c) mmine soils (n) riser installation in pull tubes
(d) wind (b) laying horizontal curves in the pipeline routing
(e) ice (c) bottom tows
seismic i'lctivi ty (d) trenching and
(g) platform motion
(II) A841.3 Operational Design Considerations
(i) press u re A841.3.1 Loading Classifications. All parts of the
(j) water offshore pipeline and riser system shall be designed for
(k) support settlement the most cd tici'll combinations of operi'ltional and
(I) accidenti'll 10i'lds environmental loads, concurrently, to which
(III) mi'ly be Wind, wave, and current
(11) lai'lds should be based on il design return interval

107
 ASME 831.8-2014

no less than five times the design life of the or A842 STRENGTH CONSIDERATIONS
100 yr, whichever is smaller.
shall be based on
If the pipeline philosophy is such that oper-
methods, material and
ations with full operational loads will be maintained
conditions.
during storms, then the shall be designed
for concurrent action of and design environ- A842.1 Strength Consideration During Installation
mental loads.
subsections define the minimum safety
If the philosophy is such that failure due to or buckling
will be or discontinued during all phases of pipeline installation
conditions, then the system shall be handling, laying, trenching, etc., through testing).
(a) full operational loads maximum coincidental
environmental loads A842.1.1 Buckling. The should be
and installed in a manner to prevent buckling
(b) environmental loads appropriate
installation. and procedures for installa-
reduced operational loads
tion should account for effect of external n\n,rn,<:r"
of waves, winds, and currents shall be
pressure, bending moment, axial, and torsional loads
considered to determine the most critical com-
and out-of-roundness. Consideration should also
bination of above
be given to the buckle phenomenon.
A841.3.2 Operational loads. Operational loads that Additional information calculating buckling
shall be considered are those forces on the stresses due to bend and external pressure can be
pipeline under steltic environmental conditions found in API RP 1111, para. 4.3.2.2.
wind, waves, current, and other dynamiC A842.1.2 Collapse. The wall thickness shall be
loadings). designed to resist collapse to external
Loads thelt should be considered as loads pressure. Considerations shall include the effects of mill
include tolerances in the wall thickness, and
(a) of unsupported span of pipe, including any other applicable factors.
appropriate) the weight of Additional information for designing to col-
(1) can be found in API RP 111 L para. 4.3.2.1.
(2) and their absorbed water A842.1.3 Allowable longitudinal Stress. The maxi-
(3) attachments to the mum stress due to axial and bending loads
(4) contents during installation shall be limited to a value that pre-
(b) internal and external pressure vents pipe buckling and will not the serviceability
of the installed pipeline.
(e) thermal and contraction
Additional information for longitudinal load
(d) buoyancy
can be found in API RP 1111, para. 4.3.1.1.
(e) of structurally restrained
such as in a pull-tube riser bend) A842.1.4 Allowable Strains. Instead of the stress
criteria of A842.1.3, an allowable installation strain
static soH-induced load ings overburden)
limit may used. The maximum longitudinal strain
The effects of such as curva-
due to axial and bending loads during installation shall
tures induced by installation, should be considered
be limited to a value that pipe buckling and will
when affect the of the pipeline.
not impair the of the installed pipeline.
Additional information for loads can be
found in API RP 1111, para. 4.1.4. A842.1.5 Installation Fatigue. Anticipated stress
fluctuations of sufficient magnitude and frequency to
A841.3.3 Design Environmental loads. induce significant fatigue shall be considered in design.
that should be considered under this category
A842.1.6 Special Assemblies. Installation of
as those due to
lines with assemblies as tap valves and
(n) waves
riser are subject to the same stated
(b) current in pa ras. A842.1.1 through A842.1.5.
(c) wind
A842.1.7 Residual Stresses. The pipeline
(d) seismic events
shall normally be installed in a manner so as to minimize
(e) accidental loadings
residual stresses. The exception shall be when the
if) dynamic soil-induced purposefully plans for residual stresses
liquefaction) of risers, When residual
ice loads weight, floating impacts, scouring) stresses are significant,

108
© 2014 by the American
be made of this material without
 ASME 831.8-2014

operating design of the (see Table A842.2.2-1 Design Factors for Offshore
para. Pipelines, Platform Piping, and Pipeline Risers
A842.1.8 Flexible Pipe. The manufacturers recom- Hoop Stress, longitudinal Combined
mended maximum and minimum _.-._-_.
location Fl Stress, F2 Stress, F3
radius shall be adhered to installation. Pipeline 0.72 0.80 0.90
shall be or selected to prevent collapse Platform piping 0.50 0.80 0.90 [Note (1))
to the combined effects of external pressure, axial and risers
and Installation shall be
to API RP 17B). NOTE:
(1) The wall thickness used in the calculation of combined stress
A842.2 Strength Considerations During Operations for platform piping and risers shall be based upon specified
minimum wall thickness, including manufacturing, corrosion,
A842.2.1 Operational and Design Criteria and erosion allowances.
Fllililre Modes.
(II) nes and risers shall be
against the following modes of failure,
(U.S. Clls/olllary Units)
(1) excessive
(2) (4)
(3) failure
(4) ductile fracture
(51 Units)
(5) brittle fracture
(6) loss of stability (5)
(7) propagating fracture
(8) corrosion
(9) where
(b) Ot/ler COllsiderations. consideration D == nominal outside diameter of
shall be given to due to FI hoop stress A842.2.2-1
Pe external
(1) foreign
Pj internal pressure, (kPa)
(2) anchors
S ::= specified minimum yield strength, psi (MPa)
(3) trawlboards
5" hoop stress, (MPa)
(4) vessels, ice etc.
T tempera tu re factor from
A842.2.2 Against Yielding. and Table 841.1.8-1
risers shall be designed against in accordance :.= nominal wall thickness, in. (mm)

with this paragraph. The combined stress calculations NOTE: It is recommended that eg. (2) or (3) be used for D/I
and allowables of paras. 833.2 through 833.6 are super- than or to 30 and that eq. (4) or (5) be used for D/I
seded by the provisions of (b) and (c) below also than 30.
TabJe A842.2.2-1).
(a) Hoop Stress. For and the tensile Additional information for pressure design can be
hoop stress due to the between internal and found in API RP 1111, paras. 4.3.1 and 4.3.2.
(b) Longillldinal Stress. For pipelines and risers, the
external pressures shall not exceed the value
below. Sh may be calculated either of the following: longitudinal stress shall not exceed values found from

NOTE: Sign convention is such that tension is positive and com-

pression is negative.
where
(1) A cross-sectional area of
F2 longitudinal stress
(u.s. Clls/omary UllitS)
Table A842.2.2-1
D Fa =: axial force, Ib (N)
P,.) 2t (2)
Ij =: in-plane stress intensification factor from
Mandatory E
(51 Ullits) io out-plane stress intensification factor from
Mandatory Appendix E
(3) M; bending moment, in.-Ib (N·m)
Mo bending moment, in.-Ib (N·m)
or 5 minimum yield (MPa)

109
© 2014 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without writien consent of ASME.
 ASME 8)1.8-2014

axial stress, tensile or AS42.2.3 Alternate Design for Strain. In situations

(MPa) where the pipeline a predictable noncyclic
F" IA of its support (e.g., fault movement
51) resultant bending stress, psi (MPa) route or differential subsidence along the
= + UoMo)2] or pipe sag before support contact, the longitudinal
SL maximum longitudinal stress, psi (positive ten- and combined stress limits need not be used as criteria
sile or (MPa) for safety excessive so long as the con-
So + Sb or Sa of yielding are not detrimental to the integrity
stress value The maximum longitudinal
z =: section modulus of ductility of the material, any pre-
II absolute value plastic strain, and the buckling
the pipe. Where plastic strains are antici-
Additional information for load design pipe out-of-roundness, and
can be found in API RP 1111, para. 4.3.1.1. the ability weld to undergo such strains without
(c) Combined Stress. For and risers, the com- detrimental effect should be considered. Similarly, the
bined stress shall not the value given by the same criteria may be applied to the during construc-
maximum shear stress combined tion pull-tube or bending
AS42.2.4 Design Against Buckling and Ovalization.
\ 2 Avoidance of buckling of the pipeline and riser during
) operation shall be considered in design. Modes of buck-
ling that may be include
where (II) local buckling of the pipe wall
A cross-sectional area of pipe material, in. 2 (b) propagation buckling following local buckling
(mm 2 ) (e) column buckling
combined stress factor from Additional information for determining
Table AB42.2.2-1 tendencies can be found in API RP 1111, pflras. 4.3.2.2
axial Ib (N) and 4.3.2.3, find Annex D.
in-plane stress intensification factor from A842.2.5 Design Against
Mandatory Appendix E tions of sufficient magnitude and
out-plane stress intensification factor from fatigue should be considered in
Mandatory Appendix E Loadings thelt may elffect fatigue include
moment, in.-\b (N·m) (II) pipe such as thelt induced by vortex
out-plane moment, in.-lb (N·m) shedding
torsional moment, in.-lb (N·m) (b) wave action
minimum yield Pipe and riser spans shall be so that vortex
axial stress, induced resonant vibrations are prevented, whenever
practical. When so is the total resul-
Fal A tant stresses shall be less than the allowable limits in
resultant para. A842.2.2, and such that fatigue failure should not
wiMi + result the life of the pipeline.
stress, (MPa) Additional information for fatigue can be
maximum longitudinal stress, psi (positive found in API RP 1111, para. 4.5.
tensile or compressive) (MPa)
Sa + 51, or Sa whichever results in the AS42.2.6 Design Against Fracture. Materials used
larger stress value for transporting gas or gas-liquid mixtures
Sf torsional stress, psi (MPa) under pressure should have reasonably high resist-
ance to propagating fractures at the conditions,
z section modulus of or other methods shall be used to limit the extent of a
fracture.
Alternatively, the Maximum Distortional
AS42.2.7 Design of (lamps and Supports. Clamps
Theory (Von Mises combined may be used
and supports shall be designed such that a smooth trans-
limiting combined stress values. Accordingly, the com-
fer of loads is made from the pipeline or riser to the
bined stress should not exceed values given by
supporting structure without highly localized stresses
due to stress concentrations. When members are to be
welded to the they shall fully encircle the pipe and

110
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be lIlade of til is material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

be welded to the by a full encirclement weld. The therefore relate only to offshore compression facilities.
support shall be attached to the member and It is the further intent of this section to make the
not the pipe. aware of during the
All welds to the pipe shall be nondestructively tested. and operation of offshore facilities.
Clamps and shall be designed in accordance
A843.1.1 location of Compressor Facilities. The
with the of API RP 2A-WSD, Section 3.
compressor facilities located on platforms should be
support design shall consider the corrosive
designed to facilitate free movement of fire or
moisture retaining gaps and crevices and gal-
other emergency equipment.
vanically dissimilar metals.
A843.1.2 Enclosures. All enclosures located on an
A842.2.8 Design of Connectors and Flanges. Con-
offshore platform shill! be constructed of noncombusti-
nectors and shall be such that smooth transfer
ble or limited combustible material as defined in
of loads is made without high localized stresses or exces-
NFPA 220, 2.
sive deformation of the attached
platforms shall consider
Connectors and shall a level of
in para. A841.3.
failure by and failure by that is
to that of the attached pipeline or riser. A843.1.3 Exits. A minimum of two exits shall be
for each level of a compressor build-
A842.2.9 Design of Structural Pipeline Riser
Any elevated walkwilY, catwillks
Protectors. Where pipeline risers are installed in loca-
more than 10 ft (3 m) above the also be
tions subject to impact from marine protective
with two exits. The maximum distance from
devices shall be installed in the zone to
any point within the compressor building to an exit
to protect the pipe and
shill! not exceed 75 ft Enclosure exits shill! be
A842.2.10 and Protection of Special unobstructed and located so as to provide a convenient
Assemblies. of connections and 1 route of escape and shall continuous unob-
such as tie-in assemblies, expansion structed to a place safety. Exit doors located
seabed riser connections, and subsea pipeline on wa lIs shill 1 ou tward and shill! be
manifolds, shall consider the additional forces and equipped with latches that Ciln be from
effects by a subsea environment. Such addi- the inside without a
include storm currents and
A843.1.5 Hazard Analysis for Offshore Compressor (14)
for seabed movement in soft soil
Stations. A hazilfd for offshore compressor
liquefaction, increased potential corrosion, thermal
stations shall be conducted in accordance with
and contraction, and stress due to installation
API RP 14J to meet the of API RP 14C.
In areas of active protective mea-
sures may be appropriilte for connections and speciill A843.2 Electrical Facitities
assemblies.
All electrical and wiring installed on off-
A842.2.11 Design of Flexible Pipe. Due to its com- shore compression shall conform to the
the mechanical behavior of flexible pipe of NFPA 70, if commercially available
is different from steel Flexible
may be used for offshore Electricill installations in offshore hazardous locations
or test results that the pipe can withstand as defined in NFPA 70, 5, Article 500 and thilt
loadings in pilfas. A841.3.2 ilnd A841.3.3. In are to remain in operation compressor station
the selection of flexible consideration should be emergency shutdown as provided in para. 1"'0"'..) •..) •..)'\<11
given to its permeable nature. The possibility of shilll be designed to conform to NFPA 70, for Class I,
sion under the combined conditions of high pressure, Division I
high and very rapid The guidelines of API RP 14F should be considered
should be investigated where such conditions in electrical facility
eXlpe(:te,::l. Selection of flexible pipe shall be in
API RP 17B ilnd API A843.3 Compressor Station Equipment
A843.3.3 Safety Devices
A843 COMPRESSOR STATIONS (11) ShutdowlI Facilities. All gas compres-
sion equipment shall be provided with an emergency
A843.1 Compressor Station shutdown system that will block out the gas going to
The the and from the compressor station. of the emer-
unique gency shutdown system shill! cause the shutdown of all
when gas and all equipment

111
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without writ1en consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

and shall the electrical facilities in the com- Portions of the pipeline to be trenched shall be
pressor building, for those that emer- designed for wave and current conditions based on pru-
gency lighting for and those that dent assessment of the of The
are necessary for protection equipment. The emer- most unfavorable
gency shutdown shall be from a mini- current conditions
mum of two locations on each that is, should maximum current conditions do not occur
an offshore platform facility have more than one clearly Simultaneously. The most unfavorable condition selec-
defined each deck shall have a minimum of two tion shall account for the of occurrence of the
shutdown locations. Blowdown piping shall extend to wave and current direction and magnitude.
a location where the of is not likely to
A844.2 Stability Against Waves and Currents
create a hazard to the platform Consideration
should be given to potential entrained liquids, prevailing A844.2.1 Submerged Weight. The
winds, and location of crew if part of the plat- of the may be (such as by weight
form facility. Under conditions of liquid entrain- to resistor limit movement to acceptable values.
ment and poor prevailing wind conditions, a forces shall be based on the wave and
structure for a blowdown facility shall be current values for the storm condition for the
location.
A843.3.4 Pressure-limiting Requirements for and current and concurrency shall
Offshore Compression Facilities be considered.
(e) Venting. Pressure relief valves shall be vented to
'''''''""n,o,"" such that no hazard is crea ted. Vent lines, A844.2.2 Bottom Soils. interaction
common headers, and platform blowdown lines shall factors that are used shall be rprwP'C:Pl'1 of the bottom
have sufficient so that will not interfere conditions at the site.
with the performance the relief A844.2.3 Trenching. The pipeline and its
nances may be trenched below bottom to
A844 ON-BOTTOM STABILITY The must be for wave and
current prior to stability, how-
for lateral and vertical stability is gov- ever, need only be based on environmental conditions
soil and expected the of exposure.
seismic, soil behavior events hav-
A844.2.4 Backfilling. Backfilling or other
probability of occurrence during the
when necessary, shall be :.rr·"rr,....
system. conditions to consider are
using such materials and
in the following subsections.
age to the pipeline and
The pipeline shall be
zontal and vertical movements, or A844.2.S Anchoring. Anchoring may be used
that any movements will be limited to values instead of or in with submerged weight
strength to be exceeded section to maintain The anchors shall be designed to
Typical factors to be considered in the stability design withstand lateral and vertical loads from the
include storm condition. Anchors shall to pre-
(n) wave and current forces vent excessive stresses in the sections between
(b) scour and resultant spanning anchors. The anchoring system adjacent pipe shat!
(c) liquefaction be to scour and resultant spanning
(d) slope failure The effect of anchors on the
Stability may be obtained by such means including, shall be considered.
but not limited to, pipe submerged weight, of A844.3 Shore Approaches
pipe below and anchoring. Pipe in the shore approach zone shall be trenched
When hyd rodynamic the or bored to the depth necessary to
variance of wave forces the length of the pipeline or stability problems that
may be taken into account. of the pipeline its
Additional information on can Seasonal variation in the near shore
be found in API RP 1111, para. 4.4.2. floor sediments and shoreline erosion over the
A844.1 Design Storm Conditions pipeline service life shall be considered.

wave and current conditions for of a A844.4 Slope Failure

pipeline that will not be trenched shall be on a The pipeline shall be for failure in
storm a minimum return interval of no Jess than zones of known or occurrence, such as mud-
life or 100 yr, whichever is smaller. slide zones and areas seismic slumping. The design

112
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
I'PIlI'On"lrl101l may be made of this material without writ1en consent of ASM E.
 ASME B31.8·2014

p1(r1Prtp{1 life or welds that have been

If it is not practical to inspected.
to survive the event, the CAUTION: When an external pressure, PC! greater than zero is
for controlled breakaway used in the hoop stress formula in para. A842.2.2(a), there is a
to prevent blowdown of the pipeline. possible combination of conditions where the yield strength of
the pipe could be exceeded during the hydrostatic test. Therefore,
A844.5 Soil Liquefaction the hoop stress and combined stress shall be checked to confirm
that they are within allowable limits to prevent pipe yielding,
liquefaction shall be per- considering both the internal and external pressures when
areas of known or occurrence. Soil determining the maximum hydrostatic lest pressure.
normally results from wave overpres-
sures or seismic loading of soils. The bulk A847.3 Test Medium
specific gravity of the be or The test medium for all offshore will be
alternative methods shall be selected to ensure both water. Additives to the effects of corrosion,
horizontal and vertical and should be considered. Such
Seismic conditions used to the occur- for the methods of
rence of bottom liquefaction or slope shall have of the test medium.
the same recurrence interval as used for the operating In arctic areas where of water is a hazard,
strength calculations for the pipeline. Occurrence the use of air, inert gas, or is allowable. Platform
of soil liquefaction due to wave overpressures shall be gas and piping may be tested with inert
based on a storm return interval of no less than five gas.
times the design life or 100 yr, whichever is smaller.
AS47.4 Test Procedure
A846 VALVES The hydrostatiC pressure test shall be conducted in
accordance with a specified procedure that shall, at a
Offshore transmission lines shall be with minimum, prOVide for
valves or other components to shut off of gas (n) of the test after installation and
to an offshore platform in an emergency before initial operation of the except as
Block valves shall be accessible and protected from provided in para. AB47.2.
damage and If a blowdown valve is involved, (b) the inclusion of
it shall be located the gas can be blown to the of offshore risers in the
without undue hazard. static test, practical.
Blowdown valves shall be provided so that each sec-
(c) maintenance of the test and recording of results
tion of between main line valves can be blown
on and assemblies for a minimum of con-
down. sizes and capacity of the connections for
tinuous hours at or above the pressure. All
blowing down tbe line shall be such that under emer-
shall accounted for. Test
gency conditions the section of line can be blown down
duration of piping may be 2 hr.
as rapidly as is practicable.
(d) a retest if, during the hold time, a or haz~
ardous leak occurs that renders the test Retesting
A847 TESTING shall commence after repairs have been made.

A84 7.1 General Provisions A847.5 Records

All offshore pipelines shall be tested after installation The operating company shall maintain in its file, for
and prior to operation within the of this the useful life of each pipeline, records showing the type
section. of test fluid, the test procedure, the test pressure, and
the duration of the test.
(14) A847.2 Test Pressure
The installed pipeline A847.6 Tie-Ins
to its point) It is that it may not be to hydro-
at least 1.25 times the maximum allowable sta tic ally test the tie-in between two test sections. Pres-
pressure. Offshore platform and offshore sure testing of tie-in welds may be exempted if the tie-
risers other than SCRs must be tested to at least 15 times in weld is by radiographic and/or other appli-
the maximum allowable operating pressure either before cable NDT methods.
or after installation. Prefabricated portions of platform
piping that have been to 1.5 times the maxi- A847.7 Testing for Buckles
mum allmvable pressure need not be tested for buckles, dents, and other diameter restric-
after installation all items are tied in by connectors, be performed after installation. shall

113
Copyright © 20J" by the American of Mechanical
reproduction may be made or this material without written consent
 ASME B31.8-2014

be by a deformation detection should be coordinated to properly direct reports of emer-

device through the section, or other methods and to avoid inconsistencies.
Ln~"'Vt'" of detecting a change in Pipe
having excessive deformation that the service- A850.7 Blasting Effects
ability of the pipeline facilities shall be or Each operating company shall establish
. Consideration should also be given to for oHacili ties in the of blasting activ-
excessive that may interfere with ities. The company shall
ging operation or internal (n) locate and mark its when are
to be detonated within distances as specified in company
Consideration should be to the of
A850 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
minimum blasting distances from the pipelines
PROCEDURES AFFECTING THE SAFETY OF
on the type of blasting
GAS TRANSMISSION FACILITIES
(b) determine the and extent of
A850.1 General
materials, the operating
All of V, which depend on
conditions, the size and soil conditions. Con-
do not apply to offshore gas transmission
sideration should be to
that offshore pipelines
(1) the effect of shock waves on the from
areas shall additionally be rn""·"f,,,'-;
tained with Location blasting
determined in section 840. (2) conducting a leak survey following
of the blasting program
A850.3 Essential Features of the Operating and
Maintenance Plan AS51 PIPELINE MAINTENANCE
The plan prescribed in para. 850.2(a) shall include A851.2 Pipeline Patrolling
(11) detailed plans and instructions for employees cov-
ering and maintenance for gas Each operating company shall maintain a periodic
facilities normal operations and pipeline patrolling program to observe conditions on
and adjacent to the pipeline right-of-way, indication of
(b) items recommended for inclusion in the plan for
leaks, construction activity other than that
specific classes of facilities, which are in
by the company, and any other factors
paras. A851.2 and A851.4, and section A860
safety and operation of the pipeline. These inspections
(c) to particular attention to those portions
should be made as often as necessary to maintain the
of the the hazard to the
of the pipeline. Records of these
public and environment in the event of an emergency
be maintained for the life of the facility. Provisions
or because of construction or maintenance
of paras. 851.2, 851.2.1, and 851.2.2 do not apply to this
Chapter.
inspections along the route
A851.4 Above-Water and Hyperbaric Repair
Procedures for Steel Pipelines
A850.4 Essential Features of the Emergency Plan
Ail above-water and hyperbaric for
A850.4.3 liaison. Each operating company shall steel pipelines shall conform to the requirements of
establish and maintain liaison with available offshore para. 851.4.
firefighting entities (public and or privately owned) that
A851.4.5 Offshore Below-Water Repair Procedures
may be for any particular offshore area.
for Steel Pipelines. Submerged offshore pipelines may
A850.4.4 Educational Program. An educational pro- be of the damaged section or by
gram shall be established to enable producers and the the use of a fuJi encirclement split sleeve of appropriate
in the offshore area to recognize installed over the damage. sections
and report a gas emergency to the officials. sleeves shall be secured dry
The educational program called for under this section or hyperbaric
should be tailored to the type of and shall be visually returned
the environment traversed by the pipeline and should to service.
be conducted in each that is in the offshore below-water con-
community served. Operators of transmission form to para. 851.4
should communicate their programs to contrac- should be under qualified
tors, or others that usually work in the area of sion by trained aware of and familiar with
concern. The programs of in the same area the maintenance plan and operating conditions of the

114
Copyright © 2014 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without writtcn consent of ASMEo
 ASME 831.8-2014
pipeline, the company's safety requirements, and the
hazards to public safety and environment.
Evacuation and repair operations should not result in
imposed loads or deformations that would impair the
integrity of the pipe materials, weight, or protective
coating.
The use of subsurface equipment equipped with cut-
ters, ejectors, jets, or air suction systems should be care-
fully controlled and monitored to avoid damaging the
pipeline, external coating, or cathodic protection system.
When lifting or supporting pipe during repairs, the
curvature of a pipe sag bend and overbend should be
controlled and maintained within limits to minimize
pipe coating damage, overstressing, denting or buckling
during the repair operation, and lifting equipment
should be selected accordingly.
Wave and current loads shou Id be considered in
determining total imposed stresses and cyclical loads in
both surface and subsurface repairs.
Personnel working on pipeline repairs should under-
sta nd the need for careful job planning, be briefed on
procedures to be followed in accomplishing repairs, and
follow necessary precautionary measures and
procedures.
When pipe is repaired, damaged coating should also
be repaired . Replacement pipe and components shall be
protected from corrosion.
A851.4.6 Offshore Repair of Flexible Pipe. If the
operability of the flexible pipe is impaired (i .e., major
structural damage), the pipe shall be repaired by replace-
ment of the damaged section. In the event of surface
cuts and abrasions in the protective coating that do not
expose the load carrying members to potential corrosion,
the repair shall be performed in a manner recommended
by the manufacturer.
A851.7 Pipeline Markers and Signs
Permanent markers are not required for offshore pipe-
lines; however, suitable signs should be posted on plat-
forms to serve as a hazard area warning. Where
appropriate, signs should display the operating com-
pany identification and emergency communication
procedures.
A854 LOCATION CLASS
There are no operating Location Classes offshore.
A860 CORROSION CONTROL OF OFFSHORE
PIPELINES
A860.1 Scope
Since offshore pipelines cannot be readily inspected
after installation and there is the possibility of damage
to the coating system, special consideration should be
115
Copyrighl © 2014 by Ihe American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
No reproduclion may be made of thi s malerial wilhouIIVril1en consent of ASME.
given to the selection, design, and application of corro-
sion control coatings, the cathodic protection system,
and other corrosion design elements.
A860.2 Evaluation of Existing Installations
(II) Monitoring. The operating company must rely on
monitoring, investiga tion, inspections, and corrective
action to control corrosion. Such activities shall be per-
formed at periodic intervals sufficient to ensure that
adequate corrosion control is maintained. Where it is
determined that corrosion that is taking place may be
detrimental to public or employee safety, the facility
shall be repaired or replaced, and corrosion control mea-
sures applied or augmented.
(e) EXlIlI1inlltioll Whel1 Exposed
(1) When a pipeline is lifted above water for main-
tenance or repair, the operating company shall visually
inspect for evidence of coating deterioration, external
corrosion, and where possible, the condition of any
exposed anode. If excessive corrosion is present, reme-
dial action shall be taken as necessary.
(2) If repairs are made below water, inspection for
evidence of external corrosion or coating deterioration
shall be made, and necessary corrective action shall be
taken to maintain the corrosion protection of the
pipeline.
A861 EXTERNAL CORROSION CONTROL
A861.1 Submerged Installations
All submerged steel pipe, valves, and related fittings
shall be externally coated and cathodically protected. All
above-water piping and components shall be protected
from the particularly corrosive conditions of the salt
water atmosphere and cyclic wetting and drying.
A861.1.1 Coatings
(II) COlltillg DesigH. The design of coating systems for
offshore installation should reflect the type of environ-
ment in which the facility is to be installed. Selection of
the protective coating should be based on
(1) low water absorption
(2) compatibility with the type of cathodic protec-
tion to be applied to the system
(3) compatibility with the system operating
temperature
(4) sufficient ductility to minimize detrimental
cracking
(5) sufficient toughness to withstand damage dur-
ing installation
(6) resistance to future deterioration in a sub-
merged environment
(7) ease of repair
(b) Clelll1ing lind SlIrfllce PreplIl"lltiol1. There may be
additional cleaning and surface preparation require-
ments, such as a near white metal finish and an anchor
~
~
 ASME B31.8-2014

pnl"w"-h"",,.rl thin An can be made when both the foreign struc-

film for irregulari- are designed to be protected as a
ties that could protrude through the coating, and considerations include the following:
any such irregularities should be removed" Tie-IllS. Isolation from at tie-ins
(c) Application and lllspecliOI1" The should be may be made by installing insulation unions,
applied under controlled conditions and have a high or other insulating devices. When making a tie-in of a
resistance to disbondment Further information can be coated line to a bare the two lines shall be electri-
obtained from NACE SP0169" A holiday suit- cally isolated.
able for the of coating applied, shall be used to (b) Pipeline Crossings. When a foreign
detect flaws" Flaws noted shall be and retested" pipeline, care shall be exercised to ensure adequate
Weights or weight shall not the ration between the two lines so that the possibility
tive application or installation. electrical interference is minimized.
(d) Coalingfor Weld Joints, and (c) Pipeline Riser Sllpporl IIl1d Secondary
Weld joints and shall be coated wi th installing riser at platforms,
material that is with the basic A such as clamps pipe shall the piping
from the structure. Insulating devices shall be installed
holiday designed for the type of field joint
where electrical isolation of a portion of the sys-
material may be used to detect flaws, and flaws
tem from production tanks, and other
shall be and retested.
to facilitate of cathodic
(e) Field Inspection. The shall be visually interference isolated
prior to installation to ensure that structures shall be minimized. Wiring and piping con-
has not occurred during welding, nections to an isolated pipeline shall also have insulation
or other laying activities to submergence of the between the and the platform. Tests shall be
Any significant to the shall be made to ensure isolation, and
with material compatible with the action shall be taken to ensure such isolation when
Care should be exercised to minimize necessary.
system, particularly during laying and
of the A861.1.4 Electrical Connections and Monitoring
Points. Test leads shall be installed so that are
A861.1.2 Cathodic Protection Requirements conductive, and acces-
(a) Design O·iteria. An offshore facility is considered impractical to locate
to be cathodically protected when it meets the criteria test leads in or open water. Test leads installations
established in Section 6.2 of NACE SP0607/1S0 15589-2. are usually limited to platforms and the pipeline
entrance to the shore.
(b) Impressed Currents. Where current sys-
tems are used, the shall be to minimize A861.1.7 Electrical Interference. Periodic tests shall
outages, and the output shall be such that the be made to ensure that electrical isolation from foreign
criterion is met. Also, consideration should be or other structures remains Some
minimize the interference effect on other pipelines or of electrical interference are in pipe-
structures. potential, in current magnitude
(c) Galvanic Anodes. Where anodes are used or direction, localized and coating breakdown"
for protection, consideration shall be given to the quality When new foreign are laid in the vicinity of
of the the percent of pipe)" Also, Jines, shall be made to ensure electri-
the formula for the should include the in accordance with para. 861.1.3(a). If electri-
output of the anodes, the desired life of the cal isolation cannot be attained, measures shall be taken
anode material, and utilization efficiency. Anodes used to minimize electrical interference. Electrical isolation
should be compatible with the temperature from the platform should be checked and maintained
of the pipeline and the marine environment. unless the was to be jOintly
protected.
(d) Olher. Consideration should be to the
effects on cathodic protection of variations in oxygen AS61.2 Above-Water Atmospheric Protection
content, temperature, and water/soil resistivity of the
particular offshore environment in which the A861.2.1 The splash zone area, where the
is installed" pipeline is intermittently wet and dry, shall be designed
with additional corrosion. This shall
A861.1.3 Electrical Isolation. Underwater be accomplished by one or more of the
shall be electrically isolated from other metallic (II)
structures so that cathodic protection can be effective. (W and

116
 ASME 831.8·2014

(c) other suitable measures, including selection of A862 CATHODIC PROTECTION CRITERIA
pipe material A862.1 Criteria
The criteri(l for cathodic protection are
A861.2.2 Surface Preparation. Coatings and other Section 6.2 of NACE SP0607/ISO 15589-2.
shall be inst(llled on a
A862.3 Electrical Checks
cations or manufacturer's recommendations. The nn,pr;"tiniO" company shall take electric(ll re(ldings

should resist water action, atmospheric deterio- at each test location aV(lilable to ensure that
fation, mechanical damage, and cathodic disbondment. the cathodic protection level meets the criteria in
Section 6.2 of NACE SP0607/ISO 15589-2.
Before each electrical test is an
A861.4 Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection shall be made to ensure electrical continuity
good contact to the pipelines is made by the test
Detailed shall be made of all connection.
piping for corrosion. This inspection shall
include those areas most to corrosion such A864 INTERNAL CORROSION CONTROL
as flanges, flange bolts, areas under A864.1 General
where is in contact with The and maintenance of offshore pipeline facil-
where moisture collects. Where corrosion ities that may carry natural carbon diox-
is found, prompt corrective action shall be taken. Correc- ide, hydrogen acids, solids or
tive action shall consist of of com- sulfur-bearing compounds, oxygen, or free
as necessary, or other action deemed consideration for the control of
by the company.

117
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made oflhis material withollt written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Chapter IX
Sou r Gas Service

8800 SOUR GAS SERVICE lattice of the substance rather than through a geometrical
leak (molecular diameters versus hole dimension),
8801 GENERAL
hardness: resistance of metal to deformation usu-
Chapter IX only to
ally by indentation. For carbon hardness can be
contains hydrogen sulfide
related to the ultimate tensile
in this This Chapter is
the numbering and content of the six of Briuel/ Hardness Number (BHN): a value to express the
the Code. All provisions of the first six chapters of the hardness of metals obtained a hard steel ball
Code are also requirements of this unless of diameter into the metal under a specified
modified herein, Paragraph follow those load. For the standard 3 OOO-kg load, numbers range
in the first six chapters with the from 81 to 945.
If a in I through VI Microllllrdness: any hardness measurement an
does not a ing paragraph in this indentor load less than 10 kg,
the provisions apply to sour gas service without Rockwell Hardness: a series of hard ness scales for
If a paragraph in this Chapter has no cor- metals.
paragmph in I through VI, the (a) The Rockwell "C" scale uses a cone dia-
provisions apply to sour gas mond indentor and a load of 150 The scale starts at
20 for soft steels and reaches a maximum of about 67
for very hard alloys.
8802 SCOPE AND INTENT
(b) The Rockwell "8" (HRB) scale uses a hard metal
8802.1 Scope ball indentor and starts at a for soft metals
This Chapter of the Code covers the material and reaches a maximum of 100 for soft steels and alloys.
fabrication, installation, inspection, test- HRB 100 HRC 20,
of operation and maintenance of Vickers Hardness HV 10: a value achieved by use of a
diamond pyramid indentor with a load of 10 kg.

(14} 8802.2 Intent heai-affected zone (HAZ): the portion of the base metal
that was not melted or welding,
The intent of this is to provide adequate but whose microstructure and properties were affected
for the safe and reliable deSign, installa- by the heat of these processes.
and maintenance of sour gas service
l'I'm,'mt~ of this Chapter supple- blistering: the formation of subsurface planar
ment the M~'ft~>r of the remainder of this Code, cavities, called hydrogen blisters, in a metal
It is not the intent of this Chapter to be all inclusive. from excessive internal hydrogen pressure. Growth
Provisions must be made for considerations that near-surface blisters in low-strength metals usually
This Chapter is not results in surface
the development and hydrogen-induced cracking (HIC): a
of new equipment and technology. Such activity is of materials caused iltomic
encouraged as as the safety and reliability fusion in the metal. The atomic hydrogen usually is
ments of this Code are satisfied. created by the corrosive reaction of sulfide on
steel in the presence of water.
8803 SOUR GAS TERMS AND DEFINITIONS sulfide a toxic gaseous impurity found
chloride stress corrosion of a metal under in some well gas streams. It also can be in
the combined action of tensile stress and corrosion in situ as a result of microbiologic activity.
the presence of chlorides and an electrolyte microbiologically infillenced corl'Osioli (MIC): corrosion or
water). deterioration of metals from the metabolic
the flow of the gas through a substance in activity of Such corrosion may beeither
which the gas actually through the initiated or accelerated, or both, microbial

118
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
renl'O(lillc.!'On
 ASME 831.8·2014

microstructllre: the grain size and morphology of metals 8821.4 Weld Acceptance
and alloys as revealed after polishing and char- The standards of for welds of piping
acterized by or that exhibit distinct systems as established in or ASME Boiler and
of solid solutions of constituent elements. Pressure Vessel Section IX, Division 1 shall be
parlial presslIre: the contribution of a single component, however, additional for hardness
such as hydrogen sulfide, in a mixture of gases to the and residual stress should be considered.
total pressure of the mixture, determined by multiplying
the mol fraction (mol percent divided by 100) of hydro-
gen sulfide in the gas by the total system pressure. 8822 PREPARATION FOR WELDING
radius (ROE): when with sour gas, the B822.3 Seal Welds
the hydrogen
sulfide concentrations reached a level (fre- Seal welds shall have a qualified procedure.
quently 100 ppm or 500 ppm) determined by dispersion
B822.4 Cleaning
calculations.
SOliI' gas: gas hydrogen sulfide (H 2S) at 65 Pipe that has been in SOUl" gas service shall be thor-
kPa) or greater at a partial pressure of 0.05 oughly cleaned to bright metal on the inside surfaces
or See NACE MR0175/ISO 15156, back 1 in. mm) from the weld bevel.
Petroleul/I and Ilalllmi gas iuduslries Materials for lise ill
H2S-conillillillg environments ill oillllld glls productiol/. 8823 QUALIFICATION OF PROCEDURES AND
sulfide stress c/'IIckillg (SSC): a corrosion-related cracking WELDERS
mechanism caused by exposure of materials
to sulfide ions in the presence of free water. The of para. 823.1 shall not apply to this
section.

8813 MARKING B823.2 Requirements for Qualification of

Procedures and Welders on Sour Gas Piping
Valves meeting NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 shall be so Systems
identified with a or
8823.2.1 Qualifying Standard. All and
qualifications shall be on destructive
8814 MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS mechanical test
B814.1 Pipe Conforming to Referenced Standards 8823.2.4 Hardness Control. The hardness of all
and Specifications weld zones including weld metal and heat-affected
Materials must meet the requirements of zones on welding qualification shall meet
NACE MR0175/1S0 15156. the hardness requirements for the alloys welded asspeci-
fied in NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. For most common
alloys, the maximum allowable hardness is HRC 22.
8820 WElDING SOUR GAS PIPELINES It is the user's responsibility to ensure the welding quali-
fication specimen is metallurgically of
8821 GENERAL full-scale welds.
B821.1 General Requirements NOTE: Both mRcrohilrdness and m icrohnrd ness surveys of prop'
erly prepared qu~lificillion specimens i\re frequently used to deler-
This paragraph concerns the welding of in sour
mine the presence of thin HAZ hard zones. A commonly
gas service in both wrought and cast steel materials maximum macrohilrdnesslimit neilr the inside surface is 250
and covers butt and fillet welded joints in
fittings, and fillet welded
socket welds, etc., as in 8824 PREHEATING
and connections to apparatus or
B824.5 Hydrogen Bake Out of Used Pipe
that has been used in sour gas service shall be
B821.2 Welding Processes for at least 20 min at 400°F (204°C) or higher to
This paragraph does not apply to the of the drive off any hydrogen in the metal. shall be
seam in the manufacture of pipe, but the user is cau- done prior to This heating should be in
tioned to ensure that such seams are suitable for sour addition to and immediately preceding any preheating
gas service in their installed condition. in the for new pipe.

119
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society or Mechanical
be made ofthis material without wrilten consent of' ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

8825 STRESS RELIEVING B831 PIPING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

8825.1 Carbon Steels B831.1 Valves and Pressure-Reducing Devices
The chemistry of the steel and welding procedure shall B831.1.3 Pressure-Reducing Devices
be controlled to limit the hardness of the weldment as (a)Instruments, instrument controllers,
para. B823.2.4. When the effectiveness of and other components that become a part
such controls is consideration shall be containment shall meet
given to stress welds in sour gas service. In MR0175/ISO 15156
bead welding, peening alloys suffer severe corrosion
low-temperature heat treatment of such alloys in any
vide the equivalent protection from service as for suitability.
does a full thermal stress relief.
8831.2 flanges
8825.6 Stress Relieving Temperature 8831.2.2 Bolting
(a) Stress is normally performed at a temper- (11) Bolting to sour gas and denied access to
ature of 1,100°F for carbon steels and air due to insulation, flange protectors, or cer-
1,200°F (649°C) for ferritic steels. Other stress tain features shall meet the of
relieving procedures may be substituted when properly NACE 15156 as Designers
supported with metallurgical evidence. The exact tem- should note that bolting meeting NACE MR0175/
perature range shall be stated in the procedure ISO 15156 requirements, such as type ASTM A193
B7M, have derated tensile properties, and the joint
(b) When stress a joint between dissimilar shall be for such deration. Bolting
metals having different stress relieving requirements, mr,"n!;p"", may be conventional ASTM A 193
the material the stress relieving
ature shall govern. considerations may be
required for austenitic and other high alloys. B840 DESIGN, INSTALLATION, AND TESTING
(c) The parts heated shall be brought slowly to the
and held at that for B841 STEEL PIPE
a period of time proportioned on the basis of at least 8841.1 Steel Piping Systems Design Requirements
1 hr/in. (1 h/25 mm) of wall but in no
case less than ~ and shaH be allowed to cool slowly 8841.1.2 fracture Control and Arrest
and uniformly. Fracture control should be con-
(c) FmC/lire COIl/rol.
(d) Records. A suitable record of the stress
sidered for sour gas service.
shall be provided for each weld stress relieved. B841.1.6 Design Factors, F, and location Classes.
(e) Tell1pera/me COIl/rol. A group of closely When using Table 841.1.6-1, factor F of 0.80 shall
such as three welds on a tee, can be controlled not be used for sour gas service.
and recorded a
8841.2 Installation of Steel Pipelines and Mains
8841.2.3 Bends, Miters, and Elbows in Steel
8826 WELDING AND INSPECTION TESTS
Pipelines
B826.2 Inspection and Tests for Quality Control of (a) Bends. Bends used in sour gas pipe shall meet the
Welds on Sour Gas Piping Systems of NACE MR0175/1S0 15156 in the as-
In addition to paras. 826.2(a) through for sour gas bent condition. Hot bends may be needed to meet
lines in Class 3 or 4 Locations, compressor stations, NACEMR0175/1S015156 The first
major or navigable river railroad bend may be needed for testing to ensure
and road crossings, 100% of all welds shall of NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 and that both
checked by nondestructive Nondestructive toughness and tensile are still """."u',mm::.
may be cond before or after stress ther wrinkle bends nor miter bends are
relieving. sour gas lines.
8841.2.4 Pipe Surfaces Requirements Applicable to
Pipelines and Mains to Operate at a Hoop Stress of 20%
8830 PIPING SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND
or More of the Specified Minimum Yield Strength
FABRICATION DETAilS
(e) Arc Bllms. Add arc burns have been
In addition to para. 830, all components shall meet found to cause serious stress concentration in pipelines
the requirements of NACE MR0175/fSO 15156 as and in sour gas lines, and shall be or elimi-
nated in all lines.

120
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

Arc burns may be removed by grinding, chipping, or made. Joints made from field-fabricated fittings are
machining. The shall be thoroughly
cleaned and checked for removal of damaged
material by etching with a 10% solution of ammonium 8842.4 Testing Plastic Piping After Construction
or a 5% solution of nitric acid in alcohol (nital).
8842.4.2 Testing Requirements
removal of material is the
may be merged smoothly into the original contour (J) All pipe installed for sour gas service shall
the provided the wall thick· be leak tested with air for 12 hI' minimum at a pressure
limits. not less than 1.5 times the maximum allowable operating
pressure or 50 (340 whichever is
8841.2.6 Hot Taps. In addition to para. 841.2.6 of
Chapter IV, it should be noted that hot tapping of sour
gas lines health and metallurgical con· 8843 COMPRESSOR STATIONS
cerns and shall be done only to written com-
pany plans. 8843.3 Station Equipment

8841.2.7 Precautions to Avoid Explosions of Gas- 8843.3.1 Gas Treating Facilities

Air Mixtures or Uncontrolled Fires During Construction (c) Metallic Materials. All metallic materials in contact
Operations with sour gas shall meet the
(II) In addition to the precautions outlined in of NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 as applicable.
para. 841.2.7(a) of IV, it should be noted that Personal should be considered for
welding and use at sour gas Use of
health and concerns sulfide sensors capable of actuating station emergency
company approved plans. shutdown should be considered.

8841.3 Testing After Construction

B844 PIPE-TYPE AND BOTTLE·TYPE HOLDERS
6841.3.1 General Provisions. In addition to
para. 841.3.1 of Chapter IV, it should be noted that testing Pipe- and bottle-type holders shall not be used for
with sour gas presents health and metallurgical sour gas. of sour gas is outside the scope of this
concerns and shall be only to written Code.
company plans.

B850 ADDITIONAL OPERATING AND

8842 OTHER MATERIALS MAINTENANCE CONSIDERATIONS AFFECTING
Materials shall meet the requirements of THE SAFETY OF SOUR GAS PIPELINES
NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 as applicable.
8850.1 General
8842.2 Design of Plastic Piping (c) Radius of exposure (ROE) to H 2S calculations shall
8842.2.2 Thermoplastic Design limitations be made a suitable air dispersion such
(f) The should consider extra as the Pasquel-Cifford given as
from third party in all class locations and at all (1) Each shall determine the
road fide concentration in the gaseous mixture in the
New construction for sour gas applications shall Suitable standards are CPA Plant Operations Test
utilize only polyethylene or polyamide thermoplastic Manual, Section C, and CPA Standard 2265.
that meets the of ASTM D2513. (2) Rlldills of
(-a) Radius of exposure to the
8842.2.9 Plastic Pipe and Tubing joints and level of after
Connections
(b) Joinl shall be x= [(1589) M QJ 0.6258
qualified destructive test of full scalle
plastic pipe joints. and plyamide for (-b) Radius of exposure equation to the 500-ppm
sour gas service be joined by butt level of after
fusion, and methods, or mechanical fit-
when recommended by the manufacturer as suit- x= [(0.4546) M QJ 0.(,258
able for sour gas service.
Mecllllllicnl Joints where
(4) Sleello Pills tic Transitioll Steel to M mol fraction of hyd rogen sulfide in the gaseous
transition for sour gas service shall be mixture

121
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
reproduction lJl8y be lJlade of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

Q maximum volume determined to be available 8851.10 Sour Gas Pipeline Blowdown

for escape in cubic feet per corrected to When blowing down sour gas lines, consideration
14.65 psia and 60°F shall be to the use of suitable tempo-
X == radius of exposure (ROE) in feet

(3) Metric for Radius of

8854 LOCATION CLASS AND CHANGES IN
(·a) lOO-ppm level of after dispersal:
NUMBER Of BUILDINGS INTENDED fOR
HUMAN OCCUPANCY
x'" == [(8.404) M QI/Il 06258
8854.5 Concentrations of People in location
(-b) SOD-ppm level of after Classes 1 and 2
(c) Security. Unattended fixed surface facilities
XIII M QIIlI 0.6158 should be from access when located
within l'4 mile (400 m) of a residential, or
where other inhabited or occupied structure; bus public
M mol fraction of hydrogen sulfide in the gaseous or populated area.
mixture (1) The protection should be provided by fencing
Q/II maximum volume determined to be available and locking or removal of valves and instrumentation
for escape in cubic meters per day corrected to and plugging of ports, or other similar means.
101 kPa and 15.6°C (2) Surface pipeline is not considered a fixed sur-
XIII ::::: radius of exposure (ROE) in meters face
(d) Additional control and or
NOTE: The equations assume a 24·hr release. When a pipeline devices should be installed and maintained to prevent
can be isolated in less than 24 hr, appropriate reductions the undetected release of hydrogen sulfide
may be used. if any of the exist:
(4) of 100-ppm and SOO-ppm ROE for (1) The lOa-ppm radius of
various 24-hr releases and mol fractions are shown 50 ft and includes any part
in Tables B850.1-1 and B850.1-2. Metric of a public road.
lOO-ppm and SOD-ppm ROE for various 24-hr releases (2) The 500-ppm radius of exposure is greater than
and mol fractions are shown in Tables B850. 1-3 and 50 ft (15 m) and includes any of a public road.
B850.1-4. (3) The 100-ppm radius of exposure is than
3,000 ft (915 m).
8850.4 Essential Features of the Emergency Plan (e) Contingency Plan. Operations subject to (d) above
shed I have a written prepared and
8850.4.2 Training In addition to conven- to state and local emergency response authorities.
all sour gas operation and maintenance Plans shall include maps, location of block valves, valve
shall be trained in and for locks.
(a) hazards and characteristics of
(b) effect on metal of the lines and B860 CORROSION CONTROL OF SOUR GAS
PIPELINES
8860.1 Scope
equipment and life support
This section contains the minimum additive or substi-
tutive for corrosion control of external and
(e) corrective action and shutdown
internal corrosion of sour gas piping and components.
Where specific provisions are not set forth herein, the
provisions of section 860 of Chapter VI shall apply.
B851 PIPELINE MAINTENANCE
8860.4 Special Considerations
8851.7 Pipeline Markers
Due to the corrosivity of sulfide and the
in para. presence of carbon dioxide and salt water,
where the 100-ppm radius which also are shall be given
than 50 ft (15 a "POISON GAS" to internal corrosion mitigation and
shall be installed. due to the corrosive and hazardous nature of
All surface facilities shall also be marked with the sour gas, consideration shall be given to the
"POISON GAS" selection of the corrosion illiowance.

122
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society or Mechanical
be made of this material without wri!1en consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8·2014

Table 8850.1-1 100-ppm ROE Table 8850.1-3 Metric Example for 100-ppm ROE
Release, Q. H2 S Release, Qm, H2 S
ROE,X, MMSCFD Mol ROE, Xm, m3 /day Mol
ft 0,000,000) Fraction m (1,000,000) Fraction

1,165 1 0.05 782 0.1 0.05

3,191 5 0.05 2,142 0.5 0.05
4,924 10 0.05 3,305 1 0.05
7,597 20 0.05 9,048 5 0.05
9,792 30 0.05 13,962 10 0.05

1,798 1 0.1 1,207 0.1 0.1

4,924 5 0.1 3,305 0.5 0.1
7,597 10 0.1 5,100 0.1
11,723 20 0.1 13,962 0.1
15,109 30 0.1 21,544 10 0.1

2,775 1 0.2 1,863 0.1 0.2

7,597 5 0.2 5.100 0.5 0.2
11,723 10 0.2 7.869 1 0.2
18,090 20 0.2 21,544 5 0.2
23,315 30 0.2 33.244 10 0.2
-- - -
..

Table 8850.1-2 500-ppm ROE

---------.--- Table 8850.1-4 Metric Example for 500-ppm ROE
Release. Q. H2S
ROE,X, MMSCFD Mol Release, Qm, H2S
ft (1,000,000) Fraction ROE, Xm• m3/day Mol
m (1,000,000) Fraction
533 1 0.05
1,458 5 0.05 357 0.1 0.05
2,250 10 0.05 979 0.5 0.05
3.472 20 0.05 1,510 1 0.05
4.474 30 0.05 4,135 5 0.05
6,380 10 0.05
822 1 0.1
2,250 5 0.1 552 0.1 0.1
3,472 10 0.1 1.510 0.5 0.1
5,357 20 0.1 2.330 0.1
6,904 30 0.1 6,380 0.1
9,845 10 0.1
1,268 0.2
3,472 0.2 851 0.1 0.2
5.357 10 0.2 2,330 0.5 0.2
8.266 20 0.2 3.596 1 0.2
10.654 30 0.2 9.845 5 0.2
15.191 10 0.2
-.~-- .. ~-.

123
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent
 ASME B31.8-2014

8861 EXTERNAL CORROSION CONTROL fOR 8867 STRESS CORROSION AND OTHER
STEEl PIPELINES PHENOMENA
Sour gas lines, particularly when combined with car-
B861.1 Buried/Submerged Installations
bon dioxide and produced salt watel~ can suffer from
B861.1.2 Cathodic Protection Requirements. Unless several corrosion-related phenomena.
it can be demonstrated by tests or that (a) Hydrogen-Reillted Problems. The corrosion reaction
cathodic protection is not all buried or sub- in the presence of the sulfide ion permits il amount
merged facilities with insulating type coatings, of liberated atoms to enter the steel. The
facilities instill led for a limited service life, shall hydrogen causes many that have been given
cathodically as soon as feasible different names:
installation, except thilt minor or exten- (1) Sulfide stress occurs when the
sions shill! be protected as covered by para. 860.3. alloys ilre too hard and/or too highly stressed in the
Facilities installed for a limited service life need not presence of corrosion with sour gas. NACE MR0175/
be cilthodically if it can be demonstrated that ISO 15156 outlines all of the materials combi-
the filcility will not corrosion that will cause nations to resist this type of
it to be harmful to the public or environment. Cathodic (2) cracking (HIC) occurs when
protection shall be to the bur- hydrogen causes inclusions in the steel to delaminate.
ied or in its Multiple shear cracks then develop to link the delamin-
a lions a stilir step crack Use of HIC
A facility is considered to be cathodically protected
resistant materials should be considered for sour gas
when it meets one or more of the criteria established in
service.
Mandatory Appendix K.
(3) Stress-oriented hydrogen-induced
Use of cathodic protection is to
is another variant of HIe. SOHIC is
buried sour gas filcilities. enhanced by high-tensile stress.
(4) Hydrogen consists atoms
diffusing inside the to delaminated areas and
8864 INTERNAL CORROSION CONTROL recombining to form molecules of gas. The
resulting pressure can create large blisters on either the
8864.1 General
inside or outside surfaces of the steel.
Sour gilS facilities shall be assumed to be internally (b) Chloride stress corrosion cracking is caused by
corrosive unless proven by to be otherwise. chlorides in the water. Austenitic stainless
Water dewpoint control freguently is used as a corrosion steels are prone to this type of crilcking. The
control method. Upset condi tions or operational changes sulfide ion a synergistic effect with the chloride ion.
may make this control method ineffective. The use of The net result is the occurrence of at lower
inhibitors is also common. and at lower chloride concentrations thiln
for small low-stressed parts
B864.2 Design of New Installations such as use of not resistant to chlo-
ride stress cracking above 140°F (60°C) is
New installations should be with in wet sour gas systems.
(II) suitable dedicated fittings for corrosion inhibitor (c) MicrobiologiCIIlly Indllced Corrosioll (MIC).
injection Microbiologic activity can create severe pitting-type cor-
(b) suitable dedicated fittings and villves to insert and rosion and hydrogen-related cracking in sour gas lines.
retrieve corrosion measuring devices such as and Use of appropriate biocides ilnd monitoring may be
coupons needed.

124
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
may be made of this material without writ1en consent of ASME.
-----.~
 ASME B31.8·2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX A (14)

REFERENCES

These references may be immediately applied to mate- A·2 API

rials purchased for use w1der this Code and shall be
5L edition, December 2012),
to all materials at least 12 months
for Line Pipe 1
after the date of issuance of the reference's latest
'API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards
including addenda, if applicable. A component or pipe
ond edition, February I, Chapter 21 - Flow
conforming to an earlier approved material specification
Measurement Electronic Systems,
edition by the user before the date of issuance
Section 1 Electronic Gas Measurement
of a new edition or addenda may be used, the
API RP 2A-WSD (21st edition, December 2000,
component or is and determined to be
Errata and through October 2007;
satisfactory for the service intended by the user.
firmed 2010), Practice for Planning,
Standards are incorporated in this Code and Constructing Fixed Offshore
and the names and addresses of the sponsoring Working Stress Design
zations are shown in this Mandatory Appendix. It is not API RP 5L1 (seventh edition, September 2009),
practical to refer to a edition of each publication Recommended Practice for Railroad
throughout the Code text; instead, the specific edition of Line Pipe
reference dates are shown herein. Reference shall be *API RP 5LW (third edition, 2009),
limited to the edition cited the user Recommended Practice for of Line
may use the latest edition of ANSI on and Marine Vessels
standards unless specifically prohibited by this Code, API 14C (seventh edition, March 2001, reaffirmed
and the user has reviewed the latest edition March 2007), Recommended Practice for
of the standard to ensure that the of the Installation, and of Basic
is not compromised. If a newer or amended Safety Systems for Offshore Production Platforms
edition of a standard is not ANSI then the 'API RP 14E (fifth edition, October 1991, reaffirmed
user shall use the March 2007), Recommended Practice for the
herein. and Installation of Offshore Production Platform
An asterisk (*) indicates that the edition of Piping
the standard has been as an American National *API RP 14F (fifth edition, July 2008), Recommended
Standard the American National Standards Institute Practice for Design, Installation, and Maintenance of
(ANSI). Electrical for Fixed clJ1d Offshore
Petroleum for Unclassified and Class I,
Division 1 and Division 2 Locations
API RP May 2001, reaffirmed March
2007), Recommended Practice for and Hazards
A·l AGA AnalysiS for Offshore Production Facilities
*API RP 13628-11 :2007 (fourth edition,
AGA Catalog No. XR0603 (October 2006), Plastic Pipe July 2008, including Technical Corrigendum 1),
Manual for Gas Service Recommended Practice for Flexible Pipe
"ANSI 54 (2012), National Fuel Gas Code API RP 1102 edition, December 2007, including
*ANSIIGPTC 2380.1 (2012, incl Addenda 1 Errata through 2012), Steel Pipelines
through GPTC Guide for Gas Transmission and Railroads and
Distribution API RP 1111 (fourth December 2009, including
Gas Technology Committee's Guide Material Errata through May 2011), Design,
G-192-15, Design of Un cased Operation, and Maintenance of Offshore
of Highways and Railroads Hydrocarbon Pipelines (Limit State

Publisher: American Gas Association (AGA), 400 North

tol Street, NW, Washington, DC 20001 I See Note in poril. 814.1.1 the lise of the 45th edition
(www.aga.org) of APISL

125
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of/his material without writlen consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

*API Spec 6A/ISO 10423:2009 (Modified) (20th edition, *ASME B16.49-2012,

October 2010, including Errata and Addenda through
March 2013), Specification for Wellhead and Distribution
Christmas Tree *ASME 618.2.1-2012, Hex,
*API Spec 6D/ISO 14313:2007 edition, April 2008, Askew Head Bolts Hex, Heavy Hex, Hex
including Errata and Addenda through October 2012), Lobed and Screws (Inch
for Pipeline Valves *ASME B18.2.2-201O, Nuts for General
*A 6DSS/ISO 14723:2009 edition, Machine Screw Nuts, Hex, Hex
December 2009), Specification for Subsea Pipeline Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)
Valves *ASME B31G-2012, Manual for
*API 17D/ISO 13628-4 edition, Remaining Strength of Corroded
including Errata through June 2013), Supplement to ASME B31 Code for Pressure Piping
Operation of Subsea Production ...,,,,,crpn. . <:: *ASME B31Q-2010, Pipeline Personnel Qualification
Wellhead and Tree *ASME 831.1-2012, Power
*API 13628-2:2006 (third edition, July 2008, *ASME 831.3-2012, Process
including Errata through August 2010), *ASME 631.4-2012, Pipeline for
for Unbonded Flexible Liquids and Slurries
API Std 1104 (21st edition, Welding of *ASME B31.8S-2012, Managing Integrity of Gas
and Related Facilities
Publisher: American Petroleum Institute (APIL *ASME 636.lOM-2004 (R2010), Welded and Seamless
1220 L Street, NW, Washington, DC 20005-4070 Wrought Steel
(www.api.org) *ASME BPV Code: Section VIII, Rules for Construction
of Pressure Vessels; and Section IX, Qualification
Standard for Weld and
A·3 ASME Procedures; Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing,
and Fusing (2013)
*ASME 61.1-2003 (R2008), Unified Inch Screw Threads
ASME 51-1-1982, Orientation and Guide for Use
(UN and UNR Thread Form) of SI (Metric) Units
* ASME B1.20.1-1983 (R2006), Threads, Genefill
ASME PCC-2-20l1, Repair of Pressure Equipment and
(Inch)
*ASME 816.1-2010, Gray Iron Pipe and IPC2002-27124, "Development of
Classes 25, 125, and 250 for Mild in Pipeline Field
*ASME 816.5-2013, and of IPe 2002, Fourth International Pipeline
NPS ~ Through 24 Metric/Inch Standard 2002
'ASME 616.9-2012, Factory-Made Wrought 6uttwelding
Publisher: The American of Mechanical
Fittings
Two Park Avenue, New York,
*ASME 616.11-2011, Fittings,
NY 10016; Order Department: 22 Law Drive, P.O.
and Threaded
Box 2900, NJ 07007-2900 (www.asme.org)
*ASME 616.20-2012, Metallic Gaskets for Pipe
Ring-Joint, Spiral-Wound, and
*ASME B16.24-2011, Cast Alloy Pipe Flanges A-4 ASTM
and Fittings: Classes ISO, 300, 600, 900, 1500, ASTM A53/ AS3M-12, Standard Specification for Pipe,
and 2S00 Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Welded
*ASME B16.33-2012, Manually Metallic Gas and Seamless
Valves for Use in Gas ""c"',,. .,'" up to 175 ASTM AlOS/ A105M-12, Standard for
NPS ~ Through NPS 2) Carbon Steel for Piping Applications
*ASME B16.34-2013, Valves Threaded, and ASTM AI06/ AI06M-l1, Standard
End Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for
*ASME B16.38-2012, Large Metallic Valves for Gas Service
Distribution: Manually Operated, NPS (DN 65) to ASTM A134-96(R2012), Standard Specification for
NPS 12 (ON 300), 125 (8.6 Maximum Electric-Fusion (Arc)- Welded NPS 16
*ASME 616.40-2013, Manually Operated Over)
Gas Shutoffs and Valves in Gas Distribution ASTM A135/ A13SM-09, Standard tion for
*ASME B16.42-2011, Ductile Iron Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe
Classes 150 and 300 ASTM A139/ AI39M-04(R201O), Standard
*ASME B16.47-2011, Diameter Steel NPS for Electric-Fusion (Arc)- Welded Steel
26 NPS 60 Metric/Inch Standard NPS 4 and

126
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
reproduction may bc made of this material without writtcn consent of ASM E,
 ASME B31.8·2014

ASTM A193/ A193M-12b, Standard for ASTM Standard Test Method for
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Time-to-Failure of Plastic Pipe Under Constant
or Service and Internal Pressure
Other Purpose Applications *ASTM D2513-13, Standard fication for
ASTM A194/A194M-12a, Standard for Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and
Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High
Pressure or or Both *ASTM D2S17-06(R2011), Standard for
ASTM Standard for Carbon Steel Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure
Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60000 PSI Tensile Fittings
Strength *ASTM D2837-11, Standard Test Method for Obtaining
ASTM A320/ A320M-l1a, Standard Specification for Hydrostatic Basis for Thermoplastic
Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel for Materials or Pressure Basis for
Service Pipe Products
ASTM A333/ A333M-l1, Standard Specification for *ASME FI041-02(R2008), Standard Guide for
Seamless and Welded Steel for Off of Polyolefin Gas Pressure and Tubing
Service *ASTM 1), Standard for
ASTM A3S4-11, Standard Specification for Quenched Tools to Squeeze-Off Polyethylene
and Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Tubing
Threaded Fasteners Publisher: American for and Materials
Standard for (ASTM International), 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O.
Steel Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Pressure Vessels (www.astm.org)
ASTM A381-96(R2012), Standard Specification for
Metal-Arc-Welded Steel for Use With
Pressure Transmission -';ucfon," A-S AWS
ASTM A39S/ A39SM-99(R2009), Standard "'n~.rlflr"
for Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure-Retaining *AWS A3.0M/ A3.0:2010, Standard Welding Terms and
for Use at Elevated Including Terms for Adhesive
ASTM A449-10, Standard Soldering, Thermal and Thermal
Screws, Bolts and Studs, Spraying
90 ksi Minimum Tensile General Use *AWS D3.6M:2010, Underwater Welding Code
ASTM A671/ A671M-I0, Standard Publisher: American Welding (AWS), 8669 NW
Electric-Fusion-Welded Steel 36th Street, No. 130, Miami, FL 33166-6672
and Lower Temperatures
ASTM Standard Specification for
Electric-fusion-Welded Steel for
Service at Moderate A·6 AWWA
ASTM A691/ A691M-09, Standard for
Ductile-Iron Fittings 3-lnch Through
Carbon and Alloy Steel Pipe, Electric-Fusion-Welded
for Service at High
ANSI A21.52-1991, Ductile-Iron Centrihlgally
ASTM A984/ A984M-03(R2009), Standard
Cast, for
for Steel Line Black, Plain-End, Electric-
Resistance-Welded *ANSI/ AWWA Cl Rubber-Gasket
for Ductile-Iron Pressure and Fittings
ASTM A 1005/ A 100SM-00(R2010), Standard
"ANSI/ AWWA CIS0/ A21.50-08, Thickness Design of
Specification for Steel Line Pipe, Black,
Ductile-Iron Pipe
and Helical Seam, Double
Arc Welded AWWA CI01-1976(R1977), Thickness Design of Cast
Iron
ASTM AI006/ AI006M-00(R2010), Standard
for Steel Line Pipe, Black, Plain-End, Publisher: American Water Works Association (AWWA),
Laser Beam Welded 6666 West Quincy Avenue, Denver, CO 80235
ASTM 888-09, Standard for Seamless (www.awwa.org)
Water Tube
ASTM D696-08<1, Standard Test Method for Coefficient
of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between 2 TI1is publication has been wilhdrnWI1, or is 110
~30°C and 30°C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer longer in print.

127
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

A·7 CGA MSS SP-71-2011, Check Valves,

and Threaded
Best Practices Guide (version 10.0, 2013)
MSS SP-75-2008, for Wrought
Publisher: Common Ground Alliance (CGA), 2300 Butt Welding
Wilson Suite 400, Arlington, VA 22201 MSS SP-78-2011, Gray Iron Plug Valves, and
(www.commongroundalliance.com) Threaded Ends
Publisher: Manufacturers Standardization of the
A-S EPRI Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS), 127 Park
Street, NE, Vienna, VA 22180 (www.mss-hq.com)
EPR! EL-3106 (1983) (also published as PRCI-AGA-
L51418), Power Line-Induced AC Potential on Natural
for Righ ts-oE· Way A·13 NACE
*ANSI/NACE MR0175/IS0 15156:2009, Petroleum and
Publisher: Electric Power Research Institute Natural Gas Industries - Materials for Use in
3420 Hillview Avenue, Palo Alto, CA 94304 Environments in Oil and Gas Production,
(www.epri.com) Parts 1, 2, and 3 (including all Technical Circulars
through 2011)
A·9 GPA NACE Corrosion Data (1985)2
NACE SP0169-2007, Control of External Corrosion on
GPA Plant Test Manual, Section Test for or Metallic Systems
Hydrogen Sulfide in LPG and Gases (TutweiJer NACE SP0177-2007, Mitigation of Current
Method) and Lightning Effects on Metallic Structures and
GPA Standard 2265-68, Determination of Corrosion Control Systems
Sulfide and Mercaptan Sulfur in Natural *NACE SP0607-2007/IS0 15589-2:2004 (Mod
(Cadmium Sulfate-Iodometric Titration Method) Petroleum and Natural Gas rndustries - Cathodic
Publisher: Gas Processors Association (GPA), 6526 East Protection of Pipeline Off-
60th Tulsa, OK 74145 (www.gpaglobaJ.org) shore
Publisher: National Association of Corrosion
A·10 GTI (NACE Interna 1440 South Creek
Houston, TX 77084-4906 (www.nace.org)
GRI-00/0154 (2000), Guide for Polyethylene Gas
Pipes Across
GRI-91/0284 (1991), EoI' A-14 NFPA
Highways2 *NFPA 10-2013, Standard for Portable Fire
Publisher: Gas Institute (GTI), 1700 South *NFPA 30,2012, Flammable and Combustible
Road, Des Plaines, IL 60018 Code
*NFPA 58-2013, Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code
*NFPA 59-2012, Utility LP-Gas Plilllt Code
A-ll IEEE *NFPA 59A-2013, Standard for the Production, Storage,
and Handling of Natural Gas (LNG)
*IEEE/ ASTM SI 10-2010, American National Standard *NFPA 70-2013, National Electrical Code (including
for Metric Practice Amendment 1)
Publisher: The Institute of Electrical and Electronics *NFPA 220-2012, Standard on of Building
445 Hoes Lane, NJ 08854 Construction
(www.ieee.org) Publisher: National Fire Protection Association (NFPA),
1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02169-7471
A-12 MSS (www.nfpa.org)

MSS SP-6-2012, Standard Finishes for Contact Faces of

A-IS PPI
Pipe and of Valves
and Handbook of Polyethylene
MSS SP-25-2008, Standard Marking for Valves, November 2007 (including Errata 6,
and Unions Policies and Procedures for Developing
MSS SP·44-2010 (inc/ud May 2011 errata), Steel Hydrostatic Basis (HDB), Pressure
Basis (PDB), Basis (SDB),
Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Minimum Required (MRS) Ratings for
Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe

128
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made ortllis material without wrillen consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

of Hydrostatic Basis A·16 PRCI

Stress (HDS), Strength PRCI PR-185-9734 (PRCI ,-,,,.al~'h L51782), Guidelines
Pressure Basis (PDB) and for Weld on (1998)
Minimum Strength (MRS) For PRCI PR-186-0324 (PRC! Catalog Updated
Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipeline Repair Manual (2006)
TR-33/2006, Generic Butt Fusion Procedure for PRC] PR-218-05404
Gas Defect Assessment A Review and
TR-41/2002, Generic Saddle Fus.ion Procedure Commonly Used Methods (2010)
for Gas Piping PRC! PR-218-9307 (PRCI L51716),
Manual (1994)
Publisher: Plastics Institute, Inc. (PPI), 105 Decker Pipeline Research Council International, Inc.
Court, Suite 825, TX 75062 (PRCI), 3141 Fairview Park Drive, Suite 525, Falls
(vvww.plasticpipe.org) Church, VA 22042 (www.prcLorg)

129
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without writlen consent of ASM E.
 ASME B31.8·2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX B
NUMBERS AND SUBJECTS OF STANDARDS AND
SPECIFICATIONS THAT APPEAR IN MANDATORY APPENDIX A

has been
rated into Mandatory

130
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
reproduction be made of this material without written consent of ASM E.
 ASME B31.S-2014

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX C (14)

PUBLICATIONS THAT DO NOT APPEAR IN THE CODE

OR MANDATORY APPENDIX A

NOTE: An ilsterisk (*) indicates standilrds that have been C-4 ASME
ilccepted as American National Standards by the Amedcan
National Standards Institute (ANSI). *ASME B1.20.3-1976 (R2013), DryseaI Pipe Threads
(Inch)
*ASME B16.3-2011, Malleable Iron Threaded
(-1 AGA Classes 150 and 300
AGA XLlOO1 (December 2010, *ASME B16.4-2011, Gray Iron Threaded Fi
1 and 2), of Locations for Classes 125 and 250
Installations in Gas Utility Areas *ASME B16.14-201O, Ferrous Bushings, and
Directional Drilling Prevention Guidelines for Locknuts With Pipe Threads
the Natural Gas Industry 2004) *ASME B16.15-2011, Cast Threaded
Classes 125 and 250
Publisher: American Gas Association (AGA), 400
*ASME B16.18-2012, Cast Alloy Solder Joint
North Capitol NW, Washington, DC 20001
(www.aga.org) Pressure
*ASME B16.22-2012, Wrought and Alloy
Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
C-2 API *ASME B16.25-2012, Buttwelding Ends
*ASME B31.12-2011, Hydrogen Piping and Pipelines
API RP 2A-LRFD (first edition, July 1993, including
Publisher: The American of Mechanical
Errata and Supplements through February 1997; reaf-
(ASME), Two Park Avenue, New York,
firmed May 2003), Recommended Practice for
NY 10016; Order 22 Law Drive, p,o.
and Fixed
Offshore Platforms - Load and Resistance Factor Box 2900, NJ 07007-2900

*API RP 500 (third edition, December 201 C-S ASTM

Recommended Practices for Classification of
Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum ASTM A6/ A6M-13, Standard for General
Facilities Classified as Class I, Division 1 and for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Plates,
Division 2 and Sheet Piling
API 5B (15th edition, 2008), ASTM A20/ A20M-ll, Standard Specification for
Threading, Gauging, and Thread General for Steel Plates for Pressure
Tubing, and Line Threads Vessels
Publisher: American Petroleum Institute (API), ASTM A29/ A29M-12, Standard for
1220 L Street, NW, DC 20005 General Requirements for Steel
(www.api.org) Alloy,
ASTM A36/ A36M-12, Standard tion for
Carbon Structural Steel
C-3 ASCE ASTM A47/ A47M-99(R2009), Standard for
Ferritic Malleable Iron
ASCE Manuals and
ASTM A48/ A48M-03(R2012), Standard for
No. 89
Iron
ASTM A125-96(R2007), Standard for Steel
1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston ;';"">n(7<: Helical, Heat-Treated

(www.asce.org) ASTM A126-04(R2009), Standard for Gray

Iron for Valves, and Fittings
1 This publiciltion hilS been superseded, withdrilwn, or is no ASTM A181/ A181M-12, Standard Specification for
longer in print. Carbon Steel for

131
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engilleers.
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

*ASTM A182/ A182M-13, Standard ASTM 842-10, Standard for Seamless

or Rolled Alloy and Standard Sizes
Forged and Valves and Parts for ASTM B43-09, Standard for Seamless Red
Service Brass Standard Sizes
ASTM A197/A197M-OO(R201n Standard Specification ASTM B61-08, Standard for Steam or Valve
for Cupola Malleable Iron
ASTM A216/ A216M-12, Standard for Steel for Composition
Suitable for Fusion Welding, for Bronze or Ounce Metal
Service ASTM B68/B68M-ll, Standard fication for
ASTM A217/ A217M-12, Standard Specification for Steel Seamless Tube, Annealed
Martensitic Stainless and Alloy, for ASTM B75/B75M-l1, Standard Specification for Seam-
Suitable for less Copper Tube
Temperature Service ASTM B249/B249M-12, Standard Specification for
ASTM A225/ A225M-12, Standard General for Wrought and
Pressure Vessel Rod, Bar, and
Vanadium-Nickel ASTM 8251-10, Standard Specification for General
ASTM A234/ A234M-l1a, Standard for for Wrought Seamless and
Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Copper-Alloy Tube
Steel for Moderate and High-Temperature Service ASTM 8584-13, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy
ASTM A242/ A242M-13, Standard for Sand for General Applications
Low-Alloy Structural Steel Publisher: American for lesting and Materials
2a, Standard (ASTM International), 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O.
Low and Intermediate 1l:msiie Box C700, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959
Plates
ASTM A285/ A285M-12, Standard for
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon
C-6 AWWA
Intermediate-1ensile ....,rn'nvlll
ASTM fur *AWWA Steel Pipe for Waterworks
Carbon and Low-Alloy Steel Service Sizes 4 in. Through 144 in. (l00 mm
Notch for Piping Through 3,600 mm)
ASTM A377-03(R2008)<l, Standard Index of Publisher: American Water Works Association (AWWA),
for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe 6666 West Quincy Avenue, Denver, CO 80235
ASTM A420/ A420M-lOa, Standard for (www.awwa.org)
Piping of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy
Steel for Service
ASTM A487/ A487M-93(R2012), Standard C-7 GIl
for Steel Suitable for Pressure Service
Guide for Across
ASTM Standard Specification for
Rivets, Steel, Structurill (2001), GRI Guide for Locating and
ASTM A515/ A515M-1O, Stilndard for Industry Research. Section 1: Fracture
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, and Arrest
and Service GRI-OO/0192.02 ), GRI Guide for Locating and
ASTM A516/ A516M-I0, Standard Specification for Pipeline Research. Section 2: Defect
Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon for Moderate- Assessment
and Lower-Temperature Service GRI-OO/0192.03 (2001), GRI Guide for Locating and
ASTM A575-96(R2013)<l, Standard for Using Pi Industry Research. Section 3:
Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades Identifying of Defects and Causes of
ASTM A576-90b(R2012), Standard for Steel Failures
Bars, Hot-Wrought, Quality GRI-OO/0192.04 (2001), GRr Guide for Locating and
ASTM A694/ A694M-08, Standard Pipeline Industry Research. Section 4:
Carbon and Alloy Steel Forgings
Fittings, Valves, and Parts for GRI-00/0192.05 (2001), GRI Guide for Locating and
Transmission Service lndusrry Research. Section 5: Line
ASTM B21/B21M-12, Standard for Naval GRI-OO/0192,06 ), GRI Guide for and
Brass Rod, Bar, and Industry Research. Section 6; Welding

132
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society or Mechanical
No may be made of this malerial wilhoul written consent or ASME,
 ASME 831.8·2014

GRI·00/0192.07 (2001), GRI Guide for Publisher: Gas Technology Institute (GTI), 1700 South
Pipeline Industry Research. Section 7: Mount Prospect Road, Des IL 60018
and Components (www.gastechnology.com)
GRl-00/0192.08 (2001), GRI Guide for Locating and
Research. Section 8: Pipeline
C-8 MSS
Repair Methods
GRI-OO/0192.09 (2001), GRl Guide for Locating and *MSS SP-55-20l1, Quality Standard for Steel
Pipeline Industry Research. Section 9; for Flanges, Fittings, and Other
Mechanical Components Visual Method for Evaluation
GRI-OO/Ol92.lO (2001), GRI Guide for and Surface Irregularities
Using Research. Section 10: MSS Pressure of Valves
Corrosion Publisher: Manufacturers Standardization of the
GRr-OO/Ol92.11 (2001), GRr Guide for and Valve and Industry, Inc (MSS), 127 Park
Using Pipeline Industry Research. Section 11: Stress Street, NE, Vienna, VA 22180 (www.mss-hq.com)
Corrosion
GRr-00/0192.12 (2001), GRr Guide for and (-9 OTHER PUBLICATIONS
Industry Research. Section 12; Industry
Statistics ANSI 217.1-1973, American National Standard for
GR!-00/0192.13 GRI Guide for Locating and Preferred Numbers 1
Industry Research. Section 13; Offshore Publisher: American National Standards Institute
Pipelines (ANSI), 25 West 43rd Street, New York, NY 10036
GRI-00/0192.14 (2001), GRI Guide for Locating and (www.ansLorg)
Pipeline Research. Section 14: In-Line
Inspection Horizonal Directional Drilling Good Practices
GRI-00/0192.15 (2001), GRI Guide for Locating and Guidelines (third edition, 2008)
Using Pipeline Industry Research. Section 15; Publisher: HDD available through North
Situations American Society for Trench less (NASTT),
GRI-00/0192.16 (2001), GRT Guide for Locating and 7445 Morgan Road, NY 13090
Industry Research. Section 16: Risk (www.nastt.org)
Assessment
GRI-00/0192.17 (2001), GRr Guide for and Catalog L52290), Installation
Using Pipeline Industry Research. Section 17: Horizontal Directional Drilling
Information Design Guide (2008)
GRI-96/0368 (1996), Guidelines for the Application of Research Council International
Guided Horizontal Drilling to Install Gas (PRCI), 3141 Fairview Park Drive, Suite 525, Falls
Distribution Pipe Church, VA 22042 (www.prci.org)

133
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
may be made of this material without written consent of ASM E.
________ J
 ASME B31.8·2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX D
SPECIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH FOR STEEL PIPE
COMMONLY USED IN PIPING SYSTEMS 1

Table D·l Specified Minimum Yield Strength for Steel Pipe Commonly Used
in Piping Systems
Type SMYS,
Spec. No. Grade [Note (ill psi (MPa)

API 5l [Note (2)] A25 BW, ERW, 5 25,000 (172)

API 5l [Note (2)J A ERW, 5, DSA 30,000 (207)
API 5l [Note (2)] B ERW, 5, DSA 35,000 (241)

API 5l [Note (2)J x42 ERW, 5, DSA 42,000 (290)

API 5l [Note (2)J x46 ERW, 5, DSA 46,000 (317)

API 5l [Note (2)1 x 52 ERW, 5, DSA 52,000 (359)

API Sl [Note (2)] x56 ERW, 5, DSA 56,000 (386)
API 5l [Note (2)] x60 ERW, 5, DSA 60,000 (414)

API 5l [Note (2)] x65 ERW, S, DSA 65,000 (448)

API 5L [Note (2)) x 70 ERW, S, DSA 70,000 (483)

API 5l [Note (2)] x80 ERW, 5, DSA 80,000 (552)

ASTM A53 Type F BW 25,000 (172)

ASTM AS3 A ERW, 5 30,000 (207)

ASTM A53 B ERW, 5 35,000 (241)

ASTM AI06 A 5 30,000 (207)

ASTM A106 B 5 35,000 (241)
ASTM AI06 ( S 40,000 (276)

ASTM A134 EFW [Note (3)]

ASTM A135 A ERW 30,000 (207)

ASTM AD5 B ERW 35,000 (241)

ASTM A139 A EFW 30,000 (207)

ASTM A139 B EfW 35,000 (241)
ASTM A139 ( EfW 42,000 (290)
ASTM A139 D EFW 46,000 (317)
ASTM A139 E EFW 52,000 (359)

ASTM A333 1 S, ERW 30,000 (207)

ASTM A333 3 5, ERW 35,000 (241)
5 35,000 (241)
ASTM
ASTM
A333
A333 "
6 5, ERW 35,000 (241)
ASTM A333 S, ERW 35,000 (241)
ASTM A333 8 S, ERW 75,000 (517)
ASTM A333 9 S, ERW 46,000 (317)

ASTM A381 Class Y·35 DSA 35,000 (241)

ASTM A381 Class Y'42 DSA 42,000 (291)

ASTM A381 Class Y·46 DSA 46,000 (317)
ASTM A381 (lass Y'48 DSA 48,000 (331)
ASTM A381 (lass V-50 DSA 50,000 (345)

I See para. 84U.

134
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechallical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 A5ME 831.8-2014

Table D-1 Specified Minimum Yield Strength for Steel Pipe Commonly Used
in Piping (Cont'd)
.~---.---.

Type SMY5,
Spec. No. Grade [Note (1)] psi (MPa)
~.--.---~---~--~-- -~-------~-------~-----

ASTM A381 Class Y-52 DSA 52,000 (359)

ASTM A381 Class Y-56 DSA 56,000 (386)
ASTM A381 Class Y-60 DSA 60,000 (414)

A5TM A381 Class Y-65 DSA 65,000 (448)

ASTM A984 35 ERW 35,000 (241)

ASTM A984 50 ERW 50,000 (345)
ASTM A984 60 ERW 60,000 (414)
ASTM A984 70 ERW 70,000 (483)
ASTM A984 80 ERW 80,000 (552)

ASTM AlOOS 35 DSA 35,000 (241)

ASTM A100S 50 OSA 50,000 (345)
ASTM AlOOS 60 DSA 60,000 (414)
ASTM AlOOS 70 DSA 70,000 (483)
ASTM A1005 80 DSA 80,000 (552)

ASTM A1006 35 lW 35,000 (241)

ASTM Al006 50 lW 50,000 (345)
ASTM A1006 60 lW 60,000 (414)
ASTM Al006 70 lW 70,000 (483)
ASTM Al006 80 lW 80,000 (552)
---~--

GENERAL NOTE: This Table is not complete. For the minimum specified yield strength of other grades
and grades in other approved specifications, refer to the particular specification.
NOTES:
(1) Abbreviations: BW = furnace buttwelded; DSA double submerged-arc welded; EFW electric
fusion welded; ERW = electric resistance welded; lW laser welded; 5 = seamless.
(2) Intermediate grades are available in API 5L
(3) See applicable plate specification for SMYS.

135
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without writ1en consent of ASME.
 ASME 631.8·2014

Table D-2 HDB Values for

Thermoplastic Materials
Plastic Pipe Material
Designation long-Term Hydrostatic Strength
(02513)
- - - - at-73°F, psi
~~~~~~~~~-~~~~-

PA 32312 (PA-l1) 2,500

PB 2110 2,000
PE 2406 1,250
PE 3408 1,600

PE 2606 1,250
PE 2706 1.250
PE 2708 1,250
PE 3608 1,600

PE 3708 1,600
PE 3710 1,600
PE 4708 1,600
PE 4710 1.600

PVC 1120 4,000

PVC 1220 4,000
PVC 2110 2,000
PVC 2116 3,150

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Long·Term Hydrostatic Strength Values {or Thermoplastic Pipes
Covered by ASTM 02513. The values apply only to materials
and pipes meeting all the requirements of the basic materials
and ASTM D2513. They are based on engineering test data
obtained in accordance with ASTM D1598 and analyzed in
accordance with ASTM D2837. A list of commercial compounds
meeting these requirements is published yearly by the Plastics
Pipe Institute.
(b) HOB Values for Reinforced Thermosetting Pipes Covered by
ASTM 02517. The value is established in accordance with
ASTM 02517. In the absence of an established HOB. the value
is 11.000 psi (75.8 MPa).

136
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
",,'V"'U,""vu
 ASME B31.8-2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX E
FLEXIBILITY AND STRESS INTENSIFICATION FACTORS

Table E-l on the following page.

137
Copyright © 20]4 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
may be made of this material without written COllsent or ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table E·1 Flexibility Factor, k. and Stress Intensification Factor, i

Flexibility Flexibility
Factor. Out-plane, In-plane. Characteristic.
Description k io il h Sketch

Welding elbow or pipe bend 1.65

-h-
0.75 r
[Notes (1)-(5)] r/
-~""""""""""--~""~'~'--""~'-'---'-'-'-'-'---_.-.-.-.- ---_.-._--- ---- ....... --
Closely spaced miter bend [Notes
(1). (2), (3). and (5)]
1.52 cot (;I 1's
5 < f,
(1 + tan 8)
h,/6 2

Single miter bend or widely

spaced miter bend 1.52 0.9 1 + co! 8 r
5 ~ r2 (1 + tan 8)
[Notes (1). (2). and (5)J

Welding tee per ASME B16.9 with

'0 ~ % 0.9
+ ';;,
Tc 1.5 T
[Notes (1). (2). and (6)]

Reinforced fabricated tee with

pad or saddle [Notes (1), (2).
(7)-(9)1

Unreinforced fabricated tee 0.9

[Notes (1). (2). and (9)l

Extruded outlet
fo 2 0.9
T, < 1.5
[Notes (1). (2). and (6)j

Welded·in contour insert

'0;': % 0.9
fc~1.5r
[Notes (1). (2). and (10)]

Branch welded·on fitting (inte·

grally reinforced) [Notes (1).
(2). (9). and (11)!

138
Copyright © 2014 by the Aillerican Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without wril1en consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table E·1 Flexibility Factor, k, and Stress Intensification Factor, i (Cont'd)

Flexibility Stress Intensification
Factor. Factor,
Description k Sketch
----~.

BtllI weld !Notes (1) and (12)1

T;>: 0.237 in. (6.02 mm), 1.0

Om.. :; in. (1.59 mm).
and S; 0.13

Butt weld [Notes (1) and (12)]

T 0.237 in. (6.02 mm).

omax;; in. (3.18 mm). 1.9 max. or
and = any value [0.9 + 2,7(0,,/hl,
but not less than
1.0
Bult weld [Notes (1) and (12)1

T;; 0,237 in. (6,02 mml.

omax ;; in. (1.59 mm),
and ;; 0.33
1.9 max. Of
Tapered transition per
Do 0
ASME B16.25 1.3 + 0.0036 -=- + 3.6 =
[Note (1)] T T

2.0 max. or

Concentric reducer per 0.5 + O.Ola

ASME B16.9 [Notes (1) and
(13)]

Double-welded slip,on flange 1.2

[Note (14)]
2.1 max. or 2.1 but
not less than 1.3
lap joint flange (with 1.6
ASME B16.9 lap jOint stub)
(14)]

2.3

Corrugated straight pipe, or 5 2.5

corrugated or creased bend
[Nole (16)j

139
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made ortllis material without writtell cOllsent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8·2014

Table E·1 Flexibility Factor, k, and Stress Intensification Factor, i (Cont'd)

100

80 Flexibility factor for

V
~
elbows, k = 1.S5/h
60 /'

" V
"' "
Flexibility factor
40 V V miters, k 1.52/h

30 ~"'l1lI ~V V
V
...;: ~V Stress intensification
factor, i = 0.9/h 2/3
..,u04<
20
'<V
..
f' V
f' k r\ ./" V
/'
J:: .....,0 15

-
c:
.-...o
'" >-
¥;;
'"
~ /'
Stress intensification
factor, i ~ 0.75/h2/3

10
~ ~ ~~
..0
'(;i
; 'x /v
V '" ~ ~
V
... OJ
,,;:;:: 8 --I-
~~
.~ ~
~
~
til '" 6

4
"'<f' ~ , l''"
/'

~,
~l'\
~
3
'"
2 I
I
" ~~ ~ " ~
~ "'l1lI
~~
1.5

0.02 0.03 0.04 0.06 0.10 0.15 0.2

"' '""CS
0.3 0.4
~
0.6 0.8 1.0I' 1.5 2
Characteristic, h
Chart A

1.00 r ......rT-Tlf--r-

1 End flanged c 1 h 1f6

2 Ends flanged c1 = II 1;3

Chart B

140
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made oflhis material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Factor, k, and Stress Intensification Factor, i (Cont'd)

NOTES:
(1) The nomenclature is as follows:
d outside diameter of branch. in. (mm)
R! == bend radius of welding elbow or pipe bend. in. (mm)
ro == radius of curvature of external contoured portion of outlet, measured in the plane containing the axes of the header and
branch, in. (mm)
" mean radius of matching in. (mm)
s == miter at centerline. (mm)
r thickness of piping component. in. (mm)
for elbows and miter bends. the nominal wall thickness of the fitting. in. (mm)
== for welding tees. the nominal wall thickness of the matching pipe. in. (mm)
== for fabricated tees. the nominal wall thickness of the run or header (provided that if thickness is greater than that of matching
pipe. increased thickness must be maintained for at least one run outside diameter to each side of the branch outside diame-
terl, in. (mm)
Tc == the crotch thickness of tees. in. (mm)
Ie pad or saddle thickness. in. (mm)
a == reducer cone angle, deg
() == one· half angle between adjacent miter axes, deg
(2) The flexibility factor, k, applies to bending in any plane. The flexibility factors. k. and stress intensification factors, i, shall not be less
than unity; factors for torsion equal unity. Both factors apply over the effective arc length (shown by heavy centerlines in the
sketches) for curved and miter bends and to the intersection point for tees.
The values of k and i can be read directly from Chart A by entering with the characteristic, h, computed from the formulas given.
(3) Where flanges are attached to one or both ends. the values of k and i shall be corrected by the factors. Cu. which can be read
directly from Chart B, entering with the computed h.
(4) The designer is cautioned that cast buttwelded fittings may have considerably heavier walls than that of the pipe with which they are
used. large errors may be introduced unless the effect of these greater thicknesses is considered.
(5) In large diameter thin-wall elbows and bends, pressure can significantly affect the magnitudes of k and i. To correct values from the
table, divide k by

divide i by

where
Ee cold modulus of elasticity, psi (MPa)
P gage pressure, psi (MPa)
(6) If the number of displacement cycles is less than 200. the radius and thickness limits specified need not be met. When the radius
and thickness limits are not met and the number of design cydes exceeds 200, the out-plane and in-plane stress intensification fac>
tors shall be calculated as and (0.67/h 2/ J ) + v" , respectively.
(7) When Ie> use h 4.05 Tlr,.
(8) The minimum value of the stress intensification factor shall be 1.2.
(9) When the branch·to-run diameter ratio exceeds 0.5. but is less than 1.0, and the number of design displacement cycles exceeds
200. the out-plane and in-plane stress intensification factors shaH be calculated as and + respectively.
unless the transition weld between the branch and run is blended to a smooth concave contour. If the transition weld is blended to
a smooth concave contour, the stress intensification factors in the table still apply.
(10) If the number of displacement cycles is less than 200, the radius and thickness limits specified need not be met. When the radius
and thickness limits are not met and the number of design displacement cycles exceeds 200, the out>plane and in-plane stress inten-
sification factors shall be calculated as 1.8/h 1/J and (O.67/h 2/J) + respectively.
(11) The designer must be satisfied that this fabrication has a pressure rating equivalent to straight pipe.
(12) The stress intensification to girth butt welds between two items for which the wail thicknesses are between 0.87Sr and
L10r for an axial distance of DQ and T are nominal outside diameter and nominal wall thickness, respectively. Oavg is the
average mismatch or offset.

141
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
'-~_ ~
be____
...._: _____ .. may
.._c_~ . .oflhis
ll1aue . ... _ material without written consent of ASME.
~
 ASME 831.8-2014

---~--~~~
Table E-l and Stress Intensification --~~-.-.:.

NOTES (Cont'd):
(13) The equation applies only if the following conditions are met
(a) Cone angle a does not exceed 60 deg, and the reducer is concentric.
(b) The larger of and does nol exceed 100.
(e) The wall thickness is not less than Tl throughout the body of the reducer, except in and immediately adjacent to the cylindrical
portion on the small end, where the thickness shall not be less than
(14) For some flanged joints, leakage may occur at expansion stresses otherwise permitted herein. The moment to produce leakage of a
flanged joint with a gasket having no self·sealing characteristics can be estimated by the following equation:

Ab total area of flange bolls, In. 2 (mm»

Ap area to outside of gasket contact, in.2
C bolt circle, in, (mm)
M[ moment to produce flange leakage, in. Ib (mm·N)
P internal pressure, psi (MPa)
Sb bolt stress. psi (MPa)
(15) Cx is the fillet weld length. For unequal lengths, use the smaller leg for CX'
(16) Factors shown apply to bending. Flexibility faclor for torsion equals 0.9.

142
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without writ1en consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX F
EXTRUDED HEADERS AND WELDED BRANCH CONNECTIONS 1

(14) F-l EXTRUDED HEADERS t/I thickness of branch pipe according to

steel formula of 841.1.1,
Definitions and limitations to F-I
but not including any thickness corrosion,
through F-4 are as follows:
in. (mm)
D outside diameter of run, in. (mm)
tr thickness of the run according to the
Dc = corroded internal diameter of run, in.
steel pipe design formula para. 841.1.1, but not
corroded internClI diameter of extruded outlet
includ any allowance for corrosion or
measured at the level of the outside surface of tnl,'r".,rp in. (mm)
run, in. (mm)
d outside diameter of branch pipe, in. (mm)
de :::: corroded internal diameter of branch pipe, F-2 EXAMPLES ILLUSTRATING THE APPLICATION
in. (mm) OF THE RULES FOR REINFORCEMENT OF
170 height of the extruded lip. This must be equal WELDED BRANCH CONNECTIONS
to or than r", as shown in limita- F-2.1 Example 1
of 1'0 below, in. (mm).
L of the reinforcement zone, in. (mm) An NPS 8 outlet is welded to an NPS 24 header. The
header material is API 5LX 46 with a 0.312-in. wall. The
1'1 half width of reinforcement zone (equal to outlet is API 5L Grade B Schedule 40 with a
in. (mm) 0.322-in. wall. The working pressure is 650 psig. The
fabrication is in Location Class 1. para. 841.1, the
1'0 radius of curvature of external contoured por-
is 1.00. The is lOO°F,
tion of outlet measured in the
factors F 0.60, E :::: 1.00, and
the axes of the run and in. (mm).
F-S.
is to the following limitations:
(a) Mil/illWIII Radius. This dimension shall F-Z.1.1 Header. Nominal wall thickness required:
not be less than that on branch
diameters larger than 30 in. mm), it need
not exceed 1.50 in. mm).
0.283 in.
(b) Maximulil Radil/s. For outlet pipe sizes
NPS 8 (ON 200) and this dimension shall Excess thickness in header wall:
not exceed 0.10d + 0.50 in. (O.lOd 12.7 mm).
For outlet pipe sizes smaller than NPS 8 H 0.312 0.283 = 0.029 in.
(ON this dimension shall not be
F-Z.1.Z Outlet. Nominal wall thickness required:
than 1.25 in. (31.75 mm).
(e) When the external contour contains more
than one the radius on any arc sector
of apprOXimately 45 shall meet the 0.133 in.
ments of (a) and (b) above.
(d) Machining shall not be employed to meet
Excess thickness in outlet wall:
the above lJ I" 0.322 - 0.133 = 0.189 in.
actual thickness of branch wall, not
corrosion allowance, in. (mm) rl inside diameter of ('\n.",i.-.a = 8.62.5 2 x 0.322
corroded finished thickness of extruded outlet = 7.981 in.
measured at a to 1'" above the
F-Z.l.3 Reinforcement Required
outside surface of run, in. (mm)
T, actual thickness of the run wall, not including AI\ dl = 7.981 x 0.283 2.259 in 2
the corrosion allowance, in. (mm)
F-Z.1.4 Reinforcement Provided by Header

I See paril. 831.6. Al (Ji - I) d = 0.029 x 7.981 0.231 in.

143
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without writien consent
~----~-~------
 ASME B31.8·2014

Fig. F-l

limits of <t.-
reinforcement of branch

';lOd'9' max. Taper bore inside

diameter (if required)
to match branch pipe;
1:3 max. taper

<=n'i'===~=-- Corrosion allowance

1'1---- r1 = 0 0 - -.......01

Fig. F-2

GENERAL NOTE: Sketch to show method of establishing To when the taper encroaches on the crotch radius.

F-3

1t
Reinforcement
zone

---IBI-I~dc~ __

I
L

Corrosion allowance

GENERAL NOTE: Sketch is drawn for condition where /( ~ 1.00.

144
if) 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this malerialwithout written consent of
 ASME B31.8·2014

Fig. F-4

I~"---d --------..-/ Reinforcement

zone

~:-dc~_1t-
I
L I

1.-11---+- - " - - - - -.......- -- - "

o Corrosion allowance

GENERAL NOTE: Sketch is drawn for condition where K = 1.00.

145
Copyright © 2014 by lite American Sociel)' of Mechanical Engineers. ~
No reproduction Jllay be made of this material without wril1en consent of ASME. l&,
 ASME 631.8-2014

fig, f-5 Rules for Reinforcement of Welded Branch Connections

Area of reinforcement enclosed by - - - - - lines.

Reinforcement area required A R ", dt
Area available as reinforcement Al + A2 + ~

A1 = (H - tl (d) (If negative, use zero for value of All

= 2(8- tblL
~ summation of area of all added reinforcement, including
weld areas that lie within the area of reinforcement
Al + A2 + A3 must be equal to or greater than AR
where

B '" nominal wall thickness of branch

d the greater of the length of the finished opening
:0

in the header wall measured parallel to the axis

of the run or the inside diameter of the branch
connection
H nominal wall thickness of header
M actual (by measurement) or nominal
thickness of added reinforcement
t = required nominal wall thickness of the header
(under the appropriate section of this Codel
tb required nominal wall thickness of the branch
(under the appropriate section of this Codel

146
of Mechanical
 AS ME B31.8·2014

Fig. F-6

8 0.322 in.
(8.179 mm)

E
d 7.981 in. --;..f-o<--.- E
(202.72 mm) c<o
1-"-- ~."~. ~~~,.~... 1 5 .962 in. ,,'- ~-~.-,." :;:m
(405.435 mm)
Nfil
Ii -
a

F-2.1.S Effective Area in Outlet is 1.00. The temperature is 37.8°C. Design factors F =
0.60, E = 1.00, and T == 1.00. For dimensions, see F-5.
L B + M (assume pad)
x 0.322) + 0.25 = 1.055 in. F-2.1.1M Header. Nominal wall thickness

orL == == 2.5 x 0.312 = 0.780 in. Use L := 0.780 in. 1= PD 4.48 x 609.6

Az 2 (B ,- Ib) L = 2 x 0.189 x 0.780 == 7.178 mm

= 0.295 in. 2
Excess thickness in header WillI:
This must be multiplied by 35,000/46,000
para. 831.4.1(f)].
H- I 7,925 - 7.178 0.747 mm

. A'
Effecttve 0295 35,000 0 2 ' 0 f-2.1.2M Outlet. Nominill wil.ll thickness
2 ' x 46,000 = ,2 4 111.-

area: 4.48 x 219.1

A3 = AR AI A'2
2.259 0,231 - 0.224 1.804 il1.2
Excess thickness in outlet wall:
Use a reinforced that is 0.250 in. thick (minimum
practicable) x 15.5 in. in diameter. B 1/, 8.179 - 3.390 4.788 mm

Area (15.500 - 8.625) x 0.250 1.719 in. 2

d = i.nside diameter of = 219.08 2 x 8.179
Fillet welds two welds each = 202.72 mm
F-2.1.3M Reinforcement Required
(0.25 x 0.25) x 4 = 0.125 in.
AR dl = 202.72 x 7.178 1455.2 mm 2
Total provided 1.844 il1.2
See also F-6. f-2.1.4M Reinforcement Provided by Header
F-2.1M 1M
AJ (H I) d 0.747 x 202.72 = 151.34 mm 2
A DN 200 outlet is welded to a DN 600 heflder. The
header material is 317.2 MPa with a 7.92-mm wflii. The f-2.1.SM Effective Area in Outlet
outlet is 241.3 MPa with a 8.18 mm wall.
The working pressure is 4.48 MPa. The fabrication is in B + M (assume 6.35 mm pad)
Location Class 1. Using para, 841.1, the joint x 8.179) 'I- 6.35 26.797 mm

147
Copyright © 2014 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

or L 2.5 x 7,92 19.812 mm, Use L d inside diameter of == 16,000 2 x 0.312

19.812 mm 15.376 in.

A2 2 (B - II,) L == 2 x 4.788 x 19.812

F-2.2.3 Reinforcement Required
189.73 mm2 AR = dl 15.376 x 0.283 4.351 in.

This must be multiplied by 241.3/317.2 F-2.2.4 Reinforcement Provided

para. 831.4.1(f)J.
AI (H I) d = 0.029 x 15.376 0.446 in. 2

Effective A'z 189.73 x 241.3 = 144.36 mm 2 F-2.2.5 Effective Area in Outlet

Height L = [l + M (assume S I win. plate)
area:
== (2.5 x 0.312) + 0.312 1.092 in.

A3 AR AI - A'2 or
1 455.2 .- 151.34 144,36 1 159.5 mm 2
L 2.5 x 0,312 0.780 in. Use L = 0.780 in.
Use a reinforced plate that is 6.35 mm thick (minimum
X 393.7 mm in diameter. Az 2 (B - 1(.) L = 2 x 0.064 x 0.780
0.100 in,2
Areil '" (393.7 219.1) x 6.35 1 lO8,9 mm 2
This must be multiplied by 35,000/46,000
Fillet welds (assuming two 6.35 mm welds each para. 831.4.1(f)].

(6.35 x 6.35) x 4 80.65 mm 2 Effective A'2 = 0.100 x 35,000/46,000 0.076 in.

Required area:
Total provided 1189.5 mm 2
See also Fig. F-6. A3 AR AI A'2
4.351 - 0.446 - 0,076 3,829 in.
F-2.2 Example 2
An NPS 16 outlet is welded to an NPS 24 header. The Approximate required thickness of reinforcement:
header material is API 5LX 46 with a 0.312-in. waiL The
3,829 ..;- (30 16) == 0.274 in.
outlet is API 5L Grade B Schedule 20 with a
0.312-in. wall. The pressure is 650 The Use Cl 0.312-in. plate minimum required length
831.4,2, the welds}:
encirclement
is LOa. The 3,829 0.312 == 12,272 in.
F == 0,60, E == 1.00,
and T == 1.00. For dimensions, see F-7. 16 + 12.272 == 29 in. (rounded to the next whole
number)
F-2.2.1 Header. Nominal wall thickness
Use a plate thClt is 29 in. long:
PD 650 x 24
2SFET Area == 0.312 x (29 16) == 4.056 in,"
= 0.283 in.
Two ~-in. welds to outlet:
Excess thickness in header wall:
x (0.25 x 0.25) x 2 = 0,063 in 2

H .. , "" 0.312 0.283 0.029 in,

Total A, provided 4.119 ill.
F-2.2.2 Outlet. Nominal wall thickness
The use of end welds is optional I-3}.

F·2.2M Example 2M
0,248 in. A DN 400 outlet is welded to an DN 600 header. The
header material is 317.2MPa with a 7.92 mm wall. The
Excess thickness in outlet wall: outlet is 241.3 MPa with a 7,92 mm wall.
The pressure is 4.48 MPa, The fabrication is in
B - II. 0,312 - 0.248 0,064 in. 1. By para. 841.4.2, the reinforcement

148
© 20 14 by the American Society or Mechanical
may be made oflhis material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 931.8·2014

Fig. F-7

~16in . ---J
I (406.4 mm) I
B = 0.312 in.
(7 .925 mm)
d = 15.376 in.
cb (390.55 mm)

AR

I
A1 : I
:I
--"--<o__- - *-
I

f-7-d=
- -LI -

15.376 in.---+-d = 15.376 in.~

:I
iI
I (390.55 mm) (390 .55 mm) I
1+ 30.752 in. .,.1
I (781.1 mm)

must be of the complete encirclement type. Using F-2.2.SM Effective Area in Outlet (14)
para. 841.1/ the joint efficiency is 1.00. The temperature
is 37 .8°C. Design factors F = 0.60/ E = 1.00/ and Height L = 21 h B + M (ilssume 7.94 mm plate)
T = 1.00. For dimensions, see Fig. F-7. = (2.5 x 7.92) + 7.94 = 27.75 mm

F-2.2.1M Header. Nominal wall thickness required:

or
PO 4.48 x 609.6
I = 2SFET = 2 x 317.16 x 0.60 x 1.00 x 1.00 L = 21/ 2H = 2.5 x 7.92 = 19.812 mm. Use L = 19.812 in.
= 7.178 mm
A 2 = 2 (B - 1/,) L = 2 x 1.635 x 19.812
Excess thickness in header willi:
= 64.80 mm 2
H- I = 7.925 - 7.178 = 0.747 mm
This must be multiplied by 241.3/317.2 [see
F-2.2.2M Outlet. Nominal wall thickness required: para. 831.4.1(f)].
4.48 x 406.4
1/, = 2 x 241.32 x 0.60 x 1.00 x 1.00 Effective A'2 = 64.80 x 241.3/317.2 = 49.30 mm 2
= 6.290 mm
Required area :
Excess thickness in outlet wall:
A, = AR - Al - A'2
B - 1/, = 7.925 - 6.290 = 1.635 mm
= 2803.5 - 291.56 - 49.30 = 2462.6 111m2

d = inside diilmeter of opening = 406.4 - 2 x 7.925

= 390.55 mm
Approximate required thickness of reinforcement:

F-2.2.3M Reinforcement Required 2462.6 7 (762 - 406.4) = 6.925 mm

AR = dl = 390.55 x 7.178 = 2803.5 mm 2

Use iI 7.92 mm plate minimum required length
F-2.2.4M Reinforcement Provided (neglecting welds) :

A I = (H - I) d = 0.747 x 390.55 = 291.56 mm 2 2462.6 7 7.92 = 310.75 mm

149
Copyright © 2014 by Ihe American Society or Mechanical Engineers. ~
No reproduction Illay be Illade or this material without wril1en conse nt or ASME. ~
 ASME B31.8·2014

406.4 310.75 = 736.6 mm (rounded to the next higher

whole number in customary
units, i.e., equiv"lent to 29 in.)

Use a plate that is 736.6 mm

Are" 7.92 x (736.6 -, 406.4) 2616.8 mm 2

Two 6.35 mm welds to outlet:

1/2 x (0.25 x 0.25) x 2 == 40.32 mm 2

The use of end welds is optional 1-3).

150
Copyright © 20]4 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of Ihis material without wrilien consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX G
TESTING OF WELDERS LIMITED TO WORK ON LINES
OPERATING AT HOOP STRESSES OF LESS THAN 20% OF THE
SPECIFIED MINIMUM YIELD STRENGTH 1

G-1 TEST PROCEDURES if) For the checking of welders who work
on small service lines only [NPS 2 (DN 50) or smaller
(a) An initial test shall qualify a welder for work.
in the following field test may be
the welder's work shall be checked either by
employed. This test should not be used as a substitute
requalification at l-yr intervals or by cutting out and
for the original qualifying test.
testing production work at least every 6 months.
Two welds made by the welder under test
(b) The test may be made on of any diameter
shall be taken from steel service line. Each shall
NPS]2 (DN 300) or smaller. The test weld shall be made
becut8 in. (200 mm) long with the weld IOGlted approxi-
with the pipe in a horizontal fixed position so that the
mately in the center. One shall have the ends
test weld includes at least one section of overhead
flattened and the entire joint subjected to the tensile
tion
test. Failure must be in the parent metal and
(c) The beveling, root
not adjacent to or in the weld metal to be
conform to the under which the The second shall be centered in the
welder is machine and bent to the contour
(d) The test weld shall be cut into four coupons and
a distance of 2 in. (50 mm) on each side of the weld.
to the root bend test. 1f as a result of this test, The to be must show no breaks or
a crack develops in the weld material or between the cracks removal from the bending machine.
weld and base metal more than Ys in. mm) long in When a tensile strength testing machine is not avail-
any this shall be cause for Cracks two bend test will be in lieu
on the corner of the testing of one tension and one test.
shall not considered. If not more than one coupon is Tests for Copper Joints. Personnel who are to work
rejected, the weld is to be considered on copper piping should pass the following test
(e) Welders who are to make welded service line con-
nections to mains shall be required to pass the following A or soldered copper bell joint should be made
tests satisfactorily: on any size of copper pipe used, with the axis of the
(1) Weld a service line connection fitting to a pipe stationary in the horizontal position. The so
section having the same diameter as a typical main. welded is to be sawed open longitudinally at the top of
weld shall be made in the same position as this type of the pipe (the being the point on the
weld is made in the field. circumstance ill time joint is The joint should
(2) The weld shall be tested attempting to break be apart for examination. The bell end of the
the fitting off the run pipe by any available means must be completely bonded. The spigot end of
(knocking it off). joint must evidence that the alloy has
A sample shall be rplt'rt,'o reached at least 75% of the total area of the telescoped
junction of the shows incomplete surfaces. At least 50% of the length at the top of the
fusion, joint must be joined.
(II) Records shall be kept of the original tests and all
1 See para. 823.1. tests conducted on the work of each welder.

151
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of AS ME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX H
FLATTENING TEST FOR PIPE 1

H·i TEST PROCEDURES (e) The test shall consist of a section of

between parallel plates until the opposite walls meet.
(a) The test shall be made on standard
For welded no opening in the weld shall take
pipe over NPS 2 (ON It
until the distance between the plates is Jess than
for double extra strong pipe.
fourths of the original outside diameter for buttwelded
and buttwelded the test
and two-thirds of the outside diameter for
section shall 4 in. to 6 in. (100 mm to 150 mm) in
and electric-resistance welded No
length, and the weld shall be located 45 from the
or breaks in the metal other than in the shall occur
line of direction of the force.
until the distance between the is less than three-
(c) For electric-resistance welded
fifths of the outside diameter buttwelded pipe, and
from each length of pipe shall be between
one-third of the outside diameter for lap-welded and
parallel with the weld at the point of maximum
electric-resistance welded A and B) For
bending until the opposite walls of the pipe meet. No
seamless A and B) no breaks or cracks in
opening in the weld shall take until the distance
the metal shall occur distance between the
between the is less than two-thirds of the original
is Jess than that shown below:
outside diameter of the pipe. No cracks or breaks in the
metal other than in the weld shall occur until the distance
between the plates is less than one-third of the original H=
outside diameter of the but in no case less than
five times the thickness the wall. Evidence of where
lamination or burnt material not during D actual outside diameter of in. in.
the entire process, and the weld shall not show (60.33 mm) nominal]
defects. e deformation unit (constant for a
(d) For seamless pipe the test section shall be not less steeL 0.09 for Grade A and 0.07
than in. (64 mm) in length.
H distance between flattening
I See porn. S17.L3(b). := nominal wall thickness of

152
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 AS ME B31.8-2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX I
END PREPARATIONS FOR BUTTWElDING

I-I EXPLANATORY NOTES treatment is provided full penetration and

bond is in See sketch of
1-1.1 General
1-5.
This Mandatory Appendix applies to end preparation (2) Where the nominal internal offset is
for buttwelding sections having thicknesses and in. mm) and there is no access to
unequal specified minimum yield I-I the pipe for the transition must be made a
through 1-4). taper cut on the end of the thicker section. See
(II) The sketches in 1-5 illustrate prepa- sketch (b) of 1-5. The taper angle shall be not greater
rations for joining ends by buttwelding for materi- than 30 deg nor less than 14
als having wall thicknesses and/or with (3) Where the nominal internal offset is more than
unequal minimum yield strength). in. (2.38 mm) but does not exceed one-holf the thinner
(b) The thickness of the sections to be joined beyond section, and there is access to the inside of the for
the area shall comply with the design welding, the tronsition be made with 0
this Code. weld oS shown in sketch of 1-5. The land on the
(c) When the minimum yield of thicker section must be to the offset plus the land
the sections to be joined are unequal, the deposited weld on abutting section.
metal shall have mechanical at least equal to (4) Where the nominal internal offset is more than
those of the section having one-half the thinner section and there is access to the
(d) The transition between ends of inside of the for the transition may be
may be made with 0 taper cut on the inside end of the thicker
or by means of a transition section as shown in sketch (b) of 1-5, or by a combina-
(e) Sharp notches or grooves at the edge of the weld tion weld to one-half the section and a
where it joins a slanted surface shall be <1voided. cut from that point as shown in sketch of
(f) For joining unequal thicknesses of equal 1-5.
minimum yield the rules given herein apply,
there is no minimum angle limit to the 1-1.3 Unequal External Diameters
(g) The maximum to, for purposes (II) Where the external offset does not exceed one-
shall not be than 1.51. half the thinner section, the transition may be made
as shown sketch (e) of 1-5,
1-1.2 Unequal Internal Diameters angle rise of the weld surface does not exceed 30
to <1t hoop stresses of less than and both bevel are properly fused.
20% of mlI1lmUm strength, if the nominal (b) Where there is on external offset one-
wall thicknesses of the adjoining ends do not vary more half the thinner section, that portion of the offset over
than Ya in. (3.2 mm), no treatment is necessary shall be as shown in sketch (f) of 1-5.
provided and bond is accom-
plished in welding. If the offset is greater than 1·1.4 Unequal Internal and External Diameters
Ya in. mm), the following paragraphs will apply. Where there is both an internal and an external
(b) For Hoop Stress Levels 20% or More of tile the joint design shall be a combination of sketches (<1)
MillimulJI Yield through (f) of 1-5, i.e., sketch (g). Particular attention
(1) If the nominal wall thickness of the adjoining must be paid to proper under these condi-
ends does not vary more than in. (2.38 mm), tions. See also 1-6 and 1-1 and I-1M.

153
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8·2014

Fig. 1·1 Welding Details for Openings Without Reinforcement Other Than That in
Header and Branch Walls

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) When a welding saddle is used, it shall be inserted over this type of connection,
(b) W, = but not less than ;,:, in. (6.35 mm).
(c) N '" in, (1.59 mm) min" ;;8in, (3,18 mm) max,. unless back welded or backing strip is used,

1-2 Welding Details for Openings With Localized-Type Reinforcement

Saddle Pad

W1 min. 38/8 • but not less than 1/4 in, (6,35 mm)
W 2 min. = M/2 • but not less than 1/4 in, (6,35 mm)
W3 min. = M, but not greater than H
N in. (1,59 mm) min,. unless back welded or backing strip is used

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) All welds to have equal leg dimensions, and a minimum throat = 0,707 x leg dimension.
(b) If M is thicker than H, the reinforcing member shall be tapered down to the header wall thickness,
(c) Provide hole in reinforcement to reveal leakage in buried welds and to provide venting during welding and heat treatment
!see para. 831.4.1(h)],

154
Copyright © 20! 4 by the American Society of Mechallical
reproduction may be made of this material without written COllsent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

Fig. 1-3 Welding Details for Openings With Complete Encirclement Types of Reinforcement

Optional weld

!I
_______ J," I
-1----- I
These longitudinal 'I
welds may be 1/
located anywhere II
around circumference If

",I
I'

Tee Tvpe Sleeve Type

(Note (1)1 [Note (2)]

Saddle and Sleeve Type Saddle Type

NOTES:
(1) Since fluid pressure is exerted on both sides of pipe metal under tee, the pipe metal does not provide reinforcement.
(2) Provide hole in reinforcement to reveal leakage in buried welds and to provide venting during welding and heat treatment
[see para, 831.4.1 (Il)J, Not required for tee type,

155
Copyright © 2014 by the American Societ)' of Mechanical Engineers,
Illay be made of this material without writ1en consent of ASME,
 ASME 831.8-2014

fig. 1-3.1 Pressurized Hot Tap Tee Reinforcing Sleeve End fillet Weld Design

End face = 1.4 limes calculated hoop

thickness of sleeve (max.), if required
Chamfer/taper 45 deg min. (approx.)

Pressurized hot tapping tee Effective weld throat O.7tto 1.0t

reinforcing sleeve

Pipe wall thickness =t

Fillet weld leg = 1.0t + gap to 1.4t + gap

156
Copyright © 2014 by lhe American of Mechanical
may be made of this material wilhout wriltel1 consent of ASME.
 1-4 Combinations of Pipe End

30 deg + 5 deg 10 deg ±1 deg

-0 -E E
E E
m
.....
ci
+1 +1
E E
E E
m
l.!')
m
i.C)

er:;;:
(1)
- V
~"<

'" -
0..::;-
(1) (1) Optional end preparation
Standard end preparation
of pipe and butt welding
o >-
-.,- of pipe fittings 7/p, in. and
pipe and fittings
=-~
;;n< :::. thinner
over 7/p,-in. (22.23 mm) thickness
-::s '"'" l>
Vl

'" "
(C
(a) fbI (e) s:
m
:::. .... txl
Standard End Preparations
'" ~ '"
'"'
"" ., 00
::;'0
Ol
..:.,
o ....,
:::'5:
-0
N
;:::-'0
01
W .,.::;
~
<.
(l;
n ,....
~. 5r M
(l;
~
:::;
(:; S +; ""'"
u
E:.. + 5 deg
30 deg 0 deg 1 deg
deg
60 deg

~,\,,'-.l.'Oao.

fd) {e)

(f)
 ASME B31.8-2014

Fig. 1-5 Acceptable Design for Unequal Wall Thickness

in.(2.38 mm) max.

lal

leI

Internal Offset

(e) (f)
External Offset

30 deg, max.
14 deg, min.
[Note (1)1(1:4) _,____"l_ _ __

(9) Combination OHset

NOTE:
(1) No minimum when materials joined have equal specified minimum yield strengths.

158
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engincers.
he made of this material withon! written consent of AS ME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Fig. 1·6 Recommended Attachment Details of Flanges

(a) Lap Joint Flange (h) Butt Welding Flange

O.707t
(or t if preferred)
1/2 in.(12.7 mm)max.

(e) Front and Back Weld td) Face and Back Weld

(e) Socket Welding Only (f) Socket Welding Flange

Theoretical throat

Size of weld
(g) Convex Fillet Weld
(h) Concave Fillat Weld

159
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechfillical Engineers.
reprodllction be made of til is material wilhout written consent of ASME,
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table 1·1 lightweight Flanges

~.--~--.~-.~---.------.-----.~-----~~---.--.---~-~--.-.-- .. ---.---.-----.--------.---
Inside Outside
Nominal Outside Diameter, length Diameter Number Diameter Diameter Approx. Weight
Pipe Diameter, Thickness, B of Hub, of Hub, of and length of Bolt Each,
Size A T [Note (1)] L E Bolts of Bolts Circle Ib
---------.----------- .. --.--- ---.--.--- .. .-~---------~~--.---------.--~.-~.---- ---
..

6 11 6.72 8 74 X 13
8 8,72 8 1" x 18
10 16 10.88 12 12 7/8 x 26
12 19 12.88 14% 12 'Is x 17 42

14 21 74 14.14 12 1 x 181" 44
16 lit, 16.16 18 16 1 x 21:1. 58
18 25 74 18.18 19}8 16 1 x 3 2274 59
20 lit. 20.20 22 20 x 3 25 69

22 29'l, 22.22 1J/, 24Yr, 20 1~. x 76

24 32 24.25 174 2618 20 1:1. x 113
26 34~, 26.25 1'l, 28'/, 24 1~, x 126
28 36'/;, 28.25 11,. 30/, 28 1:1. x 34 139

)0 38 3ft. 1 30.25 32/1 28 1 Yr, x 36 152

32 4174 1/B )2.25 3474 28 1'/, x 4 38 1/, 206
34 4374 l/a 34.25 36 3ft. 32 I'/;, x 4 40;;, 217
36 46 l/s 38 3ft. 32 1/2 x4 421,. 234

38 48)1. l'la 32 x4 45:1. 264

40 5074 l/s 43 36 x4 47 'ft. 280
42 53 11ft. 45 36 491', 328
44 1~. 47 40 5174 349

46 49 40 x 363
48 51 44 x 56 426
50 53 44 x 58Yr, 451
52 64 55 44 x 60'12 477

54 66;;, 2/, 57 44 x 62 74 504

60 73 2% 63 52 x 5 69'ft. 643
66 iY. 69 52 x 5 76 754
72 21,. 75 60 x 5 8212 846

GENERAL NOTES;
(a) Lightweight flanges afe nat-faced and designed for use with full-face gasket or asbestos sheet gasket extending to the bolt holes.
(b) Maximum pressure for lightweight nanges is 25 psi; drilling is the same as Class 125 standard.
(c) This Table encompasses forged and rolled steel: for further information, refer to ASTM A10S.
(d) All dimensions in this Table are in inches, unless othelwise noted.
NOTE:
(1) For nominal pipe sizes 36 through 72, the inside diameter, 8, shall be as specified by the purchaser.

160
Copyright © 2014 by the American Sociely of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without wrinen consent of AS ME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table 1·1M Lightweight (Metric Dimensions)

i-oI------- E--------t..,

..- - - - . - -..
... --~ .. ---- .

Inside Outside
Nominal Outside Diameter, length Diameter Number Diameter Diameter Approx. Weight
Pipe Diameter, Thickness, B of Hub, of Hub, of and length of Bolt Each,
Size A r [Note (1)] L E Bolts of Bolts Clrde kg

DN 150 279.4 14.29 170.69 31.75 192.09 8 19.05 x 57.15 241.3 5.9
DN 200 342.9 14.29 221.49 31.75 246,06 8 19,05 x 57.15 298.5 8,2
DN 250 406.4 17.46 276.35 31.75 304.80 12 22.23 x 63,50 362.0 11.8
DN 300 482.6 17.46 327.15 31.75 365.13 12 22.23 x 63.50 431.8 19.1

DN 350 533.4 19.05 359.16 31.75 400.05 12 25.40 x 69.85 476.3 20.0
ON 400 596.9 19.05 410.46 31.75 457.20 16 25.40 x 69.85 539.8 26.3
ON 450 635.0 19,05 461.77 31.75 504,83 16 28,58 x 76.20 577.9 26.8
ON 500 698.5 19,05 513.08 31.75 558.80 20 28.58 x 76.20 635.0 31.3

DN 550 749.3 25.40 564.39 44.45 615.95 20 31. 75 x 88.90 692.2 34.5
DN 600 812.8 25.40 615.95 44,45 663,58 20 31. 75 x 88,90 749.3 51.3
DN 650 870,0 25.40 666.75 44,45 723,90 24 31.75 x 88,90 806.5 57.2
DN 700 927.1 25.40 717.55 44.45 774,70 28 31.75 x 88.90 863.6 63.0

DN 750 984.3 25.40 768.35 44.45 825,50 28 31.75 x 88.90 914.4 68.9
DN 800 1 060,5 28.58 819,15 44.45 882,65 28 38.10 x 101,60 977.9 93.4
DN 850 1111.3 28.58 869.95 44.45 933.45 32 38.10 x 101.60 1 028.7 98.4
DN 900 1 168.4 28.58 44.45 984,25 32 38,10 x 101.60 1 085,9 106.1

DN 950 1 238.3 28.58 44.45 1 035.05 32 38,10 x 101.60 1 149,4 119.7

DN 1000 1 289.1 28.58 44.45 1 092.20 36 38,10 x 101.60 1 200,2 127.0
ON 1050 1 346.2 31.75 44.45 1 143.00 36 38.10 x 107,95 1 257.3 148.8
ON 1100 1 403.4 31.75 57.15 1 193.80 40 38.10 x 107.95 1 314,5 158.3

ON 1150 1 454.2 31.75 57.15 1 244.60 40 38.10 x 107.95 1 365.3 164.7

DN 1200 1511.3 34.93 63.50 1 295.40 44 38,10 x 114.30 1 422.4 193.2
DN 1250 1 568.5 34.93 63,50 1 346.20 44 44,45 x 120.65 1 479.6 204.6
DN 1300 1 625.6 34.93 63.50 1 397.00 44 44.45 x 120.65 1 536.7 216.4

DN 1350 1 682.8 34.93 63,50 1 447.80 44 44.45 x 120.65 1 593.9 228,6

DN 1500 1 854.2 38.10 69.85 1 600.20 52 <\4.45 x 127.00 1 759.0 291.7
DN 1650 2032.0 38.10 69.85 1 752.60 52 44.45 x 127,00 1 930,4 342.0
DN 1800 2 197,1 38.10 69.85 1 905.00 60 44.45 x 127,00 2095.5 383.7
.----~.---~-.----.------- ..- . -.. ---~-----.- ----~---~------.-.-----.------------

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) Lightweight flanges are flat· faced and designed for use with full·face gasket or asbestos sheet gasket extending to the bolt holes.
(b) Maximum pressure for lightweight flanges is 172 kPa; drilling is the same as Class 125 standard.
(e) This Table encompasses forged and rolled steel; for further information, refer to ASTM Al05,
(d) All dimensions in this Table are in millimeters, unless otherwise noted.
NOTE:
(1) For nominal pipe sizes DN 900 through DN 1800, the inside diameter, B. shall be as specified by the purchaser.

161
'"",;n,,,ht © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
be made of this lllaterial without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX J
COMMONLY USED CONVERSION FACTORS 1

Table J-1 Commonly Used Conversion Factors

Quantity Conversion Factor

Plane angle deg to rad 1.745329£-02

Length in. to m 2.54E-02 [Note (l)J

ft to m 3.048E-01 [Note (1)]
mile to m 1.609 344E+03 [Note (1)j

Area in. 2 to m2 6.451 600E-04 [Note (1)1

ft2 to m 2 9.290 304E-02 [Note (1)]

Volume It) to m J 2.831 685E-02

U.s_ gal 10 m J 3.785412E-03
in. J 10 m J 1.638 706E-05
oz (fluid, U.s.) to m J 2.957353E-05
liter to m J 1.000000E-03

Velocity ft/min to m/s 5.08E-03 [Note (1)]

ft/sec to m/s 3.048E-01 [Note (1)]
km/h to m/s 2.777 778£-01
mi/hr to m/s 4MO 4E-01 [Note (l)J
mi/hr to km/h 1.609 344E+00 [Note (1)J

Mass oz (avoir) 10 kg 2.834 952E-02

Ib (avoir) to kg 4.535924E-01
slug to kg U59390E+01

Acceleration to m/s2 3.048E-01 [Note (1)]

std. gray. to m/s 2 9.806 65£+00 [Note (1)]

force kgf to N 9.806 65E+00 [Note (1))

Ibf to N 4.448 222E+00
poundal to N 1.382 550E-01

Bending, torque kgf·m to N·m 9.806 65E+00 [Note (1))

Ibf-in, to N,m 1.129848£-01
Ibf.ft 10 N·m 1.355818E+00

Pressure [Note (1)] psi to bar 6.894 757E-02

Pi! to bar 1.000E-05
kPa to bar 1.000E-02

1 Extracted partially from ASME 51-1.

162
Copyright © 2014 by the Amcrican Socicty ofMechunical Engineers,
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table )-1 Commonly Used Conversion Factors (Cont'd)

Quantity Conversion Factor

Stress [Note (1l! psi to MPa 6.89" 757E-03

kips/in. 1 to MPa 6.89" 757E+00
N/mml to MPa 1.000£+00

Energy. work Btu (In to J 1.055 056E+03

Calorie on to J 4_186 8E+00 {Note (11J
Ibf-ft to I 1.355818E+00

Power hp (550 ft Ibf/sec) to W 7.456999E+02

Temperature [Note (1)] °C to K IK Ie + 273.15

of to K IK (tf+ 459.67)/1.8
OF to °C Ie (IF 32)/1.8

Temperature °C to K 1.0E+00 [Note (1)]

interval OF to K or °C 5.555 556E-Ol

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) For other commonly used conversion factors. refer to IEEE/ASTM SilO.
(b) The factors are written as a number greater than 1 and less than 10 with six or fewer decimal
places. The number is followed by the letter E (for exponent), a plus or minus symbol, and two dig-
its that indicate the power of 10 by which the number must be multiplied to obtain the correct
value. For example,
1.745 329E-02 is 1.745 329 x 10- 2 or 0.017 45329
NOTE:
(1) Relationships are exact in terms of the base units.

163
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
may be made of this material wit bout wriNen consent of ASM E.
 ASME B31.S-2014

Table J-2 list of SI Units for Use With 831.8 Code

Other Units or
Quantity Unit [Note (1)] Symbol limitations
-------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Space and Time

plane angle radian rad degree (decimalized)

solid angle steradian Sf
length meter m nautical mile (navigalion only)
area square meter m"
volume cubic meter mJ liter (L) for liquid only
(limit use to land ml;
cc shall not be used)
time second minute (min), hour (h), day
(d), week, and year
angular velocity radian per second rad/s
velocity radian per second rad/s kilometer per hom (km/h) for
vehicle speed, knot for navi-
gation only

Periodic and Related

Phenomena

frequency hertz Hz (hertz = cycle per second)

rotational speed radian per second rad/s revolutions per second (r/s),
revolutions per minute
(r/min)

Mechanics

mass kilogram
density kilogram per cubic meter
momentum kilogram·meter per second
moment of momentum kilogram-square meter per
second
angular momentum kilogram-square meter per
second
acceleration meter per second squared mis'
moment of inertia kilogram·square meier
force newton
moment of force (torque) newton-meter
pressure bar (pascal newton per square
meter)
stress megapascal MPa
viscosity (dynamic) pascal·second Pa-s
viscosity (kinematic) square meter per second
surface tension newton per meter N/m
energy, work joule J kilowatt-hour (kW-h)
power watt W
impact strength joule J

164
Copyright © 2014 by the American of Mechanical
may be made of this material without IVril1en consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

Table )-2 List of 51 Units for Use With 831.8 Code (Cont'd)
Other Units or
Quantity Unit [Note (l)J Symbol limitations

Heat

temperature: thermo- kelvin K degree Celsius (OC)

dynamic [Note (2)]
temperature: other than degree Celsius kelvin (K)
thermodynamic
[Note (2)]
linear expansion meIer per meter-kelvin
coefficient
quantity of heat joule )
heat flow rate watt W
density of heat flow rate wall per meter squared W/m2
thermal conductivity watt per meter-kelvin W/(m,K) W/(m-OC)
coefficient of heat watt per meter-squared-kelvin Wj(m 2 ,K) W/(m 2,OC)
transfer
heat capacity joule per kelvin JlK lIa C
specific heat capacity joule per kilogram-kelvin I/(kg'K) )/(kg·oC)
specific energy joule per kilogram J/kg
specific enthalpy kilojoule per kilogram kllkg
specific entropy kilojoule per kelvin-kilogram kll(K·kg)
heat rate kilojoule per kilowatt second kJ/(kW·s)

Electricity and Magnetism

electric current ampere A

electric charge coulomb C
volume density of charge coulomb per meter cubed C/m)
surface density of charge coulomb per meter squared C/m2
electric field of strength volt per meIer Vim
electric potential volt V
capacitance farad
current density ampere per meter squared A/m 2
magnetic field strength ampere per meter Aim
magnetic Flux density tesla T
magnetic flux weber Wb
self-inductance henry H
permeability henry per meter H/m
magnetization ampere per meter Aim

GENERAL NOTES:
(a) For other commonly used conversion factors, refer to IEEE/ASTM SilO,
(b) The factors are written as a number greater than 1 and less than 10 with six or fewer decimal places, The number is followed by the
letter E (for exponent), a plus or minus symbol, and two digits that indicate the power of 10 by which the number must be multiplied
to obtain the correct value. For example,
1.745 329E-02 is 1.745329 x 10- 2 or 0.01745329
(c) Relationships are exact in terms of the base units,
NOTES:
(1) Conversion factors between SI and U.s. Customary units are given in IEEE/ASTM SilO,
(2) Preferred use lor temperature and temperature interval is degrees Celsius (OC). except for thermodynamic and cryogenic work where kel-
vins may be more suitable. For temperature interval, 1 K 1°C exactly.

165
Copyright © 2Q 14 by the American of Mechallical Engineers,
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX K
CRITERIA FOR CATHODIC PROTECTION 1
Reprinted with permission from the National Association of Corrosion Engineers' NACE Standard RP0169. Section 6.
Asterisk (*) denotes word change from NACE text.

6.1 Introduction 6.3.1.2 A minimum negative (cathodic)

6.1.1 The purpose of this Mandatory Appendix* shift of 300 m V, by the application of
is to list criteria for cathodic protection which, when tive current. The shift is meilsured between the
complied with either separately or collectively, will indi- structure surface and a satumted copper-copper sulfate
cate that cathodic of a metallic sys- reference electrode the electrolyte. This crite-
IprtrCllvt'p hCls been achieved. rion of voltage shift to structures not in contact
with dissimilar
6.2 General
6.2.1 The objective of using cathodic is 6.3.1.3 A minimum (cathodic)
to control the corrosion of metallic surfaces in contact tion shift of 100 m V measured between struc-
with ture and 11 saturated copper-copper sulfate
6.2.2 The selection of a pClrticular criterion for reference electrode contacting the electrolyte. This polar-
achieving the objective in para. 6.2.1 in part, ization shift is to be determined by interrupting
upon with similClf structures ilnd the current and measuring the polarization
environments wherein the criterion has been used decay. When the current is initially
immedillte shift will occur. The
after the immediate shift, shall be used as the
6.2.3 The criteria in Section 6.3 have been devel- from which to measure polarization
through laboriltory experiment or empirically
by evaluilting diltil obtilined from success- 6.3.1.4 A voltage at least
fully operilted cathodic protection It is not as negative (cathodic) as that originally established ilt
intended that the operilting the beginning of the Tafel of the curve.
criteriil if it Ciln be This voltage shall be measured
the control of corrosion has been between the structure and a saturated copper-
6.2.4 Voltage measurements on are to copper sulfate reference electrode contacting the electro-
be made with the reference electrode on the lyte at the same location where voltage measurements
surface as close as feilsible to the structure were taken to obtain the
investigated. Consideration shall be 6.3.1.5 A net ."~,,~~,, current from the electro-
to (IR) other than those across the struc- Iyte into the structure surfilce ilS measured by an earth
ture-electrolyte the of dissimilar current technique at current dis-
metals, and the influence of structures for valid
(anodic) points of the structure.
of voltage measurements,*
6.2.5 No one criterion for evaluating the effective- 6.3.2 Aluminum Structures
ness of cathodic protection has proven to be satisfactory 6.3.2.1 A minimum negative (cathodic) voltage
for all conditions. Often a combination of criter!il is shift of 150 m V, by the application of
needed for 11 structure. tive current. The shift is mellsured between the
6.3 Criteria structure surfilce and a silturated sulfate
6.3.1 Steel and Cast Iron Structures reference electrode the
6.3.1.1 (cathodic) voltage of at lellst cautionary notes in paras. 6.3.2.3 and 6.3.2.4.
0.85 V 115 the structure surface and 6.3.2.2 A minimum (cathodic)
a saturated copper-copper sulfate reference electrode lion voltage shift of 100 mV, measured between
the electrolyte, Determination of this voltage ture surface and a sa tura ted copper-copper sulfa te
is to be mllde with the protective current reference the electrolyte. This polar-
I The criteri" for cathod ic oro,t""lt;o" traJlsmission ization shift is to be determined by interrupting
pipelines ilre in the protective current and polarization decay.

166
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

When the current is initially ,10 immediate reference electrode contacting the equal to
voltage shift will occur. The reading after the that for the most anodic metal should be main-
immediate shift shall be used as base from structures are involved that could
which to measure polarization See be paras. 6.3.2.3 and
notes in paras. 6.3.2.3 and 6.3.2.4. 6.3.2.4), they should be electrically isolated with insulat-
or the
6.3.2.3 Excessive Voltages. Notwithstanding the
alternative minimum criteria in para. 6.3.2.1 and
6.4 Alternative Reference Electrodes
para. 6.3.2.2, if cathodically at volt-
ages in excess of 1.20 V measured between the structure 6.4.1 Other standard reference electrodes may be
surface and a saturated copper-copper sulfate reference substituted for the saturated sulfate ref-
electrode the and erence electrodes. Two used electrodes are
for the listed below with their vol equivalent to
structure-electrolyte boundary, may suffer corrosion -0.85 V referred to saturated copper-copper sulfate ref-
from the buildup of alkali on the metal surface. erence electrode:
A voltage in excess of 1.20 V should not be used unless
previous test results indicate no appreciable corrosion 6.4.1.1 Saturated KCI calomel reference elec-
will occur in the environment. trode: -0.78 V.

6.3.2.4 Alkaline Soil Conditions. Since aluminum 6.4.1.2 Silver-silver chloride reference electrode
may suffer from corrosion under high conditions used in sea water: -0.80 V.
and since application of cathodic protection tends to
6.4.2 In addition to these standard reference elec-
increase the at the metal careful
trodes, an alternative metallic material or structure may
tion or testing should be made before
be used in of the saturated sulfate
protection to stop pitting attack on aluminum structures
reference if the stability of its ole.,."',,'"
in environments with a natural pH in excess of 8.0.
tial is assured and if its voltage equivalent to a
6.3.3 Copper Structures saturated copper-copper sulfate reference electrode is
6.3.3.1 A minimum established.
tion shift of 100 mV measured between the struc-
6.5 Special Considerations
ture su and saturated copper-copper sulfate
reference electrode in the electrolyte. This polarization 6.5.1 casesl such as currents and
voltage shift is to be determined interrupting the electrical gradients, exist which require the use of
protective current and the polarization decay. criteria different from listed above. Measurements
When the current is immediate of current loss and gain on the structure and current
shift will occur. The voltage after the in the electrolyte have been useful in such cases.
immediate shift shall be used as the base from
which to measure polarization decay. 6.5.2 Abnormal conditions sometimes exist where
protection is ineffective or only partially effective. Such
6.3.4 Dissimilar Metal Structure conditions may include elevated res, dis-
6.3.4.1 A (cathodic) between all bonded coatings, shielding, bacterial a and
structure surfaces and a saturated copper-copper sulfate unusual contaminants in the electrolyte.

167
2014 by tile American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material wilhout written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX l
DETERMINATION OF REMAINING STRENGTH OF
CORRODED PIPE

For steel pipelines, the remaining strength of corroded

may be determined in accordance with
B31G, Manual for the Remaining
of Corroded

168
Copyrigh! © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this mAterial without written consent
 ASME B31,8·2014

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX M
GAS LEAKAGE CONTROL CRITERIA1

M·l SCOPE funnel: a subsurface enough for a per-

son to enter and in accumulate.
This Nonmandatory Appendix
detection, grading, and control of gas
M-3 LEAKAGE SURVEY AND TEST METHODS
M·2 DEfiNITIONS (APPLICABLE TO THIS (11) The following surveys and test meth-
APPENDIX ONLy) ods may be as applicable, or in combi-
unf hole: hole that is made in the soil or paving for the nation, in with written
purpose of the subsurface (1) surface gas detection survey
a combustible gas indicator (CGI). (2) subsurface gas detector survey (including bar
hole
uuilding: any structure that is normally or occasionally
(3) vegetation survey
entered by humans for business, or other
purposes, and in which gas could accumulate. (4) pressure test
(5) bubble test
combusfiule indicator (eGl): a device of
(6) ultrasonic leakage test
measuring gas concentrations of the
Other survey and test methods may be employed if
they are deemed appropriate and are conducted in
confined space: any subsurface structure, such as vaults, accordance with that have been tested and
catch basins, or manholes, of sufficient size to accommo- proven to be at least equal to the methods listed in this
date a person, and in which gas could accumulate, section,
fo/lowup inspectioll: an inspection performed after a (b) Gas Detection
repair has been to determine the effectiveness (1) Definition. This survey is a continuous sam·
of the pling of the at or near ground level for
gas associllied slIus/mc/llre: a device or facility utilized by buried gas facilities and adjacent to aboveground gas
a gas company such as a valve box, vault, test box, or facilities with a gas detector of
vented casing which is not intended for storing, a concentration of 50 ppm
transmitting, or gas, point.
(2) Procedllre, Equipment used to perform these
LEL: the lower limit of the gas being be portable or mobile. For buried piping,
transported, the shall take place, where prac·
prampl aclioll: consists of dispatching at no more than 2 in. mm) above the
without for evaluating and, where necessary, abat· surface. In areas where the piping is under
ing the or probable hazard, shall also be at curb line(s), available ground
deviation on a CGI or catch basins, sewer,
powel~ fire and traffic
instrument, in LEL Where the reading is in
an unvented confined space, consideration should be signal boxes, or cracks in the or sidewalk), or
given to the rate of dissipation when the space is venti· other interfaces where the of gas is likely to
lated and the rate of accumulation when the space is occur, shall be adjacent to the exposed piping.
resealed. (3) Utilization. The use of this survey method may
be limited by adverse conditions (such as excessive
small slibS/fllctllres (allier Ihnll associated subs! rllc/llres): wind, excessive soil moisture, or surface sealing by ice
any subsurface structures are of insufficient size to
or water),
accommodate a person, such as and electrical
The survey shall be conducted at slow enough
ducts and conduit or valve and meter
to allow an sample to be continuously obtained
boxes, and in which gas could accumulate or
of equipment intakes over the most logical
consideration to the location of
I See pi'lra. 852,2,

169
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
be made of this material withollt written consent of ASM E,
 ASME B31.8-2014

(c) Sllbslllface Gas Deteetioll Survey is not to indicate the presence of

(1) Definition. This survey is a sampling of the sub-
surface with a combustible gas indicator (e) Pressure Drop Test
(eGl) or other device capable of 0.5% gas in (1) Definilioll. A test todetermineifanisolated seg-
air at the sample point. ment of pipeline loses pressure due to r"'''''''.F;e.
(2) Procedure. The survey shall be conducted by (2) Procedllre. Facilities selected for pressure drop
performing tests with a eGI in a series of available open- tests shall first be isolated and then tested. The follOWing
(confined spaces and small and/or criteria shall be considered in determining test
bar holes over, or adjacent to, the gas facility. The location
of the gas facility and its proximity to buildings and (-a) Test Pressure. A test conducted on
other structures shall be considered in the spacing of facilities for the purpose
the points. points shaH be as close as be performed at a pressure at least equal to the operating
possible to the main or and never farther than pressure.
15 ft m) laterally from the facility. Along the route
(-b) Test MediuIII, The test medium used must
of the main or sampling points shall be
comply with the requirements of para. 841.3.
at twice the distance between the pipeline and the near-
(-c) Test Dllmlioll. The duration of the test shall
est bu.i1ding wall, or at 30 ft (9.1 m), whichever is
but in no case need the be less than 10 ft (3.0 m). be of sufficient length to detect The following
The shall points adja- shall be considered in the determina tion of the duration:
cent to service street intersections, and known (-1) volume under test
branch connections as well as points over or (-2) time red for the test medium to
to buried service lines at building wall. become k'~nn,Clr",h stabilized
(3) Utilization (-3) sensitivity of the test instrument
(-a) Good judgment shall be used to determine (3) Utilization. Pressure tests shall be used
when available (such as manholes, vaults, or only to establish the presence or of a leak on a
valve boxes) are sufficient to provide an adequate survey. specifically isolated segmentof a Normally, this
When necessary, additional points (bar holes) type of test will not provide a leak location; ,,,o",, ..,,ro
shall be made. facilities on which leakage is indicated may
(-b) points shall be of sufficient depth ther evaluation another detection method so that the
within the subsurface or substructure leak may be located, evaluated, and
Bllbble Leakage Test
(d) Vegetatioll Survey (1) Definition. The application of a soapy water or
(1) Defillilioll. This survey uses visual observations other bubble-forming solutions on exposed piping to
to detect abnormal or unusual indications in determine the existence of a leak.
(2) Procedure. All visual indications shall be evalu- (2) Procedure. The piping shall be
ated using a combustible gas indicator (eGI). Personnel reasonably cleaned and completely coated with the solu-
performing these surveys shall have good all-around tion. Leaks are indicated by the presence of bubbles.
visibility of the area being surveyed, and their of The solution shall not be used on
travel shall be determined taking into consideration unless it has been determined by or test
the following: that the piping is resistant to direct contact
(-fl) layout with the solution.
(-b) amount and type of vegetation (3) Ulilizalion, This test method may be used for
(-c) visibili ty condi tions (such as the following:
reflected light, distortions, terrain, or obstructions) (-n) testing aboveground portions of a
(3) Utilizatioll system (such as meter set assemblies or exposed piping
(-a) This survey method shall be limited to areas or bridge
where adequate growth is firmly established. (-b) a tie-in joint or leak that is not
(-b) This survey shall not be conducted under the included in a pressure test
following conditions: Ultrasonic Leakage Tesl
(-1) soil moisture content abnormally high (1) Definition. The of exposed piping facili-
(-2) vegetation dormant ties with an instrument capable of the ultra-
(-3) in an accelerated growth sonic energy generated by escaping gas. The instrument
period, such as in used shall be suitable for the pressure involved.
(-c) Other acceptable survey methods shall be (2) Procedure. In the testing of a gas facility by this
used for locations within a survey area where method, the following shall be considered:

170
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made oflhis material wilhout wril1en consent or ASME.
 ASME 831.8·2014

Table M-4-1 Leak Detection Instruments: Type and General Usage

Instrument lower level Upper level

PPM PPM Sampling Sample flow

Surface Survey Subsurface Survey [Note (1)] % lEt % Gas [Note (1)] % lEl % Gas Method Rate
.~- .. --~-.-.~-~~-.-- .. -~.-

Catalytic type 5,000 10 50,000 100 5 [Note (2)) Hand aspirated

(hotwire % LEl)

Thermal conductivity 25,000 50 2.5 100 Hand aspirated

(% gas)
Amplified thermal 50 25 [Note (2)} Pump 0.8 gal/min
conductivity (3 l/min)
Infrared detector 1,000 2 0.1 Pump 0.5-1.3 gal/min
(2-5 L/min)
Hydrogen flame [Note (3)J 1 10,000 2010 1 10 5 Pump 0.5-1.3 gal/min
ionization detector to 100 (2-5 L!min)
50,000

GENERAL NOTE: The PPM, percent LEL, and percent gas values shown are for methane concentrations. Where other gases (such as liquefied
petroleum gas or manufactured gas) are involved, appropriate adjustment shall be made to be commensurate with the criteria of these
procedures.
NOTES:
(1) PPM = parts per million.
(2) When the maximum concentration detectable is exceeded, the needle of the instrument meter wi!! drop to zero or below.
(3) Upper sensitivity level varies with different models.

(-a) Line Pressllre. As the line pressure incre(lses, (b) Maintenance of fns/nlll1ellls. Each instrument uti-
the m(lgnitude of the ultr(lsonic energy a lized for leak detection and evaluation shall be
le(lk incre(lses. in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
(-b) Locatioll Facilify. ts near or sur- operating instructions and
rounding a f(lcility being tested m(lY reflect or (lttenU(lte (1) shall be "checked" while in use to
the ultrasonic making it difficult to ensure that the voltage are
detect or pinpoint available
(-c) Leak Frequency. A number of le(lks in a (2) shall be tested daily or prior to use to ensure
area can create a high ultrasonic background proper operation, and to determine that the sampling
may reduce the detection of this type of test. system is free of and tha t the filters are not
(-d) of Facility. Pneumatic and Q'a;;-oloer'<HE!d obstructing the sample
ap,wr."'" ultrasonic energy. The and (3) flame ionization (HFI)
amount of this of equipment sh(lll be known to be at each and a
determine if the ultrasonic b(lckground is too survey
Personnel conducting this test sh(lll SC(ln the entire (c) Calibration of IlIstmlllents. Each instrument uti-
area to elimin(lte the tracking of reflected indications. lized for leak detection and evaluation shall becalibrated
Ultr(lsonic indications of Je(lkage shall be verified in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
(lnd / or pinpointed by one of the other survey calibration instructions
or test methods. (1) after any or replacement of
(3) Utilization. The ultrasonic test may be used for (2) on a giving consideration to
the testing of exposed piping however, if the and usage of the instrument involved. HFI
ultrasonic background level a full-scale meter and CGI instruments shall be checked for cali-
when the is set at midrange, the facility bration at least once each month while in use.
shall be tested by some other survey method. (3) at any time it is that the instrument's
calibration has

M·4 TYPICALLY AVAILABLE INSTRUMENTS FOR M-5 LEAKAGE CLASSIFICATION AND ACTION
THE DETECTION OF GAS CRITERIA
(a) Type and Gmeral A avail- M-S.l General
able instruments and their type of usage is shown in The following establishes a procedure by which leak-
Table M-4-1. age indications of flammable gas can be graded and

171
Copyright © 2014 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
reproduction be made of this material without writ1en consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

controlled. When evaluating any gas leak indication, the (c) Identify foreign facilities in the area of search. Look
step is to determine the of the for evidence of recent construction activities that could
area, When this to a building have contributed to the Gas may also
wall, the investigation shall continue into the building. and vent a trench for other facilities.
(d) Place spaced bar or test holes over the
M-S.2 leak Grades su:'P€'ctE!d leaking gas line and trace the g"s to its source
Based on an evaluation of the location and/or magni- identifying the test holes with the
tude of a leak, one of the following leak shall be All bar holes sh,,11 be of depth diameter and
the leak repair priority: down to the pipe depth where necessary to obtain con-
(11) Grade '1 is a leak that an sistent and worthwhile All CGI shall
hazard to persons or property and be t"ken at an depth. Only the highest sustained
immediate or continuous action until the condi- readings shall be utilized.
tions are no haz"rdous. (e) readings are found frequently in more than
(b) Grade 2 is a leak that is one bar and addition"l techniques are
hazardous at the time of detection necessary to determine which reading is closest to the
uled repair based on probable future hazard, prob"ble source. Many of the bar hole will
(c) Grade 3 is a leak that is nonhazardous at the time normally decline over a period of time, but it may be
of detection and can be reasonably to remain desirable to excess gas from the underground
nonhazardous, locations to hasten this process. Evaluation methods
shall be used with caution to avoid the distorting of the
M-S.3 leak Classification and Action Criteria venting
Criteria for leak classification and if) Once the underground has been identified,
provided in Tables M-5.3-1, lVl-J,J-L. additional holes and holes shall be probed to
examples of leak conditions bracket the area more closely. For example, test holes
""conton as guidelines and are not exclusive, The judg- may be 6 ft (1.8 m) apart initially. The 6-ft (l.8-m)
ment of the operating company at the scene between the two highest test holes may then be
is of primary importance in determining the with additional test holes with as close
to a leak, as 12 in. (300 mm)
Additional tests include taking CGI at
M-S.4 Reevaluation of a leak
the top of " bar hole or a manometer or bubble-
When a leak is to be reevaluated Action Criteria forming solution to determine which b"r hole has the
in Tables M-5.3-2 and M-5.3-3), it shall be classified "riO",.."" positive flow. Other indications are dust parti-

the same criteria as when the leak was first discovered, cles blowing from the bar the sound of g"s coming
from the bar hole, or the feel of gas flow on a sensitive
skin surface, On occasion, sunlight defraction can be
M-6 PINPOINTING
observed ilS the gas vents to the
M-6.1 Scope (11) When gas is found in an underground conduit,
Pinpointing is" systematic process of " tests at available may be used to isolate the
detected gas leak to its source. Use of the following source in addition to the techniques previously men-
as appropriate shall prevent unnecessary tioned, Many times the leak is found "t the intersection
excavation, which is more time consuming than pin- of the conduit and a gas line, and particular
pointing a leak. attention be to these locations.
(i) When the of the CGI readings has stabi-
M-6.2 Procedure lized, the bar hole with the will usually
(11) Determine the of gas by pinpoint the gas leak.
the outer boundaries of indications, This will define (j) When and where hilS been test
the are" in which the leak will normally be located, with bubble-forming solution, particularly to locate
These tests shall be made with a CGI without smaller leaks.
excessive effort providing points,
(b) Locate all gas lines to narrow the "rea of se"rch,
M-6.3 Precautions
giving particular attention to the location of fit-
tees, and stubs, Connections have a relatively «(I) Unusual situations, which are but
probability of Caution shaH be exercised to pre- ble, may complicate these on some occasions,
vent to structures during For multiple which confusing
barring or excavating. data, can occur, To eliminate this potenti", complication,

172
Copyright © 2014 by the American Soeiet)' of Mechanical
reproduction be made of Ibis material withoul written cOllsen! of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

Table M-S.3-1 leak Classification and Action Criteria: Grade 1

Grade Definition Action Criteria Examples

A leak that represents an existing or
probable hazard to persons or
property, and requires immediate
repair or continuous action until the
conditions are no longer hazardous.
Requires prompt action [Note (l)J to
protect life and property. and
continuous action until the
conditions are no longer
hazardous.
(1) Any leak that, in the judgment of
operating personnel at the scene,
is regarded as an immediate
hazard.
(2) Escaping gas that has ignited.
(3) Any indication of gas that has
migrated into or under a building
or into a tunnel.
(4) Any reading at the outside wall
of a building, or where gas would
likely migrate to an outside wall
of a building.
(5) Any reading of 80% lEl, or
greater in a confined space.
(6) Any reading of 80% lEl, or
greater in small substructures
(other than gas associated sub-
structures) from which gas would
likely migrate to the outside wall
of a building.
(7) Any leak that can be seen,
heard, or felt, and that is in a
location that may endanger the
general public or properly.

NOTE:
(1) The prompt action in some instances may require one or more of the following:
(a) implementing company emergency plan (see para. 850.4)
(b) evacuating premises
(e) blocking off an area
(d) rerouting traffic
(e) eliminating sources of ignition
(0 venting the area
(g) stopping the now of gas by closing valves or other means
(h) notifying police and fire departments

173
Copyright © 2014 by the American Socicty of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material withoutlVritten consent of ASME.

Table M·5.3·2 leak Classification and Action Criteria: Grade 2
Grade Definition
2 A leak that is recognized as being
nonhazardous at the time of detec-
tion, but justifies scheduled repair
based on probable future hazard.
Table M·5.3·3 leak Classification and Action Criteria: Grade 3
Grade Definition
3 A leak that is nonhazardous at the These leaks shall be reevaluated dur-
time of detection and can be rea·
sonably expected to remain non-
hazardous.
Copyright © 20 I'I by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
may be made of this material without written consent of ASM E.
ASME B31.8·2014
Action Criteria
Leaks shall be repaired or cleared
within 1 calendar year, but no
later than 15 months from the
date the leak was reported. In
determining the repair priority, cri·
teria such as the following shall
be considered:
(1) amount and migration of gas
(2) proximity of gas to buildings
and subsurface structures
(3) extent of pavement
(4) soH type and soil conditions
(such as frost cap, moisture,
and natural venting)
Grade 2 leaks shall be reevaluated
at least once every 6 months untit
cleared. The frequency of reevalua-
tion shall be determined by the
location and magnitude of the
leakage condition.
Grade 2 leaks may vary greatly in
degree of potential hazard. Some
Grade 2 leaks, when evaluated by
the above criteria. may justify
scheduled repair within the next 5
working days. Others will justify
repair within 30 days. During the
working day on which the leak is
discovered. these situations shalt
be brought to the attention of the
individual responsible for schedul-
ing leak repair.
On the other hand, many Grade 2
leaks, because of their location
and magnitude, can be scheduled
for repair on a normal routine
basis with periodic reinspection
as necessary.
Action Criteria
Leaks Requiring Reevaluation al Periodic Intervals
ing the next scheduled surveyor (1) any reading of less than 80% tEl in small
within 15 months of the date
reported, whichever occurs first, (2) any reading under a street in areas without
until the leak is regarded or no
longer results in a reading.
(3) any reading of less than 20% LEl in a con-
174
Examples
(1) Leaks Requiring Action Ahead of
Ground Freezing or Other Adverse
Changes in Venting Conditions.
Any leak that, under frozen or
other adverse soil conditions,
would likely migrate to the outside
wall of a building.
(2) Leaks Requiring Action Within
6 Months
(al any reading of 40% LEl, or
greater, under a sidewalk in a
wall· to-walt paved area that
does not qualify as a Grade 1
leak
(b) any reading of 100% lEL, or
greater, under a street in a
wall-to-wall paved area that
has significant gas migration
and does not qualify as a
Grade 1 leak
(c) any reading less than 80% lEL
in small substructures (other
Ihan gas associated substruc-
tures) from which gas would
likely migrate creating a proba-
ble future hazard
(d) any reading between 20% LEl
and 80% LEl in a confined
space
(e) any reading on a pipeline
operating at hoop stress levels
of 30% SMYS, or greater, in a
Class 3 or I; location, which
does not qualify as a Grade 1
leak
(I) any reading of 80% lEl, or
greater, in gas associated sub-
structures
(g) any leak that, in the judgment
of operating company person-
nel at the scene, is of suffi·
cient magnitude to justify
scheduled repair
Examples
gas associated substructures
wall·to-wall paving where it is unlikely the
gas could migrate to the outside wat! of a
building
fined space
 ASME 831.8·2014

the area shall be rechecked after are completed. considered migrating gas leakage until proven other-
Gas may form occasionally and a wise by test and/or
indication until the in which the pocket has (b) When where the gas is heav-
formed has been vented. Foreign such as gas from low near
rrm"""", material, may be encountered. the downhill. LP gases usually
This presence is characterized fairly constant eGI do not diffuse rapidly or widely in the soil so
readings between 15% and 30% of gas in air throughout the leak is generally close to the indication. If the gas
an area. Landfill areas could, thus, substantially is venting into a duct or sewer it can travel
Gas detected in sewer shall be considerable distances.

175
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
reproduction
"----_. __:_---
be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831.8-2014

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX N
RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR HYDROSTATIC
TESTING OF PIPELINES IN PLACE

N·1 INTRODUCTION be done behind one or more or to

minimize the amount of air in line. The progress of
The
filling should be monitored by metering the water pump
some
into the pipeline and the volume of line filled.
hydrostatic pipelines. It is intended
If necessary, a period of stabilization
to provide basic only. The portions of this
between the ground and fill water should be proVided.
recommended which covers the determination
of the pressure at which the N-4 TESTING
yield strength is are only
mination is needed. (a) Pressllre Pllillp. Normally, a
pump is used for
during test. The flow
N·2 PLANNING to a reasonable rate. The
(a) All tests shall be conducted with due pressure of the pump must be higher than the
for safety of people and property. When the anticipated maximum test pressure.
test pressure is above 400 (2760 kPa), appropriate (b) Test Heads, Piping, and Valves. The pressure
shall be taken to of the test heads and piping and the rated pressure of
hoses and valves in the test manifold shall be no less
conducting the hydrostatic test. than the test All equipment should
(b) Se/eel iOIl Of Test Sections and Test Sites. The be inspected to test to determine that it is in
may need to be divided into sections for satisfactory condition.
areas with different test pressure or to (c) Pressurization. Following is a sequence for
obtain desired maximum and minimum test pressures
due to hydrostatic head differentiaL The elevation at the in the section to no more than
test site, the point and low point of the isolated 80% of test pressure and hold for a time
area, must be known to maintain the specified pressure period to determine that no major leaks exist.
at the maximum and the minimum elevations. (2) During this time monitor the pressure
(c) Water SOlfrceand WaleI' Disposal. A water source, as and check the test section any major
well as location(s) for water should be selected leaks that are found.
well in advance of the Federal, state, and local (3) After the hold time
regulations should be checked to ensure form rate to the test
with to usage and/or disposal of the water. In from a straight line use of IJlt"""Ult:'-VVJ
of the water after care should be taken (logs or automatic plotter).
damage to crops excessive erosion or (4) When the test pressure is reached and stabilized
contamination of streams, rivers, or other waterbodies from pressuring a hold may com-
including groundwater. mence. During this period, test medium may be added
(d) AII/bienl COl1diliollS. in Jow- as to maintain the minimum test pressure.
temperature conditions may
(1) heating of test medium. N-S DETERMINATION OF PRESSURE REQUIRED TO
the addition of freeze point Cau- PRODUCE YIELDING
tion should be exercised in the handling of freeze (a) Pressure-Volllllle Plot Methods. If devi-
nts tests. of freeze point ation from a line with graphical plots, an accu-
rio,~rocc~ must be G1J'efully and executed. rate versus the volume of water pumped
into the line may be made either by hand or automatic
N-3 FIlliNG plotter. To make a hand plot, the pump strokes are
Filling is normally done with a high-volume centrifu- counted to determine volume and plotted against pres-
gal pump or pumps. Filling should be continuous and sure readings. The plot should be started at a pressure

176
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
be made of this material without written consent of ASME,
 ASME 631.8·2014

the straight-line por- or smaller expansion based on their

plot. The should be mechanical
so that deviation from the
N-6 LEAK TESTING
portion can be detected readily. The devia-
tion from the straight line is the start of the nonlinear If, during the hold is indicated, the
portion of the plot and indicates that pressure may be reduced while the leak. After
the elastic limit of some of the pipe within the section the leak is repaired, a new hold
has been reached. at full test pressure.
(b) Yield for unidentified or used limited N-7 RECORDS
para. 841.1.4(a) and allowed under paras. 811.1(f) and
company shall maintain in its file for
817.1.3(h)] is determined by the pressure at the the life each pipeline and main, records show-
highest elevation within a test section, at which the num- the following:
ber of pump strokes volume) per increment (n) test medium
of rise becomes twice the number of pump (b) test pressure
(measured volume) per increment of pressure (c) test duration
rise that was required during the straight-line part of (d) test date
the plot before any deviation occurs,
(e) pressure recording chart and pressure log
(c) For control of maximum test pressure when hoop
(j) pressure versus volume plot (if applicable)
stress levels exceed 100% SMYS within a test section, pressure at high and low elevations
one of the following measures may be used: (II) elevation at point test pressure measured
(1) The pressure at which the number of pump (i) conducting test, and
strokes (measured volume) per increment of pressure contractor, if utilized
rise becomes twice the number of pump strokes (mea- (j) environmental factors (ambient temperature, rain-
sured volume) per increment of pressure rise that was snowing, windy,
the of the pressure- manufacturer (pipe,
volume plot any deviation occurs, (I)
(2) The pressure shall not exceed the pressure ness,
when the number of pump strokes (III) clear identification of what is included in each
volume) taken after deviation from the test section
of the pressure-volume plot, times the volume per (11) of any leaks or failures and their
to 0,002 times the test section fill volume disposition
pressure. This The above records shall be reviewed to ensure that
behavior of the test section. Individual the of this Code have been met.

177
© 20 14 by the American of Mechanical ",,,!,we,,,.
be made of this material without writtcn consent
 ASME 831.8-2014

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX 0
PREPARATION OF TECHNICAL INQUIRIES

0-1 INTRODUCTION An inquiry letter concerning unrelated subjects will

be returned.
The ASME 831 Committee, Code for Pressure (b) Backgrollnd. State the purpose of the inquiry,
will consider written for interpretations which would be either to obtain an interpretation of
revisions of the Code rules and develop new rules if Code rules or to propose consideration of a revision
dictated technological development. The to the rules. Provide concisely the information
Committee's activities in this are limited strictly needed for the Committee's understand of the
to of the rules or to the consideration of sure to include reference to the applicable
revisions to the rules on the basis of new data edition, addenda (if applicable), para-
or As a matter of poliCY, AS ME and tables. If sketches are provided,
does not approve, certify, rate, or endorse any item, be limited to the scope of the inquiry.
construction, device, or activity, and, accord- (c) Inquiry Structure
ingly, inquiries such consideration will be (1) Proposed Qllesliol1(s). The inquiry shall be stated
returned. Moreover, ASME does not act as a consultant in a condensed and question format, omitting
on problems or on information, and, where
of the Code rules. If, based on in such a way that
it is the of Ol-'rn,,,,., with provisos) would be an reply.
the Committee that the should seek inquiry statement should be technically and editori-
the inquiry will be returned with the recom- ally correct.
mendation that such assistance be obtained. (2) Reply(ies). Provide a
that do not provide the information needed what it is believed that the requires.
Committee's full understanding will be returned. If, in the inquirer's opinion, a revision to the Code is
needed, recommended wording shall be prOVided in
addition to information justifying the ("'''IV ....
0-2 REQUIREMENTS
0-3 SUBMITTAL
shall be limited strictly to interpretations of
the rules or to the consideration of revisions to the pres- however, handwritten
ent rules on the basis of new data or Inquiries ered. They shall include the name and mailing address
shall meet the following requirements: of the and be mailed to the following:
(a) Scope. Involve a single rule or closely related rules ASME Two Park Avenue; New
in the scope of the Code. NY 10016-5990.

178
Copyright © 2014 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
be nlade of this material without written consellt of ASME.
 ASME 831.8·2014

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX P
NOMENCLATURE FOR FIGURES

This Nonmandatory Appendix is in preparation for

a future edition of this Code.

179
Copyright © 20 J4 by the American of iVlechanical Engineers.
may be made of this material withoul writ1en consent of ASM E.
 ASME B31.8·2014

MANDATORY APPENDIX Q
SCOPE DIAGRAMS

Fig. Q·1 Scope of ASME 831.8 Transmission Piping Offshore

, 1
\ I
o 0

~ J
\I
'"
ASME 831.8 scope starts at
oUllet of separation and/or
processing plant

ASME 831.8 scope starts

Production at outlet of separation and/or
processing plant
PlatfOrm~ _

ASME 931.8 scope ends at

I
,sfp ,
"l.
\"I'~
11-----,--,-, ,
p •-'< 00-"""'0-*
~"I ~o . . .
inlet and starts at oullet
of separation or processing
plant
Junction or
metering
platform

ASME 831.8 scope starts

al oUllet 01 separation and/or
processing plant

""'---Bf See Fig. 0-2

LNG unload line

Main line (pipeline) transmission line Gas well with separator

*
Gathering pipelines Gas well without separator or processing plant
-0-0- Gas flow lines Production platform
:.~: Separation and/or processing plant Compressor station

GENERAL NOTE: facilities and piping indicated by solid lines are within the scope of ASME B31.8.

180
© 2014 by Ihe American Society of Mechanical
reproduction be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME 831,8-2014

fig. Scope of ASME B31.8 Transmission Piping Onshore

ASME 831.8 scope starts at

outlet of separation and/or
processing plant

ASME 831.8 scope starts

at outlet of wellhead separator

' - - - - - - ASME 831.8 scope includes

pipe to inlet of injection well

See Fig. 0·3

See Fig. 0·1

Offshore

See Fig. 0·3

" " Gas storage field

- 0 - 0-
Main line (pipeline) transmission line
Gathering pipelines
Gas flow lines
* Gas well without separator or processing planl
Compressor station
Meter station
Separation and/or processing plant Overpressure protection device for pipelines and mains

*
Gas well with separator Gas injection well

GENERAL NOTE: Facilities and piping indicated by solid lines are within the scope of ASME 831.8.

181
© 2014 by the American of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent
 ASME B31.8-2014

Fig. Q-3 Scope of ASME 831.8 Distribution Piping

High-pressure High-pressure
LNG or LPG peak shaving plant distribution system distribution system
[above 60 psi (410 kPa)] [above 60 psi (410 kPa) or less]
~

See
Fig. Q-2,.-.,...-i·-frH )-------.&...------
Holder
filling
regulator
Low-pressure
Plant, school. etc. holder

See
Fig. Q-2

Low-pressure distribution system Low-pressure distribution system

Main line transmission line

Gas main or distribution main

Gas service line

Overpressure protection device ror pipelines and mains

Service line with meter and no service regulator

(low-pressure distribution syslem)

Service line with meter and one service regulator

Ihigh-pressure distribution system not over 60 psi (410 kPa)]

Service line with meter and service regulator and series

regulator or other protection devices
Ihigh-pressure distribution system over 60 psi (410 kPa)]

City gvte measuring and pressure regulating sialion

Disl ribulion pressure regulating station

Compressor slat ion

Meter station

GENERAL NOTE: Facilities and piping indicated by solid lines are within the scope of A5ME B31.8.

182
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
may be made ofthis material witilout written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

NONMANDATORY APPENDIX R
ESTIMATING STRAIN IN DENTS

R·l STRAIN Fig. R-l Method for Estimating Strain in Dents

Strain in dents may be estimated using data from A
deformation in-line inspection (ILl) tools or from direct
measurement of the deformation contour. Direct mea-
surement techniques may consist of any method L"~":1lJi<::
of the and shape terms needed to esti-
mate strain. strain estimating techniques may differ
depending on the type of data available. Interpolation or
other mathematical may be used to develop
surface contour information from ILl or direct measure-
ment data. a method for
described herein it is not intended to
j

of other strain estimating (see also

R-2 ESTIMATING STRAIN

Ro is the initial pipe surface radius, equal to ~ the
nominal O.D. Determine the indented O.D. surface
radius of curvature, R 1, in a transverse through
the dent. The dent may flatten the
such that the curvature of
surface
curvature, in which case RI is a quantity. If the
dent is re-entrant meaning the curvature of the
j

surface in the transverse plane is actually RI

is a quantity. Determine the radius of curvature,
R2, in a longitudinal plane through the dent. The term
(c) Calculate the extensional strain in the longitudinal
as used herein will generally always be a
direction as
Other dimensional terms are the wall
/; the d; and the dent length, L.
(n) Calculate the bending strain in the circumferential
direction as (d) Calculate the strain on the inside pipe surface as

(b) Calculate the strain in the longitudinal

direction as and the strain on the outside pipe surface as

183
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without II'ritten cOllsent of ASME.
 INTENTIONALLY LEFf BLAt'-IK

184
© 2014 by the American Society ofMechsnieal Engineers.
be made of III is material without written consenl of ASME.
 ASME B31.8-2014

INDEX

of 847.2 Cold materials for use in, 814

Adhesive joint, 805.1.3 corrosion control in, 864.2.8
Air piping 843.4.3 Cold 804.4
Air rp('pl\JPr<: 805.1.4
Alloy steel, 804.7.2 of piping, 832.3(h)
Ambient h'''r'''~,or" Combustible materials, of, in compressor
sta tions, 853.1.5
Arc bums stations, 843
elimination of, construction of building, 843.1.2
Arctic environment, 865 843.1
843,2
Backfilling
and lubrication failures, 843.3.6
emergency shutdown facilities,
Bends, elbows, and miters, 841.2.3
Bends in plastic piping, 842.3.4 explosion prevention, 843.3.7
Bottle, 803.8 fire protection, 843.3.2
Bottle-tight control of pressure in, 845.2.1 fuel gas control, 843.3.5
Bottle-type holder, 803.8 gas treating 843.3.1
Branch connection, welded liquid removal, 843,3.1(a)
reinforcement of, App. F liquid removal equipment, 843.3.1(b)
rules for reinforcement of, examples, App, F
Branches in piping, 842.3.4 pressure-limiting requirements, 843,3.4
Buildings intended for human occupancy, 840.2 843.3,3
Buried 835 ventilations of building, 843.3.7(b)
at exits, 843,1.3
forces on pipe 835.4 fenced areas, 843.1.4
information, 835,1 location of building, 843.1.1
interconnection of 835.6 843.4
restraint due to soil friction, 835.3 843.4.3
for buried 835.5 843.4.3(e)
fuel gas piping, 843.4,2
Carbon 804.7.1 843.4,1
insertion in, of,
of plastic piping, piping, 843.3.7
of steel 841.1.11 (d) identification of valves and piping, 843.4.1(d)
Cast iron, installation of,
Cast iron service lines; see Ductile iroll service lubrication oil piping, 843.4.4
849.3 for,
connections to mains, 849.6.2 steam piping, 843.4.6
use of, 849.3 843.4.5
Check valve, 803.7 movers, 853.1.1
Class location, change in, 854 for piping, 842.3.1
description, 840.2,2
Clearance between mains and other
structures and lubrication failures, 843,3,6
of plastic piping, 842,2.8 Copper mains, 842.5
of steel piping, 841,1.11(c) of,842.5.1

185
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made of this material without written consent of ASME,
 ASME 831.8·2014

fi t ti ngs in, Dimensions

galvanic corrosion, protection against, 842.5.1(e) SI conversion, 801.4
in, 842.5.1(d) standard, 801.3
valves in, 842.5.1(b) Direct burial of piping,
service 849.5 Distribution abandoning of, 852.4
connections to mains, 849.6.4 Distribution main, 803.3
design of, 849.5.1 Distribution maintenance, 852
fittings in, 849.5.1(c) distribution abandoning of, 852.4
galvanic action, nrc,h:>('ti surveys, 852.2
installation of, 849.5.2 852.1
joints 849.5.1(d)
valves in, 849.5.1(b)
Corrosion
control, 860 Ductile iron, 804.1
Corrosion, pipeline Ductile iron
external, 861 design, 842.1.1
in arctic environments, 865 installation, 842.1.2
service, 866 field joints, making, 842.1.2(d)
restraint, 842.1.2(c)
offshore, A860
records of, 860.1(e),(f) joints, 842. 1.1 (e)
stress corrosion and other phenomena, 867 mechanical, 842.1.1(e)(1)
Cover and under railroads, other, 842.1.1 (e)(2)

reuse of, 817.2

Customer's meter, 803.6
unl"'''''''' prevention program, 850.8
copper service lines, 849.5.1
of service 849.41
of steel service lines, 849.2.1
Design, installation and
classification of locations, 840.3
design F, values of steel
standard strength, and conformance to
ANSI A21.S.2, 842.1.1 (c)
standard thickness selection, Table 842.1.1-1
thickness, allowable, 842.1.1(d)
values of s and allowable, 842.1.1 (b)
wall of, 842.1.1(a)
Ductile iron service
connections to mains, 849.6.2
use of, 849.3
840 specified minimum, 804.6
bmprO"Anl'U plan, 850.4
FrrlPn;rPflrv shutdown facilities for compressor

Tables 841.1.6-1 and 841.1.6-2 stations, 843.3.3(a)

841.1.1 Encroachment,
steel, 841.1.9(a)
840.1
least nominal wall
longitudinal joint
design values, limitations of, 841.1.3 amount of expansion, 832.2
population density indexes, 840.2 flexibility 832.3
steel 841 Explosion, of, 843.3.7
factOl~ T, Table 841.1.8-1
Design
for clearance between containers and bottles,
834.3
for steel piping, 841.1.1
pressure, 805.2
Design for vaults, 847.1 850.5
Diameter, 804.5 842.1.2(d)
nominal 804.5 in compressor stations, 843.3.2

186
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical
be made oflhis material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

Gas plant, 803.5

in copper mains, Gas service line, 803.3
in copper service line, 803.4
other than valves and 803.4
branch 831.3.3 system, 803.4
components fabricated welding, 831.35 and grooves
fittings, 831.3.2 detection of, 841.2.4(a)
standard 831.3.1 field
light weight, App. I in plastic piping, field of, 842.3.5
test for Ground temperature, 805.2.2
and stress factors, App. E
Flow control facilities
of, 841.1.9(c), 841.1.9(f), 841.1.9(g), 841.1.9(h)
Handling, and
Forces on joints, 835.4
protection from, for
Fracture control and arrest, 841.1.2
F
brittle fracture control, 841.1.2(a)
Heat fusion joint, 805.1.3(b)
ductile fracture arrest, 841.1.2(b)
distribution 803.3
Fuel gas control, 843.3.5
Fuel gas piping, 843.4.2 controlling pressure in, 845.2.4
maximum allowable operating pressure, 845.2.4(c)
to higher maximum allowable
Galvanic corrosion, protection in copper pressure, 857
mains; 842.5.1(e) Holders
Gas, 803.1
of, 803.1
Gas control criteria, App. M in exclusive 844.3(b)
Gas main, 803.3 provisions, 844.4
Gas piping pipe-type, 803.8, 844
identification of valves and piping, provisions, 844.5
installation of, 843.4.1(b) in exclusive 844.3(b)
843.4.1(a) in nonexclusive rights-of-way, 844.1
for maintaining in safe
condition, 853.2
maximum Hoop stress, 805.2.3
pressure, maximum allowable, 805.2.3
in boUIe-tight facilities, 845.2.1 Hot 803.1
in distribution 845.2.4 in piping, 842.3.6
in distribution 845.2.5 steel pipelines and mains, 841.2.6
instrument, control and sample piping, 845.5 843.3.7
and relief proof of of pipelines in App. N

and small customers prevention 850.6

distribution
cm·nn>"s,·,rp 845.2.7 Inquiries,
operating pressure, maximum allowable for high- Inspection of 842.3.2
pressure distribution Installation
pressure, maximum allowable for low- backfilling, 841
pressure distribution 845.2.5(c) of copper lines, 849.5.2
operating pressure, maximum allowable for steel or of customers' meters and regulators, 848.4
or mains, 845.2.2 of in ditch, 841.2.5(b)
accidental, protection 845.1 hauling, and
pressure relieving and limiting stations, required 841.2.6
capacity, 845.4.1 miscellaneous operations in, 841.2.5
relief and of steel and mains, 841.2
steel pipeline or main; of pipeline by directional drilling, 841.129
maximum allowable operating pressure, 857 of service lines into buildings,

187
American Society of Mechanical
of this material without written
 ASME B31.8·2014

markers, 851.6
patrolling, 851.2
in pipeline leak 851.6
into or under buildings, 849.2.2(b) records of 860.1(e),860.1(f)
Instrument, control, and piping for Markers on 851.7
gas pressure, 845.5 Marking of materials and equipment, 813
Instrument piping, 803.5 Material specifications approved for use under this
Intent of 802.2 Code, A
Internal corrosion control, 864 Materials equipment, 810
to inquiries rmV">YYH App.O qualification of, 811
Materials for use in cold climates, 812
Maximum allowable hoop stress, 805,2.3
Joints; see Length, 804.5 Maximum allowable operating pressure, S05.2.1
ductile iron, 842.1 Maximum allowable test pressure, 805.2.1
in copper service 849.5.1 (d) Maximum operating pressure, 805.2.1
plastic 842.2.9 Meters, 803.6
Meter facilities 841.1.9(c), 841.1.9(d), 841
Leak in pipelines, 851.6 841.L9(h)
Leakage terms, App. M Meter set
'~~"U"'h~ survey, in distribution piping, 852.2 customers', 803.6, 848
Length, 804.5 848.4
and relief r1,"'"r,><" 848.1
capacity and
Liquid removal in compressor stations, 843.3.1(a)
equipment for, 843.3.1 (b) Miscellaneous systems, 803.5
Location Monitoring regulator, 803.6
of compressor buildings, 843.1.1 Mufflers (silencers), 843.3.7(a)
of valves
distribution 846.2.2 Nominal outside diametel~ 804.5
transmission, 846.2.1 Nominal wall 804.5
Location 805.1.1,840.2
Long-term hydrostatic
distribution 803.3 Odorization, 856.1
pressure in, 845.2.5 in LPG 856.1
conversion to high-pressure system, 845.2.6 Offshore
maximum allowable operating pressure, 845.2.5(c) for
LPG 803.1.9
safety requirements for, 856.1
odorization, 856.1 allowable longitudinal stress, A842.1.3
ventilation, 834.3.7(c) allowable strains, A842.1.4
Lubricating oil piping, 843.4.4 alternate design for strain, A842.2.3
alternative flaw limits, A826.2.3
for buried piping, A835
Mains, gas, 803.3 anchoring, A844.2.5
Mains corrosion, A861.4
clearance between mains and other rr"'f)''''',"'l'Ir protection, A861.2
structures, plastic piping, 842.2.8 AS44.2.4
location of service line connections to, 849.1.4 below-water repair for steel
Maintenance A851.4.5
compressor station, 853.1
combustible materials, of, 853.1.5 A844.2.2
l~""''',''r'' and prime movers, 853.1.1 coupling, A803
of equipment, 853.1.4 buckle, A803
relief and testing, 853.1.2 arrestor, A803
pipeline, 851 detector, A803
external corrosion control, 861 buckling, AS42.U
internal corrosion control, 864 cathodic protection A862.1.2, A862.1

188
© 20 14 by the American of Meclwnical Engineers.
be made of this material without IVl'i!1en consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

coating requirements, A862.1.1 hyperb<uic A803

collapse, A842.1.2 and tests for quality control of welds on
column buckling, A803 A826.2
combined stress, A842.2.2(c) inspection of A826
compressor, station design! A843.1 offshore pipelines, A820
station A843.3 processes, A821.2
stations, A843 procedure, A821.3
conditions for the reuse and requalification of installation fatigue, A842.1.5
A817 intent, A802.2
connectors, A803 internal corrosion control, A864
corrosion control of offshore A860 liaison, A850.4.3
loading A841.3.1
buckling and ovalization, A842.2.4 loads imposed by construction and
A842.2.5 vessel motions, A841.2.4
A842.2.6 location class, A854
yielding! J-\O"tL.LL! location of compressor A843.1.1
design, and protection of assemblies, longitudinal stress, A842.2.2(b)
A842.2.1O material A814
conditions, A841.1 on-bottom A844
A841 the
environmental loads! A841.3.3
factors for offshore platform piping,
and risers, Table A842.2.2-1
and A840

A842.2.7
maintenance, A851
connectors and flanges, A842.2.8
markers and A851.7
flexible pipe, A842.2.1l
patrolling, A851.2
structural pipeline riser A842.2.9
A851,4
storm conditions, A844.1
pipeline system, A803
educational program, A850AA
piping system components, A831
electrical
platform, AB03
connections and monitoring points, A861.1.4
platform AB03
A843.2
pressure limiting for offshore
interference, A86L1.7 facili ties, AB43.3.4
isolation, A861.1.3 profile, A841.2.2
emergency shutdown b"'liii'IDC propagating buckle, AB03
enclosures! A843.1.2 pull AB03
enviromnent A841.2.3 riser, A803
essential features plans! AB50.3! A850.4 qualification! of materials and A811
examination when A860.2(e) of and AB23
installations, A860.2
exits, A843.1.3 repair of flexible
and AB32 requalification AB17.4
extent of examinAtion, AB26.2.1 residual stresses, AB42.1.7
external corrosion control, AB61 return interval, AB03
external hydrostatiC pressure, AB03 reuse of steel pipe, AB17.1
facilities, AB43.3.4 riser pipe or installed through a pull tube,
flexible pipe, AB03, AB42.1.B AB42.1.7
gas transmission, A800 devices, AB43.3.3
gas transmission terms And definitions, AB03 scope, AB02.1, A821.1, AB60.1
A821, AB30.1, A864.1 and intent, AB02
information, A801 shore approaches, AB44.3
provisions, AB40.1, AB47.1 shoreline AB40.2
hoop stress,

189
 ASME B31.8-2014

A803, A844.5 backfilling, 841.2.5(c)

A842.1.6 handling, hauling, and stringing, 841.2.5(a)
splash zone, A803 hot 841.2.6
stability against waves and currents, A844.2 installation in ditch, 841.2.5(b)
standard of acceptability, A826.2.2 at less than 100 841.3.5
considerations, A842 at 100 or more, 841.3.4
during installation, A842.1
on private of electric transmission
A842.2
lines, 845.3(c), 850.6(c)
A825
"no,c>rrWr1 installations, A861.1
precautions for aVOiding explosions
weight, A844.2.1 construction, 841.2.7
supports and for eXIDo,;ed A834 for underground piping,
A830 860.2(e)
test, conditions new steel, 861.1.1
medium, A847.3 purging, 841.2.7(e)
pressure, A847.2 repair of, at hoop stress levels at or above 30%
A847.4 SMYS, 851.4
testing, A847 851.1
for buckles, A847.7 841.3
tie-ins, A847.6 at hoop stress levels of less than 30% of yield,
transmission facilities, A850 841.3.3, Table 841.3.3-1
trenching, A844.2.3 at hoop stress levels of 30% or more of yield,
valves, A846 841.3.2, Table 841.3.2-1
venting, A843,3.4(c)
after construction, 841.3
A841.2.1
A803 during, 841.3.6
and maintenance 850 and mains
of plan, 850.3 clearance between other underground structures,
850.2 841.1.11(c)
classification of locations, 850.1(b), cover
Table 854.1(c) mains, 841.1.11 (a)
company, 803.1 841.1.1l(b)
pressure dents, 841.2.4(c)
maximum, 805.2.1 gouges and grooves
maximum 805.2.1 detection of, 841.2.4(a)
maximum allowable for steel or or field of, 841.2.4(b)
mains, 845.2.2
pipe surface requirements for a hoop stress of 20%
uprating for maximum allowable, 857
or more of yield, 841.2.4
Operating stress, 805.2.3
protection from 841.1.10
Overpressure protection, 805.2.1
Overpressuring, protection accidental, 845.1 for casings under railroads, highways,
roads, or streets, 841.1.11(d)
steel
Parallel encroachment, 803.1 bends, miters, and elbows, 841.2.3
Patrolling construction specifications, 841.2.1
distribution mains, 852.1 corrosion
851.2 external criteria, 861
internal criteria, 864
cold expanded, 804.4 841.2.2
container, 804.3
process, 804.7.3
material 814.1.2
Pipelines, 803.1
arc burns, 841.2.4(d) reuse of steel pipe, 856.1
~a .. "",a holder, 803.8

electrical test Piping, compressor station, 843.4

failure investigation, 850.5 gas, 843.4.1
installation, miscellaneous in, 841.25 Piping 803.2

190
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
may be made oflhis material without written consent of ASME.
 ASME B31.8·2014

system components, 831 cover and under

branch connections, welded, reinforcement of, 831.4 streets, or highways, 842.2.7
831.4.1 formula, 842.2.1
831.4.2 of, 842.2
835 installation of, 842.3
842.3.4
forces on 835.4 branches, 842.3.4
general, 835.1 construction 842.3.1
interconnection of gouges and grooves, field repair 842.3.5
restraint due to soil handling, 842.3.2
for buried piping, 835.5 hot 842.3.6
combined stress calculations, 833.4 insertion of 842.3.3(e)
and flexibility, 832 inspection, 842.3.2
amount of expansion, 832.2 installation, 842.3.3
flexibility 832.3 direct burial, 842.3.3(d)
832.3(h) 842.3.7
and anchorage for, 834 protection from hazards, 842.2.6
attachment of or anchors, 834.5 thermoplastic limitation of, 842.2.2
forces on pipe joints, 834.4 valves in, 842.2.5
834,1 Plastic service lines, 849.4
cOlU1ections to mains, 849.6.3
849.41
extruded outlets, 831.6
installation 849.4.2
fittings other than valves and flanges, 831.3
into or under 849.4.2(c)
branch connections, 831.3.3
Precautions for avoiding explosions during
connections fabricated by welding, 831.3.5
construction, 849.2.7
831.3.2
Pressure, 805.2.1
standard fittings, 831.3,1
control; see Regulntors, 803.6
831.2
small commercial, and industrial
831.2.2
customers, 845.2.7
flange and 831.2.1
monitoring regulator, 803.6
gaskets, 831.2.3
overpressure protection, 805.2.1
multiple openings, reinforcement of, 831.5
stiltion, 803.6
831.1 .3
station, 803.6
valves, 831.1
pressure relief station, 803.6
Plastic, 804.1
Plastic design pressure, 842,2.4 805.2.1
joints and connections maximum allowable 805.2.1
adhesive maximum allowable test, 805.2.1
general milximum 805.2.1
heat-fusion, normal utilization; see S/(lIldnrd service pressllre,
joint req,UHem,enlts 805.2.1
mechanical joints, standard service, 805.2.1
solvent cement joints, 842.2.9(c) test, standup, 805.2.1
materials, qualification of, 814.1.4 Pressure control facilities,
reuse of, 817.3 of, 841.1.9(c), 841.1.9(0, 84U.9(g), 841.1.9(h)
standard dimension ratio, Table 842.2.2-1 and
testing after construction maintenance of, 853.3
general,842.4.1 for compressor
during, 842.4.3 stations equipment, 843.3.4
test 842.4.2 and limiting stations,
tie-ins, 842.4.1 845.4.1
Plastic terms, 805.1.3 805.2.1
Plastic piping
clearance between mains and other
structures, 842.2.8 items, 804.3, 811.1(e), 811.2.4

191
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without written consent of
 ASME B31.8·2014

Protection galvanic action in copper service Solvent cement joint, 805.1.3

lines, Sour gas terms, B803 (Ch. IX)
required for 846.1
and mains, 841.2.7(e) for equipment, 815
piping, 842.3.7 of 814
804.6
minimum
Regulator, 803.6 minimum yield
803.6 Standard dimension ratio, 805.1.3
service, 803,6 Standard service pressure, 805.2.1
Relief and limiting design 845.3 Standards and 801.1
Relief station; see Pressure relief 803.6 approved for use under this A
Relief and testing of, in compressor Standup pressure test, 805.2.1
stations, 853.1.2 Station

Restraint due to soil friction, 835,3 Steam piping, 843.4.6

Revisions to Code, 0 Steel
Righ ts-of-way, exclusive alloy, 804.7.2
bottle-type holders in, 844.3 carbon, 804.7.1
holders in, 844.3 Steel pipe
private, 803.1 reuse of
bending 817.1.3(b)
determination of wall thickness, 817.1.3(c)
hydrostatiC test,
devices for compressor st<1tions, 843.3.3 of,
during tests of and mains, 841.3.6 longitudinal,817.1.3(d)
during tests of plastic pipe, 842.4.3 S value, 817.1.3(h)
piping, 803.5 817.1.3(f)
of Code, 802.1 817.1.3(e)
stress, 805.2.3 determination of,
of vaults, 847.3
Service lines, 849
g<1S, 803.3
installation of, 849.1.1 long-term hydrostatic, 805.1.3
location of service line connections to m<1in piping, minimum tensile, 804.6
849.1.4 specified minimum yield, 804.6
location of 849.1.3 tensile, 804.6
plastic 804.6
connections to m<1ins, 849.6.5 Stress, 805.6
of, 849.4.1 combined, 833.4
inst<111ation of, 849,4.2 hoop, 805.2.3
into or under buildings, 849.4.2(c) maximum allowable, 805.2.3
841.2 operating, 805.2.3
connections to mains, 849.6.1 805.2.3
of,849.2.1 unit; see 805.2.3
installation of, 849.2.2 wall thickness, nominal, 804.5
in bores, 849.2.2(a) Stress corrosion and other phenomena, 867
into buildings, 849.2.2(b) and anchors for piping
of, after construction, 849.1.5 attachment of, 834.5
849.1 forces on pipe 834.4
valves suitable fOf, 849.1.2 materials, design, and installation, 834.3
803.7 proviSion for 834,2
Service pressure, 805.2.1 for
Service regulator, 803,6

192
Copyright © 2014 by the American of Mechanical Engineers.
may be made of this material without written consent of ASME.
"'-~--~--~--~~~.- ----~
 ASME 831.8·2014

stop, 803.7
suitable for service 849.1.2
Vaults, 847
Tensile strength, 804.2.3 accessibility, 847.2
minimum, 804.6 and waterproofing of, 847.4
Test pressure, maximum maintenance 853.5
Test for and ventilation, 847.3
at hoop stress levels less than 30% of yield, structural design requirements, 847.1
841.3.3, Table 841.3.3·1 Ventilation
at hoop stress levels of 30% or more of yield, of building in compressor stations,
841.3.2, Table 841.3.2-1 in LPG 843.3.7
repairs, 851.4 of 847.3
Tests welders, G
Thermoplastic, 804.1
Thermoplastic design, limitations of, 842.2.2 Wall thickness
wall thickness and standard 842.1.1 (a)
Table 842.2.2-1
804.1 Water
limitations of, 842.2.3 Welders, 823
diameter and wall Welding, 820
thickness, Table 842.2.3-1 butt 822.1
Training and of n&>'rc"nn&>1 fillet preparation fOf, 822.2
Transmission fadli ties, information, 821
Transmission line, 803.2 and tests
Transmission system, 803.2 plpmg with hoop stress levels less than
of gas, 803.1 20% of yield strength, 826.2
of line 816 with stress levels of 20% or
more of yield 826.3
on bottle-type holders, 844.4(c)
Unit stress; see Stress, 805.2.3
824
805.2.4, 857
for, 822
Utilization pressure, see Standard service
of and welders, 823
pressl/re, 805.2.1
piping systems with hoop stress less than 20% of
strength, 823.1
Valves, 803.7 plpmg with hoop stress levels of 20% or
cast iron, 831.1.1(c) more of yield strength, 823.2
check, 803.7 records, qualification, 823.4
803.7 requirements for welders, 823.3
ductile iron, 831.1.1 (b) variables qualification, 823.2.3
in compressor stations, 831.1.1(a), 843.4.1(a) 823
in copper mains, preparation, 822.3
in copper service lines, 849.5.1(b) components fabricated by, 831.3.5
location of standards of acceptability, 821.4
distribution 846.2.2 825
service 849.1.3 equipment, 825.8
transmission, 846.2.1 methods, 825.7
maintenance of, 853.4 825.6
distribution 853.4.2 terms, 821.7
853.4.1
service line, 853.4.3
service line, 803.7 804.6
846.1
minimum for steeJ and iron App. 0

193
© 2014 by the American Society of Mechallical Engineers.
be made of this material withotlt written consent of
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLAI\JK

194
 ASME 931.8 INTERPRETATIONS VOlUME 17

ASME 831.8 INTERPRETATIONS

VOLUME 17

Replies to Technical Inquiries

October 2012 Through April 2014
Interpretations 17-1 Through 17·13

It has been to publish interpretations issued by the B31 Committee

ASME B31.8 as part of the update service to the Code. The interpretations have been
numbers in order. Each interpretation either to the latest Edition at the
time of issuance of the interpretation or to the Edition or stated in the
revisions to the Code may have superseded the
These are taken verbatim from the for a few typographical and
editorial corrections made for clarity.
ASME provide for reconsideration of these interpretations when or if additional
information that the believes affect the is available. Further, persons
by an may to the ASME committee or subcommittee,
stated in the Statement of Policy in Code documents, ASME does not "approve,"
"rate," or "endorse" any item, construction, proprietary or activity,

I-I
or",...nh' © 2014 by (he American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
be made of this material without II'ri(1en consent of ASME,
 ASME B31.8 INTERPRETATIONS VOLUME 17

831.8
Clarificiltiol1 on Para. A842.2T .... )7-2 12-384
Para. 811, QUillification of Materiill and Equipment, and Table 841.1.8-1,
Temperature Derating Factor, T, for Steel Pipe. 17-8 06-876
Para. 812, for Design 17-5 10-1990
Para, , .. ,' , .... . 17-10 12-379
PilriL 825.1, Stress Relieving of Carbon Steels .. . 17-6 12-368
Para, 831.4 and Appendix F, Branch Connections Fun Encirclement
Sleeves .. , .,.,,.,,, 17-12 13-1665
Para. 831.4, Reinforcement of Welded Bml1ch COIUleclions, (lnd
Para. 841.3, After Construction ..................... . 17-4 07-838
Pam. 840.2.2 and 841.3.2-], Minimum Test Pressure for Class 1,
Division 2. 17-11 12-1566
P(lm. 841.3, Pressure Limitation for Onshore 17-3 12-1719
Para. 841.3.l(c), Hydrostatic Tests by Test (Nitrogen) in
17-1 12-104
Pipe Support Attachments .. , . 17-7 13-1171
P(lfii. A847.4( c), Durat)on of Pressure Test .. ,., . 17-9 12-2068
P(lril, B841.231, Degrees of Miter Bend in Sour Gas Service. 17-13 13-1667

© 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical

.".,.:,:,~~.'.,,,,~:.::::....,,b.'e made of Ihis malerial withoul wril1en cons.e..ll__t __.. ,. ___-"
 ASME B31.8 INTERPRETATIONS VOLUME 17

Interpretation: 17·1

ASME B31.8-2010, Para. Tests by Pneumatic Test (Nitrogen)

in Pipelines

Date Issued: October 16, 2012

File: 12-104

Question the hydrostatic test to the after

construction

Reply (1): Yes. See para. 841.3.1 (c).

Question (2): Does meet the Code rDn,,:'nh, to be used as a test medium?

Reply (2): Yes. See para. 841.3.2.

Interpretation: 17-2

J"'JIC'.<. ASME B31.8-2010, Cli:uific<1tion on P<1ra. A842.2.7

Date Issued: October 16,2012

File: 12-384

Do doubler attached to offshore l<1unchers and receivers that are

in accordance with ASME B31.8 full welds per para. A842.2.7?

Reply: Yes. See para. A834.

Interpretation: 17·3

ASME B31,8·2010, Para. 841.3, Pressure Limitation for Onshore Pipeline

Date Issued: Janu<1ry 2, 2013

File: 12·1719

Question: Is there an allowable limit for the hoop stress during of an onshore pipeline
when the test medium is water?

No,

1-3
Copyright © 2014 by the American of Mechanical ~",,, .. ,,,~,
be made oflhis material without written consent of ASME.
'--.-.•~------~..-. -----_.
 ASME 831.8 INTERPRETATIONS VOLUME 17

Interpretation: 17·4

Subject: ASME B31.8-2012, Para. 831.4, Reinforcement of Welded Branch Connections, and
Para. 841.3, After Construction

Date Issued: July 11, 2013

File: 07-838

(1): ASME B31.8, para. 831.4, Reinforcement of Welded Branch Connection

calculation methodology be used to qualify reinforced branch and
their attachment welds, including cover fillet welds?

(1): No.

(2): If ASME B31.8 Code has been pressure tested in accordance with para. 841.3,
After Construction, and welds or are mllst the piping be
pressure tested

The Code does not currently address this circumstance.

Interpretation: 17-5

Subject: ASME B31.8-2010, Para. 812, Low-Temperature Application for

Date Issued: July 11,2013

File: 10-1990

Question (1): Is it to use materials shown by to have

-SO°F (-4S°C) in a gas pipeline that may between
-20°F

Yes, all of para. 812 of ASME B31.8-201O are complied with.

Question (2): Can the criteria in ASME B31.3, para. and 323.2.2B
(which allows lower than minimum design at maximum design pressure
provided it can be documented that stress ratio at lower temperature is less than 1.0) be
for a gas pipeline according to ASME B31.8 for the pipeline section
to occasionally reach below the minimum design temperature?

No. ASME B31.8 defines the minimum to be "the lowest antici-

during service." See para. 805.2.2.

Standard for Piping,

to ASME B31.8?

Reply (3): No. ASME B31.8-201O does not reference ASME B31T-201O.

1-4
Copyright © 2014 by the Americall Sociely of Mechanical
be made of this material withollt written consent of ASM E.
 ASME B31.8 INTERPRETATIONS VOLUME 17

Interpretation: 17-6

Subject: ASME 831.8-2010, Para. 825.1, Stress Relieving of Carbon Steels

Date Issued: September 20, 2013

File: 12-368

Question: For welds in carbon steels having a carbon content in excess of 0.32% (ladle analysis)
or a carbon equivalent (C + ~Mn) in excess of 0.65% (ladle analysis), if stress relieving requirements
for the ASME 8PV Code, Section VIII, Division 1 allow wall thicknesses exceeding 1 Y,J in. (32 mm)
without stress relieving, is the wall thickness requirement of para. 825.2 superseded?

Reply: No, Paragraph 825.2, requiring that all carbon steels shall be stress relieved when the
nominal wall thickness exceeds 1~ in. (32 mm), is still applicable,

Interpretation: 17-7

Subject: ASME 831.8-2012, Para. A842,2.7, Pipe Support Attachments

Date Issued: September 20, 2013

File: 13-1171

Question: On a fixed offshore platform, does a pipe support attachment require a full encircling
member when the support is welded directly to the pipe and the pipe stress is less than 50%
SMYS?

Reply: Yes, Paragraph A842,2,7 of the Code requires a full encircling member, regardless of
the pipe stress.

Interpretation: 17·8

Subject: ASME 831.8-2012, Para, 811, Qualification of Material and Equipment, and Table 841.1,8-1,
Temperature Derating Factor, T, for Steel Pipe

Date Issued: October 1, 2013

File: 06-876

Question (1): May ASTM A790 UNS S31803 duplex steel pipe be used w1der ASME 831.8-2012?

Reply (1): Yes. If the subject pipe does not conform to a listed pipe specification in ASME 831.8,
it may be used subject to the requirements of para. 811.

Question (2): If ASTM A790 UNS 31803 duplex steel pipe is used in accordance with para. 811,
and it has material specifications extending to -60°F, may it be used in ASME 831.8 construction at
design temperatures colder than -20°F?

Reply (2): Yes. See para. 812, Materials for Use in Low Temperature Applications, for low-
temperature considerations.

1-5
Copyright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. ~
t' ,s
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ill ,
 ASME B31.8 INTERPRETATIONS VOlUME 17

Interpretation: 17-9

ASME B31.8-201O, Para. Duration of Pressure Test

Date Issued: November 18,2013

File: 12-2068

(1): Is a subsea pipeline manifold, with valves, and fittings, considered as

piping, which would only a 2-hr pressure test in accordance with the last
sentence in para. A847.4(c)?

Reply (1): No. In accordance with A842.2.lO, a subsea pipeline manifold with
and This will an 8-hr pressure test in accordance
with para.

In many cases, a subsea manifold also consists of several other

such as chemical lines and power connected to umbilical lines with different
When these lines also are to ASME VIII, shall
as when determining the duration of the pressure test?

Reply No. See (1).

Interpretation: 17-10

ASME Para. Stress Relieving

Date Issued: February 26, 2014

File: 12-379

Do ASME 831.8-2012, para. 825 stress requirements apply to in-service

Yes.

Interpretation: 17·11

ASME 831.8-2010, Para. 840.2.2 and Table 841.3.2-1, Minimum Test Pressure for Class 1,
Division 2

Date Issued: 8, 2014

File: 12-1566

Question: Is it the intent, for pipelines at a stress at or above 30%

the minimum test pressure described in para. 840.2.2(a)(2) for Class I, Division 2 steel
and mains or exceeds the value of 1.25 x MOP in Table 841.3.2-1?

Yes.

1-6
 ASME B31.8 INTERPRETATIONS VOLUME 17

Interpretation: 17-12

ASME 831.8-2003, Para. 831.4 and Appendix F, 8nmch Connections on Full Encirclement
Sleeves
Date Issued: April 8, 2014
File: 13-1665

Question Does ASME 831.8-2003, para. 831.4 only to full encirclement sleeves?
Reply (1): No. All welded branch connections shall meet the requirements of para. 831.4,
including welded branch connections fabricated with full encirclement sleeves.

Question Do the calculations in Appendix F only to full encirclement sleeves?

(2): No. All welded branch connections and extruded headers shill! meet the
of Appendix F, including welded branch connections filbricated with full encirclement sleeves.

Interpretation: 17-13

ASME B31.8-2003, Pma. B841.231, n~,_.~~~ of Miter Bend in Sour Gas Service
Date Issued: 8, 2014
File: 13-1667

The last sentence of ASME 831.8-2003, paril. 8841.231 SilYS, "Neither wrinkle bends
nor miter bends ilre permitted for sour gilS lines." Is a miter bend in this sentence defined as
more than deg, which is the same ilS for sweet
Yes. As stated in para. 8801, "All provisions of the first six of the Code are
of this Chapter unJess specifically modified herein." Furthermore, para. B801
says, I VI does not have a
in this to sour gilS service
pilril. 8841.231 in 831.8-2003 is now para.

1-7
 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

1-8
Copvright © 2014 by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. &
No reproduction may be made of this material without written consent of ASME. ~